2011 LaCrosse Owner Manual PDF

Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (1,1)
2011 Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual M
In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 Storage Compartments . . . . . . . . 4-1 Climate Control Systems . . . . . . 8-1
Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-4 Additional Storage Features . . . 4-2 Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Vehicle Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Performance and Instruments and Controls . . . . 5-1
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20 Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 Driving and Operating . . . . . . . . 9-1
Warning Lights, Gauges, and Driving Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Keys, Doors and Windows . . . 2-1 Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 Starting and Operating . . . . . . . 9-17
Keys and Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 Information Displays . . . . . . . . . . 5-23 Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27
Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12 Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . 9-28
Vehicle Security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14 Vehicle Personalization . . . . . . . 5-36 Drive Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32
Exterior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16 Universal Remote System . . . . 5-42 Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32
Interior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17 Ride Control Systems . . . . . . . . 9-35
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18 Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-39
Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20 Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 Object Detection Systems . . . . 9-42
Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-50
Seats and Restraints . . . . . . . . . 3-1 Lighting Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-55
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Conversions and Add-Ons . . . 9-62
Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13 Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28 Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20
Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42 Rear Seat Infotainment . . . . . . . 7-34
Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-44
2011 Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual M
Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

General Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-2 Vehicle Identification . . . . . . . . . 12-1
Vehicle Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4 Vehicle Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-32 Customer Information . . . . . . . 13-1
Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37 Customer Information . . . . . . . . 13-1
Wheels and Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-46 Reporting Safety Defects . . . . 13-15
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-84 Vehicle Data Recording and
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-88 Privacy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . 10-91 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i-1
Service and Maintenance . . . 11-1
General Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . . 11-2
Recommended Fluids,
Lubricants, and Parts . . . . . . . 11-7
Maintenance Records . . . . . . . 11-10
Introduction iii
For vehicles first sold in Canada,

substitute the name “General
Motors of Canada Limited” for Buick
Motor Division wherever it appears
in this manual.
The names, logos, emblems, Manufactured under license from

slogans, vehicle model names, and Dolby Laboratories. Dolby and the
vehicle body designs appearing in double-D symbol are trademarks
this manual including, but not limited of Dolby Laboratories. Copyright
to, GM, the GM logo, BUICK, the 1992-1997 Dolby Laboratories.
BUICK Emblem, and LACROSSE All rights reserved.
are trademarks and/or service Manufactured under license under
marks of General Motors LLC, its U.S. Patent #'s: 5,451,942;
subsidiaries, affiliates, or licensors. 5,956,674; 5,974,380; 5,978,762;
6,487,535 & other U.S. and
This manual describes features that worldwide patents issued &
may or may not be on your specific pending. DTS and DTS Digital
vehicle either because they are Surround are registered trademarks
options that you did not purchase or and the DTS logos and Symbol
due to changes subsequent to the are trademarks of DTS, Inc. © This product incorporates copyright
printing of this owner manual. 1996-2007 DTS, Inc. All Rights protection technology that is
Please refer to the purchase Reserved. protected by U.S. patents and other
documentation relating to your intellectual property rights. Use of
specific vehicle to confirm each of this copyright protection technology
the features found on your vehicle.
Litho in U.S.A.
©
Part No. 20859621 A First Printing 2010 General Motors LLC. All Rights Reserved.
iv Introduction
must be authorized by Macrovision, Canadian Vehicle Owners Danger, Warnings, and

and is intended for home and
other limited viewing uses only Propriétaires Canadiens Cautions
unless otherwise authorized by A French language copy of this Warning messages found on vehicle
Macrovision. Reverse engineering manual can be obtained from your labels and in this manual describe
or disassembly is prohibited. dealer or from: hazards and what to do to avoid or
reduce them.
On peut obtenir un exemplaire de
ce guide en français auprès du Danger indicates a hazard with a
concessionnaire ou à l'adresse high level of risk which will result in
suivante: serious injury or death.
Helm, Incorporated Warning or Caution indicates a
P.O. Box 07130 hazard that could result in injury or
“Made for iPod” means that an Detroit, MI 48207 death.
electronic accessory has been
1-800-551-4123
designed to connect specifically to
Numéro de poste 6438 de langue { WARNING
iPod and has been certified by
the developer to meet Apple française These mean there is something
performance standards. iPod is a www.helminc.com that could hurt you or other
trademark of Apple Computer, Inc., people.
registered in the U.S. and other Using this Manual
countries. To quickly locate information about Notice: This means there is
the vehicle, use the Index in the something that could result in
back of the manual. It is an property or vehicle damage.
alphabetical list of what is in the This would not be covered by the
manual and the page number where vehicle's warranty.
it can be found.
Introduction v
Vehicle Symbol Chart j : LATCH System Child

Here are some additional symbols Restraints
that may be found on the vehicle * : Malfunction Indicator Lamp
and what they mean. For more
information on the symbol, refer to : : Oil Pressure
A circle with a slash through it is
the Index. } : Power
a safety symbol which means “Do 9 : Airbag Readiness Light / : Remote Vehicle Start
Not,” “Do not do this,” or “Do not let # : Air Conditioning > : Safety Belt Reminders
this happen.”
! : Antilock Brake System (ABS) 7 : Tire Pressure Monitor
Symbols g : Audio®Steering Wheel Controls F : Traction Control
or OnStar
The vehicle has components and M : Windshield Washer Fluid
labels that use symbols instead of $ : Brake System Warning Light
text. Symbols are shown along with " : Charging System
the text describing the operation or
information relating to a specific I : Cruise Control
component, control, message, B : Engine Coolant Temperature
gauge, or indicator.
O : Exterior Lamps
M : This symbol is shown when # : Fog Lamps
you need to see your owner manual
for additional instructions or . : Fuel Gauge
information. + : Fuses
* : This symbol is shown when 3 : Headlamp High/Low-Beam
you need to see a service manual Changer
for additional instructions or
information.
vi Introduction
2 NOTES
In Brief 1-1
In Brief Sensing System for Passenger

Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Vehicle Personalization . . . . . .
Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-18
1-18
Mirror Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10 Universal Remote System . . . 1-19
Steering Wheel Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
Instrument Panel Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11 Performance and Maintenance
Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12 Traction Control
Initial Drive Information System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-4 Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . 1-12
Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13 Electronic Stability
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
Tire Pressure Monitor . . . . . . . . 1-20
Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . 1-4 Vehicle Features Tire Sealant and
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 Radio(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15 Compressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
Trunk Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16 Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . 1-21
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 Portable Audio Devices . . . . . . 1-16 Driving for Better Fuel
Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 Bluetooth® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16 Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
Memory Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7 Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . 1-16 Roadside Assistance
Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8 Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17 Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
Heated and Ventilated Navigation System . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17 OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8 Driver Information
Head Restraint Adjustment . . . . 1-9 Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
Safety Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
1-2 In Brief
Instrument Panel
In Brief 1-3
A. Air Vents on page 8‑8. I. Front Storage on page 4‑2. R. Power Door Locks on
B. Head-Up Display (HUD) on J. Data Link Connector (DLC). page 2‑11.
page 5‑26 (If Equipped). See Malfunction Indicator Lamp Hazard Warning Flashers on
C. Turn and Lane‐Change Lever. on page 5‑14. page 6‑4.
See Turn and Lane-Change K. Cruise Control on page 9‑39. Passenger Sensing System on
Signals on page 6‑4. L. Steering Wheel Adjustment on page 3‑35.
Driver Information Center page 5‑2. S. Parking Brake on page 9‑33.
Buttons. See Driver Information M. Horn on page 5‑3. T. Shift Lever Position Indicator.
Center (DIC) on page 5‑23. See Automatic Transmission on
N. Steering Wheel Controls on
D. Instrument Cluster on page 5‑2. page 9‑28.
page 5‑9. U. Shift Lever. See Shifting Into
O. Ignition Positions (Key Access)
Driver Information Center on page 9‑18 or Ignition Park on page 9‑25.
Display. See Driver Information Positions (Keyless Access) on V. Traction Control System (TCS)
Center (DIC) on page 5‑23. page 9‑19. on page 9‑35.
E. Windshield Wiper/Washer on P. Heated and Ventilated Front Electronic Stability Control
page 5‑3. Seats on page 3‑10. (ESC) on page 9‑37.
F. Info‐Display. Q. Automatic Climate Control Ultrasonic Parking Assist on
G. AM-FM Radio on page 7‑12. System on page 8‑1 page 9‑42.
H. Exterior Lamp Controls on (If Equipped). Rear Window Sunshade on
page 6‑1. Dual Automatic Climate Control page 2‑20.
Fog Lamps on page 6‑5 System on page 8‑4 W. Glove Box on page 4‑1.
(If Equipped). (If Equipped).
Instrument Panel Illumination

Control on page 6‑5.
1-4 In Brief
Initial Drive Press and hold 7 for more than

two seconds to sound the panic
Information alarm.
This section provides a brief
Press 7 again to cancel the panic
overview about some of the
important features that may or may alarm.
not be on your specific vehicle. Press the button to extend the key.
The key can be used for all locks.
For more detailed information, refer
to each of the features which can be This key is also used for the
found later in this owner manual. ignition, if the vehicle does not have
push-button start
Remote Keyless Entry See Keys on page 2‑2 and
Press K to unlock the driver door or Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
(RKE) System System Operation on page 2‑4.
all doors.
The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter will work up to 65 feet Press Q to lock all doors. Remote Vehicle Start
(20 m) away from the vehicle.
On vehicles with remote start the Lock and unlock feedback can be With this feature the engine can be
distance will be greater. personalized. started from outside of the vehicle.
Press and hold V to open the Starting the Vehicle
trunk. 1. Aim the remote keyless entry
Press and release 7 to locate the transmitter at the vehicle.
vehicle. 2. Press Q.
3. Immediately after completing
Step 2, press and hold / until
the turn signal lamps flash.
In Brief 1-5
When the vehicle starts, the parking Door Locks Trunk Release
lamps will turn on and remain on
as long as the engine is running. To lock or unlock a door manually: The trunk may be opened by
The doors will be locked and the . From the inside, pull once on the pressing V on the Remote
climate control system may door handle to unlock it, and a Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter or
come on. second time to open it. the trunk release button located on
The engine will continue to run for the rear of the trunk above the
. From the outside turn the key license plate. See Trunk on
10 minutes. Repeat the steps for a toward the front or rear of the
10-minute time extension. Remote page 2‑12 for more information.
vehicle, or press the Q or K
start can be extended only once.
button on the Remote Keyless Windows
Canceling a Remote Start Entry (RKE) transmitter. See
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) On vehicles with power windows,
To cancel a remote start: System Operation on page 2‑4. the switches are on the driver door
. Aim the RKE transmitter at the armrest. Each passenger door has
See Door Locks on page 2‑10. a switch that controls only that
vehicle and press and hold /
Power Door Locks window.
until the parking lamps turn off.
On vehicles with power door locks, Press the switch to lower the
. Turn on the hazard warning window. Pull the switch up to
flashers. the controls are located on the
center of the instrument panel. raise it.
. Turn the vehicle on and then off. For more information, see Power
K: Press to unlock the doors.
See Remote Vehicle Start on Windows on page 2‑18.
page 2‑8. Q: Press to lock the doors.
See Power Door Locks on
page 2‑11.
1-6 In Brief
. Raise or lower the rear part of
Seat Adjustment Power Seats
the seat cushion by moving the
Manual Seats rear of the horizontal control up
or down.
To adjust the seat:
. Raise or lower the entire seat by
1. Pull the handle under the seat to moving the control up or down.
unlock it.
See Power Seat Adjustment on
2. Slide the seat to the desired page 3‑4.
position and release the handle.
Reclining the Seatback
3. Try to move the seat back and
forth to be sure it is locked in
place.
To raise or recline the seatback, use
the lever on the outboard side of the To adjust the seat:
seat. See Reclining Seatbacks on
page 3‑7.
. Move the seat forward or
rearward by moving the
horizontal control forward or
rearward.
. Raise or lower the front part of
front of the horizontal control up
or down. To raise or recline the seatback,
tilt the top of the vertical control
forward or rearward. See Reclining
Seatbacks on page 3‑7.
In Brief 1-7
Lumbar Adjustment Memory Features Storing Memory Positions

To save into memory:
1. Adjust the driver seat and
seatback recliner and both
outside mirrors to the desired
driving positions.
2. Press and release
MEM (Memory).
3. Press “1” until a beep sounds.
4. Repeat for a second driver
using “2.”
To recall the memory positions,
To adjust the lumbar support: On vehicles with the memory press and hold “1” or “2.” The driver
. Press and hold the front or rear feature, the controls on the outboard seat and outside mirrors move to
of the control to increase or side of the driver seat are used to the stored positions. Releasing
decrease lumbar support. save and recall memory settings for “1” or “2” before the stored position
the driver seat and outside mirrors. is reached stops the recall.
. Press and hold the top or bottom
of the control to raise or lower See “Memory Seats” under Power
lumbar support. Seat Adjustment on page 3‑4 for
more information.
See Lumbar Adjustment on
page 3‑7.
1-8 In Brief
Easy Exit Driver Seat Heated Seats Heated and Ventilated

The easy exit driver seat feature Seats
can move the seat rearward to allow
extra room to exit the vehicle.
To activate the easy exit driver seat,
turn the ignition in off and open the
driver door. If the driver door is
already open, turning the ignition off
will activate the easy exit
driver seat.
Easy exit driver seat can be turned
on or off using the vehicle
personalization menu. See “Driver
Seat Easy Exit” under Vehicle On vehicles with this feature, the
Personalization on page 5‑36 for buttons are near the climate
more information. On vehicles with this feature, the
controls. To operate the heated controls are on the climate control
seats the ignition must be on. panel. To operate the heated and
Press L to heat the seat cushion ventilated seats the engine must be
and seatback. running.
For more information see Heated Press L to heat the seat and
Front Seats on page 3‑9. seatback or { to cool the seat.
For more information, see Heated
and Ventilated Front Seats on
page 3‑10.
In Brief 1-9
Head Restraint Safety Belt Sensing System for

Adjustment Passenger Airbag
Do not drive until the head restraints
for all occupants are installed and
adjusted properly.
To achieve a comfortable seating
position, change the seatback
recline angle as little as necessary
while keeping the seat and the head
The passenger sensing system will
restraint height in the proper
turn off the right front passenger
position.
frontal airbag under certain
For more information see Head conditions. The driver airbags,
Restraints on page 3‑2 and Seat seat‐mounted side impact airbags,
Adjustment on page 3‑4. Refer to the following sections for and roof‐rail airbags are not affected
important information on how to use by the passenger sensing system.
safety belts properly.
The passenger airbag status
. Safety Belts on page 3‑13. indicator will be visible on the
. How to Wear Safety Belts instrument panel when the vehicle is
Properly on page 3‑16. started. See Passenger Sensing
System on page 3‑35 for more
. Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 3‑21.
information.
. Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) on
page 3‑50.
1-10 In Brief
Mirror Adjustment Vehicles with the memory feature Interior

can store a preferred mirror position.
Exterior Adjust this mirror for a clear view of
See “Memory Seats” under Power
the area behind the vehicle. Hold
Seat Adjustment on page 3‑4 for
the mirror in the center to move it
more information.
up, down, or side-to-side. To reduce
See Power Mirrors on page 2‑16. headlamp glare during night-time
use, move the lever at the bottom of
Manual Foldaway Mirrors the mirror to the right.
Vehicles with manual folded mirrors Vehicles with OnStar® have three
are folded inward to prevent additional control buttons located at
damage when going through an the bottom of the mirror. See your
automatic car wash. To fold, pull the dealer for more information on the
mirror toward the vehicle. Push the system and how to subscribe to
mirror outward, to return it to the OnStar. See the OnStar® owner's
original position. guide for more information about the
To adjust the mirrors: Automatic Dimming Feature services OnStar provides.
1. Turn the control knob to the The driver outside mirror See Manual Rearview Mirror on
L (left) or R (right) selecting the automatically adjusts for the glare page 2‑17.
driver or passenger mirror. of the headlamps behind you.
2. Push the control knob to the left, See Power Mirrors on page 2‑16.
right, up, or down to adjust the See Folding Mirrors on page 2‑16.
mirror.
In Brief 1-11
Steering Wheel Interior Lighting

Adjustment Dome Lamps
The interior lamps control located in
the overhead console controls both
the front and rear interior lamps.
To operate, press the following
buttons:
*: Turns the lamps off.
1: Turns the lamps on when any
door is opened.
+ : Keeps the lamps on all #$: Press to turn each lamp on
the time. or off.
Reading Lamps The rear reading lamps are located
To adjust the steering wheel: in the headliner.
There are front and rear reading
1. Pull the lever (A) down. For more information on interior
lamps.
2. Move the steering wheel up lighting, see:
The front reading lamps are located
or down. in the overhead console. . Instrument Panel Illumination
3. Pull or push the steering wheel Control on page 6‑5.
closer or away from you.
4. Pull the lever (A) up to lock the
steering wheel in place.
Do not adjust the steering wheel
while driving.
1-12 In Brief
Exterior Lighting AUTO : Automatically turns the Windshield Wiper/Washer

exterior lamps on and off,
depending on outside lighting.
The current status of the AUTO
system is displayed in the Driver
Information Center (DIC) uplevel
display. See Driver Information
Center (DIC) on page 5‑23.
; : Turns on the parking lamps, The windshield wiper lever is on the
together with the sidemarker lamps, side of the steering column. With
taillamps, license plate lamps and the ignition in ACC/ACCESSORY or
instrument panel lights. ON/RUN, move the windshield
wiper lever to select the wiper
2 : Turns on the headlamps, speed.
The exterior lamp control is located together with the parking lamps,
sidemarker lamps, taillamps, license 2: Fast wipes.
on the instrument panel on the
outboard side of the steering wheel. plate lamps, and instrument panel 1: Slow wipes.
lights.
Turn the control to the following & : Turn the band up for more
positions: For more information, see: frequent wipes or down for less
. Exterior Lamp Controls on frequent wipes.
O: Turns off the exterior lamps.
The knob returns to the AUTO page 6‑1.
position after it is released. Turn to . Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
off again to reactivate the on page 6‑3.
AUTO mode. . Fog Lamps on page 6‑5.
In Brief 1-13
Climate Controls
The heating, cooling, and ventilation for the vehicle can be controlled with
these systems.
Automatic Climate Control System
9 : Turns the windshield
wipers off.
3 : Briefly move the wiper lever
down for a single wipe or hold down
for several wipes.
Windshield Washer
Pull the windshield wiper lever to
spray windshield washer fluid and
activate the wipers.
See Windshield Wiper/Washer on
page 5‑3.
A. Power F. AUTO
B. Temperature Control G. Defrost
C. Fan Control H. Air Conditioning
D. Air Delivery Mode Control I. Rear Window Defogger
E. Recirculation
1-14 In Brief
Dual Automatic Climate Control System Transmission

Automatic Transmission
Driver Shift Control (DSC)
Driver Shift Control (DSC) allows
shifting an automatic transmission
similar to a manual transmission.
DSC can be enabled through the
shift lever. See Manual Mode on
page 9‑30.
A. Power I. Rear Window Defogger

B. Driver Temperature Control J. Heated Steering Wheel
C. Defrost K. Air Conditioning
D. Fan Control L. ZONE
E. Air Delivery Mode Control See Automatic Climate Control
F. Recirculation / Automatic System on page 8‑1 (If Equipped)
Recirculation or Dual Automatic Climate
Control System on page 8‑4
G. Passenger Temperature Control (If Equipped).
H. AUTO
In Brief 1-15
Vehicle Features Storing a Favorite Station 4. Press the SELECT button to

select the next number.
Stations from all bands can be
Radio(s) stored in the favorite lists in any 5. To save the time and return to
order. Up to six stations can be the Time Settings menu, press
VOL / O : Press to turn the system stored in each favorite page and the the BACK button at any time or
on and off. Turn to increase or number of available favorite pages press the SELECT button after
decrease the volume. can be set. adjusting the minutes.
RADIO / BAND: Press to choose To store the station to a position in Setting the 12/24 Hour Format
between FM, AM, or XM™, the list, press the corresponding
1. Press the CONFIG button and
if equipped. numeric button 1-6 until the station
select Time Settings, or press
TUNE: Turn to select radio can be heard again.
the H button.
stations. For more information, see “Storing
and Retrieving Favorites” in AM-FM 2. Highlight 12/24 Hour Format.
g: Press to seek the previous
station or track. Radio on page 7‑12. 3. Press the SELECT button to
select the 12 hour or 24 hour
l : Press to seek the next station Setting the Clock
display format.
or track. Adjusting the Time For detailed instructions on setting
Buttons 1 ‐ 6: Press to save and 1. Press the CONFIG button and the clock, see Clock (Without Date
select favorite stations select Time Settings, or press Display) on page 5‑5 or Clock
INFO : Press to show available the H button. (With Date Display) on page 5‑5.
information about the current station
or track. 2. Select Set Time.
For more information about these 3. Turn the Menu knob to adjust
and other radio features, see the highlighted number.
Operation on page 7‑7.
1-16 In Brief
Satellite Radio Portable Audio Devices See Bluetooth (Overview) on

page 7‑44 or Bluetooth
Vehicles with an XM™ Satellite This vehicle may have a 3.5 mm (Infotainment Controls) on
Radio tuner and a valid XM Satellite (1/8 in) auxiliary input and a USB page 7‑45 or Bluetooth (Voice
Radio subscription can receive port located in the center console. Recognition) on page 7‑50.
XM programming. External devices such as iPods®,
laptop computers, MP3 players, Steering Wheel Controls
XM Satellite Radio Service CD changers, and USB storage
XM is a satellite radio service based devices. may be connected,
in the 48 contiguous United States depending on the audio system.
and 10 Canadian provinces. XM For more information, see Auxiliary
Satellite Radio has a wide variety of Devices (Radio with CD) on
programming and commercial-free page 7‑29 or Auxiliary Devices
music, coast to coast, and in (Radio with CD/DVD and MEM) on
digital-quality sound. A fee is page 7‑32.
required to receive the XM service.
For more information refer to: Bluetooth®
. www.xmradio.com or call The Bluetooth® system allows users
1-800-929-2100 (U.S.). with a Bluetooth-enabled cell phone
. www.xmradio.ca or call to make and receive hands-free
calls using the vehicle’s audio Some audio controls can be
1-877-438-9677 (Canada). adjusted at the steering wheel.
system, microphone, and controls.
For more information, see Satellite b g: Press to interact with the
Radio on page 7‑14. The Bluetooth-enabled cell phone
must be paired with the in-vehicle available Bluetooth, OnStar,
Bluetooth system before it can be or Navigation system.
used in the vehicle. Not all phones
will support all functions.
In Brief 1-17
$ c: Press to silence the Cruise Control RES/+ : Move the thumbwheel up

vehicle speakers only. Press again to make the vehicle resume to a
to turn the sound on. For vehicles previously set speed or to
with OnStar or Bluetooth systems, accelerate.
press to reject an incoming call, SET/− : Move the thumbwheel
or end a current call. down to set the speed and activate
_ SRC ^ : Press to select an audio cruise control or make the vehicle
source. decelerate.
Toggle up or down to select the next See Cruise Control on page 9‑39.
or previous favorite radio station,
CD, or MP3 track. Navigation System
+ x −: Press + to increase the The vehicle's navigation system
volume, press − to decrease the (if equipped) provides detailed maps
volume. The cruise control buttons are of most major freeways and roads
located on the steering wheel. throughout the United States and
For more information, see Steering Canada. After a destination has
Wheel Controls on page 5‑2. 5 : Press to turn the cruise control been set, the system provides
system on and off. An indicator light turn-by-turn instructions for reaching
will turn on or off in the instrument the destination. In addition, the
panel cluster. system can help locate a variety of
\: Press to disengage cruise points of interest (POI), such as
control without erasing the set banks, airports, restaurants,
speed from memory. and more.
See the Navigation System manual
for more information.
1-18 In Brief
Driver Information SET/CLR: Use this button to set or Power Outlets

clear the menu item when it is
Center (DIC) displayed. The accessory power outlets can be
The DIC display is located in the used to plug in electrical equipment,
For more information, see Driver such as a cell phone or MP3 player.
center of the instrument panel Information Center (DIC) on
cluster. It shows the status of many page 5‑23. There are two accessory power
vehicle systems. The controls for outlets, one is located inside the
the DIC are located on the turn center console storage and other is
signal lever.
Vehicle Personalization on the rear of the center floor
Some vehicle features can be console.
programmed by using the audio
Remove the cover to access and
system controls. These features
replace when not in use.
include:
See Power Outlets on page 5‑6.
. Climate and Air Quality
. Comfort and Convenience
. Collision/Detection Systems
. Language
. Lighting
. Power Door Locks
MENU: Press this button to get to . Remote Lock/Unlock/Start
the Trip/Fuel Menu and the Vehicle
Information Menu. See Vehicle Personalization on
page 5‑36.
wx: Use the thumbwheel to
scroll through the items in
each menu.
In Brief 1-19
Universal Remote System Sunroof Express-open/Express-close:

Press and release the rear or front
The ignition must be in ON/RUN or of the switch to express-open or
ACC/ACCESSORY, or Retained express-close the sunshade.
Accessory Power (RAP) to operate
the sunroof and power sunshade. The driver side switch operates the
See Ignition Positions (Key Access) sunroof.
on page 9‑18 or Ignition Positions Vent: Press the rear of the
(Keyless Access) on page 9‑19 or switch to vent the sunroof.
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) Press the front of the switch to
on page 9‑21. close the sunroof vent.
The sunroof switches are on the Express-open/Express-close:
overhead console. Press and release the rear or front
The passenger side switch operates of the switch to express-open or
The Universal Home Remote the sunshade. express-close the sunroof.
System allows for garage door See Sunroof on page 2‑20.
openers, security systems, and
home automation devices to be
programmed to work with these
buttons in the vehicle.
See Universal Remote System on
page 5‑42.
1-20 In Brief
Performance and Electronic Stability Tire Pressure Monitor

Maintenance Control (ESC) This vehicle may have a Tire
The Electronic Stability Control Pressure Monitor System (TPMS).
Traction Control (ESC) system assists with
directional control of the vehicle
System (TCS) in difficult driving conditions.
The traction control system limits The system turns on automatically
wheel spin. The system turns on every time the vehicle is started.
automatically every time the vehicle . To turn off both traction control
is started.
and ESC, press and hold g, The TPMS warning light alerts you
. To turn off traction control, press located on the console to the to a significant loss in pressure of
and release g located on the right of the shifter, until g one of the vehicle's tires. If the
console to the right of the shifter. illuminates and the appropriate warning light comes on, stop as
i illuminates and the DIC message is displayed. soon as possible and inflate the
appropriate DIC message is See Electronic Stability tires to the recommended pressure
displayed. See Electronic Control (ESC)/Traction Control shown on the Tire and Loading
Stability Control (ESC)/Traction System (TCS) Indicator/Warning Information label. See Vehicle Load
Control System (TCS) Indicator/ Light on page 5‑20. Limits on page 9‑12. The warning
Warning Light on page 5‑20. light will remain on until the tire
. Press and release the button to pressure is corrected.
. Press and release the button turn on both systems.
again to turn on traction control.
For more information, see Electronic
For more information, see Traction Stability Control (ESC) on
Control System (TCS) on page 9‑37.
page 9‑35.
In Brief 1-21
During cooler conditions, the low tire Tire Sealant and Resetting the Oil Life System
pressure warning light may appear
when the vehicle is first started and
Compressor Kit 1. Turn the key to ON/RUN with the
engine off.
then turn off. This may be an early This vehicle may come with a jack
indicator that the tire pressures are and spare tire or a tire sealant and 2. Press the DIC menu button on
getting low and the tires need to be compressor kit. The kit can be used the turn signal lever to scroll
inflated to the proper pressure. to seal small punctures in the tread through the menu items on the
area of the tire. DIC screen.
The TPMS does not replace normal
monthly tire maintenance. It is the See Tire Sealant and Compressor 3. Press the set button to clear the
driver’s responsibility to maintain Kit on page 10‑70 for complete CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON
correct tire pressures. operating information. message and/or restore the
REMAINING OIL LIFE 100%
See Tire Pressure Monitor System If the vehicle came with a jack and message.
on page 10‑54. spare tire, see If a Tire Goes Flat on
page 10‑68. 4. Turn the key to LOCK/OFF.
See Engine Oil Life System on
Engine Oil Life System page 10‑12.
The engine oil life system calculates
engine oil life based on vehicle use
and displays the CHANGE ENGINE
OIL SOON message when it is time
to change the engine oil and filter.
The oil life system should be reset
to 100% only following an oil
change.
1-22 In Brief
. Replace the vehicle's tires with
Driving for Better Fuel the same TPC Spec number
Roadside Assistance and OnStar
Economy molded into the tire's sidewall If you have a current OnStar
Driving habits can affect fuel near the size. subscription, press the Q button
mileage. Here are some driving tips and the current GPS location will be
. Follow recommended scheduled
to get the best fuel economy sent to an OnStar Advisor who will
maintenance.
possible. assess your problem, contact
Roadside Assistance, and relay
. Avoid fast starts and accelerate Roadside Assistance your exact location to get the help
smoothly. Program you need.
. Brake gradually and avoid U.S.: 1-800-252-1112 Online Owner Center
abrupt stops.
TTY Users: 1-888-889-2438 The Online Owner Center is a
. Avoid idling the engine for long complimentary service that includes
periods of time. Canada: 1-800-268-6800
online service reminders, vehicle
. When road and weather As the owner of a new Buick, you maintenance tips, online owner
conditions are appropriate, use are automatically enrolled in the manual, special privileges,
cruise control. Roadside Assistance program. This and more.
program provides technically trained
. Always follow posted speed advisors who are available 24 hours Sign up today at:
limits or drive more slowly when a day, 365 days a year, to give www.buickownercenter.com
conditions require. minor repair information or make (U.S.) or www.gm.ca (Canada).
. Keep vehicle tires properly towing arrangements.
inflated. For more information see Roadside
. Combine several trips into a Assistance Program on page 13‑7.
single trip.
In Brief 1-23
OnStar® How OnStar Service Works Not all OnStar services are
available on all vehicles. For more
Q : Push this blue button to information, see the OnStar Owner's
connect to a specially trained
Guide; visit www.onstar.com (U.S.)
OnStar advisor to verify your
or www.onstar.ca (Canada); contact
account information and to answer
OnStar at 1-888-4-ONSTAR
questions.
(1‐888‐466‐7827) or
] : Push this red emergency TTY 1‐877‐248‐2080; or press Q
button to get priority help from to speak with an OnStar advisor
For vehicles with an active OnStar specially trained OnStar emergency
subscription, OnStar uses several 24 hours a day, 7 days a week.
advisors.
innovative technologies and live For a full description of OnStar
advisors to provide a wide range X: Push this button for hands‐free, services and system limitations,
of safety, security, navigation, voice‐activated calling and to give see the OnStar Owner's Guide in
diagnostics, and calling services. voice commands for Hands‐Free the glove box.
Calling and Turn‐by‐Turn
Automatic Crash Response Navigation. OnStar service is subject to the
OnStar terms and conditions
In a crash, built‐in sensors can Automatic Crash Response, included in the OnStar Subscriber
automatically alert an OnStar Emergency Services, Crisis Assist, Information.
advisor who is immediately Stolen Vehicle Assistance, Vehicle
connected to the vehicle to see Diagnostics, Remote Door Unlock, OnStar service requires wireless
if you need help. Roadside Assistance, Turn‐by‐Turn communication networks and the
Navigation, and Hands‐Free Calling Global Positioning System (GPS)
are available on most vehicles. satellite network. Not all OnStar
services are available everywhere
or on all vehicles at all times.
1-24 In Brief
OnStar service can’t work unless If you try to add, connect, or modify On some vehicles, the mute button
your vehicle is in a place where any equipment or software in your can be used to dial numbers into
OnStar has an agreement with a vehicle, OnStar service may not voice mail systems, or to dial phone
wireless service provider for service work. Other problems OnStar can’t extensions. See the OnStar Owner's
in that area, and the wireless control may prevent service to you, Guide for more information.
service provider has coverage, such as hills, tall buildings, tunnels,
network capacity, reception, and weather, electrical system design Your Responsibility
technology compatible with OnStar's and architecture of your vehicle, Increase the volume of the radio if
service. Service involving location damage to important parts of your the OnStar advisor cannot be heard.
information about your vehicle can’t vehicle in a crash, or wireless phone
If the light next to the OnStar
work unless GPS signals are network congestion or jamming.
buttons is red, the system may
available, unobstructed, and See Radio Frequency Statement on not be functioning properly. Push
compatible with the OnStar page 13‑18 for information
hardware. The vehicle has to have the Q button and request a vehicle
regarding Part 15 of the Federal diagnostic. If the light appears clear
a working electrical system and Communications Commission (FCC)
adequate battery power for the (no light appears), your OnStar
rules and Industry Canada subscription has expired and all
OnStar equipment to operate. Standards RSS-210/220/310.
OnStar service may not work if the services have been deactivated.
OnStar equipment isn’t properly OnStar Steering Wheel Push the Q button to confirm that
installed or you haven’t maintained Controls the OnStar equipment is active.
it and your vehicle is in good
working order and in compliance This vehicle may have a Talk/Mute
with all government regulations. button that can be used to interact
with OnStar Hands-Free calling.
See Steering Wheel Controls on
page 5‑2 for more information.
Keys, Doors and Windows 2-1
Keys, Doors and Doors

Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Interior Mirrors
Manual Rearview Mirror . . . . . . 2-17
Windows Vehicle Security Windows
Vehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Anti-Theft Alarm System . . . . . 2-14 Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Keys and Locks Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14 Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 Immobilizer Operation (Key Rear Window Sunshade . . . . . 2-20
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Access) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 Immobilizer Operation Roof
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) (Keyless Access) . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15 Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
System Operation . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Exterior Mirrors
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10 Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11 Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11 Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12 Park Tilt Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
2-2 Keys, Doors and Windows
Keys and Locks { WARNING

Keys Leaving children in a vehicle with
the keyless access transmitter is
{ WARNING dangerous for many reasons,
children or others could be badly
Leaving children in a vehicle with injured or even killed. They could
the ignition key is dangerous for operate the power windows or
many reasons. Children or others other controls or even make the
could be badly injured or even vehicle move. The windows will
killed. They could operate the function with the keyless access
power windows or other controls transmitter in the vehicle and they
The key, that is part of the Remote
or even make the vehicle move. could be seriously injured or killed
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter,
The windows will function with the if caught in the path of a closing can be used for the ignition and all
keys in the ignition and children window. Do not leave the keyless locks if the vehicle is a key access
could be seriously injured or killed access transmitter in a vehicle vehicle. If the vehicle has the
if caught in the path of a closing with children. keyless ignition, the key can be
window. Do not leave the keys in used for the locks.
a vehicle with children.
Notice: If the keys get locked in If there is a decrease in the RKE

the vehicle, it may have to be operating range:
damaged to get them out. . Check the distance. The
Always carry a spare key. transmitter may be too far from
If you are locked out of the vehicle, the vehicle.
see Roadside Assistance Program . Check the location. Other
(U.S. and Canada) on page 13‑7 or vehicles or objects may be
Roadside Assistance Program blocking the signal.
(Mexico) on page 13‑9.
. Check the transmitter's battery.
Remote Keyless Entry See “Battery Replacement” later
in this section.
(RKE) System
Press the button on the RKE . If the transmitter is still not
transmitter to extend the key. Press See Radio Frequency Statement on working correctly, see your
the button and the key blade to page 13‑18 for information dealer or a qualified technician
retract the key. regarding Part 15 of the Federal for service.
Communications Commission (FCC)
See your dealer if a new key is rules and Industry Canada
needed. Standards RSS-210/220/310.
Remote Keyless Entry Q (Lock): Press to lock all doors. The turn signal indicators may flash
and/or the horn may sound to
(RKE) System Operation The turn signal indicators may flash indicate unlocking, see “Unlock
The transmitter functions will work and/or the horn may sound to Feedback” under Vehicle
up to 20 m (65 ft) away from the indicate locking, see “Locking Personalization on page 5‑36.
vehicle. On vehicles with remote Feedback” under Vehicle
start the distance will be greater. Personalization on page 5‑36. Pressing K will disarm the
theft-deterrent system. See
Keep in mind that other conditions, If the driver door is open when Q is Anti-Theft Alarm System on
such as those previously stated, can pressed, all doors lock except the page 2‑14.
impact the performance of the driver door, if enabled through the
transmitter. vehicle personalization. Memory seat positions may be
recalled when unlocking the vehicle.
If the passenger door is open when See “Memory Seats” under Power
Q is pressed, all doors lock. Seat Adjustment on page 3‑4 and
Pressing Q may also arm the “Remote Recall” under Vehicle
theft-deterrent system. See Personalization on page 5‑36 for
Anti-Theft Alarm System on more information.
page 2‑14. V (Remote Trunk Release):
K (Unlock): Press to unlock the Press and hold to unlock the trunk.
driver door or all doors, see “Door 7 (Vehicle Locator/Panic
Unlock Options” under Vehicle Alarm): Press and release
Personalization on page 5‑36. one time to locate the vehicle.
The exterior lamps flash and the
RKE without Remote Start Shown horn chirps.
Press and hold 7 for at least Keyless Unlocking Lock Sensor

two seconds to sound the panic With the keyless entry transmitter
alarm. The horn sounds and the within 1 m (3 feet), approach the
turn signals flash until 7 is pressed front door and pull the handle to
again or the vehicle is started. unlock and open the door. If the
transmitter is recognized, the door
/ (Remote Vehicle Start): will unlock and open.
For vehicles with this feature, press
Q and then press and hold / within Entering any door other than the
five seconds to start the engine from driver door will always cause all of
outside the vehicle using the RKE the doors to unlock. This is not
transmitter. See Remote Vehicle customizable.
Start on page 2‑8 for additional To customize which doors unlock
information. when the driver's door is opened,
Keyless Access Operation see “Door Unlock Options” under When all doors are closed and the
Vehicle Personalization on ignition is off, the vehicle can be
Some vehicles have a keyless page 5‑36. locked by pressing this area on the
access system that lets you lock door handle. This feature will be
and unlock the doors and access available for several minutes after
the trunk without removing the the vehicle has been turned off.
remote transmitter from your pocket,
purse, briefcase, etc. The keyless Keyless Trunk Opening
entry transmitter should be within Lift up on the touch pad located
1 m (3 feet) of the door or trunk above the license plate to open the
being opened. trunk if the keyless entry transmitter
is within range.
Programming Transmitters to Programming with a Recognized 3. Place the new transmitter into
the Vehicle Transmitter (Keyless Access the transmitter pocket. The
Vehicles Only) transmitter pocket is located
Only keyless entry transmitters inside the center console
programmed to the vehicle will work. A new transmitter can be
programmed to the vehicle when storage area under the
If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a cupholder. The cupholder will
replacement can be purchased and there is one recognized transmitter.
To program, the vehicle must be off need to be pulled out to access
programmed through your dealer. the transmitter pocket.
The vehicle can be reprogrammed and all of the transmitters, both
so that lost or stolen transmitters no currently recognized and new, must 4. Press the ignition. When the
longer work. Any remaining be with you. transmitter is learned the DIC
transmitters will need to be 1. Place the recognized will display will show that it is
reprogrammed. Each vehicle can transmitter(s) in the cupholder. ready to program the next
have up to five transmitters matched transmitter.
to it. 2. Insert the vehicle key of the new
transmitter into the key lock 5. Remove the transmitter from the
cylinder located on the outside transmitter pocket and press the
of the driver door and turn the unlock button.
key to the unlock position five To program additional
times within ten seconds. transmitters, repeat Steps 3
The Driver Information Center through 5.
(DIC) displays Ready For When all additional transmitters
Remote #2, 3, 4 or 5. are programmed, press and hold
the ignition for 5 seconds to exit
programming mode.
Programming without a 2. Wait for ten minutes until the 5. Press the ignition. When the
Recognized Transmitter (Keyless DIC displays Press Engine Start transmitter is learned the DIC
Access Vehicles Only) Button To Learn and then press will display will show that it is
If there are no currently recognized the ignition. ready to program the next
transmitters available, follow this The DIC displays will again transmitter.
procedure to program up to five show Remote Learn Pending, 6. Remove the transmitter from the
transmitters. This feature is not Please Wait. transmitter pocket and press the
available in Canada. This procedure 3. Repeat Step 2 two additional unlock button.
will take approximately 30 minutes times. After the third time all To program additional
to complete. The vehicle must be off previously known transmitters transmitters, repeat Steps 4
and all of the transmitters you wish will no longer work with the through 6.
to program must be with you. vehicle. Remaining transmitters When all additional transmitters
1. Insert the vehicle key of the can be relearned during the next are programmed, press and hold
transmitter into the key lock steps. the ignition for 5 seconds to exit
cylinder located on the outside The DIC display should now programming mode.
of the driver door and turn the show Ready For Remote # 1.
key to the unlock position five
times within ten seconds. 4. Place the new transmitter into
the transmitter pocket. The
The Driver Information Center transmitter pocket is located
(DIC) displays Remote Learn inside the center console
Pending, Please Wait. storage area under the
cupholder. The cupholder will
need to be pulled out to access
the transmitter pocket.
Starting the Vehicle with a 3. With the vehicle in P (Park) or 4. Insert the new battery, positive
Low Transmitter Battery N (Neutral), press the brake side facing up. Push the battery
pedal and the ignition control. down to until it is held in place.
If the transmitter battery is weak, See Starting the Engine on Replace with a CR2032 or
the DIC may display No Remote page 9‑21, for additional equivalent battery.
Detected when you try to start the information about the vehicle's
vehicle. The Replace Battery in 5. Snap the battery cover back on
keyless ignition with push start. to the transmitter.
Remote Key message may also be
displayed at this time. Replace the transmitter battery
as soon as possible. Remote Vehicle Start
Battery Replacement If available, this feature allows the
Replace the battery if the Replace engine to be started from outside
Battery in Remote Key message the vehicle.
displays in the DIC. See “Replace This button / will be on the RKE
Battery in Remote Key” under Key transmitter if the vehicle has remote
and Lock Messages on page 5‑34. start.
The battery is not rechargeable. To Laws in some local communities
replace the battery: may restrict the use of remote
1. Push the button on the starters. For example, some laws
transmitter to extend the key. may require a person using remote
start to have the vehicle in view.
To start the vehicle: 2. Remove battery cover by prying Check local regulations for any
1. Remove the cupholder from the with finger. requirements.
center console storage area. 3. Remove battery by pushing on
2. Place the transmitter in the battery and sliding toward
transmitter pocket with the keyblade.
buttons facing up.
Starting the Engine Using Vehicles with an automatic climate For example, if the vehicle has been
Remote Start control system will default to a running for five minutes, and
To start the engine using the remote heating or cooling mode depending 10 minutes are added, the engine
start feature: on the outside temperature during a will run for a total of 15 minutes.
remote start. When the key is turned A maximum of two remote starts or
1. Press Q on the RKE transmitter. to ON/RUN (Key Access), or the remote start attempts are allowed
The vehicle's doors will be ON/RUN/START ignition position is between ignition cycles.
locked. selected (Keyless Access), the
climate control system will turn on at The vehicle's ignition must be
2. Within five seconds, press and the setting the vehicle was set to turned on and then back off before
hold / until the turn signal when the vehicle was last turned off. the remote start procedure can be
lamps flash. This confirms the Vehicles with heated or heated and used again.
request to remote start the ventilated front seats can have this Shutting the Engine Off After a
vehicle has been received. Once feature turn on automatically during Remote Start
the vehicle is started, the a remote start see “Remote Start
parking lamps will turn on and Heated Seats” and “Remote Start To shut off the engine:
remain on as long as the engine Vented Seats” under Vehicle
is running.
. Press / until the parking lamps
Personalization on page 5‑36 for
3. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN more information. turn off.
(Key Access), or select the ON/ . Turn on the hazard warning
RUN/START ignition position Extending Engine Run Time flashers.
(Keyless Access), to drive the For a 10 minute extension, repeat . Turn the ignition on and then
vehicle. Steps 1 and 2 while the engine is
The engine will shut off after back off.
still running. The remote start can
10 minutes unless a time only be extended once.
extension is done or the ignition
is put in ON/RUN (Key Access) When the remote start is extended,
or ON/RUN/START (Keyless the second 10 minutes will start
Access). immediately.
Conditions in Which Remote Start Door Locks WARNING (Continued)

Will Not Work
The remote start will not operate if: { WARNING . Young children who get into
. The key is in the ignition (Key
Unlocked doors can be unlocked vehicles may be
Access) or the ignition is in any unable to get out. A child can
position other than OFF (Keyless dangerous.
be overcome by extreme heat
Access). . Passengers, especially and can suffer permanent
. The transmitter is in the vehicle children, can easily open the injuries or even death from
(Keyless Access). doors and fall out of a moving heat stroke. Always lock the
vehicle. The chance of being vehicle whenever leaving it.
. The hood is not closed. thrown out of the vehicle in a
. The hazard warning flashers crash is increased if the . Outsiders can easily enter
are on. doors are not locked. So, all through an unlocked door
passengers should wear when you slow down or stop
. There is an emission control safety belts properly and the your vehicle. Locking your
system malfunction. doors should be locked doors can help prevent this
. The engine coolant temperature whenever the vehicle is from happening.
is too high. driven.
. The oil pressure is low. (Continued)
. Two remote vehicle starts have
already been used.
. The vehicle is not in P (Park).
To lock and unlock the door, use the Power Door Locks Delayed Locking
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter or the key from the When locking the doors with the
outside and the door lock knob or power lock switch and a door is
switch from the inside. open, the doors will lock
five seconds after the last door is
From inside the vehicle with the closed. You will hear three chimes
doors locked, pull once on the door to signal that the delayed locking
handle to unlock it, and a second feature is in use.
time to open it.
Pressing the power lock switch
Manually locking the driver door twice or the lock button on the RKE
also automatically locks all other transmitter twice will override the
doors. delayed locking feature and
For more information see: immediately lock all the doors.
. Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) This feature will not operate if the
System Operation on page 2‑4. K (Unlock): Press to unlock all key is in the ignition.
. doors. This feature can be programmed by
Power Door Locks on page 2‑11.
. Vehicle Personalization on
Q (Lock): Press to lock all doors. using the Driver Information Center
(DIC). See “Delayed Door Lock”
page 5‑36. See “Power Door Locks” in Vehicle
under Vehicle Personalization on
Personalization on page 5‑36.
page 5‑36.
Safety Locks Doors WARNING (Continued)

Trunk If the vehicle must be driven with
the liftgate, or trunk/hatch open:
{ WARNING . Close all of the windows.
Exhaust gases can enter the . Fully open the air outlets on
vehicle if it is driven with the or under the instrument
liftgate, trunk/hatch open, or with panel.
any objects that pass through the . Adjust the Climate Control
seal between the body and the system to a setting that
trunk/hatch or liftgate. Engine brings in only outside air and
exhaust contains Carbon set the fan speed to the
Monoxide (CO) which cannot be highest setting. See Climate
Press the button on the driver door seen or smelled. It can cause Control System in the Index.
armrest to activate the safety locks unconsciousness and even death.
on the passenger rear doors.
. If the vehicle has a power
(Continued) liftgate, disable the power
This switch also disables the rear liftgate function.
power windows.
For more information about
Once activated, the light, located on carbon monoxide, see Engine
the switch, illuminates and goes out
Exhaust on page 9‑27.
when deactivated.
If the light flashes the feature may
not be working properly.
Remote Trunk Release Rear Seat Pass-Through

To open the trunk from the outside
the vehicle, press the V button on
the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter, or by pressing the
touchpad above the license plate.
Emergency Trunk Release
Handle
Notice: Do not use the
emergency trunk release handle
as a tie-down or anchor point
when securing items in the trunk There is an emergency trunk
as it could damage the handle. release handle located inside the
The emergency trunk release trunk on the trunk latch. On some The vehicle may have a small door
handle is only intended to aid a vehicles, the release handle can be in the rear seat. This door allows
person trapped in a latched trunk, accessed by folding the rear seat access to the trunk from inside the
enabling them to open the trunk center seatback. See Rear Seats on vehicle.
from the inside. page 3‑11. Pull the release handle
to open the trunk from the inside. The rear seat armrest must be down
for the pass-through door to open.
To release the pass-through door,
pull the release handle. To close the
door, raise it and push it until it
latches.
Vehicle Security Disarming the System Immobilizer

This vehicle has theft-deterrent To disarm the system, do one of the See Radio Frequency Statement on
features; however, they do not make following: page 13‑18 for information
it impossible to steal. . Press K on the RKE transmitter. regarding Part 15 of the Federal
Communications Commission (FCC)
Anti-Theft Alarm System
. Approach the vehicle with the rules and Industry Canada
RKE transmitter (Keyless Standards RSS-210/220/310.
This vehicle has an anti-theft alarm Access).
system. Immobilizer Operation
. Start the engine.
Arming the System The alarm automatically disarms. (Key Access)
To arm the system, press Q on the How to Detect a Tamper This vehicle has a passive
RKE transmitter. theft-deterrent system.
Condition
The alarm automatically arms after The system does not have to be
about 30 seconds. The security If K is pressed and the horn manually armed or disarmed.
light, located on the instrument sounds, an attempted break-in has
The vehicle is automatically
panel, flashes. occurred while the system was
immobilized when the key is
armed.
removed from the ignition.
Press V on the RKE transmitter to If the alarm has been activated, the
open the trunk without setting off the The system is automatically
Theft Attempted message will
alarm. The system rearms when the disarmed when the vehicle is
appear on the DIC. See Key and
trunk is closed. started with the correct key.
Lock Messages on page 5‑34 for
The key uses a transponder that
additional information.
matches an immobilizer control
unit in the vehicle and automatically
disarms the system. Only the If the engine still does not start with
correct key starts the vehicle. The the other key, the vehicle needs
vehicle may not start if the key is service. If the vehicle does start, the
damaged. first key may be damaged. See your
dealer who can service the
theft-deterrent system and have a
new key made. The security light, located in the
Do not leave the key or device that instrument panel cluster, comes on
disarms or deactivates the theft if there is a problem with arming or
deterrent system in the vehicle. disarming the theft-deterrent
system.
The security light, located in the Immobilizer Operation The system has one or more
instrument panel cluster, comes on
if there is a problem with arming or
(Keyless Access) transmitters that are matched to an
immobilizer control unit in your
disarming the theft-deterrent This vehicle has a passive vehicle. Only a correctly matched
system. theft-deterrent system. transmitter will start the vehicle.
When trying to start the vehicle, the The system does not have to be If the transmitter is ever damaged,
security light comes on briefly when manually armed or disarmed. you may not be able to start your
the ignition is turned on. vehicle.
The vehicle is automatically
If the engine does not start and the immobilized when the transmitter When trying to start the vehicle, the
security light stays on there is a leaves the vehicle. security light comes on briefly when
problem with the system. Turn the the ignition is turned on.
The immobilization system is
ignition off and try again. If the engine does not start and the
disarmed when the ignition button is
If the engine still does not start, and pushed in and a valid transmitter is security light stays on there is a
the key appears to be undamaged found in the vehicle. problem with the system. Turn the
or the light continues to stay on, try ignition off and try again.
another ignition key.
If the keyless access transmitter Exterior Mirrors Vehicles with the memory feature
appears to be undamaged, try can store a preferred mirror position.
another keyless access transmitter. See “Memory Seats” under Power
Or, you may try placing the Power Mirrors Seat Adjustment on page 3‑4 for
transmitter in the transmitter pocket more information.
located in the center console. See
“No Remote Detected” under Key Folding Mirrors
and Lock Messages on page 5‑34.
Manual Foldaway Mirrors
If the engine does not start with the
other transmitter or when the Vehicles with manual folded mirrors
transmitter is on the pocket in the are folded inward to prevent
center console, your vehicle needs damage when going through an
service. See your dealer who can automatic car wash. To fold, pull the
service the theft-deterrent system mirror toward the vehicle. Push the
and have a new transmitter mirror outward, to return it to the
programmed to the vehicle. original position.
Do not leave the key or device that Automatic Dimming Feature
To adjust the mirrors:
disarms or deactivates the theft
1. Turn the control knob to the The driver outside mirror
deterrent system in the vehicle.
L (left) or R (right) selecting the automatically adjusts for the
driver or passenger mirror. glare of the headlamps behind you.
2. Push the control knob to the left,
right, up, or down to adjust the
mirror.
Turn Signal Indicator Park Tilt Mirrors Interior Mirrors

The vehicle might have a turn signal If the vehicle has the memory
indicator lamp that is built into the package, the outside mirrors have Manual Rearview Mirror
mirror housing. The turn signal lamp a park tilt feature. This feature
flashes with the use of the vehicle's Adjust the inside rearview mirror
automatically tilts the outside mirrors for a clear view of the area behind
turn signal and hazard flashers. to a preselected position when the your vehicle. To avoid glare of the
vehicle is in R (Reverse). This headlamps from behind, push the
Heated Mirrors allows the driver to view the curb tab forward for daytime and pull it
For vehicles with heated mirrors: for parallel parking. for nighttime use.
< (Rear Window Defogger): The passenger and driver mirrors Vehicles with OnStar® have three
Press to heat the mirrors. return to their original position additional control buttons located at
when the vehicle is shifted out of the bottom of the mirror. See your
See “Rear Window Defogger” under R (Reverse), or the ignition is turned
Automatic Climate Control System dealer for more information about
off or to OFF/LOCK. OnStar and how to subscribe to it.
on page 8‑1 for more information.
This feature can be turned on or off See the OnStar Owner's Guide for
through the Driver Information more information about the services
Center (DIC). See Vehicle OnStar provides.
more information.
Windows Power Windows
{ WARNING
Leaving children, helpless adults,
or pets in a vehicle with the
windows closed is dangerous.
They can be overcome by the
extreme heat and suffer
permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke. Never leave a
child, a helpless adult, or a pet
alone in a vehicle, especially with The vehicle aerodynamics are
designed to improve fuel economy
the windows closed in warm or
performance. This may result in a The power window switches located
hot weather.
pulsing sound when either rear on the driver door control all four
window is down and the front windows. The passenger doors
windows are up. To reduce the have a window switch that controls
sound, open either a front window that window. Push the switch down
or the sunroof (if equipped). to open the window. Pull the front of
the switch up to close it.
The switches work when the
ignition is in ON/RUN or
ACC/ACCESSORY, or in
Retained Accessory Power (RAP).
See Retained Accessory Power
(RAP) on page 9‑21.
Express Window Operation the driver window switches when To program each front window:
the lockout feature is active. To 1. With the ignition in ON/RUN or
Windows with an express-up or
restore power to the rear windows, ACC/ACCESSORY, or in
down feature allow the front
press the button again. The light on Retained Accessory Power
windows to be lowered or raised
the button goes out. If the light (RAP), close all doors.
without holding the switch. Rear
flashes, the feature may not be
windows only have express down. 2. Press and hold the power
working properly.
Pull a window switch up or push it window switch until the window
down all the way, release it, and the This switch also activates the Safety is fully open.
window goes down or up Locks. See Safety Locks on
automatically. Stop the window by page 2‑12. 3. Pull the power window switch up
pushing or pulling the switch. until the window is fully closed.
Programming the Power
4. Continue holding the switch up
Rear Window Lockout Windows
for approximately two seconds
The rear window lockout If the battery on the vehicle has after the window is completely
button v is on the driver door. been recharged, disconnected, or is closed.
Press the button to disable the rear not working, you will need to
The window is now reprogrammed.
window controls. The light on the reprogram each front power window
Repeat the process for the other
button comes on indicating the for the express-up feature to work.
windows.
feature is in use. The rear windows Before reprogramming, replace or
can still be raised or lowered using recharge the vehicle's battery.
Sun Visors Rear Window Sunshade Roof

On vehicles with a rear window
sunshade, the switch is on the Sunroof
console to the right of the shifter.
The sunshade only operates
when the ignition is in ON/RUN or
ACC/ACCESSORY.
To open the sunshade, press and
release the switch. The sunshade
will fully extend. To close the
sunshade, press and release the
switch again. The sunshade will fully
close.
Pull the sun visor down to block If the vehicle is shifted into
glare. Detach the sun visor from the (R) Reverse when the sunshade
center mount to pivot to the side is extended, it will automatically On vehicles with a sunroof, the
window, or to extend along the rod if close. switch is located on the overhead
available. console.
The sunroof only operates when the Express-Open/Express-Close To express-open the sunshade from
ignition is in ON/RUN or ACC/ the closed position, fully press and
To express-open the sunroof from
ACCESSORY, or in Retained release the rear of the switch (C).
the closed or vent position, fully
Accessory Power (RAP). See The sunshade opens automatically.
press and release the rear of the
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) To stop the sunshade partway,
switch (B). The sunroof opens
on page 9‑21. press the switch a second time. To
automatically. To stop the sunroof
express-close the sunshade fully
Vent partway, press the switch a second
press and release the front of the
time. To express-close the sunroof,
The sunroof has an express-vent switch (D). The sunshade closes
fully press and release the front of
open feature. From the closed automatically. To stop the sunshade
the switch (A). The sunroof closes
position, press the rear of the partway, press the switch a
automatically. To stop the sunroof
sunroof switch (B) to the first detent second time.
partway, press the switch a
to vent the sunroof. To close the second time. Notice: Forcing the sunshade
sunroof, press the front of the forward of the sliding glass panel
sunroof switch (A) to the second If the sunshade is closed, it opens
may cause damage and the
detent. automatically with the sunroof but
sunroof may not operate properly.
can also be express-opened/
Always close the glass panel
express-closed by using the
before closing the sunshade.
sunshade control (C) (D). The
sunshade cannot be fully closed The sunroof glass panel cannot be
with the sunroof open. opened or closed if the vehicle has
an electrical failure.
Anti-Pinch Feature
If an object is in the path of the
sunroof while it is closing, the
anti-pinch feature will detect the
object and stop the sunroof from
closing at the point of the
obstruction. The sunroof, and
sunshade will then return to the
open or vent position. To close the
sunroof once the obstruction has
been removed, refer to the
"Express-Open/Express-Close"
functions described previously. Dirt and debris may collect on the
sunroof seal or in the track. This
could cause an issue with sunroof
operation, noise, or plugging the
water drainage system. Periodically
open the sunroof and remove any
obstacles or loose debris. Wipe the
sunroof seal and roof sealing area
using a clean cloth, mild soap, and
water. Do not remove grease from
the sunroof.
Seats and Restraints 3-1
Seats and Rear Seats

Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Airbag System
Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
Restraints Safety Belts
Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . 3-30
When Should an Airbag
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13 Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
How to Wear Safety Belts What Makes an Airbag
Head Restraints Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21 How Does an Airbag
Front Seats Safety Belt Use During Restrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 Pregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26 What Will You See After an
Power Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . 3-4 Safety Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . 3-26 Airbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 Safety System Check . . . . . . . . 3-26 Passenger Sensing
Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 Safety Belt Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35
Heated Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9 Replacing Safety Belt System Servicing the Airbag-Equipped
Heated and Ventilated Front Parts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-27 Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10 Adding Equipment to the
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . 3-40
Airbag System Check . . . . . . . . 3-41
Replacing Airbag System
Parts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-41
3-2 Seats and Restraints
Child Restraints Head Restraints

Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42
Infants and Young The vehicle's front seats have
Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44 adjustable head restraints in the
Child Restraint Systems . . . . . 3-47 outboard seating positions.
Where to Put the Restraint . . . 3-49 The vehicle's rear seats have
Lower Anchors and Tethers adjustable head restraints in the
for Children (LATCH outboard seating positions.
System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-50
Replacing LATCH System
Parts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-59 { WARNING
Securing Child Restraints
With head restraints that are not
(Rear Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-59 Adjust the head restraint so that the
installed and adjusted properly,
Securing Child Restraints top of the restraint is at the same
(Front Passenger Seat) . . . . 3-61 there is a greater chance that
occupants will suffer a neck/ height as the top of the occupant's
spinal injury in a crash. Do not head. This position reduces the
drive until the head restraints for chance of a neck injury in a crash.
all occupants are installed and
adjusted properly.
Front Seat Rear Seat Push down on the head restraint

after the button is released to make
sure that it is locked in place.
If you are installing a child restraint
in the rear seat, see “Securing a
Child Restraint Designed for the
LATCH System” under Lower
Anchors and Tethers for Children
(LATCH System) on page 3‑50.
To raise or lower the head restraint, Pull the head restraint up to raise it.
press the release button located on To lower the head restraint, press
the side of the head restraint and the release button, located on the
pull up or push the head restraint head restraint post on the top of the
down and release the button. seatback, while you push the head
Pull and push on the head restraint restraint down.
after the button is released to make
sure that it is locked in place.
The front head restraints are not
designed to be removed.
Front Seats WARNING (Continued)

Power Seat Adjustment
Seat Adjustment movement could startle and

Manual Seat Adjustment confuse you, or make you push a
pedal when you do not want to.
Adjust the driver seat only when
the vehicle is not moving.
To adjust the seat position:

1. Pull the handle located at the
front of the seat.
2. Move the seat forward or
backward to adjust the seat To adjust a power seat:
position. . Move the seat forward or
3. Release the handle to stop the rearward by sliding the control
seat from moving. forward or rearward.
{ WARNING . Raise or lower the front part of
You can lose control of the front of the control up or down.
vehicle if you try to adjust a . Raise or lower the entire seat by
manual driver seat while the moving the entire control up
vehicle is moving. The sudden or down.
(Continued)
Memory Seats Storing Memory Positions Memory Remote Recall

To save into memory: The memory feature can recall the
1. Adjust the driver seat and driver seat and outside mirrors to
seatback recliner and both stored positions when entering the
outside mirrors to the desired vehicle.
driving positions. To activate memory remote recall,
2. Press and release unlock the driver door with the
MEM (Memory). Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter, and open the driver
3. Press “1” until a beep sounds. door. If the driver door is already
4. Repeat for a second driver open, pressing the unlock button on
using “2.” the transmitter will activate the
recall. The driver seat and outside
To recall the memory positions, mirrors move to the memory
On vehicles with the memory press and hold “1” or “2.” The driver position associated with the
feature, the controls on the outboard seat and outside mirrors move to transmitter used to unlock the
side of the driver seat are used to the stored positions. Releasing vehicle. Every time the ignition is
save and recall memory settings for “1” or “2” before the stored position turned off, the positions of the driver
the driver seat and outside mirrors. is reached stops the recall. seat and outside mirrors are stored
to the keyless entry transmitter used
to start the vehicle.
The automatic recall feature Easy Exit Driver Seat To stop recall movement, press one
can be turned on or off using the The easy exit driver seat feature of the memory, power mirror,
vehicle personalization menu. See can move the seat rearward to allow or power seat controls.
“Remote Recall” under Vehicle extra room to exit the vehicle. If something has blocked the driver
Personalization on page 5‑36 for seat while recalling the exit position,
more information. To activate the easy exit driver seat,
turn the ignition off and open the the recall may stop. Remove the
To stop recall movement, press one driver door. If the driver door is obstruction; then press and hold the
of the memory, power mirror, already open, turning the ignition off power seat control rearward for
or power seat controls. will activate the easy exit two seconds. Try recalling the exit
If something has blocked the driver driver seat. position again. If the exit position is
seat while recalling a memory still not recalling, see your dealer for
Easy exit driver seat can be turned service.
position, the recall may stop. on or off using the vehicle
Remove the obstruction; then press personalization menu. See “Driver
and hold the appropriate manual Seat Easy Exit” under Vehicle
control for the memory item that is Personalization on page 5‑36 for
not recalling for two seconds. Try more information.
recalling the memory position again
by pressing the appropriate memory
button. If the memory position is still
not recalling, see your dealer for
service.
Lumbar Adjustment Reclining Seatbacks WARNING (Continued)

front of you. In a crash, you could
go into it, receiving neck or other
injuries.
The lap belt cannot do its job
either. In a crash, the belt could
go up over your abdomen. The
belt forces would be there, not at
your pelvic bones. This could
cause serious internal injuries.
For proper protection when the
vehicle is in motion, have the
To increase or decrease lumbar
support, press and hold the front or { WARNING seatback upright. Then sit well
back in the seat and wear the
rear of the control. Sitting in a reclined position when safety belt properly.
To raise or lower lumbar support, the vehicle is in motion can be
press and hold the top or bottom of dangerous. Even when buckled
the control. up, the safety belts cannot do
Release the control when the their job when reclined like this.
seatback reaches the desired level The shoulder belt cannot do its
of lumbar support. job because it will not be against
See Power Seat Adjustment on your body. Instead, it will be in
page 3‑4 for more information. (Continued)
Manual Reclining Seatbacks To return the seatback to the upright

position:
{ WARNING 1. Lift the lever fully without
applying pressure to the
You can lose control of the seatback, and the seatback will
vehicle if you try to adjust a return to the upright position.
manual driver seat while the
2. Push and pull on the seatback to
vehicle is moving. The sudden
make sure it is locked.
movement could startle and
confuse you, or make you push a
pedal when you do not want to.
Adjust the driver seat only when
the vehicle is not moving. On vehicles with manual reclining
seatbacks, the lever is on the
outboard side of the seat.
To recline the seatback:
{ WARNING 1. Lift the recline lever.
If either seatback is not locked, it 2. Move the seatback to the
could move forward in a sudden desired position, and then
stop or crash. That could cause release the lever to lock the
injury to the person sitting there. seatback in place.
Always push and pull on the
seatbacks to be sure they are 3. Push and pull on the seatback to
make sure it is locked.
locked.
Power Reclining Seatbacks Heated Front Seats
{ WARNING
If you cannot feel temperature
change or pain to the skin, the
seat heater may cause burns
even at low temperatures. To
reduce the risk of burns, people
with such a condition should use
care when using the seat heater,
especially for long periods of
On vehicles with this feature, the
time. Do not place anything on
buttons are near the climate
the seat that insulates against
On vehicles with power reclining controls. To operate the heated
heat, such as a blanket, cushion, seats the ignition must be on.
seatbacks, the control is on the
cover or similar item. This may
outboard side of the seat.
cause the seat heater to Press L to heat the seat cushion
. Tilt the top of the control overheat. An overheated seat and seatback.
rearward to recline the seatback. heater may cause a burn or may Press the button once for the
. Tilt the top of the control forward damage the seat. highest setting. With each press of
to raise the seatback. the button, the heated seat will
change to the next lower setting,
and then to the off setting. The
lights indicate three for the highest
setting and one for the lowest.
The passenger seat may take
longer to heat up.
Remote Start Heated Seats Heated and Ventilated

When it is cold outside, the heated Front Seats
seats can be turned on
automatically during a remote
vehicle start. The heated seats will
{ WARNING
be canceled when the ignition is If you cannot feel temperature
turned on. Press the button to use change or pain to the skin, the
the heated seats after the vehicle is seat heater may cause burns
started. even at low temperatures. See
The temperature performance of an the Warning under Heated Front
unoccupied seat may be reduced. Seats on page 3‑9.
This is normal.
On vehicles with this feature, the
The heated seats will not turn on controls are on the climate control
during a remote start unless the panel. To operate the heated and
heated seat feature is enabled in ventilated seats the engine must be
the vehicle personalization menu. running.
See Remote Vehicle Start on
page 2‑8 and “Remote Start Press L to heat the seat and
Heated Seats” under Vehicle seatback or { to cool the seat.
Press the button once for the
more information.
highest setting. With each press of
the button, the seat will change to
the next lower setting, and then to
the off setting. The lights indicate
three for the highest setting and one
for the lowest.
The passenger seat may take Rear Seats

longer to heat up.
Remote Start Heated and Folding the Seatback
Ventilated Seats The rear seat can be folded down to
During a remote start, the heated or allow for more cargo space, or it can
ventilated seats can be turned on be placed back into a locked upright
automatically. They are canceled position. Adjust the seatback only
when the ignition is turned on. Press when the vehicle is not moving.
the button to use the heated or To fold the seatback down:
ventilated seats after the vehicle is
Notice: Folding a rear seat with
started.
the safety belts still fastened may
The heated or ventilated seat cause damage to the seat or the 1. Be sure the safety belt is in the
indicator lights on the button do not safety belts. Always unbuckle the retainer clip.
turn on during a remote start. safety belts and return them to
The heated seat temperature their normal stowed position
performance of an unoccupied seat before folding a rear seat.
may be reduced. This is normal.
The heated or ventilated seats will
not turn on during a remote start
unless they are enabled in the
vehicle personalization menu. See
Remote Vehicle Start on page 2‑8
and “Remote Start Heated Seats” or
“Remote Start Cooled Seats” under
Vehicle Personalization on
Raising the Seatback To raise the seatback:

1. Push the seatback up and push
{ WARNING it back to lock it into place. Make
sure the safety belt is in the
If either seatback is not locked, it retainer clip and does not get
could move forward in a sudden twisted or caught in the
stop or crash. That could cause seatback.
injury to the person sitting there.
A tab on the handle pops down
Always push and pull on the
to indicate the seatback has
seatbacks to be sure they are been locked.
locked.
2. Push and pull the top of the
2. Pull on the lever located on the seatback to be sure it is locked
top of the seatback to unlock it. into position.
3. Fold the seatback down. { WARNING
A safety belt that is improperly
routed, not properly attached,
or twisted will not provide the
protection needed in a crash. The
person wearing the belt could be
seriously injured. After raising the
rear seatback, always check to be
sure that the safety belts are
properly routed and attached, and
are not twisted.
Safety Belts { WARNING

In most states and in all Canadian
provinces, the law requires wearing
This section of the manual safety belts. Here is why:
describes how to use safety belts It is extremely dangerous to ride
in a cargo area, inside or outside You never know if you will be in a
properly. It also describes some
of a vehicle. In a collision, people crash. If you do have a crash, you
things not to do with safety belts.
riding in these areas are more do not know if it will be a
serious one.
{ WARNING likely to be seriously injured or
killed. Do not allow people to ride A few crashes are mild, and some
Do not let anyone ride where a in any area of your vehicle that is crashes can be so serious that even
safety belt cannot be worn not equipped with seats and buckled up, a person would not
properly. In a crash, if you or your safety belts. Be sure everyone in survive. But most crashes are in
passenger(s) are not wearing your vehicle is in a seat and using between. In many of them, people
safety belts, the injuries can be a safety belt properly. who buckle up can survive and
much worse. You can hit things sometimes walk away. Without
safety belts they could have been
inside the vehicle harder or be This vehicle has indicators as a badly hurt or killed.
ejected from the vehicle. You and reminder to buckle the safety belts.
your passenger(s) can be See Safety Belt Reminders on After more than 40 years of safety
seriously injured or killed. In the page 5‑12 for additional belts in vehicles, the facts are clear.
same crash, you might not be, information. In most crashes buckling up does
if you are buckled up. Always matter ... a lot!
fasten your safety belt, and check
that your passenger(s) are
restrained properly too.
Why Safety Belts Work

When you ride in or on anything,
you go as fast as it goes.
Put someone on it. The person keeps going until

stopped by something. In a real
vehicle, it could be the windshield...
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose

it is just a seat on wheels.
Get it up to speed. Then stop the

vehicle. The rider does not stop.
Questions and Answers About

Safety Belts
Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle
after a crash if I am wearing a
safety belt?
A: You could be — whether you are
wearing a safety belt or not. But
your chance of being conscious
during and after an accident, so
you can unbuckle and get out, is
much greater if you are belted.
or the instrument panel... or the safety belts! And you can unbuckle a
safety belt, even if you are
With safety belts, you slow down as upside down.
the vehicle does. You get more time
to stop. You stop over more Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why
distance, and your strongest bones should I have to wear safety
take the forces. That is why safety belts?
belts make such good sense. A: Airbags are supplemental
systems only; so they work with
safety belts — not instead of
them. Whether or not an airbag
is provided, all occupants still
have to buckle up to get the
most protection. That is true not
only in frontal collisions, but
especially in side and other
collisions.
Q: If I am a good driver, and I How to Wear Safety Belts Occupants who are not buckled up
never drive far from home, can be thrown out of the vehicle in a
why should I wear safety
Properly crash. And they can strike others in
belts? This section is only for people of the vehicle who are wearing safety
A: You may be an excellent driver, adult size. belts.
but if you are in a crash — even Be aware that there are special First, before you or your
one that is not your fault — you things to know about safety belts passenger(s) wear a safety belt,
and your passenger(s) can be and children. And there are different there is important information you
hurt. Being a good driver does rules for smaller children and should know.
not protect you from things infants. If a child will be riding in the
beyond your control, such as vehicle, see Older Children on
bad drivers. page 3‑42 or Infants and Young
Most accidents occur within Children on page 3‑44. Follow
40 km (25 miles) of home. And those rules for everyone's
the greatest number of serious protection.
injuries and deaths occur at It is very important for all occupants
speeds of less than to buckle up. Statistics show that
65 km/h (40 mph). unbelted people are hurt more often
Safety belts are for everyone. in crashes than those who are
wearing safety belts.
Sit up straight and always keep your

feet on the floor in front of you. The
lap part of the belt should be worn
low and snug on the hips, just
touching the thighs. In a crash, this Q: What is wrong with this?

applies force to the strong pelvic { WARNING
bones and you would be less likely
to slide under the lap belt. If you slid You can be seriously hurt if your
under it, the belt would apply force shoulder belt is too loose. In a
on your abdomen. This could cause crash, you would move forward
serious or even fatal injuries. The too much, which could increase
shoulder belt should go over the injury. The shoulder belt should fit
shoulder and across the chest. snugly against your body.
These parts of the body are best
able to take belt restraining forces.
The shoulder belt locks if there is a
sudden stop or crash.
A: The shoulder belt is too loose.
It will not give as much
protection this way.
Q: What is wrong with this? Q: What is wrong with this?

{ WARNING
You can be seriously hurt if your
lap belt is too loose. In a crash,
you could slide under the lap belt
and apply force on your
abdomen. This could cause
serious or even fatal injuries. The
lap belt should be worn low and
snug on the hips, just touching
the thighs.
A: The lap belt is too loose. It will A: The belt is buckled in the wrong
not give nearly as much buckle.
protection this way.
Q: What is wrong with this?

{ WARNING { WARNING
You can be seriously injured if You can be seriously injured if
your belt is buckled in the wrong your belt goes over an armrest
place like this. In a crash, the belt like this. The belt would be much
would go up over your abdomen. too high. In a crash, you can slide
The belt forces would be there, under the belt. The belt force
not on the pelvic bones. This would then be applied on the
could cause serious internal abdomen, not on the pelvic
injuries. Always buckle your belt bones, and that could cause
into the buckle nearest you. serious or fatal injuries. Be sure
the belt goes under the armrests.
A: The belt is over an armrest.

Q: What is wrong with this? Q: What is wrong with this?

{ WARNING
You can be seriously injured if
you wear the shoulder belt under
your arm. In a crash, your body
would move too far forward,
which would increase the chance
of head and neck injury. Also, the
belt would apply too much force
to the ribs, which are not as
strong as shoulder bones. You
could also severely injure internal
organs like your liver or spleen.
A: The shoulder belt is worn under The shoulder belt should go over A: The belt is behind the body.
the arm. It should be worn over the shoulder and across the
the shoulder at all times. chest.
Q: What is wrong with this? Lap-Shoulder Belt

{ WARNING
All seating positions in the vehicle
You can be seriously injured by have a lap-shoulder belt.
not wearing the lap-shoulder belt
The following instructions explain
properly. In a crash, you would
how to wear a lap-shoulder belt
not be restrained by the shoulder properly.
belt. Your body could move too
far forward increasing the chance 1. Adjust the seat, if the seat is
of head and neck injury. You adjustable, so you can sit up
might also slide under the lap straight. To see how, see “Seats”
belt. The belt force would then be in the Index.
applied right on the abdomen.
That could cause serious or fatal
injuries. The shoulder belt should A: The belt is twisted across
go over the shoulder and across the body.
the chest.
{ WARNING
You can be seriously injured by a
twisted belt. In a crash, you would
not have the full width of the belt
to spread impact forces. If a belt
is twisted, make it straight so it
can work properly, or ask your
2. Pick up the latch plate and pull
dealer to fix it.
the belt across you. Do not let it
get twisted.
The lap-shoulder belt may lock if Pull up on the latch plate to

you pull the belt across you very make sure it is secure. If the belt
quickly. If this happens, let the is not long enough, see Safety
belt go back slightly to unlock it. Belt Extender on page 3‑26.
Then pull the belt across you Position the release button on
more slowly. the buckle so that the safety belt
If the shoulder portion of a could be quickly unbuckled if
passenger belt is pulled out all necessary.
the way, the child restraint If equipped with a shoulder belt
locking feature may be engaged. height adjuster, move it to the
If this happens, let the belt go height that is right for you. See
back all the way and start again. “Shoulder Belt Height
To unlatch the belt, push the button
Adjustment” later in this section
on the buckle. The belt should
for instructions on use and
return to its stowed position. Slide
important safety information.
the latch plate up the safety belt
4. To make the lap part tight, pull webbing, when the safety belt is not
up on the shoulder belt. in use. The latch plate should rest
It may be necessary to pull on the stitching on the safety belt,
stitching on the safety belt near the guide loop on the side wall.
through the latch plate to fully
tighten the lap belt on smaller
occupants.
3. Push the latch plate into the

buckle until it clicks.
Before a door is closed, be sure Safety Belt Pretensioners

the safety belt is out of the way. If
This vehicle has safety belt
a door is slammed against a safety
pretensioners for front outboard
belt, damage can occur to both the
occupants. Although the safety belt
safety belt and the vehicle.
pretensioners cannot be seen, they
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster are part of the safety belt assembly.
They can help tighten the safety
The vehicle has a shoulder belt belts during the early stages of a
height adjuster for the driver and moderate to severe frontal and near
right front passenger seating frontal crash if the threshold
positions. conditions for pretensioner
Adjust the height so the shoulder activation are met.
portion of the belt is on the shoulder Press the release button (A) and
move the height adjuster to the Pretensioners work only once. If the
and not falling off of it. The belt pretensioners activate in a crash,
should be close to, but not desired position. The adjuster
can be moved up by pushing the they will need to be replaced, and
contacting, the neck. Improper probably other new parts for the
shoulder belt height adjustment slide/trim up. After the adjuster is
set to the desired position, try to vehicle's safety belt system. See
could reduce the effectiveness of Replacing Safety Belt System Parts
the safety belt in a crash. See How move it down without pushing the
release button to make sure it has After a Crash on page 3‑27.
to Wear Safety Belts Properly on
page 3‑16. locked into position.
Rear Safety Belt Comfort There is one guide for each outside
Guides passenger position in the rear seat.
Here is how to install a comfort
This vehicle may have rear shoulder guide to the safety belt:
belt comfort guides. If not, they are
available through your dealer. The
guides may provide added safety
belt comfort for older children who
have outgrown booster seats and
for some adults. When installed and
properly adjusted, the comfort guide
positions the belt away from the
neck and head.
2. Place the guide over the belt,
and insert the two edges of the
belt into the slots of the guide.
1. Remove the guide from its

storage pocket on the side of
the seat.
{ WARNING
A safety belt that is not properly
worn may not provide the
protection needed in a crash. The
person wearing the belt could be
seriously injured. The shoulder
belt should go over the shoulder
and across the chest. These parts
of the body are best able to take
belt restraining forces.
3. Be sure that the belt is not 4. Buckle, position, and release the
twisted and it lies flat. The safety belt as described
elastic cord must be under the previously in this section. Make
belt and the guide on top. sure the shoulder portion of the
belt is on the shoulder and not
falling off of it. The belt should
be close to, but not contacting,
the neck.
Safety Belt Use During The best way to protect the fetus is Safety System Check
to protect the mother. When a safety
Pregnancy belt is worn properly, it is more likely Now and then, check that the safety
Safety belts work for everyone, that the fetus will not be hurt in a belt reminder light, safety belts,
including pregnant women. Like all crash. For pregnant women, as for buckles, latch plates, retractors, and
occupants, they are more likely to anyone, the key to making safety anchorages are working properly.
be seriously injured if they do not belts effective is wearing them Look for any other loose or
wear safety belts. properly. damaged safety belt system parts
that might keep a safety belt system
Safety Belt Extender from doing its job. See your dealer
to have it repaired. Torn or frayed
If the vehicle's safety belt will fasten safety belts may not protect you in a
around you, you should use it. crash. They can rip apart under
But if a safety belt is not long impact forces. If a belt is torn or
enough, your dealer will order you frayed, get a new one right away.
an extender. When you go in to Make sure the safety belt reminder
order it, take the heaviest coat you light is working. See Safety Belt
will wear, so the extender will be Reminders on page 5‑12 for more
long enough for you. To help avoid information.
personal injury, do not let someone
Keep safety belts clean and dry.
else use it, and use it only for the
See Safety Belt Care on
A pregnant woman should wear a seat it is made to fit. The extender
page 3‑27.
lap-shoulder belt, and the lap has been designed for adults. Never
portion should be worn as low as use it for securing child seats. To
possible, below the rounding, wear it, attach it to the regular safety
throughout the pregnancy. belt. For more information, see the
instruction sheet that comes with
the extender.
Safety Belt Care Replacing Safety Belt After a minor crash, replacement of
safety belts may not be necessary.
Keep belts clean and dry. System Parts After a But the safety belt assemblies that
Crash were used during any crash may
{ WARNING have been stressed or damaged.
Do not bleach or dye safety belts.

{ WARNING See your dealer to have the safety
belt assemblies inspected or
It may severely weaken them. In A crash can damage the safety replaced.
a crash, they might not be able to belt system in the vehicle. New parts and repairs may be
provide adequate protection. A damaged safety belt system necessary even if the safety belt
Clean safety belts only with mild may not properly protect the system was not being used at the
soap and lukewarm water. person using it, resulting in time of the crash.
serious injury or even death in a
Have the safety belt pretensioners
crash. To help make sure the
checked if the vehicle has been in a
safety belt systems are working
crash, or if the airbag readiness light
properly after a crash, have them stays on after you start the vehicle
inspected and any necessary or while you are driving. See Airbag
replacements made as soon as Readiness Light on page 5‑12.
possible.
Airbag System The vehicle may have the following

airbags:
For frontal airbags, the word
AIRBAG will appear on the middle
The vehicle has the following part of the steering wheel for the
. A seat-mounted side impact
airbags: driver and on the instrument panel
airbag for the rear seat
. A frontal airbag for the driver. passenger seated directly for the right front passenger.
. A frontal airbag for the right front behind the driver. With seat-mounted side impact
passenger. . A seat-mounted side impact airbags, the word AIRBAG will
airbag for the rear seat appear on the side of the seatback
. A seat-mounted side impact closest to the door.
airbag for the driver. passenger seated directly
behind the right front passenger. With roof-rail airbags, the word
. A seat-mounted side impact AIRBAG will appear along the
airbag for the right front All of the airbags in the vehicle will
have the word AIRBAG embossed headliner or trim.
passenger.
in the trim or on an attached label Airbags are designed to supplement
. A roof-rail airbag for the driver near the deployment opening. the protection provided by safety
and the passenger seated belts. Even though today's airbags
directly behind the driver. are also designed to help reduce
. A roof-rail airbag for the right the risk of injury from the force of an
front passenger and the inflating bag, all airbags must inflate
passenger seated directly very quickly to do their job.
behind the right front passenger.
Here are the most important things

to know about the airbag system: { WARNING { WARNING
Airbags inflate with great force, Children who are up against,
{ WARNING faster than the blink of an eye. or very close to, any airbag when
You can be severely injured or Anyone who is up against, or very it inflates can be seriously injured
killed in a crash if you are not close to, any airbag when it or killed. Airbags plus
wearing your safety belt — even if inflates can be seriously injured lap-shoulder belts offer protection
you have airbags. Airbags are or killed. Do not sit unnecessarily for adults and older children, but
designed to work with safety close to the airbag, as you would not for young children and infants.
belts, but do not replace them. be if you were sitting on the edge Neither the vehicle's safety belt
Also, airbags are not designed to of your seat or leaning forward. system nor its airbag system is
deploy in every crash. In some Safety belts help keep you in designed for them. Young
crashes safety belts are your only position before and during a children and infants need the
restraint. See When Should an crash. Always wear your safety protection that a child restraint
Airbag Inflate? on page 3‑31. belt, even with airbags. The driver system can provide. Always
should sit as far back as possible secure children properly in your
Wearing your safety belt during a while still maintaining control of vehicle. To read how, see Older
crash helps reduce your chance the vehicle. Children on page 3‑42 or Infants
of hitting things inside the vehicle and Young Children on
or being ejected from it. Airbags Occupants should not lean on or
sleep against the door or side page 3‑44.
are “supplemental restraints” to
the safety belts. Everyone in your windows in seating positions with
vehicle should wear a safety belt seat-mounted side impact airbags
properly — whether or not there is and/or roof-rail airbags.
an airbag for that person.
Where Are the Airbags?
There is an airbag readiness light

on the instrument panel cluster,
which shows the airbag symbol. The
system checks the airbag electrical
system for malfunctions. The light
tells you if there is an electrical
problem. See Airbag Readiness Driver Side shown, Passenger
Light on page 5‑12 for more Side similar
information.
The driver frontal airbag is in the The seat-mounted side impact
middle of the steering wheel. airbags for the driver and right front
The right front passenger frontal passenger are in the side of the
airbag is in the instrument panel on seatbacks closest to the door.
the passenger's side. The roof-rail airbags for the driver,
right front passenger, and second
row outboard passengers are in the
ceiling above the side windows.
WARNING (Continued)
When Should an Airbag
Inflate?
that person causing severe injury Frontal airbags are designed to
or even death. The path of an inflate in moderate to severe frontal
inflating airbag must be kept or near-frontal crashes to help
clear. Do not put anything reduce the potential for severe
between an occupant and an injuries mainly to the driver's or right
airbag, and do not attach or put front passenger's head and chest.
anything on the steering wheel However, they are only designed to
hub or on or near any other inflate if the impact exceeds a
airbag covering. predetermined deployment
Rear Seat Driver Side Shown, threshold. Deployment thresholds
Do not use seat accessories that are used to predict how severe a
Passenger Side Similar block the inflation path of a crash is likely to be in time for the
If the vehicle has second row seat-mounted side impact airbag. airbags to inflate and help restrain
seat‐mounted side impact airbags, the occupants.
Never secure anything to the roof
they are in the sides of the rear
of a vehicle with roof-rail airbags Whether the frontal airbags will or
seatback closest to the door.
by routing a rope or tie down should deploy is not based on how
through any door or window fast your vehicle is traveling.
{ WARNING opening. If you do, the path of an It depends largely on what you hit,
inflating roof-rail airbag will be the direction of the impact, and how
If something is between an
blocked. quickly your vehicle slows down.
occupant and an airbag, the
airbag might not inflate properly
or it might force the object into
(Continued)
Frontal airbags may inflate at Frontal airbags are not intended to the system's designed threshold
different crash speeds. For inflate during vehicle rollovers, rear level. The threshold level can vary
example: impacts, or in many side impacts. with specific vehicle design.
. If the vehicle hits a stationary In addition, the vehicle has Roof‐rail airbags are not intended to
object, the airbags could inflate dual-stage frontal airbags. inflate in rear impacts. Both roof‐rail
at a different crash speed than if Dual-stage airbags adjust the airbags will deploy when either side
the vehicle hits a moving object. restraint according to crash severity. of the vehicle is struck or if the
. If the vehicle hits an object that The vehicle has electronic frontal sensing system predicts that the
deforms, the airbags could sensors, which help the sensing vehicle is about to roll over, or in a
inflate at a different crash speed system distinguish between a severe frontal impact.
than if the vehicle hits an object moderate frontal impact and a more In any particular crash, no one can
that does not deform. severe frontal impact. For moderate say whether an airbag should have
frontal impacts, dual-stage airbags inflated simply because of the
. If the vehicle hits a narrow object inflate at a level less than full
(like a pole), the airbags could damage to a vehicle or because of
deployment. For more severe frontal what the repair costs were. For
inflate at a different crash speed impacts, full deployment occurs.
than if the vehicle hits a wide frontal airbags, inflation is
object (like a wall). The vehicle has seat-mounted side determined by what the vehicle hits,
impact and roof-rail airbags. See the angle of the impact, and how
. If the vehicle goes into an object Airbag System on page 3‑28. quickly the vehicle slows down. For
at an angle, the airbags could Seat-mounted side impact and seat-mounted side impact and
inflate at a different crash speed roof-rail airbags are intended to roof-rail airbags, deployment is
than if the vehicle goes straight inflate in moderate to severe side determined by the location and
into the object. crashes. In addition, these roof‐rail severity of the side impact.
Thresholds can also vary with airbags are intended to inflate In a rollover event, roof‐rail airbag
specific vehicle design. during a rollover or in a severe deployment is determined by the
frontal impact. Seat-mounted side direction of the roll.
impact and roof-rail airbags will
inflate if the crash severity is above
What Makes an Airbag How Does an Airbag Airbags should never be regarded
as anything more than a supplement
Inflate? Restrain? to safety belts.
In a deployment event, the sensing In moderate to severe frontal or
system sends an electrical signal near frontal collisions, even belted What Will You See After
triggering a release of gas from the occupants can contact the steering an Airbag Inflates?
inflator. Gas from the inflator fills the wheel or the instrument panel. In
airbag causing the bag to break out moderate to severe side collisions, After the frontal airbags and
of the cover and deploy. The inflator, even belted occupants can contact seat-mounted side impact airbags
the airbag, and related hardware are the inside of the vehicle. inflate, they quickly deflate, so
all part of the airbag module. quickly that some people may not
Airbags supplement the protection
even realize an airbag inflated.
Frontal airbag modules are located provided by safety belts. Frontal
Roof-rail airbags may still be at least
inside the steering wheel and airbags distribute the force of the
partially inflated for some time after
instrument panel. For vehicles with impact more evenly over the
they deploy. Some components of
seat-mounted side impact airbags, occupant's upper body, stopping the
the airbag module may be hot for
there are airbag modules in the side occupant more gradually.
several minutes. For location of the
of the front seatbacks closest to the Seat-mounted side impact and
airbag modules, see What Makes
door. For vehicles with roof-rail roof-rail airbags distribute the force
an Airbag Inflate? on page 3‑33.
airbags, there are airbag modules in of the impact more evenly over the
the ceiling of the vehicle, near the occupant's upper body. The parts of the airbag that come
side windows that have occupant into contact with you may be warm,
But airbags would not help in many
seating positions. but not too hot to touch. There may
types of collisions, primarily
be some smoke and dust coming
because the occupant's motion is
from the vents in the deflated
not toward those airbags. See When
airbags. Airbag inflation does not
Should an Airbag Inflate? on
prevent the driver from seeing out of
the windshield or being able to steer The vehicle has a feature that may
the vehicle, nor does it prevent automatically unlock the doors, turn WARNING (Continued)
people from leaving the vehicle. on the interior lamps and hazard
warning flashers, and shut off the Use caution if you should attempt
{ WARNING fuel system after the airbags inflate.
You can lock the doors, turn off the
to restart the engine after a crash
has occurred.
When an airbag inflates, there interior lamps and hazard warning
may be dust in the air. This dust flashers by using the controls for
In many crashes severe enough to
could cause breathing problems those features.
inflate the airbag, windshields are
for people with a history of broken by vehicle deformation.
asthma or other breathing trouble. { WARNING Additional windshield breakage may
To avoid this, everyone in the also occur from the right front
vehicle should get out as soon as A crash severe enough to inflate passenger airbag.
it is safe to do so. If you have the airbags may have also
damaged important functions in
. Airbags are designed to inflate
breathing problems but cannot
the vehicle, such as the fuel only once. After an airbag
get out of the vehicle after an inflates, you will need some new
airbag inflates, then get fresh air system, brake and steering
systems, etc. Even if the vehicle parts for the airbag system.
by opening a window or a door. If you do not get them, the
If you experience breathing appears to be drivable after a
airbag system will not be there
problems following an airbag moderate crash, there may be
to help protect you in another
deployment, you should seek concealed damage that could crash. A new system will include
medical attention. make it difficult to safely operate airbag modules and possibly
the vehicle. other parts. The service manual
(Continued) for your vehicle covers the need
to replace other parts.

. The vehicle has a crash sensing
and diagnostic module which
Passenger Sensing The passenger sensing system
turns off the right front passenger
records information after a System frontal airbag under certain
crash. See Vehicle Data The vehicle has a passenger conditions. The driver airbags,
Recording and Privacy on sensing system for the right front seat‐mounted side impact airbags,
page 13‑16 and Event Data passenger position. The passenger and roof‐rail airbags are not affected
Recorders on page 13‑16. airbag status indicator will be visible by the passenger sensing system.
. Let only qualified technicians on the instrument panel when the The passenger sensing system
work on the airbag systems. vehicle is started. works with sensors that are part of
Improper service can mean that the right front passenger seat. The
an airbag system will not work sensors are designed to detect the
properly. See your dealer for presence of a properly-seated
service. occupant and determine if the right
front passenger frontal airbag
should be enabled (may inflate)
or not.
The words ON and OFF will be According to accident statistics,
visible during the system check. children are safer when properly
If you are using remote start, secured in a rear seat in the correct
if equipped, to start the vehicle from child restraint for their weight
a distance you may not see the and size.
system check. When the system
check is complete, either the word
ON or the word OFF will be visible.
See Passenger Airbag Status
Indicator on page 5‑13.
We recommend that children be The passenger sensing system is

secured in a rear seat, including: WARNING (Continued) designed to turn off the right front
an infant or a child riding in a passenger frontal airbag if:
rear-facing child restraint; a child passenger airbag inflates and the
passenger seat is in a forward
. The right front passenger seat is
riding in a forward-facing child seat; unoccupied.
an older child riding in a booster position.
seat; and children, who are large Even if the passenger sensing
. The system determines that an
enough, using safety belts. system has turned off the right infant is present in a rear-facing
front passenger frontal airbag, no infant seat.
A label on the sun visor says,
“Never put a rear-facing child seat in system is fail-safe. No one can . The system determines that a
the front.” This is because the risk to guarantee that an airbag will not small child is present in a child
the rear-facing child is so great, deploy under some unusual restraint.
if the airbag deploys. circumstance, even though the . The system determines that a
airbag is turned off. small child is present in a
{ WARNING Secure rear-facing child restraints booster seat.
in a rear seat, even if the airbag . A right front passenger takes
A child in a rear-facing child
is off. If you secure a his/her weight off of the seat for
restraint can be seriously injured
forward-facing child restraint in a period of time.
or killed if the right front
the right front seat, always move . The right front passenger seat is
passenger airbag inflates. This is
the front passenger seat as far occupied by a smaller person,
because the back of the
back as it will go. It is better to such as a child who has
rear-facing child restraint would
secure the child restraint in a outgrown child restraints.
be very close to the inflating
rear seat.
airbag. A child in a forward-facing . Or, if there is a critical problem
child restraint can be seriously with the airbag system or the
injured or killed if the right front passenger sensing system.
(Continued)
When the passenger sensing airbag, depending upon the If the On Indicator is Lit for a
system has turned off the right front person's seating posture and Child Restraint
passenger frontal airbag, the off body build. Everyone in the vehicle
indicator will light and stay lit to who has outgrown child restraints If a child restraint has been installed
remind you that the airbags are off. should wear a safety belt and the on indicator is lit:
See Passenger Airbag Status properly — whether or not there is 1. Turn the vehicle off.
Indicator on page 5‑13. an airbag for that person.
2. Remove the child restraint from
The passenger sensing system is the vehicle.
designed to turn on (may inflate) the { WARNING 3. Remove any additional items
right front passenger frontal airbag
If the airbag readiness light ever from the seat such as blankets,
anytime the system senses that a
comes on and stays on, it means cushions, seat covers, seat
person of adult size is sitting
that something may be wrong heaters, or seat massagers.
properly in the right front passenger
seat. When the passenger sensing with the airbag system. To help 4. Reinstall the child restraint
system has allowed the airbag to be avoid injury to yourself or others, following the directions provided
enabled, the on indicator will light have the vehicle serviced right by the child restraint
and stay lit to remind you that the away. See Airbag Readiness manufacturer and refer to
airbag is active. Light on page 5‑12 for more Securing Child Restraints (Rear
information, including important Seat) on page 3‑59 or Securing
For some children who have
safety information. Child Restraints (Front
outgrown child restraints and for
Passenger Seat) on page 3‑61.
very small adults, the passenger
sensing system may or may not turn
off the right front passenger frontal
5. If, after reinstalling the child If the Off Indicator is Lit for an enable the right front passenger
restraint and restarting the Adult-Size Occupant frontal airbag:
vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, 1. Turn the vehicle off.
turn the vehicle off. Then slightly
recline the vehicle seatback and 2. Remove any additional material
adjust the seat cushion, from the seat, such as blankets,
if adjustable, to make sure that cushions, seat covers, seat
the vehicle seatback is not heaters, or seat massagers.
pushing the child restraint into 3. Place the seatback in the fully
the seat cushion. upright position.
Also make sure the child 4. Have the person sit upright in
restraint is not trapped under the the seat, centered on the seat
vehicle head restraint. If this cushion, with legs comfortably
happens, adjust the head extended.
restraint. See Head Restraints
on page 3‑2. If a person of adult-size is sitting in 5. Restart the vehicle and have the
the right front passenger seat, but person remain in this position for
6. Restart the vehicle. two to three minutes after the on
the off indicator is lit, it could be
If the on indicator is still lit, because that person is not sitting indicator is lit.
secure the child in the child properly in the seat. If this happens,
restraint in a rear seat position in use the following steps to allow the
the vehicle, and check with your system to detect that person and
dealer.
Additional Factors Affecting

System Operation { WARNING { WARNING
Safety belts help keep the Stowing of articles under the For up to 10 seconds after the
passenger in position on the seat passenger seat or between the ignition is turned off and the
during vehicle maneuvers and passenger seat cushion and battery is disconnected, an airbag
braking, which helps the passenger seatback may interfere with the can still inflate during improper
sensing system maintain the proper operation of the passenger service. You can be injured if you
passenger airbag status. See sensing system. are close to an airbag when it
“Safety Belts” and “Child Restraints” inflates. Avoid yellow connectors.
in the Index for additional They are probably part of the
information about the importance of Servicing the airbag system. Be sure to follow
proper restraint use. Airbag-Equipped Vehicle proper service procedures, and
A thick layer of additional material, Airbags affect how the vehicle make sure the person performing
such as a blanket or cushion, should be serviced. There are parts work for you is qualified to do so.
or aftermarket equipment such as of the airbag system in several
seat covers, seat heaters, and seat places around the vehicle. Your
massagers can affect how well the dealer and the service manual have
passenger sensing system information about servicing the
operates. We recommend that you vehicle and the airbag system. To
not use seat covers or other purchase a service manual, see
aftermarket equipment except when Service Publications Ordering
approved by GM for your specific Information on page 13‑14.
vehicle. See Adding Equipment to
the Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on
page 3‑40 for more information
about modifications that can affect
how the system operates.
Adding Equipment to the In addition, the vehicle has a This could either prevent proper
passenger sensing system for deployment of the passenger
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle the right front passenger airbag(s) or prevent the
Q: Is there anything I might add position, which includes sensors passenger sensing system
to or change about the vehicle that are part of the passenger from properly turning off the
that could keep the airbags seat. The passenger sensing passenger airbag(s). See
from working properly? system may not operate properly Passenger Sensing System on
if the original seat trim is page 3‑35.
A: Yes. If you add things that
replaced with non-GM covers, If you have questions, call
change the vehicle's frame,
upholstery or trim, or with GM Customer Assistance. The
bumper system, height, front end
covers, upholstery or trim phone numbers and addresses
or side sheet metal, they may
designed for a different vehicle. for Customer Assistance are in
keep the airbag system from
Any object, such as an Step Two of the Customer
working properly. Changing or
aftermarket seat heater or a Satisfaction Procedure in this
moving any parts of the front
comfort enhancing pad or manual. See Customer
seats, safety belts, the airbag
device, installed under or on top Satisfaction Procedure on
sensing and diagnostic module,
of the seat fabric, could also page 13‑1.
steering wheel, instrument
interfere with the operation of
panel, roof-rail airbag modules,
the passenger sensing system.
ceiling headliner or pillar garnish
trim, front sensors, side impact
sensors, or airbag wiring can
affect the operation of the airbag
system.
Q: Because I have a disability, Airbag System Check Replacing Airbag System

I have to get my vehicle
modified. How can I find out The airbag system does not need Parts After a Crash
whether this will affect my regularly scheduled maintenance or
airbag system? replacement. Make sure the airbag
readiness light is working. See
{ WARNING
A: If you have questions, call Airbag Readiness Light on A crash can damage the airbag
Customer Assistance. The page 5‑12 for more information. systems in your vehicle.
phone numbers and addresses A damaged airbag system may
for Customer Assistance are in Notice: If an airbag covering is
damaged, opened, or broken, the not work properly and may not
Step Two of the Customer
airbag may not work properly. Do protect you and your
Satisfaction Procedure in this
not open or break the airbag passenger(s) in a crash, resulting
manual. See Customer
Satisfaction Procedure on coverings. If there are any in serious injury or even death. To
page 13‑1. opened or broken airbag covers, help make sure your airbag
have the airbag covering and/or systems are working properly
In addition, your dealer and the airbag module replaced. For the after a crash, have them
service manual have information location of the airbag modules, inspected and any necessary
about the location of the airbag see What Makes an Airbag replacements made as soon as
sensors, sensing and diagnostic Inflate? on page 3‑33. See your possible.
module and airbag wiring. dealer for service.
If an airbag inflates, you will need to
replace airbag system parts. See
your dealer for service.
If the airbag readiness light stays on Child Restraints The manufacturer's instructions that
after the vehicle is started or comes come with the booster seat, state
on when you are driving, the airbag the weight and height limitations for
system may not work properly. Have Older Children that booster. Use a booster seat
the vehicle serviced right away. See with a lap-shoulder belt until the
Airbag Readiness Light on child passes the below fit test:
page 5‑12 for more information. . Sit all the way back on the seat.
Do the knees bend at the seat
edge? If yes, continue. If no,
return to the booster seat.
. Buckle the lap-shoulder belt.
Does the shoulder belt rest on
the shoulder? If yes, continue.
If no, then return to the
booster seat.
. Does the lap belt fit low and
Older children who have outgrown snug on the hips, touching the
booster seats should wear the thighs? If yes, continue. If no,
vehicle's safety belts. return to the booster seat.
. Can proper safety belt fit be
maintained for the length of the
trip? If yes, continue. If no,
return to the booster seat.
Q: What is the proper way to According to accident statistics,

wear safety belts? children and infants are safer when WARNING (Continued)
A: An older child should wear a properly restrained in a child
restraint system or infant restraint and seriously injured. A safety
lap-shoulder belt and get the
system secured in a rear seating belt must be used by only one
additional restraint a shoulder
belt can provide. The shoulder position. person at a time.
belt should not cross the face or In a crash, children who are not
neck. The lap belt should fit buckled up can strike other people
snugly below the hips, just who are buckled up, or can be
touching the top of the thighs. thrown out of the vehicle. Older
This applies belt force to the children need to use safety belts
child's pelvic bones in a crash. properly.
It should never be worn over the
abdomen, which could cause
severe or even fatal internal
{ WARNING
injuries in a crash. Never do this.
Never allow two children to wear
the same safety belt. The safety
belt can not properly spread the
impact forces. In a crash, the two
children can be crushed together
(Continued)
{ WARNING { WARNING
Never do this. Children can be seriously injured
Never allow a child to wear the or strangled if a shoulder belt is
safety belt with the shoulder belt wrapped around their neck and
behind their back. A child can be the safety belt continues to
seriously injured by not wearing tighten. Never leave children
the lap-shoulder belt properly. In a unattended in a vehicle and never
crash, the child would not be allow children to play with the
restrained by the shoulder belt. safety belts.
The child could move too far
forward increasing the chance of Infants and Young Airbags plus lap‐shoulder belts offer
head and neck injury. The child protection for adults and older
might also slide under the lap
Children children, but not for young children
belt. The belt force would then be Everyone in a vehicle needs and infants. Neither the vehicle's
applied right on the abdomen. protection! This includes infants and safety belt system nor its airbag
That could cause serious or fatal all other children. Neither the system is designed for them. Every
injuries. The shoulder belt should distance traveled nor the age and time infants and young children ride
go over the shoulder and across size of the traveler changes the in vehicles, they should have the
the chest. need, for everyone, to use safety protection provided by appropriate
restraints. In fact, the law in every child restraints.
state in the United States and in Children who are not restrained
every Canadian province says properly can strike other people,
children up to some age must be or can be thrown out of the vehicle.
restrained while in a vehicle.
{ WARNING WARNING (Continued)

Never do this. child restraint in a rear seat. If you
Never hold an infant or a child must secure a forward-facing
while riding in a vehicle. Due to child restraint in the right front
crash forces, an infant or a child seat, always move the front
will become so heavy it is not passenger seat as far back as it
possible to hold it during a crash. will go.
For example, in a crash at only
40 km/h (25 mph), a 5.5 kg (12 lb)
infant will suddenly become a
110 kg (240 lb) force on a person's
arms. An infant should be
secured in an appropriate { WARNING
restraint. Never do this.
Children who are up against,
or very close to, any airbag when
it inflates can be seriously injured
or killed. Never put a rear-facing
child restraint in the right front
seat. Secure a rear-facing child
restraint in a rear seat. It is also
better to secure a forward-facing
(Continued)
Q: What are the different types of The restraint manufacturer's

add-on child restraints? instructions that come with the { WARNING
A: Add-on child restraints, which restraint state the weight and
height limitations for a particular A young child's hip bones are still
are purchased by the vehicle's so small that the vehicle's regular
owner, are available in four basic child restraint. In addition, there
are many kinds of restraints safety belt may not remain low on
types. Selection of a particular the hip bones, as it should.
restraint should take into available for children with
special needs. Instead, it may settle up around
consideration not only the child's the child's abdomen. In a crash,
weight, height, and age but also
whether or not the restraint will { WARNING the belt would apply force on a
body area that is unprotected by
be compatible with the motor
vehicle in which it will be used. To reduce the risk of neck and any bony structure. This alone
head injury during a crash, infants could cause serious or fatal
For most basic types of child injuries. To reduce the risk of
need complete support. This is
restraints, there are many serious or fatal injuries during a
because an infant's neck is not
different models available. When
fully developed and its head crash, young children should
purchasing a child restraint, be
weighs so much compared with always be secured in appropriate
sure it is designed to be used in
a motor vehicle. If it is, the the rest of its body. In a crash, an child restraints.
restraint will have a label saying infant in a rear-facing child
that it meets federal motor restraint settles into the restraint,
vehicle safety standards. so the crash forces can be
distributed across the strongest
part of an infant's body, the back
and shoulders. Infants should
always be secured in rear-facing
child restraints.
Child Restraint Systems
(B) Forward-Facing Child Seat (C) Booster Seats

(A) Rear‐Facing Infant Seat A forward-facing child seat (B) A booster seat (C) is a child restraint
provides restraint for the child's designed to improve the fit of the
A rear-facing infant seat (A) body with the harness. vehicle's safety belt system.
provides restraint with the seating A booster seat can also help a child
surface against the back of the to see out the window.
infant.
The harness system holds the infant
in place and, in a crash, acts to
keep the infant positioned in the
restraint.
Securing an Add-On Child the LATCH system. See Lower In some areas, Certified Child
Restraint in the Vehicle Anchors and Tethers for Children Passenger Safety Technicians
(LATCH System) on page 3‑50 for (CPSTs) are available to inspect
more information. Children can be and demonstrate how to correctly
{ WARNING endangered in a crash if the child use and install child restraints. In
A child can be seriously injured or restraint is not properly secured in the U.S., refer to the National
killed in a crash if the child the vehicle. Highway Traffic Safety
restraint is not properly secured in When securing an add-on child Administration (NHTSA) website to
the vehicle. Secure the child restraint, refer to the instructions locate the nearest child safety seat
that come with the restraint which inspection station. For CPST
restraint properly in the vehicle
may be on the restraint itself or in a availability in Canada, check with
using the vehicle's safety belt or
booklet, or both, and to this manual. Transport Canada or the Provincial
LATCH system, following the Ministry of Transportation office.
instructions that came with that The child restraint instructions are
child restraint and the instructions important, so if they are not Securing the Child Within the
in this manual. available, obtain a replacement Child Restraint
copy from the manufacturer.
To help reduce the chance of injury, Keep in mind that an unsecured

child restraint can move around in a
{ WARNING
the child restraint must be secured
in the vehicle. Child restraint collision or sudden stop and injure A child can be seriously injured or
systems must be secured in vehicle people in the vehicle. Be sure to killed in a crash if the child is not
seats by lap belts or the lap belt properly secure any child restraint in properly secured in the child
portion of a lap-shoulder belt, or by the vehicle — even when no child is restraint. Secure the child
in it. properly following the instructions
that came with that child restraint.
Where to Put the

Restraint
{ WARNING WARNING (Continued)
According to accident statistics, A child in a rear-facing child Secure rear-facing child restraints
children and infants are safer when restraint can be seriously injured in a rear seat, even if the airbag
properly restrained in a child or killed if the right front is off. If you secure a
restraint system or infant restraint passenger airbag inflates. This is forward-facing child restraint in
system secured in a rear seating because the back of the the right front seat, always move
position. rear-facing child restraint would the front passenger seat as far
be very close to the inflating back as it will go. It is better to
We recommend that children and
airbag. A child in a forward-facing secure the child restraint in a
child restraints be secured in a rear
child restraint can be seriously rear seat.
seat, including: an infant or a child
riding in a rear-facing child restraint; injured or killed if the right front See Passenger Sensing System
a child riding in a forward-facing passenger airbag inflates and the on page 3‑35 for additional
child seat; an older child riding in a passenger seat is in a forward information.
booster seat; and children, who are position.
large enough, using safety belts. Even if the passenger sensing When securing a child restraint in a
A label on your sun visor says, system has turned off the right rear seating position, study the
“Never put a rear-facing child seat in front passenger frontal airbag, no instructions that came with your
the front.” This is because the risk to system is fail-safe. No one can child restraint to make sure it is
the rear-facing child is so great if the guarantee that an airbag will not compatible with this vehicle.
airbag deploys. deploy under some unusual
Child restraints and booster seats
circumstance, even though it is
vary considerably in size, and some
turned off.
may fit in certain seating positions
(Continued) better than others. Always make
sure the child restraint is properly
secured.
Depending on where you place the Lower Anchors and When installing a child restraint with
child restraint and the size of the a top tether, you must also use
child restraint, you may not be able
Tethers for Children either the lower anchors or the
to access adjacent safety belt (LATCH System) safety belts to properly secure the
assemblies or LATCH anchors for The LATCH system holds a child child restraint. A child restraint must
additional passengers or child restraint during driving or in a crash. never be installed using only the top
restraints. Adjacent seating This system is designed to make tether and anchor.
positions should not be used if the installation of a child restraint easier. In order to use the LATCH system in
child restraint prevents access to or The LATCH system uses anchors in the vehicle, you need a child
interferes with the routing of the the vehicle and attachments on the restraint that has LATCH
safety belt. child restraint that are made for use attachments. The child restraint
Wherever a child restraint is with the LATCH system. manufacturer will provide you with
installed, be sure to secure the child Make sure that a LATCH-compatible instructions on how to use the child
restraint properly. child restraint is properly installed restraint and its attachments. The
Keep in mind that an unsecured using the anchors, or use the following explains how to attach a
child restraint can move around in a vehicle's safety belts to secure the child restraint with these
collision or sudden stop and injure restraint, following the instructions attachments in the vehicle.
people in the vehicle. Be sure to that came with that restraint, and Not all vehicle seating positions or
properly secure any child restraint in also the instructions in this manual. child restraints have lower anchors
your vehicle — even when no child and attachments or top tether
is in it. anchors and attachments.
Lower Anchors Top Tether Anchor The child restraint may have
a single tether (A) or a dual
tether (C). Either will have a single
attachment (B) to secure the top
tether to the anchor.
Some child restraints that have a
top tether are designed for use with
or without the top tether being
Lower anchors (A) are metal bars attached. Others require the top
built into the vehicle. There are tether always to be attached. In
two lower anchors for each LATCH Canada, the law requires that
seating position that will forward-facing child restraints have
accommodate a child restraint with a top tether, and that the tether be
lower attachments (B). attached. Be sure to read and follow
A top tether (A, C) anchors the top the instructions for the child
of the child restraint to the vehicle. restraint.
A top tether anchor is built into
the vehicle. The top tether
attachment (B) on the child restraint
connects to the top tether anchor in
the vehicle in order to reduce the
forward movement and rotation of
the child restraint during driving or in
a crash.
Lower Anchor and Top Tether

Anchor Locations
To assist you in locating the lower

anchors, each rear anchor position
has a label, near the crease
between the seatback and the seat
cushion.
The top tether anchors are located

under the covers, behind the rear
seat, on the filler panel. Be sure to
Rear Seat use an anchor located on the same
i (Top Tether Anchor): Seating side of the vehicle as the seating
positions with top tether anchors. position where the child restraint will
To assist you in locating the top be placed.
j (Lower Anchor): Seating tether anchors, the top tether anchor
positions with two lower anchors. symbol is located on the cover.
Do not secure a child restraint in a Securing a Child Restraint

position without a top tether anchor Designed for the LATCH { WARNING
if a national or local law requires System
that the top tether be attached, or if Do not attach more than one child
the instructions that come with the restraint to a single anchor.
child restraint say that the top tether { WARNING Attaching more than one child
must be attached. restraint to a single anchor could
If a LATCH-type child restraint is cause the anchor or attachment
According to accident statistics, not attached to anchors, the child to come loose or even break
children and infants are safer when restraint will not be able to protect during a crash. A child or others
properly restrained in a child the child correctly. In a crash, the could be injured. To reduce the
restraint system or infant restraint child could be seriously injured or
system secured in a rear seating risk of serious or fatal injuries
killed. Install a LATCH-type child during a crash, attach only one
position. See Where to Put the restraint properly using the
Restraint on page 3‑49 for child restraint per anchor.
anchors, or use the vehicle's
additional information. safety belts to secure the
restraint, following the instructions
that came with the child restraint
and the instructions in this
manual.
Notice: Do not let the LATCH You cannot secure three child
{ WARNING attachments rub against the restraints using the LATCH anchors
vehicle’s safety belts. This may in the rear seat at the same time,
Children can be seriously injured damage these parts. If necessary, but you can install two of them.
or strangled if a shoulder belt is move buckled safety belts to If you want to do this, install one
wrapped around their neck and avoid rubbing the LATCH LATCH child restraint in the
the safety belt continues to attachments. passenger-side position, and install
tighten. Buckle any unused safety the other one either in the
belts behind the child restraint so Do not fold the empty rear seat
with a safety belt buckled. This driver-side position or in the center
children cannot reach them. Pull position. If you need to install child
could damage the safety belt or
the shoulder belt all the way out restraints in both the center and
the seat. Unbuckle and return the
of the retractor to set the lock, safety belt to its stowed position, driver‐side position, the one in the
if your vehicle has one, after the before folding the seat. center seating position will need to
child restraint has been installed. be secured using the vehicle safety
If you need to secure more than one belts instead of the LATCH anchors.
child restraint in the rear seat, see
Where to Put the Restraint on Refer to the following illustration to
page 3‑49. learn which anchors to use.
There are five lower LATCH anchors This system is designed to make
in the rear seat. installation of child restraints easier.
. Use anchors 1 and 2 when When using lower anchors, do not
installing a child restraint using use the vehicle's safety belts.
LATCH in seating position A. Instead use the vehicle's anchors
and child restraint attachments to
. Use anchors 3 and 4 when secure the restraints. Some
installing a child restraint using restraints also use another vehicle
LATCH in seating position B. anchor to secure a top tether.
. Use anchors 4 and 5 when 1. Attach and tighten the lower
installing a child restraint using attachments to the lower
LATCH in seating position C. anchors. If the child restraint
A. Passenger Side Rear does not have lower
Seating Position and Lower Installing child restraints using
LATCH in seating positions B and C attachments or the desired
Anchors 1 and 2 seating position does not have
at the same time is prohibited.
B. Center Rear Seating Position lower anchors, secure the child
and Lower Anchors 3 and 4 Make sure to attach the child restraint with the top tether and
restraint at the proper anchor the safety belts. Refer to the
C. Driver Side Rear Seating location. child restraint manufacturer
Position and Lower
instructions and the instructions
Anchors 4 and 5
in this manual.
1.1. Find the lower anchors for
the desired seating
position.
1.2. Put the child restraint on 2.2. Route, attach, and tighten
the seat. the top tether according to
If the head restraint the child restraint
interferes with the proper instructions and the
installation of the child following instructions:
restraint, the head restraint
may be removed. See
“Head Restraint Removal
and Reinstallation” at the
end of this section.
1.3. Attach and tighten the lower
attachments on the child . If the position you are using
restraint to the lower
does not have a headrest
anchors.
or head restraint, or the
2. If the child restraint manufacturer headrest or head restraint
recommends that the top tether has been removed, and you
be attached, attach and tighten are using a dual tether,
the top tether to the top tether . If the position you are using route the tether over the
anchor, if equipped. Refer to the does not have a headrest seatback.
child restraint instructions and or head restraint, or the
the following steps: headrest or head restraint
2.1. Find the top tether anchor. has been removed, and you
are using a single tether,
Open the cover to expose route the tether over the
the anchor. seatback.
3. Before placing a child in the

child restraint, make sure it is
securely held in place. To check,
grasp the child restraint at the
LATCH path and attempt to
move it side‐to‐side and
back‐and‐forth. There should
be no more than 2.5 cm (1 in) of
movement, for proper
installation.
Head Restraint Removal and
Reinstallation
. If the position you are using . If the position you are using
has an adjustable headrest has an adjustable headrest The rear outboard head restraints
or head restraint and you or head restraint and you can be removed if they interfere with
are using a single tether, are using a dual tether the proper installation of the child
route the tether under the route the tether around the restraint.
headrest or head restraint headrest or head restraint. To remove the head restraint:
and in between the
headrest or head restraint 1. Partially fold the seatback
posts. See Head Restraints forward. See Rear Seats on
on page 3‑2. page 3‑11 for additional
information.
3. Store the head restraint in the To reinstall the head restraint:

trunk of the vehicle.
4. When the child restraint is
removed, reinstall the head
restraint before the seating
position is used.
{ WARNING
With head restraints that are not
installed and adjusted properly,
there is a greater chance that
2. Press both buttons on the head occupants will suffer a neck/
restraint posts at the same time, spinal injury in a crash. Do not
and pull up on the head 1. Insert the head restraint posts
drive until the head restraints for
restraint. into the holes in the top of the
all occupants are installed and
seatback. The notches (A) on
adjusted properly.
the posts must face the driver
side of the vehicle.
2. Push the head restraint all the
way down.
3. Pull up on the head restraint to
be sure that it locks.
Replacing LATCH System Securing Child Restraints If the child restraint does not have
the LATCH system, you will be
Parts After a Crash (Rear Seat) using the safety belt to secure the
When securing a child restraint in a child restraint in this position. Be
{ WARNING rear seating position, study the sure to follow the instructions that
instructions that came with the child came with the child restraint. Secure
A crash can damage the LATCH restraint to make sure it is the child in the child restraint when
system in the vehicle. A damaged compatible with this vehicle. and as the instructions say.
LATCH system may not properly
secure the child restraint, If the child restraint has the LATCH If more than one child restraint
system, see Lower Anchors and needs to be installed in the rear
resulting in serious injury or even
Tethers for Children (LATCH seat, be sure to read Where to Put
death in a crash. To help make
System) on page 3‑50 for how and the Restraint on page 3‑49.
sure the LATCH system is
where to install the child restraint 1. Put the child restraint on
working properly after a crash, using LATCH. If a child restraint is
see your dealer to have the the seat.
secured in the vehicle using a
system inspected and any safety belt and it uses a top tether, If the head restraint interferes
necessary replacements made as see Lower Anchors and Tethers for with the proper installation of the
soon as possible. Children (LATCH System) on child restraint, the head restraint
page 3‑50 for top tether anchor may be removed. See “Head
locations. Restraint Removal and
If the vehicle has the LATCH system
Reinstallation” under Lower
and it was being used during a Do not secure a child seat in a Anchors and Tethers for
crash, new LATCH system parts position without a top tether anchor Children (LATCH System) on
may be needed. if a national or local law requires page 3‑50.
New parts and repairs may be that the top tether be anchored, or if
necessary even if the LATCH the instructions that come with the
system was not being used at the child restraint say that the top strap
time of the crash. must be anchored.
2. Pick up the latch plate, and run

the lap and shoulder portions of
the vehicle's safety belt through
or around the restraint. The child
restraint instructions will show
you how.
4. Pull the shoulder belt all the way 5. To tighten the belt, push down
out of the retractor to set the on the child restraint, pull the
lock. When the retractor lock is shoulder portion of the belt to
set, the belt can be tightened but tighten the lap portion of the belt,
not pulled out of the retractor. and feed the shoulder belt back
into the retractor. When installing
a forward-facing child restraint, it
3. Push the latch plate into the may be helpful to use your knee
buckle until it clicks. to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt.
Position the release button on
the buckle so that the safety belt Try to pull the belt out of the
could be quickly unbuckled if retractor to make sure the
necessary. retractor is locked. If the
retractor is not locked, repeat
Steps 4 and 5.
6. If the child restraint has a top To remove the child restraint, Securing Child Restraints
tether, follow the child restraint unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and
manufacturer's instructions let it return to the stowed position.
(Front Passenger Seat)
regarding the use of the top If the top tether is attached to a top This vehicle has airbags. A rear
tether. See Lower Anchors and tether anchor, disconnect it. If the seat is a safer place to secure a
Tethers for Children (LATCH head restraint was removed, forward-facing child restraint. See
System) on page 3‑50 for more reinstall it before the seating Where to Put the Restraint on
information. position is used. See “Head page 3‑49.
7. Before placing a child in the Restraint Removal and
In addition, the vehicle has a
child restraint, make sure it is Reinstallation” under Lower Anchors
passenger sensing system which
securely held in place. To check, and Tethers for Children (LATCH
is designed to turn off the right
grasp the child restraint at the System) on page 3‑50 for
front passenger frontal airbag and
safety belt path and attempt additional information on installing
seat‐mounted side impact airbag
to move it side‐to‐side and the head restraint properly.
under certain conditions. See
back‐and‐forth. When the child Passenger Sensing System on
restraint is properly installed, page 3‑35 and Passenger Airbag
there should be no more than Status Indicator on page 5‑13 for
2.5 cm (1 in) of movement. more information, including
important safety information.
A label on the sun visor says, If the child restraint has the LATCH
“Never put a rear-facing child seat in WARNING (Continued) system, see Lower Anchors and
the front.” This is because the risk to Tethers for Children (LATCH
the rear-facing child is so great if the system is fail-safe. No one can System) on page 3‑50 for how and
airbag deploys. guarantee that an airbag will not where to install the child restraint
deploy under some unusual using LATCH. If a child restraint is
{ WARNING circumstance, even though it is
turned off.
secured using a safety belt and it
uses a top tether, see Lower
A child in a rear-facing child Anchors and Tethers for Children
Secure rear-facing child restraints (LATCH System) on page 3‑50 for
restraint can be seriously injured
in a rear seat, even if the airbag top tether anchor locations.
or killed if the right front
is off. If you secure a
passenger airbag inflates. This is Do not secure a child seat in a
forward-facing child restraint in
because the back of the position without a top tether anchor
the right front seat, always move
rear-facing child restraint would if a national or local law requires
the front passenger seat as far
be very close to the inflating that the top tether be anchored, or if
back as it will go. It is better to
airbag. A child in a forward-facing the instructions that come with the
secure the child restraint in a
child restraint can be seriously child restraint say that the top strap
rear seat. must be anchored.
injured or killed if the right front
passenger airbag inflates and the See Passenger Sensing System In Canada, the law requires that
passenger seat is in a forward on page 3‑35 for additional forward-facing child restraints have
position. information. a top tether, and that the tether be
Even if the passenger sensing attached.
system has turned off the right
front passenger frontal airbag, no
(Continued)
You will be using the lap-shoulder 3. Pick up the latch plate, and run
belt to secure the child restraint in the lap and shoulder portions of
this position. Follow the instructions the vehicle's safety belt through
that came with the child restraint. or around the restraint. The child
1. Move the seat as far back as it restraint instructions will show
will go before securing the you how.
forward-facing child restraint.
When the passenger sensing
system has turned off the right
front passenger frontal airbag
and seat‐mounted side airbag,
the off indicator on the
5. Pull the shoulder belt all the way
passenger airbag status
out of the retractor to set the
indicator should light and stay lit
lock. When the retractor lock is
when you start the vehicle. See
set, the belt can be tightened but
Passenger Airbag Status
not pulled out of the retractor.
Indicator on page 5‑13.
2. Put the child restraint on
the seat. 4. Push the latch plate into the
buckle until it clicks.
Position the release button on
the buckle so that the safety belt
could be quickly unbuckled if
necessary.
Try to pull the belt out of the If the airbags are off, the off
retractor to make sure the indicator in the passenger airbag
retractor is locked. If the status indicator will come on and
retractor is not locked, repeat stay on when the vehicle is started.
Steps 5 and 6. If a child restraint has been installed
7. Before placing a child in the and the on indicator is lit, see “If
child restraint, make sure it is the On Indicator is Lit for a Child
securely held in place. To check, Restraint ” under Passenger
grasp the child restraint at the Sensing System on page 3‑35 for
safety belt path and attempt to more information.
move it side‐to‐side and To remove the child restraint,
back‐and‐forth. When the child unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and
6. To tighten the belt, push down restraint is properly installed, let it return to the stowed position.
on the child restraint, pull the there should be no more than
shoulder portion of the belt to 2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.
tighten the lap portion of the belt,
and feed the shoulder belt back
into the retractor. When installing
a forward-facing child restraint, it
may be helpful to use your knee
to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt.
Storage 4-1
Storage Storage Cupholders

Compartments
Storage Compartments
Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Glove Box
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 The glove box is located on the
Front Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 passenger side of the instrument
Center Console Storage . . . . . . 4-2 panel. Lift up on the lever to open it.
Additional Storage Features
Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
There are removable cupholders

located in the center console.
Slide the cover (A) to access the
cupholders. Cupholders are also
located in the rear armrest.
4-2 Storage
Front Storage The center console has an upper Additional Storage

tray and a lower main storage area.
The driver's storage compartment is
To access the main storage area,
Features
located near the left side of the
steering column on the bottom of adjust the armrest to the rear
the instrument panel. Pull the cover position and push button (A) to Convenience Net
down to open. open. Push button (B) to access the Use the convenience net located in
upper tray. the trunk to store small loads as far
Center Console Storage An accessory power outlet is in the forward as possible. The net should
lower area. See Power Outlets on not be used to store heavy loads.
page 5‑6. Attach the loops on each corner of
the net to the hooks located on the
Some vehicles might also have sides of the trunk.
input jacks for auxiliary audio
devices. See Auxiliary Devices
(Radio with CD) on page 7‑29 or
Auxiliary Devices (Radio with
CD/DVD and MEM) on page 7‑32.
The armrest can be adjusted by

sliding it to the desired position.
Instruments and Controls 5-1
Tire Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . 5-20

Instruments and Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Fuel Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10 Engine Oil Pressure Light . . . . 5-21
Controls Engine Coolant Temperature
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . .
Security Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-21
5-22
Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . 5-12 High-Beam on Light . . . . . . . . . 5-22
Controls Airbag Readiness Light . . . . . . 5-12 Front Fog Lamp Light . . . . . . . . 5-22
Steering Wheel Adjustment . . . 5-2 Passenger Airbag Status Taillamp Indicator Light . . . . . . 5-22
Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . 5-2 Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13 Cruise Control Light . . . . . . . . . 5-23
Heated Steering Wheel . . . . . . . 5-3 Charging System Light . . . . . . 5-14
Malfunction Information Displays
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3 Driver Information
Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . . 5-3 Indicator Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Brake System Warning Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 Head-Up Display (HUD) . . . . . 5-26
Clock (Without Date Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
Display) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 Electric Parking Brake Vehicle Messages
Clock (With Date Display) . . . . . 5-5 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18 Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6 Antilock Brake System (ABS) Battery Voltage and Charging
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
Warning Lights, Gauges, and Traction Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19 Brake System Messages . . . . 5-31
Indicators Electronic Stability Control Compass Messages . . . . . . . . . 5-31
Warning Lights, Gauges, and (ESC) Indicator Light . . . . . . . 5-19 Cruise Control Messages . . . . 5-31
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 Electronic Stability Control Door Ajar Messages . . . . . . . . . 5-32
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 (ESC)/Traction Control Engine Cooling System
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10 System (TCS) Indicator/ Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10 Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
5-2 Instruments and Controls
Engine Oil Messages . . . . . . . . 5-33 Controls 3. Pull or push the steering wheel
Engine Power Messages . . . . 5-33 closer or away from you.
Fuel System Messages . . . . . . 5-33
Key and Lock Messages . . . . . 5-34 Steering Wheel 4. Pull the lever (A) up to lock the
steering wheel in place.
Lamp Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34 Adjustment
Object Detection System Do not adjust the steering wheel
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34 while driving.
Ride Control System
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34 Steering Wheel Controls
Anti-Theft Alarm System
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35
Tire Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35
Transmission Messages . . . . . 5-36
Window Messages . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36
Vehicle Personalization
Vehicle Personalization . . . . . . 5-36
Universal Remote System
Universal Remote System . . . 5-42 To adjust the steering wheel:
Universal Remote System
Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43 1. Pull the lever (A) down.
Universal Remote System 2. Move the steering wheel up
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-46 or down. For vehicles with audio steering
wheel controls, some audio controls
can be adjusted at the steering
wheel.
b g (Push to Talk): For vehicles Heated Steering Wheel Windshield Wiper/Washer

with a Bluetooth®, OnStar®,
For vehicles with a heated steering
or navigation system, press to
wheel, the button for this feature is
interact with those systems. See
located on the climate control
Bluetooth (Overview) on page 7‑44
system.
or Bluetooth (Infotainment Controls)
on page 7‑45 or Bluetooth (Voice ( : Press to turn the heated
Recognition) on page 7‑50, the steering wheel on or off. A light on
OnStar Owner's Guide, or the the button displays when the feature
The windshield wiper lever is on the
separate Navigation System Manual is turned on.
side of the steering column. With
for more information. The steering wheel takes about the ignition in ACC/ACCESSORY or
$ c (Mute/End Call): Press to three minutes to start heating. ON/RUN, move the windshield
silence the vehicle speakers only. wiper lever to select the wiper
Press again to turn the sound on. Horn speed.
For vehicles with OnStar or 2: Fast wipes.
Bluetooth systems, press to reject Press near the horn symbols or
an incoming call, or end a press on the steering wheel pad to 1: Slow wipes.
current call. sound the horn.
_ SRC ^ (Rotary Control): Press

to select an audio source.
Toggle up or down to select the next
or previous favorite radio station,
CD, or MP3 track.
+ x − (Volume): Press + to
increase the volume. Press − to
decrease the volume.
& (Adjustable Interval Wipes): Wipe Parking When the windshield wiper lever is
Turn the band up for more frequent If the ignition is turned to released, additional wipes may
wipes or down for less frequent LOCK/OFF while the wipers are occur depending on how long the
wipes. windshield washer had been
on 1, 2, or &, they will activated. See Washer Fluid on
immediately stop. page 10‑22 for information on filling
If the windshield wiper lever is then the windshield washer fluid
moved to OFF before the driver reservoir.
door is opened, or within
10 minutes, the wipers will restart { WARNING
and move to the base of the
9 (Off): Turns the windshield windshield. In freezing weather, do not use
wipers off. If the ignition is turned to your washer until the windshield
is warmed. Otherwise the washer
3 (Mist): Single wipe, briefly LOCK/OFF during a windshield
fluid can form ice on the
move the wiper down. Several wash, the wipers will stop when they
wipes, hold the wiper lever down. reach the base of the windshield. windshield, blocking your vision.
Clear ice and snow from the wiper Windshield Washer

blades before using them. If they Compass
Pull the windshield wiper lever to
are frozen to the windshield, The vehicle may have a compass
spray windshield washer fluid and
carefully loosen or thaw them. display on the Driver Information
activate the wipers.
Damaged wiper blades should be Center (DIC). The compass receives
replaced. See Wiper Blade The wipers will continue until the its heading and other information
Replacement on page 10‑28. lever is released or the maximum from the Global Positioning
wash time is reached. System (GPS) antenna, StabiliTrak,
Heavy snow or ice can overload the
wipers. A circuit breaker stops them and vehicle speed information.
until the motor cools.
Avoid covering the GPS antenna for Clock (Without Date Setting the 12/24 Hour Format
long periods of time with objects
that may interfere with the antenna's
Display) 1. Press the CONFIG button and
select Time Settings, or press
ability to receive a satellite signal. The infotainment system controls
See Backglass Antenna on are used to access the time and the H button.
page 7‑19 and Satellite Radio date settings through the menu 2. Highlight 12/24 Hour Format.
Antenna on page 7‑19 for the system. See Operation on
location of the vehicle's antennas. page 7‑7 for information about how 3. Press the SELECT button to
The compass system is designed to to use the menu system. select the 12 hour or 24 hour
operate for a certain number of display format.
miles or degrees of turn before Setting the Time
needing a signal from the GPS 1. Press the CONFIG button and Clock (With Date Display)
satellites. When the compass select Time Settings, or press The infotainment system controls
display shows CAL, drive the the H button. are used to access the time and
vehicle for a short distance in an date settings through the menu
open area where it can receive a 2. Select Set Time. system. See Operation on
GPS signal. The compass system 3. Turn the Menu knob to adjust page 7‑7 for information about how
will automatically determine when the highlighted value. to use the menu system.
the GPS signal is restored and
provide a heading again. See 4. Press the SELECT button to Setting the Time and Date
Compass Messages on page 5‑31 select the next value.
1. Press the CONFIG button and
for more information on the 5. To save the time and return to select Time and Date Settings,
messages that may be displayed for the Time Settings menu, press
the compass. or press the H button.
the 0 BACK button at any time
or press the SELECT button 2. Select Set Time or Set Date.
after adjusting the minutes. 3. Turn the Menu knob to adjust
the highlighted value.
4. Press the SELECT button to Setting the Month & Day Power Outlets
select the next value. Format
The accessory power outlets can be
5. To save the time or date and 1. Press the CONFIG button and used to plug in electrical equipment,
return to the Time and Date select Time and Date Settings, such as a cell phone or MP3 player.
Settings menu, press the or press the H button.
0 BACK button at any time or There are two accessory power
press the SELECT button after 2. Highlight Set Date Format. outlets. One is located inside the
adjusting the minutes or year. center console storage and the
3. Press the SELECT button other is on the rear of the center
Setting the 12/24 Hour Format to select MM/DD/YY floor console.
(month/day/year) or DD/MM/YY
1. Press the CONFIG button and (day/month/year). These outlets are powered when
select Time and Date Settings, the ignition is in ON/RUN or
or press the H button. Setting the Auto Time Adjust ACC/ACCESSORY, or until the
1. Press the CONFIG button and driver door is opened within
2. Highlight Set Time Format. 10 minutes of turning off the vehicle.
select Time and Date Settings,
3. Press the SELECT button to See Retained Accessory Power
or press the H button.
select the 12 hour or 24 hour (RAP) on page 9‑21.
display format. 2. Highlight Auto Time Adjust. Remove the cover to access and
3. Press the SELECT button to turn replace when not in use.
Auto Time Adjust on or off.
4. Press the SELECT button to
select Time Zone, and then
select the Time Zone.
5. Press the SELECT button to turn
Daylight Savings on or off.
Certain electrical accessories may Power Outlet 120 Volt Alternating An indicator light on the outlet
not be compatible with the Current comes on when in use. The light
accessory power outlets and could The vehicle may have a power comes on when the ignition is in
overload vehicle or adapter fuses. outlet that can be used to plug in ON/RUN and equipment requiring
If a problem is experienced, see electrical equipment that uses a less than 150 watts is plugged into
your dealer. maximum limit of 150 watts. the outlet, and no system fault is
When adding electrical equipment, detected.
be sure to follow the installation If you try to connect equipment
instructions included with the using more than 150 watts or a
equipment. See Add-On Electrical system fault is detected the
Equipment on page 9‑62. equipment may operate for a short
Notice: Hanging heavy period and turn itself off.
equipment from the power outlet A protection circuit shuts off the
can cause damage not covered power supply and the indicator light
by the vehicle warranty. The turns off. To reset the circuit, unplug
power outlets are designed for the item and plug it back in or turn
accessory power plugs only, such the Remote Accessory Power (RAP)
as cell phone charge cords. off and then back on. See Retained
Accessory Power (RAP) on
The power outlet is located on the page 9‑21. Prolonged usage of the
rear of the center console. power outlet at the maximum load of
150 watts, may cause the outlet to
overheat and automatically
shutdown. The power restarts when
equipment that operates within the
limit is plugged into the outlet and a
system fault is not detected.
The power outlet is not designed for Warning Lights, Gauges can indicate when there
and may not work properly, if the could be a problem with a vehicle
following are plugged in: Gauges, and function. Often gauges and warning
lights work together to indicate a
. Equipment with high initial peak Indicators problem with the vehicle.
wattage such as:
compressor-driven refrigerators Warning lights and gauges can When one of the warning lights
and electric power tools. signal that something is wrong comes on and stays on while
before it becomes serious enough driving, or when one of the gauges
. Other equipment requiring an to cause an expensive repair or
extremely stable power supply shows there may be a problem,
replacement. Paying attention to the check the section that explains what
such as: warning lights and gauges could
microcomputer-controlled to do. Follow this manual's advice.
prevent injury. Waiting to do repairs can be costly
electric blankets, touch sensor
lamps, etc. Warning lights come on when there and even dangerous.
could be a problem with a vehicle
function. Some warning lights come
on briefly when the engine is started
to indicate they are working.
Instrument Cluster
English Shown, Metric Similar

Speedometer Notice: If the engine is operated

with the tachometer in the shaded
The speedometer shows the warning area, the vehicle could
vehicle's speed in either kilometers be damaged, and the damages
per hour (km/h) or miles per would not be covered by the
hour (mph). vehicle warranty. Do not operate
the engine with the tachometer in
Odometer the shaded warning area.
The odometer shows how far the
vehicle has been driven, in either Fuel Gauge
kilometers or miles.
This vehicle has a tamper-resistant
odometer. If the vehicle needs a Metric
new odometer installed, the new When the ignition is on, the fuel
one is set to the mileage of the old gauge indicates about how much
odometer. If this is not possible, it is fuel is left in the tank.
set at zero and a label is put on the An arrow on the fuel gauge
driver's door to show the old indicates the side of the vehicle the
mileage reading. fuel door is on.
Tachometer When the indicator nears empty, the
English low fuel light comes on. There is still
The tachometer displays the engine a little fuel left, but the fuel tank
speed in revolutions per should be filled soon.
minute (rpm).
Here are four things that some Engine Coolant

owners ask about. None of these
show a problem with the fuel gauge:
Temperature Gauge
. At the service station, the fuel
pump shuts off before the gauge
reads full.
. It takes a little more or less fuel
to fill up than the gauge
indicated. For example, the
gauge indicated the tank was
half full, but it actually took a
little more or less than half the
Metric
tank's capacity to fill the tank.
This gauge shows the engine
. The gauge moves a little while coolant temperature.
turning a corner or speeding up. English If the gauge pointer moves towards
. The gauge takes a few seconds the shaded area, the engine is
to stabilize after the ignition is too hot.
turned on, and goes back to This reading indicates the same
empty when the ignition is thing as the warning light. It means
turned off. that the engine coolant has
overheated. If the vehicle has been
operating under normal driving
conditions, pull off the road, stop the
vehicle, and turn off the engine as
soon as possible. See Engine
Overheating on page 10‑19 for more
information.
Safety Belt Reminders Passenger Safety Belt The front passenger safety belt
Reminder Light warning light and chime may turn on
Driver Safety Belt Reminder if an object is put on the seat such
Light as a briefcase, handbag, grocery
bag, laptop or other electronic
There is a driver safety belt
device. To turn off the warning light
reminder light on the instrument
and or chime, remove the object
panel cluster.
from the seat or buckle the
safety belt
When the vehicle is started this light
flashes and a chime comes on to Airbag Readiness Light
remind passengers to fasten their This light shows if there is an
safety belt. Then the light stays on electrical problem. The system
solid until the belt is buckled. This check includes the airbag sensor,
When the vehicle is started this light cycle continues several times if the the pretensioners, the airbag
flashes and a chime may come on passenger remains or becomes modules, the wiring and the crash
to remind drivers to fasten their unbuckled while the vehicle is sensing and diagnostic module. For
safety belts. Then the light stays on moving. more information on the airbag
solid until the belt is buckled. This If the passenger safety belt is system, see Airbag System on
cycle may continue several times if buckled, neither the chime nor the page 3‑28.
the driver remains or becomes light comes on.
unbuckled while the vehicle is
moving.
If the driver safety belt is buckled,
neither the light nor chime come on.
WARNING (Continued)
working properly. The airbags in

the vehicle might not inflate in a
crash, or they could even inflate
The airbag readiness light comes on without a crash. To help avoid When the vehicle is started, the
solid and stays on for several injury, have the vehicle serviced passenger airbag status indicator
seconds when the vehicle is started. right away. will light the words ON and OFF for
Then the light goes out. several seconds as a system check.
If it stays on solid after the vehicle Passenger Airbag Status If you are using remote start,
has been started or comes on while if equipped, to start the vehicle from
driving, the airbag system may not Indicator a distance you may not see the
work properly. Have the vehicle The vehicle has a passenger system check. Then, after several
serviced right away. sensing system. See Passenger more seconds, the status indicator
Sensing System on page 3‑35 for will light either the word ON or OFF
{ WARNING important safety information. The to let you know the status of the
instrument panel has a passenger right front passenger frontal airbag.
If the airbag readiness light stays airbag status indicator.
on after the vehicle is started or If the word ON is lit on the
passenger airbag status indicator, it
comes on while driving, it means
means that the right front passenger
the airbag system might not be
frontal airbag is enabled (may
(Continued) inflate).
If the word OFF is lit on the airbag Charging System Light Malfunction
status indicator, it means that the
passenger sensing system has
Indicator Lamp
turned off the right front passenger A computer system called OBD II
frontal airbag. (On-Board Diagnostics-Second
If, after several seconds, both status Generation) monitors operation of
indicator lights remain on, or if there the fuel, ignition, and emission
are no lights at all, there may be a control systems. It ensures that
problem with the lights or the The charging system light comes on emissions are at acceptable levels
passenger sensing system. See briefly when the ignition is turned for the life of the vehicle, helping to
your dealer for service. on, but the engine is not running, as produce a cleaner environment.
a check to show the light is working.
{ WARNING The light turns off when the engine
is started. If it does not, have the
If the airbag readiness light ever vehicle serviced by your dealer.
comes on and stays on, it means If the light stays on, or comes on
that something may be wrong while driving, there could be a
with the airbag system. To help problem with the electrical charging This light should come on when the
avoid injury to yourself or others, system. Have it checked by your ignition is on, but the engine is not
have the vehicle serviced right dealer. Driving while this light is on running, as a check to show it is
away. See Airbag Readiness could drain the battery. working. If it does not, have the
Light on page 5‑12 for more If a short distance must be driven vehicle serviced by your dealer.
information, including important with the light on, be sure to turn off
safety information. If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp
all accessories, such as the radio comes on and stays on while the
and air conditioner. engine is running, this indicates that
there is an OBD II problem and
service is required.
Malfunctions often are indicated by those of the same Tire To prevent more serious damage to
the system before any problem is Performance Criteria (TPC) can the vehicle:
apparent. Being aware of the light affect the vehicle's emission . Reduce vehicle speed.
can prevent more serious damage controls and can cause this light
to the vehicle. This system assists to come on. Modifications to . Avoid hard accelerations.
the service technician in correctly these systems could lead to . Avoid steep uphill grades.
diagnosing any malfunction. costly repairs not covered by the
vehicle warranty. This could also
. If towing a trailer, reduce the
Notice: If the vehicle is amount of cargo being hauled as
continually driven with this light result in a failure to pass a
required Emission Inspection/ soon as it is possible.
on, after a while, the emission
controls might not work as well, Maintenance test. See If the light continues to flash, when
the vehicle fuel economy might Accessories and Modifications on it is safe to do so, stop the vehicle.
not be as good, and the engine page 10‑3. Find a safe place to park the
might not run as smoothly. This This light comes on during a vehicle. Turn the vehicle off, wait at
could lead to costly repairs that malfunction in one of two ways: least 10 seconds, and restart the
might not be covered by the engine. If the light is still flashing,
Light Flashing: A misfire condition follow the previous steps and see
vehicle warranty. has been detected. A misfire your dealer for service as soon as
Notice: Modifications made to the increases vehicle emissions and possible.
engine, transmission, exhaust, could damage the emission control
intake, or fuel system of the system on the vehicle. Diagnosis Light On Steady: An emission
vehicle or the replacement of the and service might be required. control system malfunction has
original tires with other than been detected on the vehicle.
Diagnosis and service might be
required.
An emission system malfunction

. Make sure to fuel the vehicle Emissions Inspection and
might be corrected: with quality fuel. Poor fuel quality Maintenance Programs
causes the engine not to run as
. Make sure the fuel cap is fully efficiently as designed and can Some state/provincial and local
installed. See Filling the Tank on cause: stalling after start-up, governments may have programs to
page 9‑53. The diagnostic stalling when the vehicle is inspect the on-vehicle emission
system can determine if the fuel changed into gear, misfiring, control equipment. For the
cap has been left off or hesitation on acceleration, inspection, the emission system test
improperly installed. A loose or or stumbling on acceleration. equipment is connected to the
missing fuel cap allows fuel to These conditions might go away vehicle’s Data Link
evaporate into the atmosphere. once the engine is warmed up. Connector (DLC).
A few driving trips with the cap
properly installed should turn the If one or more of these
light off. conditions occurs, change the
fuel brand used. It will require at
. If the vehicle has been driven least one full tank of the proper
through a deep puddle of water, fuel to turn the light off.
the vehicle's electrical system
might be wet. The condition is See Recommended Fuel on
usually corrected when the page 9‑50. The DLC is under the instrument
electrical system dries out. A few If none of the above have made the panel to the left of the steering
driving trips should turn the light turn off, your dealer can check wheel. See your dealer if assistance
light off. the vehicle. The dealer has the is needed.
proper test equipment and
diagnostic tools to fix any
mechanical or electrical problems
that might have developed.
The vehicle may not pass Brake System Warning If the light comes on while driving,
inspection if: pull off the road and stop carefully.
Light The pedal may be harder to push or
. The malfunction indicator lamp is
on with the engine running, or if The vehicle brake system consists it can go closer to the floor. It may
the light does not come on when of two hydraulic circuits. If one take longer to stop. Try turning off
the ignition is turned to ON/RUN circuit is not working, the remaining and restarting the vehicle one or two
while the engine is off. circuit can still work to stop the times, if the light is still on, have the
vehicle. For normal braking vehicle towed for service. See
. The critical emission control performance, both circuits need to Antilock Brake System (ABS)
systems have not been be working. Warning Light on page 5‑18 and
completely diagnosed by the Towing the Vehicle on page 10‑88.
system. This can happen if the If the warning light comes on, there
is a brake problem. Have your brake
battery has recently been
replaced or if the battery has run system inspected right away. { WARNING
down. The diagnostic system The brake system might not be
evaluates critical emission working properly if the brake
control systems during normal system warning light is on.
driving. This can take Driving with the brake system
several days of routine driving. warning light on can lead to a
If this has been done and the
English Metric crash. If the light is still on after
vehicle still does not pass the
the vehicle has been pulled off
inspection, your dealer can
If the vehicle has antilock brakes, the road and carefully stopped,
prepare the vehicle for
this light should come on when the have the vehicle towed for
inspection.
vehicle is placed in START. If it does service.
not, have the vehicle serviced by
your dealer.
Electric Parking Brake Antilock Brake System

Light (ABS) Warning Light
For vehicles with the Electric Park

Brake (EPB), the park brake
warning light should come on briefly
English Metric when ignition is placed in ON/RUN.
If it does not come on, then have it This light comes on briefly when the
For vehicles with the Electric Park engine is started.
fixed so it will be ready to warn if
Brake (EPB), the park brake status
there is a problem. If the light does not come on, have it
light comes on when the brake is
applied. If the light continues If this light comes on, there is a fixed so it will be ready to warn if
flashing after the park brake is problem with a system on the there is a problem.
released, or while driving, there is a vehicle that is causing the park If the ABS light stays on, turn the
problem with the Electric Parking brake system to work at a reduced ignition off.
Brake system. A Service Parking level. The vehicle can still be driven,
If the light comes on while driving,
Brake message may also display in but should be taken to a dealer as
stop as soon as it is safely possible
the Driver Information Center (DIC). soon as possible. See Parking
and turn off the vehicle. Then start
See Brake System Messages on Brake on page 9‑33 for more
the engine again to reset the
page 5‑31 for more information. information.
system. If the ABS light stays on,
If the light does not come on, For vehicles with the uplevel cluster, or comes on again while driving, the
or remains flashing, see your dealer. this telltale displays in the Driver vehicle needs service. A chime may
Information Center (DIC) screen. also sound when the light comes on
steady.
If the ABS light is the only light on, Traction Off Light Electronic Stability
the vehicle has regular brakes, but
the antilock brakes are not
Control (ESC) Indicator
functioning. Light
If both the ABS and the Brake
System Warning Light are on, the
vehicle's antilock brakes are not
functioning and there is a problem
with the regular brakes. See your This light comes on when the
dealer for service. Traction Control System (TCS) has
been turned off by pressing and
See Brake System Warning Light This light comes on briefly while
releasing the traction control button.
on page 5‑17. starting the engine.
This light also comes on and the
See Brake System Messages on If it does not, have the vehicle
system turns off if there is a problem
page 5‑31 for all brake related DIC serviced by your dealer. If the
with the traction control system.
messages. system is working normally the
If the light comes on and stays on indicator light then goes off.
for an extended period of time while
the system is turned on, the vehicle If the light comes on and stays on
needs service. while driving, there could be a
problem with the ESC and the
See Traction Control System (TCS) vehicle might need service. When
on page 9‑35 and Electronic this warning light is on, the ESC is
Stability Control (ESC) on off and does not limit wheel spin.
The light flashes if the system is (TCS) is also off, wheel spin is not When the Light is On Steady
active and is working to assist the limited. If the ESC is off, the system This indicates that one or more of
driver with directional control of the does not assist in controlling the the tires are significantly
vehicle in difficult driving conditions. vehicle. Switch on the TCS and the underinflated.
For vehicles with the uplevel cluster, ESC and the warning light turns off.
A tire pressure message can
this light is shown in the Driver See Traction Control System (TCS) accompany the light. See Tire
Information Center (DIC) screen. on page 9‑35 and Electronic Messages on page 5‑35 for more
See Electronic Stability Control Stability Control (ESC) on information. Stop as soon as
(ESC) on page 9‑37 for more page 9‑37 for more information possible, and inflate the tires to the
information. pressure value shown on the Tire
Tire Pressure Light and Loading Information Label. See
Electronic Stability Tire Pressure on page 10‑53 for
more information.
Control (ESC)/Traction
Control System (TCS) When the Light Flashes First and
Then is On Steady
Indicator/Warning Light
This indicates that there may be a
problem with the Tire Pressure
For vehicles with a Tire Pressure Monitor System. The light flashes
Monitor System, this light comes on for about a minute and stays on
briefly when the engine is started. steady for the remainder of the
It provides information about tire ignition cycle. This sequence
pressures and the Tire Pressure repeats with every ignition cycle.
This light comes on when the Monitor System. See Tire Pressure Monitor
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Operation on page 10‑55 for more
system is turned off. When the ESC information.
is off the Traction Control System
Engine Oil Pressure Light Low Fuel Warning Light
{ WARNING
Do not keep driving if the oil
pressure is low. The engine can
become so hot that it catches fire. The oil pressure light should come
on briefly as the engine is started.
Someone could be burned. Check
If it does not come on have the This light, below the fuel gauge,
the oil as soon as possible and vehicle serviced by your dealer.
have the vehicle serviced. comes on briefly when the engine is
If the light comes on and stays on, it started.
means that oil is not flowing through If it does not come on have the
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil the engine properly. The vehicle
maintenance can damage the vehicle serviced by your dealer.
could be low on oil and might have If the system is working normally the
engine. The repairs would not be some other system problem. See
covered by the vehicle warranty. indicator light then goes off.
your dealer.
Always follow the maintenance This light also comes on when the
schedule for changing engine oil. For vehicles with the uplevel cluster fuel tank is low on fuel. When fuel is
this telltale displays in the Driver added the light should go off. If it
Information Center (DIC) screen. does not, have your vehicle
serviced.
For vehicles with the uplevel cluster,
this telltale displays in the Driver
Information Center (DIC) screen.
Security Light High-Beam on Light Front Fog Lamp Light
This light flashes when the security This light comes on when the For vehicles with fog lamps, this
system is activated. high-beam headlamps are in use. light comes on when the fog lamps
For more information, see Vehicle See Headlamp High/Low-Beam are on.
Security on page 2‑14. Changer on page 6‑2 for more The light goes out when the fog
For vehicles with the uplevel cluster information. lamps are turned off. See Fog
this telltale displays in the Driver Lamps on page 6‑5 for more
Information Center (DIC) screen. information.
Taillamp Indicator Light
This light comes on when the

taillamps are in use.
Cruise Control Light Information Displays DIC Operation and Displays

The DIC has different displays
Driver Information which can be accessed by using
Center (DIC) the DIC buttons located on the turn
signal lever located on the left side
The Driver Information Center (DIC) of the steering wheel. The DIC
displays information about the displays trip, fuel, vehicle system
vehicle. It also displays warning information, and warning messages
This light is white whenever the messages if a system problem is if a system problem is detected.
cruise control is set and turns green detected. See Vehicle Messages on
when the cruise control is active. The bottom of the DIC display
page 5‑30 for more information. All
shows what position the shift lever
The light goes out when the cruise messages appear in the DIC display
is in, the odometer, and the direction
control is turned off. See Cruise located in the center of the
the vehicle is driving.
Control on page 9‑39 for more instrument panel cluster.
information. In cold weather the DIC display may
On some models, the DIC may have
change slowly. This is normal and
For vehicles with the uplevel cluster some warning lights or indicators
will move more quickly as the
this telltale will be shown in the shown in the top portion of the
vehicle's interior temperature rises.
Driver Information Center (DIC) display. See Warning Lights,
screen. Gauges, and Indicators on
The vehicle may also have features
that can be customized through the
controls on the radio. See Vehicle
more information.
DIC Buttons Trip/Fuel Menu Items Trip 1 and Trip 2

Press MENU on the turn signal This display shows the current
lever until Trip/Fuel Information distance traveled, in either
Menu is displayed. Use w x to kilometers (km) or miles (mi), since
scroll through the following menu the last reset for the trip odometer.
items: The trip odometer can be reset to
zero by pressing SET/CLR while the
. Digital Speedometer trip odometer display is showing.
. Trip 1 Fuel Range
. Trip 2 This display shows the approximate
. Fuel Range distance the vehicle can be driven
without refueling. The fuel range
. Average Fuel Economy estimate is based on an average of
MENU: Press to get to the . Instantaneous Fuel Economy the vehicle's fuel economy over
Trip/Fuel Menu and the Vehicle recent driving history and the
Information Menu.
. Average Vehicle Speed
amount of fuel remaining in the fuel
w x (Thumbwheel): Use to scroll
. Timer tank. Fuel range cannot be reset.
through the items in each menu. . Turn-by-Turn Average Fuel Economy
A small marker will move across the
bottom of the page as you scroll Digital Speedometer This display shows the approximate
through the items. This shows The speedometer shows how fast average liters per 100 kilometers
where each page is in the menu. the vehicle is moving in either (L/100 km) or miles per
kilometers per hour (km/h) or miles gallon (mpg). This number is
SET/CLR (Set/Clear): Press to set
per hour (mph). The speedometer calculated based on the number of
or clear the menu item when it is
cannot be reset. L/100 km (mpg) recorded since the
displayed.
last time this menu item was reset.
The fuel economy can be reset by Timer Vehicle Information Menu

pressing SET/CLR while the This display can be used as a timer. Items
Average Fuel Economy display is To start the timer, press SET/CLR
showing. Press MENU on the turn signal
while Timer is displayed. The lever until Vehicle Information Menu
Instantaneous Fuel Economy display will show the amount of time is displayed. Use w x to scroll
that has passed since the timer was
The Instantaneous Fuel Economy through the following menu items:
last reset, not including time the
display shows the current fuel ignition is off. Time will continue to . Unit
economy in either liters per be counted as long as the ignition is . Tire Pressure
100 kilometers (L/100 km) or miles on, even if another display is being
per gallon (mpg). This number shown on the DIC. The timer will . Remaining Oil Life
reflects only the fuel economy that record up to 99 hours, 59 minutes
the vehicle has right now and Unit
and 59 seconds (99:59:59) after
changes frequently as driving which the display will return to zero. Move w x to switch between
conditions change. Unlike average To stop the timer, press SET/CLR Metric or US when the Unit display
economy, this display cannot be briefly while Timer is displayed. To is active. Press SET/CLR to confirm
reset. reset the timer to zero, press and the setting. This will change the
Average Vehicle Speed hold SET/CLR. displays on the cluster and DIC to
either metric or English (US)
This display shows the average Turn-by-Turn
measurements.
speed of the vehicle in miles per This display is used for the OnStar
hour (mph) or kilometers per or Navigation System Turn-by-Turn
hour (km/h). This average is guidance. See the OnStar manual
calculated based on the various or the Navigation manual, if the
vehicle speeds recorded since the vehicle has navigation, for more
last reset of this value. The average information.
speed can be reset by pressing
SET/CLR while the Average Vehicle
Speed display is showing.
Tire Pressure oil life, additional maintenance is Head-Up Display (HUD)

The display will show a vehicle with recommended in the Maintenance
Schedule in this manual. See
the approximate pressures of all
four tires. Tire pressure is displayed Scheduled Maintenance on { WARNING
in either kilopascal (kPa) or pounds page 11‑2 for more information. If the HUD image is too bright or
per square inch (psi). See Tire Remember, the Oil Life display must too high in your field of view, it
Pressure Monitor System on be reset after each oil change. It will may take you more time to see
page 10‑54 and Tire Pressure not reset itself. Also, be careful not things you need to see when it is
Monitor Operation on page 10‑55 for to reset the Oil Life display dark outside. Be sure to keep the
more information. accidentally at any time other than HUD image dim and placed low in
when the oil has just been changed. your field of view.
Remaining Oil Life It cannot be reset accurately until
This display shows an estimate of the next oil change. To reset the
the oil's remaining useful life. engine oil life system press For vehicles with the Head-Up
If Remaining Oil Life 99% is SET/CLR while the Oil Life display Display (HUD), some information
displayed, that means 99% of the is active. See Engine Oil Life concerning the operation of the
current oil life remains. System on page 10‑12. vehicle is projected onto the
windshield. This includes the
When the remaining oil life is low, Compass speedometer reading, RPM reading,
the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON transmission position, outside air
message will appear on the display. The vehicle may have a compass
display in the Driver Information temperature, compass heading and
See Engine Oil Messages on a brief display of the current radio
page 5‑33. The oil should changed Center (DIC). See Compass on
page 5‑4 for more information. station, including XM information or
as soon as possible. See Engine Oil CD track. It will also display
on page 10‑9. In addition to the turn-by-turn navigation information if
engine oil life system monitoring the the vehicle has a navigation radio.
The images are projected through The following indicator lights come
the HUD lens located on the driver's on the instrument panel when
side of the instrument panel. activated and also appear on
Notice: If you try to use the HUD the HUD:
image as a parking aid, you may . Turn Signal Indicators
misjudge the distance and . High-Beam Indicator Symbol
damage your vehicle. Do not use
the HUD image as a parking aid. The HUD temporarily displays some
vehicle warnings, such as CHECK
The tap shift gear will also appear TIRE PRESSURE and FUEL
on the HUD if the vehicle has tap LEVEL LOW when these messages
shift and it is active. are on the DIC trip computer.
The HUD information can be HUD Display on the Vehicle The HUD also displays the following
displayed in one of three languages, Windshield messages on vehicles with these
English, French, or Spanish. The systems, when they are active:
speedometer reading and other The HUD information appears as an
numerical values can be displayed image focused out toward the front . TRACTION CONTROL ACTIVE
in either English or metric units. of the vehicle. . STABILITRAK ACTIVE
The language selection is changed When the ignition key is turned to
through the radio and the units of ON/RUN, the HUD will display an
measurement is changed through introductory message for a short
the trip computer in the Driver time, until the HUD is ready.
Information Center (DIC). See
AM-FM Radio on page 7‑12 and
Driver Information Center (DIC) on
page 5‑23.
When the HUD is on, the To adjust the HUD image so that PAGE: Press to select the display
speedometer reading is continually items are properly displayed, do the formats. Release the page button
displayed. The current radio station following: when the format number with the
or CD track number will display for a 1. Adjust the driver's seat to a desired display is shown on the
short period of time after the radio comfortable position. HUD. If vehicle messages are
or CD track status changes. displayed, pressing PAGE, may
This happens whenever radio 2. Start the engine. clear the message.
information is changed. The 3. Adjust the HUD controls. The three formats are as follows:
speedometer size is reduced when
radio, CD information, warnings, Use the following settings to adjust
or turn-by-turn navigation the HUD.
information are displayed on OFF: To turn HUD off, turn the HUD
the HUD. dimming knob fully counterclockwise
until the HUD display turns off.
Brightness: Turn the dimming knob
clockwise or counterclockwise to English Shown, Metric Similar
brighten or dim the display. Format One: This display gives the
« (Up) ª (Down): Press the up speedometer reading (in English or
or down arrows to center the HUD metric units), turn signal indication,
image in your view. The HUD image high beam indication, transmission
can only be adjusted up and down, positions, outside air temperature,
not side to side. and compass heading.
The HUD control is located to the

left of the steering wheel.
All formats will show the turn-by-turn The HUD image can temporarily
navigation information and provide light up depending on the angle and
details about the next driving position of the sunlight on the HUD
maneuver to be made. When you display. This is normal and will
near your destination, the HUD will change when the angle of the
display a distance bar that will sunlight on the HUD display
English Shown, Metric Similar empty the closer you get to your changes.
destination. All navigation Polarized sunglasses could make
Format Two: This display includes information is provided to the HUD the HUD image harder to see.
the information in Format One by the navigation radio or OnStar®
without the transmission service, for vehicles that have these Care of the HUD
information, the outside air features.
temperature, and compass heading. Clean the inside of the windshield
as needed to remove any dirt or film
that could reduce the sharpness or
clarity of the HUD image.
To clean the HUD lens, use a soft,
clean cloth that has household glass
cleaner sprayed on it. Wipe the
English Shown, Metric Similar HUD lens gently, then dry it. Do not
English Shown, Metric Similar spray cleaner directly on the lens
The HUD image displayed on the
Format Three: This display windshield will automatically dim because the cleaner could leak into
includes all the information in and brighten to compensate for the unit.
Format One along with a circular outside lighting. However, the HUD
tachometer, but without outside air brightness control can still be
temperature and compass heading. adjusted as needed.
If You Cannot See the HUD Vehicle Messages Battery Voltage and
Image When the Ignition Is On Charging Messages
Messages displayed on the DIC
. Is anything covering the indicate the status of the vehicle or
HUD lens? BATTERY SAVER ACTIVE
some action that may be needed to
. Is the HUD dimmer setting bright correct a condition. Multiple This message displays when the
enough? messages may display one after the vehicle has detected that the battery
other. voltage is dropping beyond a
. Is the HUD image adjusted to reasonable point. The battery saver
the proper height? The messages that do not require system starts reducing certain
.
immediate action can be features of the vehicle that you may
Are you wearing polarized
acknowledged and cleared by be able to notice. At the point that
sunglasses?
pressing SET/CLR. The messages features are disabled, this message
. Still no HUD image? Check the that require immediate action cannot is displayed. It means that the
fuse in the instrument panel fuse be cleared until that action is vehicle is trying to save the charge
block. See Instrument Panel performed. All messages should be in the battery. Turn off unnecessary
Fuse Block on page 10‑41. taken seriously and clearing the accessories to allow the battery to
messages does not correct the recharge.
If the HUD Image Is Not Clear problem.
. Is the HUD image too bright?
. Are the windshield and HUD
lens clean?
If the HUD image is not correct,
contact your dealer.
Keep in mind that the windshield is
part of the HUD system.
LOW BATTERY RELEASE PARK BRAKE Cruise Control Messages

This message is displayed when the SWITCH
APPLY BRAKE BEFORE
battery voltage is low. See Battery This message is displayed if the
CRUISE
electric parking brake is on while the
vehicle is in motion. Release it If this message displays when
SERVICE BATTERY before you attempt to drive. See attempting to activate cruise control,
CHARGING SYSTEM Parking Brake on page 9‑33 for apply the brake and then try again.
This message is displayed when more information.
CRUISE SET TO XXX
there is a fault in the battery
charging system. Take the vehicle to SERVICE PARKING BRAKE This message will display when the
your dealer for service. This message is displayed when cruise control is set and it will show
there is a problem with the electric the speed it was set to. See Cruise
Brake System Messages parking brake. See Parking Brake Control on page 9‑39 for more
on page 9‑33 for more information. information.
BRAKE FLUID LOW Take the vehicle to your dealer.
This message is displayed when the
brake fluid level is low. See Brake Compass Messages
Fluid on page 10‑24.
CAL
PRESS BRAKE PEDAL TO This message is displayed when the
RELEASE PARK BRAKE compass needs to be calibrated.
This message is displayed if you See Compass on page 5‑4.
attempt to release the electric –––
parking brake without the brake
pedal applied. See Parking Brake Three dashes will be displayed if the
on page 9‑33 for more information. compass needs service. See your
dealer for service.
Door Ajar Messages TRUNK OPEN COOLANT LEVEL LOW ADD

This message will display when the COOLANT
DRIVER DOOR OPEN
trunk is open. Close the trunk This message will display if the
This message will display when the completely. coolant is low. See Engine Coolant
driver door is open. Close the door on page 10‑16.
completely. Engine Cooling System
ENGINE OVERHEATED —
HOOD OPEN Messages IDLE ENGINE
This message will display when the A/C OFF DUE TO HIGH This message displays when the
hood is open. Close the hood ENGINE TEMP engine coolant temperature is too
completely. hot. Stop and allow the vehicle to
This message displays when the
LEFT REAR DOOR OPEN engine coolant becomes hotter than idle until it cools down.
This message will display when the the normal operating temperature. ENGINE OVERHEATED —
driver side rear passenger door is To avoid added strain on a hot STOP ENGINE
open. Close the door completely. engine, the air conditioning
compressor automatically turns off. This message displays and a
PASSENGER DOOR OPEN When the coolant temperature continuous chime sounds if the
returns to normal, the air engine cooling system reaches
This message will display when the unsafe temperatures for operation.
front passenger door is open. Close conditioning compressor turns back
on. You can continue to drive the Stop and turn off the vehicle as
the door completely. soon as it is safe to do so to avoid
vehicle.
RIGHT REAR DOOR OPEN severe damage. This message
If this message continues to appear, clears when the engine has cooled
This message will display when the have the system repaired by your to a safe operating temperature.
passenger side rear passenger door dealer as soon as possible to avoid
is open. Close the door completely. damage to the engine.
HIGH COOLANT ENGINE OIL HOT, IDLE Engine Power Messages

TEMPERATURE ENGINE
ENGINE POWER IS REDUCED
This message displays if the coolant This message displays when the
temperature is hot. See Engine engine oil temperature is too hot. This message displays when the
Overheating on page 10‑19. Stop and allow the vehicle to idle vehicle's engine power is reduced.
until it cools down. Reduced engine power can affect
Engine Oil Messages the vehicle's ability to accelerate.
ENGINE OIL LOW — ADD OIL If this message is on, but there is
CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON This message displays when the no reduction in performance,
engine oil level is too low. Check proceed to your destination. The
the oil level. See Engine Oil on performance may be reduced the
engine oil needs to be changed.
page 10‑9. next time the vehicle is driven. The
When you change the engine oil, be
vehicle may be driven at a reduced
sure to reset the Oil Life System. OIL PRESSURE LOW — STOP speed while this message is on, but
See Engine Oil Life System on
page 10‑12 and Driver Information
ENGINE maximum acceleration and speed
may be reduced. Anytime this
Center (DIC) on page 5‑23 for This message displays if low oil
message stays on, the vehicle
information on how to reset the pressure levels occur. Stop the
should be taken to your dealer for
system. See Engine Oil on vehicle as soon as safely possible
service as soon as possible.
page 10‑9 and Scheduled and do not operate it until the cause
Maintenance on page 11‑2 for of the low oil pressure has been
more information. corrected. Check the oil as soon as Fuel System Messages
possible and have the vehicle FUEL LEVEL LOW
serviced by your dealer.
vehicle is low on fuel. Refuel as
soon as possible.
TIGHTEN GAS CAP Lamp Messages Ride Control System

This message displays when the AFL (Adaptive Forward Messages
fuel cap is not on tight. Tighten the
fuel cap.
Lighting) Lamps Need Service Service Rear Axle
This message displays when the This message displays when there
Key and Lock Messages Adaptive Forward Lighting (AFL) is a problem with the All-Wheel
system is disabled and needs Drive (AWD) System. See your
NO REMOTE DETECTED service. See your dealer. See dealer for service.
This message displays when the Adaptive Forward Lighting (AFL) on
transmitter battery is weak on page 6‑4 for more information. Service Traction Control
vehicles with Keyless Access. See This message displays when there
“Starting the Vehicle with a Low Object Detection System is a problem with the Traction
Battery” under “Remote Keyless Messages Control System (TCS). When this
Transmitter Operation (Keyless message is displayed, the system
Access)” for more information. PARK ASSIST OFF will not limit wheel spin. Adjust your
This message is displayed when the driving accordingly. See your dealer
REPLACE BATTERY IN for service.
REMOTE KEY park assist system has been turned
off. See Ultrasonic Parking Assist Service Stabilitrak
This message displays when the on page 9‑42.
battery in the Remote Keyless This message displays if there is a
Entry (RKE) transmitter needs to SERVICE PARK ASSIST problem with the StabiliTrak®
be replaced. This message is displayed if there is system. If this message appears, try
a problem with the park assist to reset the system. Stop; turn off
system. Take the vehicle to your the engine for at least 15 seconds;
dealer for service. then start the engine again. If this
message still comes on, it means
there is a problem. See your dealer
for service. The vehicle is safe to
drive, however, you do not have the Tire Messages You can receive more than one tire
benefit of StabiliTrak, so reduce pressure message at a time. To
your speed and drive accordingly. TIRE PRESSURE LOW ADD read the other messages that may
AIR TO TIRE have been sent at the same time,
Sport Mode On press the set/reset button. The DIC
On vehicles with the Tire Pressure
This message displays when using also shows the tire pressure values.
Monitor System (TPMS), this
the selective ride control. See See Driver Information Center (DIC)
message displays when the
Selective Ride Control on on page 5‑23.
pressure in one or more of the
page 9‑38 for more information. vehicle's tires is low. SERVICE TIRE MONITOR
Traction Control Off The low tire pressure warning light SYSTEM
This message displays when the will also come on. See Tire This message displays if there is a
Traction Control System (TCS) is Pressure Light on page 5‑20. problem with the Tire Pressure
turned off. Adjust your driving If a tire pressure message appears Monitor System (TPMS). See Tire
accordingly. on the DIC, stop as soon as you Pressure Monitor Operation on
can. Inflate the tires by adding air page 10‑55 for more information.
Anti-Theft Alarm System until the tire pressure is equal to the
TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE
Messages values shown on the Tire Loading
Information label. See Tires on This message displays when the
THEFT ATTEMPTED page 10‑46, Vehicle Load Limits on system is learning new tires. See
page 9‑12, and Tire Pressure on Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on
This message displays if the vehicle
page 10‑53. page 10‑55 for more information.
detects a tamper condition.
Transmission Messages Window Messages Vehicle

SERVICE TRANSMISSION OPEN, THEN CLOSE DRIVER Personalization
This message displays if there is a WINDOW The audio system controls are used
problem with the transmission. See This message is displayed when the to access the personalization
your dealer. window needs to be reprogrammed. menus for customizing vehicle
If the vehicle's battery has been features.
SHIFT TO PARK recharged or disconnected, you will CONFIG (Configuration): Press to
This message displays when the need to reprogram each front access the Configuration
transmission needs to be shifted to window for the express up feature to Settings Menu.
P (Park). This may appear when work. See Power Windows on
attempting to remove the key if the page 2‑18 for more information. MENU / SELECT Knob: Press the
vehicle is not in P (Park). center of this knob to enter the
OPEN, THEN CLOSE menus and select menu items. Turn
TRANSMISSION HOT — IDLE PASSENGER WINDOW the knob to scroll through the
ENGINE This message is displayed when the menus.
This message displays and a chime window needs to be reprogrammed. 0 BACK: Press to exit or move
sounds if the transmission fluid in If the vehicle's battery has been backwards in a menu.
the vehicle gets hot. Driving with the recharged or disconnected, you will
transmission fluid temperature high need to reprogram each front Entering the Personalization
can cause damage to the vehicle. window for the express up feature to Menus
Stop the vehicle and let it idle to work. See Power Windows on 1. Press CONFIG to access the
allow the transmission to cool. This page 2‑18 for more information. Configuration Settings menu.
message clears when the fluid
2. Turn the MENU / SELECT knob
temperature reaches a safe level.
to highlight Vehicle Settings.
3. Press the center of the Climate and Air Quality Air Quality Control
MENU / SELECT knob to select This will allow you to select the
Select the Climate and Air Quality
the Vehicle Settings menu. whether the system will operate at
menu and the following will be
The following list of menu items will displayed: high or low sensitivity. Only vehicles
be available: with the dual zone climate control
. Auto Fan Control
. Climate and Air Quality will have this option.
. Air Quality Control
. Comfort and Convenience Press the MENU / SELECT knob
. Auto Heated Seats when Air Quality Control is
. Collision/Detection Systems highlighted to open the menu. Turn
. Remote Start Heated Seats
. Language the knob to highlight High or Low.
. Remote Start Cooled Seats Press the knob to confirm the
. Lighting selection and move back to the
. Auto Defog
. Power Door Locks last menu.
. Auto Rear Defog
. Remote Lock/Unlock/Start Remote Start Heated Seats
Auto Fan Control
. Return to Factory Settings When on, this feature will turn the
This will allow you to select the heated seats on when using remote
Turn the MENU / SELECT knob to automatic fan speed it can be
highlight the menu. Press the knob start on cold days.
adjusted to run lower or higher than
to select it. Each of the menus is normal. Press the MENU / SELECT knob
detailed in the following information. when Remote Start Heated Seats is
Press the MENU / SELECT knob highlighted. Turn the knob to select
when Auto Fan Control is On or Off. Press the knob to confirm
highlighted to open the menu. Turn and go back to the last menu.
the knob to highlight High, Medium,
or Low. Press the knob to confirm
the selection and move back to the
last menu.
Remote Start Cooled Seats Auto Rear Defog Chime Volume

When on, this feature will turn the This will allow you to turn the auto This allows the selection of the
cooled seats on when using remote rear defog on or off. This feature will chime volume level.
start on warm days. automatically turn on the rear Press the MENU / SELECT knob
Press the MENU / SELECT knob defogger when it is cold outside. when Chime Volume is highlighted.
when Remote Start Cooled Seats is Press the MENU / SELECT knob Turn the knob to select Normal or
highlighted. Turn the knob to select when Auto Rear Defog is High. Press the knob to confirm and
On or Off. Press the knob to confirm highlighted to open the menu. Turn go back to the last menu.
and go back to the last menu. the knob to highlight On or Off.
Press the knob to confirm the Driver Seat Easy Exit
Auto Defog selection and move back to the When on, this feature will move the
This will allow you to turn the auto last menu. drivers seat rearward upon turning
defog on or off. Only vehicles with the ignition off and the drivers door
the dual zone climate control will Comfort and Convenience being opened. This may be
have this option. Select the Comfort and performed to make it easier to exit
Press the MENU / SELECT knob Convenience menu and the the vehicle. See the “Easy Exit
when Auto Defog is highlighted to following will be displayed: Driver Seat” information under
open the menu. Turn the knob to Power Seat Adjustment on
. Chime Volume
highlight On or Off. Press the knob page 3‑4 for more information.
. Driver Seat Easy Exit
to confirm the selection and move This allows you to turn the easy exit
back to the last menu. . Parking Tilt Mirrors seat feature on or off.
Press the MENU / SELECT knob
when Driver Seat Easy Exit is
highlighted. Turn the knob to select
On or Off. Press the knob to confirm
and go back to the last menu.
Park Tilt Mirrors Collision/Detection Systems Lighting

When on, both the driver and Select the Collision/Detection Select the Lighting menu and the
passenger mirrors will tilt downward Systems menu and the following will following will be displayed:
when vehicle is shifted to be displayed: . Exit Lighting
R (Reverse) to improve visibility of . Side Blind Zone Alert . Vehicle Locator Lights
the ground near the rear wheels,
They will return to their previous Side Blind Zone Alert Exit Lighting
driving position when the vehicle is
This allows the Side Blind Zone This allows the selection of how
shifted out of R (Reverse), the
Alert feature to be turned on or off. long the exterior lamps stay on
ignition is turned to OFF, or the
vehicle is left in reverse. See Park Press the MENU / SELECT knob when leaving the vehicle when it is
Tilt Mirrors on page 2‑17 for more when Side Blind Zone Alert is dark outside.
information. highlighted. Turn the knob to select Press the MENU / SELECT knob
On or Off. Press the knob to confirm when Exit Lighting is highlighted.
This allows you to turn the park tilt
and go back to the last menu. Turn the knob to select Off,
mirrors feature on or off.
Language 30 Seconds, 1 Minute, or 2 Minutes.
Press the knob to confirm and go
when Park Tilt Mirrors is highlighted. Select the Language menu and the back to the last menu.
Turn the knob to select Driver & following will be displayed:
Passenger or Off. Press the knob to
confirm and go back to the
. English
last menu. . French
. Spanish
Turn the MENU / SELECT knob to
select the language. Press the knob
to confirm and go back to the
last menu.
Vehicle Locator Lights Unlocked Door Anti Lock Out Press the MENU / SELECT knob
This allows the vehicle locator lights When on, this feature will keep the when Delayed Door Lock is
to be turned on or off. The vehicle driver door from locking when the highlighted. Turn the knob to select
locator lights come on when door is open. If off is selected, the On or Off. Press the knob to confirm
unlocking the vehicle with the RKE Delayed Door Lock menu will be and go back to the last menu.
transmitter. available and the door will lock as Auto Door Unlock
Press the MENU / SELECT knob programmed through this menu.
This allows selection of which of the
when Vehicle Locator Lights is Press the MENU / SELECT knob doors will automatically unlock when
highlighted. Turn the knob to select when Auto Door Unlock is the vehicle is shifted into P (Park).
On or Off. Press the knob to confirm highlighted. Turn the knob to select
and go back to the last menu. On or Off. Press the knob to confirm Press the MENU / SELECT knob
and go back to the last menu. when Auto Door Unlock is
Power Door Locks highlighted. Turn the knob to select
Delayed Door Lock All Doors, Driver Door, or Off. Press
Select Power Door Locks and the
When on, this feature will delay the the knob to confirm and go back to
following will be displayed:
locking of the doors until the last menu.
. Unlocked Door Anti Lock Out
five seconds after the last door is
. Auto Door Unlock closed. You will hear three chimes
. Delayed Door Lock to signal delayed locking is in use.
Pressing either the power lock
button or the lock button on the RKE
transmitter twice will override the
delayed locking feature and
immediately lock all of the doors.
Remote Lock/Unlock/Start Locking Feedback doors will unlock when the button is
This allows selection of what type of pressed a second time. When set to
Select Remote Lock/Unlock/Start
feedback is given when locking the All Doors, all of the doors will unlock
and the following will be displayed:
vehicle with the RKE transmitter. at the first press of the unlock
. Unlock Feedback (Lights) button. Press the knob to confirm
Press the MENU / SELECT knob and go back to the last menu.
. Locking Feedback
when Locking Feedback is
. Door Unlock Options highlighted. Turn the knob to select Remote Recall
. Remote Recall Lights and Horn, Lights Only, Horn When on, this feature will recall the
Only, or Off. Press the knob to current drivers last seat and outside
. Passive Entry confirm and go back to the mirrors upon unlocking the drivers
. Remote Left In Vehicle last menu. door with the RKE, and opening that
Door Unlock Options door. The current driver is identified
Unlock Feedback (Lights) when the RKE is used to unlock the
When on, the exterior lamps will This allows selection of which doors Driver door. If keyless access
flash when unlocking the vehicle will unlock when pressing the unlock equipped, the recall will occur upon
with the RKE transmitter. button on the RKE transmitter. opening the driver door. See the
Press the MENU / SELECT knob “Memory Remote Recall”
when Door Unlock Options is information under Power Seat
when Unlock Feedback (Lights) is
highlighted. Turn the knob to select Adjustment on page 3‑4 for more
highlighted. Turn the knob to select
All Doors or Driver Door Only. When information.
On or Off. Press the knob to confirm
and go back to the last menu. set to Driver Door Only, the driver
door will unlock the first time the
unlock button is pressed and all
This allows the Remote Recall Remote Left In Vehicle Universal Remote
feature to be turned on or off. This allows the Remote Left In
Remote Recall is when the Vehicle reminder feature to be
System
memorized settings will be recalled turned on or off. If on, the horn will See Radio Frequency Statement on
as you unlock and enter the vehicle. chirp if a remote is left in the page 13‑18 for information
Press the MENU / SELECT knob vehicle. regarding Part 15 of the Federal
when Remote Recall is highlighted. Press the MENU / SELECT knob Communications Commission (FCC)
Turn the knob to select On or Off. when Remote Left In Vehicle is rules and Industry Canada
Press the knob to confirm and go highlighted. Turn the knob to select Standards RSS-210/220/310.
back to the last menu. On or Off. Press the knob to confirm
Passive Entry and go back to the last menu.
This allows the Passive Entry Return to Factory Settings
feature to be turned on or off.
Select Return to Factory Settings to
Press the MENU / SELECT knob return all of the vehicle
when Passive Entry is highlighted. personalization to the default
Turn the knob to select On or Off. settings. Turn the knob to select Yes
Press the knob to confirm and go or No. Press the knob to confirm
back to the last menu. and go back to the last menu.
Universal Remote System Do not use the Universal Home When programming a garage door,
Remote with any garage door park outside of the garage. Park
Programming opener that does not have the stop directly in line with and facing the
and reverse feature. This includes garage door opener motor-head or
any garage door opener model gate motor-head. Be sure that
manufactured before April 1, 1982. people and objects are clear of the
Read the instructions completely garage door or gate being
before attempting to program the programmed.
Universal Home Remote. Because It is recommended that a new
of the steps involved, it may be battery be installed in your
helpful to have another person hand-held transmitter for quicker
available to assist you with and more accurate transmission of
programming the Universal Home the radio-frequency signal.
Remote.
Programming the Universal
Keep the original hand-held Home Remote System
If the vehicle has this feature, you transmitter for use in other vehicles
will see these buttons with one LED as well as for future Universal Home For questions or help programming
indicator next to them in the Remote programming. It is also the Universal Home Remote
headliner. recommended that upon the sale of System, call 1‐800‐355‐3515 or go
the vehicle, the programmed to www.homelink.com.
This system provides a way to
Universal Home Remote buttons be Programming a garage door opener
replace up to three remote control
erased for security purposes. See involves time-sensitive actions, so
transmitters used to activate
“Erasing Universal Home Remote read the entire procedure before
devices such as garage door
Buttons” later in this section. starting. Otherwise, the device will
openers, security systems, and
home automation devices. time out and the procedure will have
to be repeated.
To program up to three devices: Some entry gates and garage

. If the Universal Home
door openers may require Remote indicator light
1. Hold the end of your hand-held blinks rapidly for
transmitter about 3 to 8 cm substitution of Step 2 with the
procedure noted in “Gate two seconds, then turns to
(1 to 3 in) away from the a constant light and the
Universal Home Remote buttons Operator and Canadian
Programming” later in this garage door does not
while keeping the indicator light move, continue with the
in view. The hand-held section.
programming Steps 4
transmitter was supplied by the 3. Press and hold for five seconds through 6.
manufacturer of your garage the newly-trained Universal
door opener receiver Home Remote button (the button It may be helpful to have
(motor-head unit). selected in Step 2) while another person assist with
observing the indicator light and the remaining Steps 4
2. At the same time, press and through 6.
hold both the hand-held garage door activation.
transmitter button and one of the . If the indicator light stays on
three Universal Home Remote continuously or the garage
buttons to be used to operate door starts to move when
the garage door. Do not release the Universal Home
the Universal Home Remote Remote button is pressed
button or the hand-held and released, then the
transmitter button until the programming is complete.
indicator light changes from a There is no need to
slowly to a rapidly flashing light. continue programming
You now may release both Steps 4 through 6.
buttons.
6. Immediately return to the Gate Operator and Canadian

vehicle. Firmly press and hold Programming
for two seconds the Universal
Home Remote button, selected If you have questions or need
in Step 2 to control the garage help programming the Universal
door, and then release it. If the Home Remote System, call
garage door does not move or 1‐800‐355‐3515 or go to
the lamp on the garage door www.homelink.com.
opener receiver (motor-head Canadian radio-frequency laws
unit) does not flash, press and require transmitter signals to time
hold the same button a second out or quit after several seconds of
time for two seconds, and then transmission. This may not be long
“Learn” or “Smart” Buttons release it. Again, if the door enough for the Universal Home
does not move or the garage Remote to pick up the signal during
4. After Steps 1 through 3 have door lamp does not flash, press programming. Similarly, some U.S.
been completed, locate the and hold the same button a third gate operators are manufactured to
“Learn” or “Smart” button inside time for two seconds, and then time out in the same manner.
the garage on the garage door release.
opener receiver (motor-head
unit). The name and color The Universal Home Remote should
of the button may vary by now activate the garage door.
manufacturer. To program the remaining two
5. Firmly press and release the Universal Home Remote buttons,
“Learn” or “Smart” button. After begin with Step 1 of “Programming
you press this button, you will the Universal Home Remote
have 30 seconds to complete System.”
Step 6.
If you live in Canada, or you are Universal Remote System Reprogramming a Single
having difficulty programming a gate Universal Home Remote
operator or garage door opener by
Operation
Button
using the “Programming the Using Universal Home Remote
Universal Home Remote System” To reprogram any of the three
procedures, regardless of where Press and hold the appropriate Universal Home Remote buttons:
you live, replace Step 2 under Universal Home Remote button for 1. Press and hold the desired
“Programming the Universal Home at least half of a second. The Universal Home Remote button.
Remote System” with the following: indicator light will come on while the Do not release the button.
signal is being transmitted.
2. Continue to press and hold the 2. The indicator light will begin to
Universal Home Remote button Erasing Universal Home flash after 20 seconds. Without
while you press and release every Remote Buttons releasing the button, proceed
two seconds (cycle) the hand-held with Step 1 of the section
All programmed buttons should be
transmitter button until the “Programming the Universal
erased when the vehicle is sold or
frequency signal has been Home Remote System”.
the lease ends.
successfully accepted by the
Universal Home Remote. The To erase all programmed buttons on If you have questions or need
Universal Home Remote indicator the Universal Home Remote device: help programming the Universal
light will flash slowly at first and then Home Remote System, call
1. Press and hold down the two 1‐800‐355‐3515 or go to
rapidly. Proceed with Step 3 under outside buttons until the
“Programming the Universal Home www.homelink.com. You may also
indicator light begins to flash, call the customer assistance phone
Remote System” to complete. after 10 seconds. number under Customer Assistance
2. Release both buttons. Offices on page 13‑4.
Lighting 6-1
Lighting Interior Lighting

Instrument Panel Illumination
Exterior Lighting
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 Exterior Lamp Controls
Exterior Lighting
Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . 6-1
Sun Visor Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Exterior Lamps Off
Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 Lighting Features
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 Battery Load Management . . . . 6-7
Daytime Running Battery Power Protection . . . . . . 6-8
Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Automatic Headlamp
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Adaptive Forward
Lighting (AFL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . 6-4
Turn and Lane-Change The exterior lamp control is located
Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 on the instrument panel on the
Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 outboard side of the steering wheel.
Turn the control to the following
positions:
O (Off): Turns off the exterior
lamps. The knob returns to the
AUTO position after it is released.
Turn to off again to reactivate the
AUTO mode.
6-2 Lighting
AUTO (Automatic): Automatically 2 (Headlamps): Turns on the Headlamp High/

turns the exterior lamps on and off, headlamps together with the
depending on outside lighting.
Low-Beam Changer
following:
The current status of the AUTO . Sidemarker Lamps
2 3 Headlamp High/Low Beam
system is displayed in the Driver Changer: Push the turn signal/lane
Information Center (DIC) uplevel
. Taillamps change lever away from you and
display. See Driver Information release, to turn the high beams on.
. License Plate Lamps
Center (DIC) on page 5‑23. To return to low beams, push the
. Instrument Panel Lights lever again or pull it toward you and
; (Parking Lamps): Turns on the release.
. Parking Lamps
parking lamps together with the
following:
Exterior Lamps Off
. Sidemarker Lamps
Reminder
. Taillamps
A warning chime sounds, if the
. License Plate Lamps driver door is opened while the
. Instrument Panel Lights ignition is off and the exterior lamps
are on. This indicator light turns on in the
instrument panel cluster when the
high‐beam headlamps are on.
Lighting 6-3
Flash-to-Pass The DRL system turns on the Automatic Headlamp

low-beam headlamps at a reduced
To flash the high beams, pull the brightness. For vehicles with High
System
turn signal/lane change lever toward Intensity Discharge (HID) When the exterior lamp control is
you, and release. headlamps, the dedicated DRL set to AUTO and it is dark enough
lights will come on when all of the outside, the headlamps come on
Daytime Running following conditions are met: automatically.
Lamps (DRL) . The engine is running There is a light sensor located on
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can . The exterior lamp band is top of the instrument panel. Do not
make it easier for others to see the in AUTO cover the sensor or the headlamps
front of your vehicle during the day. will come on when they are not
Fully functional daytime running
. The light sensor determines it is needed.
lamps are required on all vehicles daytime.
The system may also turn on the
first sold in Canada. When the DRL are on, the headlamps when driving through a
low-beam headlamps will be on. parking garage or tunnel.
The taillamps, sidemarker,
instrument panel lights and other When it is bright enough outside the
lamps will not be on. headlamps will turn off or may
change to daytime running
The DRL turn off when the lamps (DRL).
headlamps are turned to O or the The automatic headlamp system
ignition is off. turns off when the exterior lamp
control is turned to O or the ignition
is off.
6-4 Lighting
Adaptive Forward Hazard Warning Flashers Turn and Lane-Change

Lighting (AFL) | Hazard Warning Flasher: Signals
The Adaptive Forward Lighting Press this button located on the
System (AFL) pivots the headlamps instrument panel below the climate
horizontally to provide greater road control system, to make the front
illumination while turning. To enable and rear turn signal lamps flash on
AFL, set the exterior lamp switch to and off. Press again to turn the
the AUTO position. Moving the flashers off.
switch out of the AUTO position The hazard warning flashers turn on
deactivates the system. AFL automatically if the airbags deploy.
operates when the vehicle speed
is greater than 3 km/h (2 mph).
AFL does not operate when the
transmission is in R (Reverse).
AFL is not immediately operable
after starting the vehicle; driving a Move the lever all the way up or
short distance is required to down to signal a turn.
calibrate the AFL. See Exterior An arrow on the instrument panel
Lamp Controls on page 6‑1. cluster flashes in the direction of the
turn or lane change.
Lighting 6-5
Raise or lower the lever until the Fog Lamps Interior Lighting
arrow starts to flash to signal a lane
change. Hold it there until the lane For vehicles with fog lamps, the
change is completed. If the lever is button is located on the exterior Instrument Panel
briefly pressed and released, the lamp control, on the outboard side Illumination Control
turn signal flashes three times. of the steering wheel.
The brightness of the instrument
The turn and lane‐change signal To turn on the fog lamps, the ignition panel lighting and steering wheel
can be turned off manually by and the headlamps or parking lamps controls can be adjusted. Use the
moving the lever back to its original must be on. thumbwheel located next to the
position. If the fog lamps are turned on while exterior lamps control on the
If after signaling a turn or lane the exterior lamp switch is in the outboard side of the steering wheel.
change the arrow flashes rapidly or AUTO position, the headlamps D : Move the thumbwheel up or
does not come on, a signal bulb come on automatically. down to brighten or dim the lights.
might be burned out. # : Press to turn on or off. An
Have the bulbs replaced. If the bulb indicator light on the instrument
is not burned out, check the fuse. panel cluster comes on when the
See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on fog lamps are on.
page 10‑38. Some localities have laws that
require the headlamps to be on
along with the fog lamps.
6-6 Lighting
Dome Lamps Lighting Features

The interior lamps control located in
the overhead console controls both Entry Lighting
the front and rear interior lamps. The headlamps, taillamps, license
To operate, press the following plate lamps, reverse lamps, dome
buttons: lamps, and most of the interior lights
* (Off): Turns the lamp off. turn on briefly, when the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) K is pressed,
1 Door: Turns the lamp on when or when the door handle is pulled on
any door is opened. a Keyless Access Vehicle. See
+ ON: Keeps the lamp on all Ignition Positions (Key Access) on
the time. page 9‑18 or Ignition Positions
#$: Press to turn each lamp on (Keyless Access) on page 9‑19.
or off.
Reading Lamps After about 30 seconds the exterior
The rear reading lamps are located lamps turn off, and then the dome
There are front and rear reading in the headliner. and remaining interior lights will dim
lamps. to off. Entry lighting can be disabled
The front reading lamps are located Sun Visor Lamps manually by changing the ignition
in the overhead console. out of the OFF position, or by
This lamp turns on when the cover pressing the Remote Keyless
is opened.
Entry (RKE) Q button.
This feature can be changed.
See Vehicle Personalization on
page 5‑36.
Lighting 6-7
Exit Lighting The exterior lights turn off The battery can be discharged at
immediately by turning the exterior idle if the electrical loads are very
The headlamps, taillamps, parking lamps control to OFF. high. This is true for all vehicles.
lamps, reverse lamps, and license This is because the generator
plate lamps come on at night, or in This feature can be changed.
See Vehicle Personalization on (alternator) may not be spinning fast
areas with limited lighting, when the enough at idle to produce all the
key is removed from the ignition. page 5‑36.
power that is needed for very high
The dome lamps also come on electrical loads.
when the key is removed from the Battery Load
A high electrical load occurs when
ignition. The exterior lights and Management several of the following are on, such
dome lamps remain on after the
door is closed for a set amount of The vehicle has Electric Power as: headlamps, high beams, fog
time, then automatically turn off. Management (EPM) that estimates lamps, rear window defogger,
the battery's temperature and state climate control fan at high speed,
For a vehicle with Keyless Access, of charge. It then adjusts the voltage heated seats, engine cooling fans,
the exterior lights and dome lamps for best performance and extended trailer loads, and loads plugged into
automatically turn on when a door life of the battery. accessory power outlets.
is opened after the ignition is
turned off. See Ignition Positions When the battery's state of charge EPM works to prevent excessive
(Key Access) on page 9‑18 or is low, the voltage is raised slightly discharge of the battery. It does this
Ignition Positions (Keyless Access) to quickly bring the charge back up. by balancing the generator's output
on page 9‑19. When the state of charge is high, and the vehicle's electrical needs.
the voltage is lowered slightly to It can increase engine idle speed to
prevent overcharging. If the vehicle generate more power, whenever
has a voltmeter gauge or a voltage needed. It can temporarily reduce
display on the Driver Information the power demands of some
Center (DIC), you may see the accessories.
voltage move up or down. This is
normal. If there is a problem, an
alert will be displayed.
6-8 Lighting
Normally, these actions occur in Battery Power Protection

steps or levels, without being
noticeable. In rare cases at the The battery saver feature is
highest levels of corrective action, designed to protect the vehicle's
this action may be noticeable to the battery.
driver. If so, a Driver Information If the exterior lamps or any interior
Center (DIC) message might be light is left on and the ignition is
displayed, such as BATTERY turned off, the battery rundown
SAVER ACTIVE, BATTERY protection system automatically
VOLTAGE LOW, or LOW BATTERY. turns the lamp off after about
If one of these messages displays, 10 minutes.
it is recommended that the driver
reduce the electrical loads as much
as possible. See Driver Information
Center (DIC) on page 5‑23.
Infotainment System 7-1
Infotainment Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18

Backglass Antenna . . . . . . . . . . 7-19
Phone
Bluetooth (Overview) . . . . . . . . 7-44
System Satellite Radio Antenna . . . . . . 7-19 Bluetooth (Infotainment
Controls) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-45
Audio Players Bluetooth (Voice
CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20 Recognition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-50
Introduction CD/DVD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-22
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 Mass Storage
Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . 7-2 Media (MEM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25
Overview (Radio with CD) . . . . . 7-3 Auxiliary Devices (Radio
Overview (Radio with CD/DVD with CD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29
and MEM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5 Auxiliary Devices (Radio with
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7 CD/DVD and MEM) . . . . . . . . 7-32
Radio Rear Seat Infotainment
AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12 Rear Seat Entertainment
Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14 (RSE) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34
7-2 Infotainment System
Introduction To minimize taking your eyes off the The vehicle has Retained
road while driving, do the following Accessory Power (RAP). With RAP,
Read the following pages to while the vehicle is parked: the audio system can be played
become familiar with the audio even after the ignition is turned off.
. Become familiar with the
system's features. See Retained Accessory Power
operation and controls of the
audio system. (RAP) on page 9‑21 for more
{ WARNING . Set up the tone, speaker
information.
Taking your eyes off the road for adjustments, and preset radio Navigation System
extended periods could cause a stations. For vehicles with a navigation
crash resulting in injury or death For more information, see Defensive system, see the separate Navigation
to you or others. Do not give Driving on page 9‑2. System Manual.
extended attention to
Notice: Contact your dealer
entertainment tasks while driving. before adding any equipment.
Theft-Deterrent Feature
Adding audio or communication The theft-deterrent feature works by
This system provides access to equipment could interfere with learning a portion of the Vehicle
many audio and non‐audio listings. the operation of the vehicle's Identification Number (VIN) to the
engine, radio, or other systems, infotainment system. The
and could damage them. Follow infotainment system does not
federal rules covering mobile operate if it is stolen or moved to a
radio and telephone equipment. different vehicle.
Overview (Radio with CD) A. VOL/ O

. Turns the system on or off
and adjusts the volume.
B. FAV
. Radio: Opens the
favorites list.
C. Buttons 1 to 6
. Radio: Saves and selects
favorite stations.
D. INFO
. Radio: Shows available
information about the
current station.
. CD: Shows available
current track.
E. TUNE I. l L. SELECT
. Radio: Manually selects . Radio: Seeks the next
. Selects menu items.
radio stations. station. M. CONFIG
. CD: Selects tracks. . CD: Select the next track . Opens the settings menu.
F. CD/AUX or fast forwards within a
track. N. 0 BACK
. Selects the CD player or
an external audio source. J. RADIO/BAND . Menu: Moves one
level back.
G. g . Changes the band while
listening to the radio. . Character Input: Deletes
. Radio: Seeks the previous the last character.
station.
. Selects the radio when
listening to a different O. H
. CD: Select the previous audio source.
track or rewinds within a
. Opens the clock menu.
track. K. Menu Knob
P. TONE
. Opens menus, highlights
H. Z CD Eject menu items, or sets
. Opens the tone menu.
. Removes a disc from the numeric values while in Q. 5
CD slot. a menu.
. Opens the phone
main menu.
. Mutes the audio system.
Overview (Radio with CD/DVD and MEM) A. VOL/ O

. Turns the system on or off
and adjusts the volume.
B. FAV
. Radio: Opens the
favorites list.
. MEM: Opens the
favorites list.
C. Buttons 1 to 6
. Radio: Saves and selects
favorite stations.
. MEM: Saves and selects
favorite tracks and
playlists.
D. INFO
. Radio: Shows available
current station.
. CD: Shows available
current track.
E. TUNE/ k H. Z CD Eject L. SELECT

. Manually selects radio . Removes a disc from the
. Selects menu items.
stations and pauses time CD slot. M. Menu Knob
shifted content.
I. REC O . Opens menus, highlights
. CD/DVD: Select tracks, menu items, or sets
pauses playback, and
. AUX: Records content numeric values while in
stops playback. from audio CDs, MP3/ a menu.
WMA CDs, and USB mass
. MEM: Select tracks and storage devices. N. 0 BACK
pauses playback.
J. DEL . Menu: Moves one
F. RADIO/BAND level back.
. MEM: Deletes the current
. Changes the band while track from MEM. . Character Input: Deletes
listening to the radio. the last character.
. Selects the radio when
K. l
O. TONE
listening to a different . Radio: Seeks the next
audio source. station. . Opens the tone menu.
G. g . CD: Selects the next track P. H
or fast forwards within a
. Radio: Seeks the previous track.
. Opens the clock menu.
station. Q. CONFIG
. MEM: Selects the next
. CD: Selects the previous track or fast forwards . Opens the settings menu.
track or rewinds within a within a track.
track.
. MEM: Selects the previous
track or rewinds within a
track.
R. 5 Turning the System On or Off Menu System

. Opens the phone VOL/ O (Volume/Power): Press to Controls
main menu. turn the system on and off. The Menu knob, SELECT button,
. Mutes the audio system. Automatic Switch‐Off and the 0 BACK button are used to
S. MEM/DVD/AUX If the infotainment system has been navigate the menu system.
. Selects MEM, CD/DVD, turned on after the ignition is turned Menu Knob: Turn to:
USB, or a connected front off, the system will turn off . Enter the menu system.
or rear auxillary audio automatically after ten minutes.
source.
. Highlight a menu option.
Volume Control . Select a value.
Operation VOL/ O (Volume/Power): Turn to SELECT: Press to:
adjust the volume.
Controls . Select or activate the highlighted
5 (Phone/Mute): For vehicles with menu option.
The infotainment system is operated
OnStar®, press and hold 5 to mute
by using the pushbuttons, . Confirm a set value.
multifunction knobs, menus that are the infotainment system. Press and
hold 5 again, or turn the VOL/ O
. Turn a system setting on or off.
shown on the display, and steering
wheel controls, if equipped. knob to cancel mute. 0 BACK: Press to:
®
For vehicles without OnStar , press . Exit a menu.
5 to mute the infotainment system. . Return from a submenu screen
Press 5 again, or turn the VOL/ O to the previous menu screen.
knob to cancel mute. . Delete the last character in a
sequence.
Selecting a Menu Option Activating a Setting Turning a Function On or Off
1. Turn the Menu knob to move the 1. Turn the Menu knob to highlight 1. Turn the Menu knob to highlight
highlighted bar. the setting. the function.
2. Press the SELECT button to 2. Press the SELECT button to 2. Press the SELECT button to turn
select the highlighted option. activate the setting. the function on or off.
Submenus Setting a Value Entering a Character Sequence
An arrow on the right‐hand edge of 1. Turn the Menu knob to change 1. Turn the Menu knob to highlight
the menu indicates that it has a the current value of the setting. the character.
submenu with other options. 2. Press the SELECT button to 2. Press the SELECT button to
confirm the setting. select the character.
Press the 0 BACK button to delete Adjusting the Treble, Midrange, Adjusting the Fader and Balance
the last character in the sequence and Bass
or press and hold to delete the
entire character sequence.
Audio Settings
The audio settings can be set for
each radio band and each audio
player source. 1. Press the TONE button.
1. Press the TONE button. 2. Select Fader or Balance.
To quickly reset an audio setting
value to 0: 2. Select Treble, Midrange, 3. Select the value.
or Bass.
1. Press the TONE button. Press the 0 BACK button to go
3. Select the value.
2. Select the audio setting. back to the Tone Settings menu.
Press the 0 BACK button to go
3. Press and hold the SELECT
back to the Tone Settings menu.
button until the value changes
to 0.
Adjusting the EQ (Equalizer) DSP (Digital Signal Processing) The DSP settings for the Radio with
For vehicles that have an equalizer: Settings CD/DVD and MEM are:
For vehicles with DSP, it is used to . 2.0 normal ‐ Select this setting to
provide a choice of different adjust the audio for stereo
listening experiences. mode. This provides the best
The DSP settings for the Radio with sound quality for the drivers seat
CD are: first, with the front passenger
second.
. normal ‐ Select this setting to
adjust the audio for stereo
. hk surround ‐ Select to enable
1. Press the TONE button. hk surround. This produces a
mode. This provides the best
2. Select EQ. sound quality for the drivers seat true 6.1 matrix surround from
first, with the front passenger any two channel digital source.
3. Select the setting.
second. This feature is not available in
Press the 0 BACK button to go AM/FM radio mode.
. hk surround ‐ Select to enable
hk surround. This produces a To adjust the DSP settings:
true 6.1 matrix surround from 1. Press the TONE button.
any two channel digital source. 2. Select DSP.
This feature is not available in
AM/FM radio mode. 3. Select the setting.
System Settings Auto Volume Maximum Startup Volume

Configuring the Number of The auto volume feature The maximum volume played when
Favorite Pages automatically adjusts the radio the Radio with CD is first turned on
volume to compensate for road and can be set.
wind noise as the vehicle speeds up
or slows down, so that the volume
level is consistent.
The level of volume compensation
can be selected, or the auto volume
feature can be turned off.
To configure the number of available
favorite pages: 1. Press the CONFIG button.
1. Press the CONFIG button. 2. Select Radio Settings.
2. Select Radio Settings. 3. Select Maximum Startup
Volume.
3. Select Radio Favorites.
4. Select the setting.
4. Select the number of available
1. Press the CONFIG button.
favorite pages. 5. Press the 0 BACK button to go
2. Select Radio Settings. back to the System
5. Press the 0 BACK button to go Configuration menu.
back to the System 3. Select Auto Volume.
Configuration menu. 4. Select the setting.
5. Press the 0 BACK button to go
back to the System
Configuration menu.
Radio RDS (Radio Data System) Selecting a Station

The radio may have RDS. The RDS Seek Tuning (Radio with CD)
AM-FM Radio feature is available for use only on
If the radio station is not known:
FM stations that broadcast RDS
Control Buttons information. This feature only works Briefly press g or l. To
The buttons used to control the when the information from the radio automatically search for the next
radio are: station is available. In rare cases, a available station. If a station is not
radio station could broadcast found, the radio switches to a more
RADIO / BAND: Press to turn the incorrect information that causes the
radio on and choose between AM, sensitive search level. If a station
radio features to work improperly. still is not found, the frequency that
FM, and XM™, if equipped. If this happens, contact the radio was last active begins to play.
Menu Knob: Turn to navigate the station.
available menus. If the radio station is known:
While the radio is tuned to an
TUNE: Turn to search for stations. FM-RDS station, the station name Press and hold g or l until the
or call letters display. station on the display is reached,
INFO: Press to display additional then release the button.
information that may be available for Radio Menus
the current song. Seek Tuning (Radio with CD/DVD
Radio menus are available for AM
g/l: Press to search for and MEM)
and FM.
stations.
Turn the menu knob to open the Briefly press g or l, to
FAV: Press to open the favorites main radio menu for that band. automatically search for the next
list and select the favorites page. available station. If a station is not
Selecting a Band found, the radio switches to a more
1 to 6: Press to select preset sensitive search level. If a station
stations. Press the RADIO/BAND button to
choose AM, FM, or XM™, still is not found, the frequency that
k (Play/Pause): Press to pause if equipped. The last station that was last active begins to play.
time shifted content, if equipped. was playing starts playing again.
Manual Tuning content. The system stores the RDS received. A station search will be
Turn the TUNE knob to select the stations sorted by program type in completed and the first station in
frequency on the display. the FM category list. the updated list will play.
To search for a programming type To cancel the station search, press
Favorites List determined by station: the SELECT button.
1. Turn the menu knob. 1. Turn the menu knob. Storing a Station as a Favorite
2. Select Favorites List. 2. Select FM category list. A list of Stations from all bands can be
3. Select the station. all programming types available stored in any order in the favorite
displays. pages.
Station Lists
3. Select the programming type. Up to six stations can be stored in
1. Turn the menu knob.
A list of stations that transmit each favorite page and the number
2. Select AM or FM Station List. All programming of the selected of available favorite pages can
receivable stations in the current type displays. be set.
reception area are displayed. If a
4. Select the station. Storing Stations
station list has not been created,
an automatic station search The category lists are updated To store the station to a position in
is done. when the station lists are the list, press the corresponding
updated. button 1 to 6 until a beep is heard.
3. Select the station.
Updating Station & Category Lists Retrieving Stations
Category Lists
If stations stored in the station list Press the FAV button to open a
Most stations that broadcast an
can no longer be received. favorite page or to switch to another
RDS program type code specify the
type of programming transmitted. 1. Turn the menu knob. favorite page. Briefly press one of
Some stations change the program the 1 to 6 buttons to retrieve the
2. Select Update AM or FM Station
type code depending on the station.
List, if the stations stored in the
station list are no longer
Time Shifting (Radio with Press and release the l or g Satellite Radio
CD/DVD and MEM) buttons to jump forward or back Vehicles with an XM™ Satellite
The radio with MEM time shift 30 seconds in the time shift buffer. Radio tuner and a valid XM Satellite
feature can rewind 20 minutes of When the radio station is changed, Radio subscription can receive XM
FM/AM content. While listening to the buffer is cleared and programming.
the radio, the content from the automatically restarted for the
current station is always being current station. Content from a XM Satellite Radio Service
buffered. previously tuned station is no longer XM is a satellite radio service that is
available. based in the 48 contiguous United
Press the k button to pause the
The time shift feature is not States and 10 Canadian provinces.
radio. The radio displays the time
available while recording or with XM Satellite Radio has a wide
shift status bar. The status bar
other sources of playback. variety of programming and
shows the amount of content that is
commercial-free music,
stored in the buffer and the current Pausing AM/FM with the Vehicle coast-to-coast, and in digital-quality
pause point. Turned Off sound. A service fee is required to
To resume playback from the If AM/FM is paused when the receive the XM service. For more
current pause point, press the k vehicle is turned off, the radio information, contact XM at
button again. The radio is no longer continues to buffer the current radio www.xmradio.com or call
live, but played from the time shift station for up to 20 minutes. If the 1-800-929-2100 in the U.S. and
buffer. A status bar displays below vehicle is turned back on within www.xmradio.ca or call
the station number. 20 minutes, the radio resumes 1-877-438-9677 in Canada.
playback from the paused point.
Press and hold the l or g
buttons to fast forward or rewind
through the time shift buffer. Hold
l until the end of the recorded
buffer resumes live playback.
Control Buttons XM Categories Selecting a Channel Using g or

The buttons used to control the XM XM channels are organized in l (Radio with CD)
radio are: categories.
. Press and release g or l to
RADIO/BAND: Press to turn the Removing or Adding Categories go to the previous or next
radio on and choose between AM,
Channels in a category that have channel.
FM, and XM™, if equipped.
been removed can still be accessed
g/l: Press to go to the
. Press and hold g or l to
by using the g or l buttons, scroll through the previous or
previous or next channel. or the TUNE knob. next channel until the channel is
FAV: Press to open the To add or remove categories: reached.
favorites list.
1. Press the CONFIG button. Selecting a Channel Using g or
1 to 6: Press to select a favorite.
2. Select Radio Settings. l (Radio with CD/DVD and MEM)
TUNE: Turn to select channel.
3. Select XM Categories.
INFO: Press to display additional Press and release g or l to go to
information that may be available 4. Turn the Menu knob to highlight the previous or next channel.
about the current song. the category.
Selecting a Channel Using the
k (Play/Pause): Press to pause 5. Press the SELECT button to TUNE Knob
time shifted content, if equipped. remove or add the category.
To select an XM channel using the
Selecting the XM Band Selecting an XM Channel TUNE knob:
Press the RADIO/BAND button to XM channels can be selected by Turn the TUNE knob to highlight an
choose between the AM, FM and using g, l, the TUNE knob, XM channel, the channel is selected
XM bands. The last channel played or the menu system. after a short delay.
in that band begins to play when
that band is selected.
To select a channel using the menu: Storing a Channel as a Favorite To resume playback from the
1. Turn the menu knob and select To store the channel to a position in current pause point, press the k
Channel List. the list, press and hold the button again. The radio is no longer
corresponding 1to 6 button until the live, but played from the time shift
2. Select the desired channel. buffer. A status bar displays below
channel can be heard again.
Selecting a Channel Using the the channel number.
Menu System Retrieving Channels
Press and hold the l or g
1. Turn the menu knob. Press the FAV button to open a
favorite page or to change to buttons to fast forward or rewind
2. Select XM Category List. another favorite page. Briefly press through the time shift buffer. Hold
one of the 1 to 6 buttons to retrieve l until the end of the recorded
3. Select the category. buffer resumes live playback.
the channel.
4. Select the channel.
Time Shifting (Radio with Press and release the l or g
Storing an XM Channel as a CD/DVD and MEM) buttons to go to the next or previous
Favorite song in the time shift buffer.
The radio with MEM time shift
Channels from all bands can be feature can rewind 20 minutes of When the channel is changed, the
stored in any order in the favorite XM content. While listening to the buffer is cleared and automatically
pages. radio, the content from the current restarted for the current channel.
channel is always being buffered. Content from a previously tuned
Up to six channels can be stored in station is no longer available.
each favorite page and the number
Press the k button to pause the The time shift feature is not
of available favorite pages can
be set. radio. The radio displays the time available while recording or with
shift status bar. The status bar other sources of playback.
shows the amount of content that is
stored in the buffer and the current
pause point.
Pausing XM with the Vehicle Loading XM: The audio system is No Title Info: The system is
Turned Off acquiring and processing audio and working properly. No song title
If XM is paused when the vehicle is text data, no action is needed. This information is available at this time
turned off, the radio continues to message should disappear shortly. on this channel.
buffer the current radio station for Channel Off Air: This channel is No CAT Info: The system is
up to 20 minutes. If the vehicle is not currently in service. Tune in to working properly. No category
turned back on within 20 minutes, another channel. information is available at this time
the radio resumes playback from the Channel Unauth : This channel is on this channel.
paused point. blocked or cannot be received with No Information: The system is
XM Messages your XM Subscription package. working properly. No text or
Channel Unavailable: This informational messages are
XL (Explicit Language available at this time on this
Channels): These channels, or any previously assigned channel is no
longer assigned. Tune to another channel.
others, can be blocked by request,
by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696). station. No XM Signal: The system is
No Artist Info: The system is working properly. The vehicle may
XM Updating: The encryption code be in a location that where the XM
in the receiver is being updated, no working properly. No artist
information is available at this time signal is being blocked. When the
action is required. This process vehicle is moved into an open area,
should take no longer than on this channel.
the signal should return.
30 seconds.
CAT Not Found: The system is Radio Reception AM

working properly. There are no
Frequency interference and static The range for most AM stations is
channels available for the selected
can occur during normal radio greater than for FM, especially at
category.
reception if items such as cellular night. The longer range can cause
XM Radio ID: If tuned to channel 0, phone chargers, vehicle station frequencies to interfere with
this message alternates with the XM convenience accessories, and each other. For better radio
Radio 8 digit radio ID label. This external electronic devices are reception, most AM radio stations
label is needed to activate the plugged into the accessory power boost the power levels during the
service. outlet. If there is interference or day, and then reduce these levels
Unknown: If this message is static, unplug the item from the during the night. Static can also
received when tuned to channel 0, accessory power outlet. occur when things like storms and
there could be a receiver fault. power lines interfere with radio
Consult with your dealer.
FM reception. When this happens, try
FM signals only reach about reducing the treble on the radio.
Check Antenna: If this message
16 to 65 km (10 to 40 miles). XM™ Satellite Radio Service
does not clear within a short period
Although the radio has a built-in
of time, the receiver could have a XM Satellite Radio Service gives
fault. Consult with your dealer. electronic circuit that automatically
works to reduce interference, some digital radio reception from coast to
XM Not Available: If this message static can occur, especially around coast in the 48 contiguous United
does not clear within a short period tall buildings or hills, causing the States, and in Canada. Just as with
of time, the receiver could have a sound to fade in and out. FM, tall buildings or hills can
fault. Consult with your dealer. interfere with satellite radio signals,
causing the sound to fade in and
out. In addition, traveling or standing
under heavy foliage, bridges,
garages, or tunnels may cause loss
of the XM signal for a period of time.
Cellular Phone Usage damaged, it could interfere with Notice: Do not apply aftermarket
radio reception. For proper radio glass tinting with metallic film.
Cellular phone usage may cause
reception, the antenna connector The metallic film in some tinting
interference with the vehicle's radio.
needs to be properly attached to the materials will interfere with or
This interference may occur when
post on the glass. distort the incoming radio
making or receiving phone calls,
If a cellular telephone antenna reception. Any damage caused to
charging the phone's battery,
needs to be attached to the glass, your backglass antenna due to
or simply having the phone on. This
make sure that the grid lines for the metallic tinting materials will not
interference can cause an increased
AM-FM antenna are not damaged. be covered by the vehicle
level of static while listening to the
There is enough space between the warranty.
radio. If static is received while
listening to the radio, unplug the grid lines to attach a cellular
cellular phone and turn it off. telephone antenna without Satellite Radio Antenna
interfering with radio reception. For vehicles with XM™ satellite
Backglass Antenna Notice: Using a razor blade or radio service, the antenna is located
sharp object to clear the inside on the roof of the vehicle. Keep the
The AM-FM antenna is integrated
rear window can damage the rear antenna clear of obstructions for
with the rear window defogger,
window antenna and/or the rear clear radio reception.
located in the rear window. Make
sure that the inside surface of the window defogger. Repairs would
rear window is not scratched and not be covered by the vehicle
that the lines on the glass are not warranty. Do not clear the inside
damaged. If the inside surface is rear window with sharp objects.
Audio Players mild neutral detergent solution Control Buttons

mixed with water, and clean it. Wipe
The buttons used to control the CD
the disc from the center to the
CD Player outer edge.
player are:
The CD player can play audio CDs CD / AUX: Press to use the CD
Care of the CD Player player.
and MP3 CDs.
Do not add a label to a disc, as it l/g: Press to select tracks or
The CD player will not play could get caught in the CD player.
8 cm (3 in.) CDs. to fast forward or rewind within a
If a label is needed, label the top of track.
Care of CDs the recorded disc with a
marking pen. INFO: Press to display additional
Sound quality can be reduced due information about the current track
to disc quality, recording method, Do not use disc lens cleaners that may be available.
quality of the music recorded, and because they could contaminate the
how the disc has been handled. lens of the disc optics and damage TUNE: Turn to select tracks.
Handle discs carefully and store the CD player. Menu Knob: Turn to enter
them in their original cases or other Notice: If a label is added to a the menu.
protective cases away from direct CD, or more than one CD is SELECT: Press to select an item.
sunlight and dust. If the bottom inserted into the slot at a time,
surface of a disc is damaged, the or an attempt is made to play Z (Eject): Press to eject the disc.
disc may not play properly or at all. scratched or damaged CDs, the
Do not touch the bottom surface of Inserting a CD
CD player could be damaged.
a disc while handling it; this could While using the CD player, use With the printed side facing up,
damage the surface. Pick up discs only CDs in good condition insert a disc into the CD slot until it
by grasping the outer edges or the without any label, load one CD at is drawn in.
edge of the hole and the outer edge. a time, and keep the CD player
If the bottom surface of a disc is and the loading slot free of
dirty, take a soft lint free cloth, foreign materials, liquids, and
or dampen a clean soft cloth in a debris.
Removing a CD Using the CD Menu: Searching for MP3 Tracks

Press the Z button. 1. Turn the menu knob. The search feature may take some
2. Select Tracks list. time to display the information after
The disc is pushed out of the reading the disc due to the amount
CD slot. 3. Select the track. of information stored on the disc.
If the disc is not removed after it is Playing Tracks in Random Order FM automatically plays while the
ejected, it is pulled back in after a disc is being read.
few seconds. Turn the menu knob and then set
Shuffle Songs to On. Tracks can be searched by:
Playing a CD or MP3 CD . Playlists
Fast Forward and Rewind
Press the CD/AUX button if there is . Artists
a disc in the player, it begins Press and hold l or g to fast
forward or rewind within the current
. Albums
playing.
track. . Song Titles
Information about the disc and
current track is shown on the Selecting an MP3 Track . Genres
display depending on the data Using the control buttons: . Folder View
stored.
. Press the g or l button to To search for tracks:
Selecting a CD Track
select the previous or next track. 1. Turn the menu knob.
Using the control buttons: . Turn the TUNE knob. 2. Select Search.
. Press the g or l button to Using the CD Menu: 3. Select: Playlists, Artists, Albums,
select the previous or next track. Song Titles, Genres,
. Turn the TUNE knob. or Folder View.
2. Select Playlists / Folders.
4. Select the track.
3. Select the playlist or folder.
CD/DVD Player mixed with water, and clean it. Wipe Control Buttons
the disc from the center to the
The CD/DVD player can play The buttons used to control the
outer edge.
CDs, DVD‐As, MP3/WMA CDs, CD/DVD player are:
MP3/WMA DVDs, and DVD‐Vs. Care of the CD/DVD Player MEM/DVD/AUX: Press to choose
The CD/DVD player will not play Do not add a label to a disc, as it between the MEM, CD/DVD,
8 cm (3 in.) discs. could get caught in the CD/DVD and AUX.
player. If a label is needed, label the l/g: Press to select tracks or
Care of CDs and DVDs top of the recorded disc with a to fast forward or rewind within a
Sound quality can be reduced due marking pen. track.
to disc quality, recording method, Do not use disc lens cleaners
quality of the music recorded, and INFO: Press to display additional
because they could contaminate the information about the disc that may
how the disc has been handled. lens of the disc optics and damage
Handle discs carefully and store be available.
the CD/DVD player.
them in their original cases or other TUNE: Turn to select tracks.
protective cases away from direct Notice: If a label is added to a
CD, or more than one CD is Menu Knob: Turn to enter
sunlight and dust. If the bottom
inserted into the slot at a time, the menu.
surface of a disc is damaged, the
disc may not play properly or at all. or an attempt is made to play SELECT: Press to select an item.
Do not touch the bottom surface of scratched or damaged CDs, the
CD player could be damaged. Z (Eject): Press to eject the disc.
a disc while handling it; this could
damage the surface. Pick up discs While using the CD player, use k : Press to pause a CD, DVD‐A,
by grasping the outer edges or the only CDs in good condition or DVD‐V, press again to resume
edge of the hole and the outer edge. without any label, load one CD at playback. Press and hold to stop a
a time, and keep the CD player DVD‐V disc.
If the bottom surface of a disc is and the loading slot free of
dirty, take a soft lint free cloth, foreign materials, liquids, and
or dampen a clean soft cloth in a debris.
mild neutral detergent solution
Inserting a CD or DVD Selecting CD or DVD‐A Tracks Playing an MP3 CD or DVD

With the printed side facing up, Using the control buttons: Files that are not stored in folders
insert a disc into the slot until it is are displayed in the root
drawn in.
. Press the g or l button to directory (disc).
select the previous or next track.
Removing a CD or DVD The search rate increases if the
. Turn the TUNE knob. menu knob is continuously turned
Press the Z button. Using the menu: while searching in a list.
The disc is pushed out of the 1. Turn the menu knob. Selecting an MP3 Track
CD/DVD slot.
2. Select Tracks List. Using the control buttons:
If the disc is not removed after it is
3. Select the track. . Press g or l to select the
ejected, it is pulled back in after a
few seconds. Pausing a CD or DVD‐A Track previous or next track.
Playing a CD or DVD‐A Disc Press the k button to pause a CD
. Turn the TUNE knob.
Press the MEM/DVD/AUX button if or DVD‐A track. Press the k button Using the CD or DVD Menu:
there is a disc in the player, it again to continue playing the track. 1. Turn the menu knob.
begins playing.
Playing CD or DVD‐A Tracks in 2. Select Folder List.
Information about the disc and Random Order 3. Select the folder.
current track is shown on the
display depending on the data Turn the menu knob and then set 4. Select the track.
stored. Shuffle Songs to On.
Fast Forward and Rewind
Press and hold l or g to fast
forward or rewind within the current
track.
Searching for MP3s on a CD The number of objects in each Recording an Audio or MP3
or DVD category is shown in parentheses CD to MEM
It is normal for the search feature to after the category.
See Mass Storage Media (MEM) on
take some time to display the To search for tracks: page 7‑25 for more information.
information after reading the disc 1. Turn the menu knob.
due to the amount of information Playing a DVD‐V
stored on the disc. The infotainment 2. Select Search. See Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE)
system automatically switches to 3. Select: Playlists, Artists, Albums, System on page 7‑34 for
FM while the disc is being read. Song Titles, or Genres. information about how to control a
Files that do not have any meta 4. Select the track. The search rate Video DVD using the wireless
data stored in the ID3 tag display as increases if the menu knob is remote control.
Unknown. continuously turned while Selecting a Chapter
Tracks can be searched for by: searching in a list.
Using the control buttons:
. Playlists Playing MP3 Tracks in Random
Order
. Press g or l to select the
. Artists previous or next chapter.
. Albums Turn the menu knob and then set
. Turn the TUNE knob.
Shuffle Songs to On.
. Song Titles Using DVD Menu:
. Genres 1. Turn the menu knob.
2. Select Chapter List.
3. Select the chapter.
Selecting a Title Navigating the DVD‐V Disc Menu To navigate the menu:
1. Turn the menu knob. Use the following actions to 1. Turn the menu knob.
2. Select Title List. navigate the title menu on a 2. Select the action.
DVD‐V Disc.
3. Select the title. . Select / Enter Mass Storage
Changing the Audio Stream . Cursor UP Media (MEM)
1. Turn the menu knob. . Cursor DOWN Infotainment systems with MEM
2. Select Audio Stream. . Cursor RIGHT storage are able to record up to
3. Select Change Audio Stream. 1.1 GB (gigabyte) of music from
. Cursor LEFT Audio CDs, MP3/WMA/AAC discs,
4. Press SELECT to change the . Up Menu and USB storage devices. The MEM
selection. player can also time shift audio from
Use the following actions to AM, FM, and XM™ radio.
Select Cancel to exit the menu. navigate the menu on a DVD‐V Disc
Pausing a DVD while playing chapters. Music or content that is stored in
MEM that you did not create,
1. Turn the menu knob. . Pause (Play) or have the right to distribute, must
2. Select Pause, to pause the disc. . Chapter List be deleted before the sale or end of
Select unpause to start . Title List the lease of the vehicle.
playback.
. DVD/DVD Control Buttons
. DVD/AUX The buttons used to control the
MEM player are:
. AUX/DVD
MEM/DVD/AUX: Press to select
. AUX/AUX the MEM player.
l/g: Press to select tracks or Recording From Audio CDs Re-recording a Previously
to fast forward or rewind within a Recorded Disc
The infotainment system can record
track. the current song playing or all songs If the disc or track has already been
INFO: Press to display additional from an audio CD to MEM. A status recorded to MEM, the message The
information about the MEM track bar appears on the top of the Song(s) is Already Recorded
that may be available. display when the recording process displays.
starts and disappears when the
k /TUNE : Press to pause the process has ended. Copy protected
Stopping the Recording
track currently playing, press again CDs cannot be recorded to MEM. Press the O REC button while
to resume playback. Turn to select
tracks. Recording to MEM recording from an audio CD to
display the stop recording option.
O REC: Press to record music Press O REC, then select Record Select Stop Recording Song
from a CD or USB drive. Current Song or Record All Songs to MEM.
DEL: Press to delete the current on Disc. If the track has started Renaming Recorded Discs
track from MEM. playing, the system will restart the
track and begin recording from the Discs that have been recorded to
FAV (Favorites): Press to display MEM can be renamed.
beginning of the track. When the
MEM favorites.
song recording is completed, the 1. Turn the menu knob.
1 to 6: Press to select a track or message Song Recorded to MEM
playlist stored in that numeric displays, and there may be a slight 2. Select Rename Recorded Discs.
position. pause. 3. Select the disc.
Songs recorded to MEM are stored 4. Select Album or Artist to rename
as the current date, disc and track either one.
number.
5. Use the menu knob to enter the
character sequence. See
Operation on page 7‑7 for
more information.
Recording From MP3/WMA Re-recording a Previously Playing From MEM

Discs or USB Storage Devices Recorded Disc
Playing Back a Previously
USB Host Support If the disc or track has already been Recorded CD
recorded to MEM, the message The
The USB connector uses the USB Song(s) is Already Recorded Turn the TUNE knob to select a
standards, 1.1 and 2.0. displays. track if MEM is already playing from
the previously recorded disc.
USB Supported Devices Stopping the Recording
1. Select Recorded Disc List.
. USB Flash Drives Press the O REC button while 2. Select the disc.
. Portable USB Hard Drives recording from an MP3/WMA CD or
USB storage device to display the 3. Select the track.
Recording to MEM
stop recording option. Select Stop Searching For a Track
Press O REC, then select Record Recording Song to MEM.
Tracks can be searched for by:
Current Song or Record Current
Deleting Tracks From MEM . Playlists
Folder.
Individual tracks and all tracks can . Artists
The information stored by MEM is
be deleted from MEM.
titled according to the ID3 tag . Albums
associated with it. To delete individual tracks, press
and release the DEL button while . Song Titles
the track is playing. . Genres
To delete all tracks from MEM,
press and hold the DEL button while
a track is playing.
The number of objects in each Configuring MEM Favorites Saving MEM Tracks as
category is shown in parentheses Favorites
During MEM playback, press the
after the category.
FAV button to change between Favorites can be saved by pressing
To search for tracks: favorite categories. The favorite and holding one of the 1 to 6
1. Turn the menu knob. categories are: buttons. Favorites can be stored
. Playlists according to the following list:
2. Select Search.
. Artists Playlist: Adds currently playing
3. Select: Playlists, Artists, Albums, track to the playlist selected.
Song Titles, or Genres. . Albums
Artist: Saves the artist associated
4. Select the track. The search rate . Genres with the currently playing track in
increases if the menu knob is the indicated favorites position.
To remove MEM favorites
continuously turned while
categories: Album: Saves the album
searching in a list.
1. Press the CONFIG button. associated with the currently playing
Shuffle Songs track in the indicated favorites
2. Select Radio Settings. position.
Select the Shuffle Songs option
from the MEM menu to randomly 3. Select MEM Favorites. Genre: Saves the genre associated
play back tracks stored in MEM. 4. Remove the check mark from with the currently playing track in
the box to remove that MEM the indicated favorites position.
favorites category.
Replace the check mark to re-add
the removed category.
Creating Playlists Adjusting the Volume

To create a playlist using tracks Turn the VOL/ O knob to adjust the
stored in MEM: volume of the infotainment system
1. Select Playlist from the MEM after the volume level has been set
favorites. on the portable audio device.
2. Select the track to be stored in USB Port
the playlist.
For vehicles with a USB port, the
3. Press and hold one of the 1 to following devices may be connected
6 buttons until the track can be and controlled by the infotainment
heard again to store the track. system.
4. Repeat steps 1 though 3 to store The AUX input is located in the . iPod's
additional tracks in the playlist. center console. . PlaysForSure Devices (PFD)
Auxiliary Devices 3.5 mm Jack . USB Drives
(Radio with CD) Connect a 3.5 mm (1/8 in) cable to . Zune's
the auxiliary input jack to use a
The optional AUX input allows portable audio player. Not all iPod's, PFD's, USB Drives,
portable devices to connect to the and Zune's are compatible with the
vehicle using the 3.5 mm (1/8 in) Playback of an audio device that is infotainment system.
input jack or the USB port. connected to the 3.5 mm jack can
only be controlled using the controls
Portable devices are controlled by on the device.
using the menu system described in
Operation on page 7‑7.
Connecting and Controlling To search for tracks: On: Repeats the current track.
an iPod™ 1. Turn the menu knob. Off: Playback starts from the
Not all iPod's can be controlled by 2. Select Search. beginning of the current track after
the infotainment system. the last track finishes.
3. Select: Playlists, Artists, Albums,
Connecting an iPod Song Titles, Podcasts, Genres, Connecting and Controlling a
Connect the iPod to the USB port. Audiobooks, or Composers. PlaysForSure Device (PFD)
4. Select the track. or Zune™
Searching For a Track
Shuffle Connecting a PFD or Zune
Tracks can be searched for by:
Turn the menu knob and set Shuffle Connect the PFD or Zune to the
. Playlists USB port.
Songs (Random) to On or Off, then
. Artists
press the 0 BACK button to return Searching For a Track
. Albums the main screen. Tracks can be searched for by:
. Song Titles On: Plays tracks in the current . Playlists
. Podcasts folder in random order.
. Artists
. Genres Off: Plays tracks in the current
folder in sequential order.
. Albums
. Audiobooks . Song Titles
Repeat
. Composers . Podcasts
Turn the menu knob and set
Repeat to On or Off, then press . Genres
the 0 BACK button to return the
main screen.
To search for tracks: Connecting and Controlling a Files that do not have any meta
1. Turn the menu knob. USB Drive data stored in the ID3 tag display as
Unknown.
2. Select Search. The infotainment system can only
play back .mp3 and .wma files from Tracks can be searched for by:
3. Select: Playlists, Artists, Albums, a USB drive. .
Song Titles, Podcasts, Playlists*
or Genres. Only the first 2,500 songs are . Artists
recognized on the device.
4. Select the track. . Albums
When a device is not supported, the
Shuffle Functionality message “No supported data found.
. Song Titles
Turn the menu knob and set Shuffle You can safely disconnect the . Genres
Songs (Random) to On or Off. device” appears. . Folder View
On: Plays current tracks in random Connecting a USB Drive *This only displays if a playlist is
order. Connect the USB drive to the found on the device.
Off: Plays current tracks in USB port. To search for tracks:
sequential order.
Searching For a Track 1. Turn the menu knob.
Repeat Functionality It is normal for the search feature to 2. Select Search.
Turn the menu knob and set Repeat take some time to display the
to On or Off. information after reading the device 3. Select: Playlists, Artists,
due to the amount of information Albums, Song Titles, Genres,
Repeat On: Repeats the current or Folder View.
stored.
track.
Repeat Off: Playback starts from
the beginning of the current track
after the last track finishes.
Shuffle Functionality Auxiliary Devices 3.5 mm Jack

Turn the menu knob and set Shuffle (Radio with CD/DVD Connect a 3.5 mm (1/8 in.) cable to
Songs (Random) to On or Off. and MEM) the auxiliary input jack to use a
On: Plays current tracks in random portable audio player.
The optional AUX input allows
order. Playback of an audio device that is
portable devices to be connected
Off: Plays current tracks in using the 3.5 mm (1/8 in.) input jack connected to the 3.5 mm jack can
sequential order. or the USB port. only be controlled using the controls
on the device.
Repeat Functionality Portable devices are controlled by
using the menu system described in Adjusting the Volume
Turn the menu knob and set Repeat
Operation on page 7‑7. Turn the VOL/ O knob to adjust the
to On or Off.
volume of the infotainment system
Repeat On: Repeats the current
track. after the volume level has been set
on the portable audio device.
Repeat Off: Playback starts from
the beginning of the current track USB Port
after the last track finishes. The following devices may be
connected to the USB port and
controlled by the infotainment
system.
. iPod's
. USB Mass Storage Devices
Not all iPod's or USB Mass Storage
The AUX input is located in the
Devices are compatible with the
center console.
infotainment system.
Connecting and Controlling Searching For a Track Connecting and Controlling a

an iPod™ Tracks can be searched for by: USB Drive
Not all iPod's can be controlled by . Playlists Files that are not stored in folders
the infotainment system. are displayed in the root
. Artists directory (USB).
Connecting an iPod . Albums
Connect the iPod to the USB port. Connecting a USB Drive
. Song Titles
Connect the USB drive to the
Selecting a Track . Genres USB port.
Using the control buttons: . Composers Disconnecting a USB Drive
. Press g SEEK or l SEEK to . Audiobooks A USB drive should be ejected from
select the previous or next track. the USB port before disconnecting
The number of objects in each
. Turn the TUNE knob to select a category is shown in parentheses it. To eject a USB drive:
track in the current sub menu. after the category. 1. Turn the menu knob.
The track will start to play.
To search for tracks: 2. Select USB Eject.
Playing Tracks in Random Order 1. Turn the menu knob. Playing Tracks in Random Order
Turn the menu knob and set Shuffle 2. Select Search.
Songs to On or Off. Turn the menu knob and then set
3. Select: Playlists, Artists, Albums, Shuffle Songs to On.
Shuffle On: Plays current tracks in Song Titles, Genres,
random order. Composers, or Audiobooks.
Shuffle Off: Plays current tracks in 4. Select the track. The search rate
sequential order. increases if the menu knob is
continuously turned while
searching in a list.
Selecting a Track Tracks can be searched by: Rear Seat

Using the control buttons: . Playlists
Infotainment
Press g or l to select the Artists
. .
previous or next track. . Albums Rear Seat Entertainment

. Turn the TUNE knob to select a . Song Titles (RSE) System
track in the current sub menu. The vehicle may have a DVD Rear
The track will start to play.
. Genres
Seat Entertainment (RSE) system.
Selecting a track in a different The number of objects in each The RSE system works with the
folder: category is shown in parentheses vehicle's infotainment system. The
after the category.
1. Turn the menu knob. DVD player is part of the front radio.
To search for tracks: The RSE system includes a radio
2. Select Folder List. with a DVD player, two rear seat
3. Select the folder. video display screens, audio/video
2. Select Search. jacks, two wireless headphones,
4. Select the track. and a remote control. See CD/DVD
3. Select: Playlists, Artists, Albums,
Searching for Tracks Song Titles, or Genres. Player on page 7‑22 or the
separate navigation system manual
It is normal for the search feature to 4. Select the track. The search rate for more information on the vehicle's
take some time to display the increases if the menu knob is DVD system.
information after reading the device continuously turned while
due to the amount of information searching in a list.
stored.
Recording Tracks to MEM
Files that do not have any meta
data stored in the ID3 tag display as See Mass Storage Media (MEM) on
Unknown. page 7‑25 for more information.
Before Driving On some infotainment systems, the Headphones

Global Off feature can be turned off
The RSE is for rear seat
by performing one of the following:
passengers only. The driver cannot
safely view the video screen while . Press and hold the radio power
driving. button for more than
three seconds.
In severe or extreme weather
conditions, the RSE system may not . Insert or eject any disc.
work until the temperature is within . Insert a DVD video disc.
the operating range. The operating
range is above −20°C (−4°F) and
. Press the Remote Control power
below 60°C (140°F). If the button.
temperature is outside of this range, . Press the MEM/DVD/AUX button
heat or cool the vehicle until it is or the k button when a DVD
within the operating range. A. Battery cover
video disc is in the player.
Global Off . Press the SRC button on the B. Channel 1 or 2 switch
Depending on the infotainment steering wheel when a DVD C. Power button
system, the RSE system may have video disc is in the player.
D. Volume control
a Global Off feature. The Global Off . Cycle the ignition.
feature disables all RSE system E. Power indicator light
features. Press and hold the radio RSE includes two 2-channel
power button for more than wireless headphones. Channel 1 is
three seconds for Global Off to dedicated to the DVD player, and
disable the RSE features. Channel 2 is dedicated to any
external auxiliary device connected
to the A/V jacks. The headphones
are used to listen to various
multi‐media. The wireless To adjust the volume on the If the foam ear pads attached to the
headphones have an On/Off button, headphones, use the volume headphones become worn or
channel 1/2 switch, and a volume control. damaged, the pads can be replaced
control. Turn the headphones off For optimal audio performance, the separately from the headphone set.
when not in use. headphones must be worn correctly. To purchase replacemnet ear pads,
Push the On/Off button to turn on Headphones should be worn with call 1‐888‐293‐3332, then prompt
the headphones. A light on the the headband over the top of the zero (0), or contact your dealer.
headphones comes on. If the light head for best audio reception. The Battery Replacement
does not come on, check the symbol L (Left) appears on the
batteries. Intermittent sound or static outside bottom edge of the ear cup To change the batteries:
can also indicate weak batteries. and should be positioned on the left 1. Loosen the screw to the battery
See “Battery Replacement” later in ear. The symbol R (Right) appears door located on the left side of
this section for more information. on the outside bottom edge of the the headphones.
Infrared transmitters are on the top ear cup and should be positioned on 2. Slide the battery door open.
of the left seatback video screen. the right ear.
3. Replace the two AAA batteries.
The headphones shut off Notice: Do not store the
automatically to save the battery headphones in heat or direct 4. Replace the battery door and
power if the RSE system is shut off sunlight. This could damage the tighten the screw.
or if the headphones are out of headphones and repairs will not Remove the batteries if the
range of the transmitters for more be covered by the warranty. headphones are not going to be
than three minutes. Moving too far Storage in extreme cold can used for a long period of time.
forward or stepping out of the weaken the batteries. Keep the
vehicle, can cause the headphones headphones stored in a cool, dry
to lose the signal or have static. place.
Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks Changing the Source on the Video How to Change the RSE Video
Display Screens Screen Settings
If available, the A/V jacks are
located on the rear of the floor The image from the auxiliary device The screen display mode,
console. They allow audio or video can be switched between the video brightness, and language can be
cables to be connected from an display screens. changed from the setup menu using
auxiliary device such as a To change the display: the remote control. To change a
camcorder or a video game system. setting:
1. Press the AUX button on the
The A/V jacks are color coded: remote control to change the 1. Press z.
. Yellow for video input. source of both video screens
2. Use n, q, p, o and r to
from the DVD player to the
. White for left audio input. select the settings.
auxiliary device.
. Red for right audio input. 3. Press z again to exit the
2. Press the AUX button a second
Power for auxiliary devices is not time to change the left video setup menu.
supplied by the radio system. screen source to the DVD player
To use the auxiliary inputs of the and the right video screen to the
RSE system: auxiliary device.
1. Connect the auxiliary device 3. Press the AUX button a third

cables to the A/V jacks. time to change the left video
screen source to the auxiliary
2. Power on both the auxiliary device and the right video
device and the RSE video screen to the DVD player.
screen.
4. Press the AUX button a fourth
time to change the source of
both video screens to the DVD
player.
Audio Output Video Screens Push the video screen down into its
locked position when it is not in use,
Audio from the DVD player or The video screens are located in the
the screen turns off automatically.
auxiliary inputs can be heard back of the driver and front
through the following: passenger seats. Only the left RSE seatback console
contains the infrared transmitters for
. Wireless Headphones
the wireless headphones, they may
. Vehicle Speakers be visible as eight illuminated LEDs.
The RSE system transmits the These LEDs are not on the right
audio signal to the wireless video screen. Both seatback
headphones if an audio signal is consoles contain an infrared
available. See “Headphones” earlier receiver for the remote control.
in this section for more information. They are located at the top of each
console.
The front seat passengers are
able to listen to playback from Notice: Avoid directly touching
the A/V jacks through the vehicle the video screen, as damage may
speakers by selecting Rear A/V as occur. See “Cleaning the Video
the source on the radio. Screen” later in this section for
To use the video screen: more information.
1. Push the release button located
on the seatback console.
2. Move the screen to the desired
viewing position.
Video Screen Input Jack Remote Control If a CD, DVD, or MP3 disc is in the
Radio DVD slot, the remote control
Each video screen is equipped with
a video input jack to allow video
O button can be used to turn on the
video screen display and start the
cables to be connected from an
disc. The infotainment system can
auxiliary device such as a
also turn on the video screen
camcorder or a video game system.
display. See CD/DVD Player on
This signal will override any video
page 7‑22 or the separate
provided by the RSE system; either
navigation system manual for more
the DVD or Auxiliary A/V jack
information.
source. The RSE system must be
on for this input to operate. Notice: Storing the remote
control in a hot area or in direct
sunlight can damage it, and the
repairs will not be covered by the
To use the remote control, aim it at warranty. Storage in extreme cold
the transmitter window at either can weaken the batteries. Keep
seatback console and press the the remote control stored in a
button. Direct sunlight or very bright cool, dry place.
light could affect the ability of the
RSE transmitter to receive signals
from the remote control. Check the
batteries if the remote control does
not seem to be working. See
“Battery Replacement” later in this
section. Objects blocking the line of
sight could also affect the function
of the remote control.
Remote Control Buttons z (Display Menu): Press to adjust t (Previous Track/Chapter):

O (Power): Press to turn the the brightness, screen display Press to go to the start of the
video screens on and off. mode, and display the current track or chapter. Press again
language menu. to go to the previous track or
P (Illumination): Press to turn the chapter. This button may not work
remote control backlight on. The q (Return): Press to exit the when the DVD is playing the
backlight times out after several current active menu and return to
the previous menu. This button copyright information or the
seconds if no other button is previews.
pressed. operates only when the display
menu or a DVD menu is active. u (Next Track/Chapter): Press to
v (Title): Press to return to the go to the beginning of the next
main menu of the DVD. This c (Stop): Press to stop playing,
chapter or track. This button might
function could vary for each disc. rewinding, or fast forwarding a DVD.
Press twice to return to the not work when the DVD is playing
y (Main Menu): Press to access beginning of the DVD. the copyright information or the
the DVD menu. The DVD menu is previews.
different on every DVD. Use the s (Play/Pause): Press to start
r (Fast Reverse): Press to
navigation arrows to move the playing a DVD. Press to pause a
DVD while it is playing. Press again quickly reverse the DVD or CD. To
cursor. After making a selection stop fast reversing a DVD video,
press the enter button. This button to continue playing.
only operates when using a DVD. press s. To stop fast reversing a
Depending on the infotainment
DVD audio or CD, release r. This
n, q , p , o (Menu Navigation system in the vehicle, DVD
button might not work when the
Arrows): Use the arrow buttons to playback may be slowed down by
DVD is playing the copyright
navigate through a menu. pressing s then [. Reverse slow
information or the previews.
r (Enter): Press to select the play by pressing s then r. Press
highlighted choice in any menu. s again to cancel slow play.
[ (Fast Forward): Press to fast The AUX button also controls the d (Camera): Press to change the
forward the DVD or CD. To stop fast source display between the left and camera angle on DVDs that have
right video screens as described in
forwarding a DVD video, press s. this feature when the DVD is
the table below: playing.
To stop fast forwarding a DVD audio
or CD, release [. This button might Aux Left Right \ (Clear) (If Available): Press this
Button Screen Screen button within three seconds after
not work when the DVD is playing
Press inputting a numeric selection, to
the copyright information or the
previews. Default clear all numeric inputs.
e (Audio): Press to change audio State DVD DVD } 10 (Double Digit Entries)
tracks on DVDs that have this (No Media Media (If Available): Press this button to
feature when the DVD is playing. Press) select chapter or track numbers
First Aux Video Aux Video greater than 9. Press this button
{ (Subtitles): Press to turn ON/ before inputting the number.
OFF subtitles and to move through Press Source Source
subtitle options when a DVD is Second DVD Aux Video 1 through 0 (Numeric Keypad):
playing. Press Media Source The numbered keypad provides the
capability of direct chapter or track
AUX (Auxiliary): Press to switch Third Aux Video DVD number selection.
the video display between the DVD Press Source Media
player and an auxiliary source. Replacing the Remote Control
Return to Return to
Fourth If the remote control becomes lost
Default Default
Press or damaged, a new universal
State State
remote control can be purchased.
Use a Toshiba® code set for
replacement universal remote
controls.
Battery Replacement Tips and Troubleshooting Chart

To change the remote control Problem Recommended Action
batteries:
No power. The ignition might not be turned to
1. Slide back the rear cover on the ON/RUN or in ACC/ACCESSORY.
remote control.
The picture does not fill the screen. Check the display mode settings in
2. Replace the two batteries in the There are black borders on the top the setup menu by pressing the
compartment. and bottom or on both sides or it display menu button on the remote
3. Replace the battery cover. looks stretched out. control.
Remove the batteries from the In auxiliary mode, the picture moves Check the auxiliary input
remote control if unused for an or scrolls. connections at both devices.
extended period of time.
The remote control does not work. Check to make sure there is no
obstruction between the remote
control and the transmitter window.
Check the batteries to make sure
they are not dead or installed
incorrectly.
After stopping the player, I push If the stop button was pressed one
Play but sometimes the DVD starts time, the DVD player resumes
where I left off and sometimes at the playing where the DVD was
beginning. stopped. If the stop button was
pressed two times the DVD player
begins to play from the beginning of
the DVD.
Tips and Troubleshooting Chart (cont'd) DVD Display Error Messages

Problem Recommended Action The DVD display error message
depends on which radio the vehicle
The auxiliary source is running but Check that the RSE video screen is has. The video screen may display
there is no picture or sound. in the auxiliary source mode by one of the following:
pressing the AUX button on the
remote control. Disc Load/Eject Error or
Check the auxiliary input Mechanical Error: There are disc
connections at both devices. load or eject problems.
Sometimes the wireless headphone Check for obstructions, low Disc Format Error or Unknown
audio cuts out or buzzes. batteries, reception range, and Format: The disc is inserted with
interference from cellular telephone the disc label wrong side up, or if
towers or by using a cellular the disc is damaged.
telephone in the vehicle. Disc Region Error or Disc Error:
Check that the headphones are on The disc is not from a correct
correctly using the L (left) and region.
R (right) on the headphones.
Check that the headphones are No Disc Inserted: No disc is
positioned properly with the present when the Z EJECT or
headband across the top of MEM/DVD/AUX button is pressed
the head. on the radio.
I lost the remote and/or the See your dealer for assistance.
headphones.
The DVD is playing, but there is no Check that the RSE video screen is
picture or sound. sourced to the DVD player by
pressing the AUX button on the
remote control.
DVD Distortion Phone Steering Wheel Controls

Video distortion can occur when b / g (Push To Talk): Press to
operating cellular phones, scanners, Bluetooth (Overview) answer incoming calls, to confirm
CB radios, Global Position Systems system information, and to start
(GPS)*, two-way radios, mobile fax, Vehicles with a Bluetooth system voice recognition.
or walkie talkies. can use a Bluetooth capable cell
phone with a Hands‐Free Profile to $ / c (Mute/End Call): Press to
It might be necessary to turn off the make and receive phone calls. The end a call, reject a call, or to cancel
DVD player when operating one of infotainment system and voice an operation.
these devices in or near the vehicle. recognition are used to control the Infotainment System Controls
*Excludes the OnStar® System. system. The system can be used
while the ignition is in ON/RUN or For information about how to
Cleaning the RSE Seatback ACC/ACCESSORY. The range of navigate the menu system using the
Console the Bluetooth system can be up to infotainment controls, see Operation
9.1 m (30 ft.). Not all phones support on page 7‑7.
Use only a clean cloth dampened
with clean water to clean the RSE all functions and not all phones work 5 (Phone): Press to enter the
seatback console surface. with the Bluetooth system. See Phone main menu.
www.gm.com/bluetooth for more
Cleaning the Video Screen information about compatible Voice Recognition
phones. The voice recognition system uses
Use only a clean cloth dampened
with clean water. Use care when Bluetooth Controls commands to control the system
touching or cleaning the screen as and dial phone numbers.
damage could result. Use the buttons located on the
Noise: The system may not
infotainment system and the
recognize voice commands if there
steering wheel to operate the
is too much background noise.
Bluetooth system.
When to Speak: A tone sounds to See Radio Frequency Statement on The pairing process can be started
indicate that the system is ready for page 13‑18 for FCC information by using the voice recognition
a voice command. Wait for the tone for Federal Communications system or the controls on the
and then speak. Commission and Industry Canada infotainment system.
How to Speak: Speak clearly in a information. Pairing Information:
calm and natural voice. . Up to five cell phones can be
Bluetooth (Infotainment
Audio System paired to the Bluetooth system.
Controls)
When using the Bluetooth system,
. The pairing process is disabled
For information about how to when the vehicle is moving.
sound comes through the vehicle's navigate the menu system using the
front audio system speakers and infotainment controls, see Operation
. The Bluetooth system links with
overrides the audio system. Use the on page 7‑7. the first available paired cell
VOL/ O knob during a call to phone in the order the phone
change the volume level. The Pairing was paired.
adjusted volume level remains in A Bluetooth enabled cell phone . Only one paired cell phone can
memory for later calls. The system must be paired to the Bluetooth be connected to the Bluetooth
maintains a minimum volume level. system first and then connected to system at a time.
Other Information the vehicle before it can be used. . Pairing should only need to be
See the cell phone manufacturer
®
The Bluetooth word mark and completed once, unless changes
user guide for Bluetooth functions
logos are owned by the Bluetooth® to the pairing information have
before pairing the cell phone. If a
SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks been made or the phone is
Bluetooth phone is not connected,
deleted.
by General Motors is under license. calls will be made using OnStar®
Other trademarks and trade names Hands‐Free Calling, if available. To link to a different paired phone,
are those of their respective owners. Refer to the OnStar Owner's Guide see “Linking to a Different Phone”
for more information. later in this section.
Pairing a Phone 5. Start the pairing process on the Listing All Paired and Connected
1. Press the CONFIG button. cell phone that will be paired to Phones
the vehicle. Reference the cell 1. Press the CONFIG button.
2. Select Phone Settings. phone manufacturers user guide
3. Select Bluetooth. for information on this process. 2. Select Phone Settings.
4. Select Pair Device (Phone). Locate the device named “Your 3. Select Bluetooth.
A four digit PIN number appears Vehicle” in the list on the cell 4. Select Device List.
on the display. phone and follow the instructions
on the cell phone to enter the Deleting a Paired Phone
If the “Add new GPS device” four digit PIN number provided
option is selected, the system 1. Press the CONFIG button.
by the system.
will start a search for Bluetooth 2. Select Phone Settings.
“Handsfree” profile devices just 6. The system prompts for a name
for the phone and confirms the 3. Select Bluetooth.
like if “Add new Phone” was
selected . The additional GPS name provided. This name is 4. Select Device List.
location feature which would used to indicate which phone is
5. Select the phone to delete and
provide the vehicle's GPS connected.
follow the on screen prompts.
location through the Bluetooth 7. The system responds with
Serial Port Profile is not “<Phone name> has been
available. successfully paired” after the
pairing process is complete.
8. Repeat Steps 1 through 7 to pair
additional phones.
Linking to a Different Phone Making a Call Using Radio with CD

To link to a different phone, the new Phone Book To make a call using the Phone
phone must be in the vehicle and For cell phones that support the Book menu:
available to be connected to the phone book feature, the Bluetooth
Bluetooth system before the system can use the contacts stored
1. Press the 5 button twice.
process is started. on your cell phone to make calls. 2. Select Phone Book.
1. Press the CONFIG button. See your cell phones owners guide 3. You can search through the list
or contact your wireless provider to by selecting the letter group the
2. Select Phone Settings. find out if this feature is supported phone book entry begins with,
3. Select Bluetooth. by your phone. or press the SELECT button to
4. Select Device List. When a cell phone supports the scroll through the entire list of
phone book feature, the Phone names/numbers in the
5. Select the new phone to link to phone book.
Book, and Call Lists menus are
and follow the on screen
automatically available. 4. Select the name or number you
prompts.
The Phone Book menu allows you want to call.
If delete is selected, the
to access the phone book stored in To make a call using the Call
highlighted phone will be
the cell phone to make a call. Lists menu:
deleted.
The Call Lists menu allows you to
access the phone numbers from the 1. Press the 5 button twice.
Incoming Calls, Outgoing Calls, and 2. Select Call Lists.
Missed Calls menus on your cell
3. Select the Incoming Calls,
phone to make a call.
Outgoing Calls, or Missed
Calls list.
4. Select the name or number you
want to call.
Radio with CD/DVD and MEM Making a Call Accepting or Declining a Call
1. Press the 5 button. Radio with CD When a call is received, the
infotainment system mutes and a
2. Select Phone Book. 1. Press the 5 button twice. ring tone is heard in the vehicle.
3. You can search through the list 2. Enter the character sequence. Accepting a Call
by selecting the letter group the See “Entering a Character
phone book entry begins with, Sequence” in Operation on Turn the menu knob to Answer and
or press the SELECT button to page 7‑7 for more information. press the SELECT button.
scroll through the entire list of
3. Select Call to start dialing the Declining a Call
names/numbers in the
phone book. number. Turn the menu knob to Decline and
Radio with CD/DVD and MEM press the SELECT button.
4. Select the name or number you
want to call. 1. Press the 5 button. Call Waiting
To make a call using the Call Call waiting must be supported on
2. Select Enter number.
Lists menu: the Bluetooth phone and enabled by
3. Enter the character sequence. the wireless service carrier to work.
1. Press the 5 button. See “Entering a Character
2. Select Call Lists. Sequence” in Operation on Accepting a Call
page 7‑7 for more information. Turn the menu knob to Answer and
3. Select the Incoming Calls,
Outgoing Calls, or Missed 4. Select Call to start dialing the press the SELECT button.
Calls list. number. Declining a Call
4. Select the name or number you Turn the menu knob to Decline and
want to call. press the SELECT button.
Switching Between Calls 4. After the call has been placed, Dual Tone Multi-Frequency
(Call Waiting Calls Only) turn the menu knob button and (DTMF) Tones
To switch between calls: choose Merge Calls.
The in‐vehicle Bluetooth system can
1. Turn the menu knob. 5. To add more callers to the send numbers during a call. This is
conference call, repeat steps 1 used when calling a menu driven
2. Select Switch Call from through 4. The amount of callers phone system.
the menu. that can be added are limited by
your wireless service carrier. 1. Turn the menu knob and select
Conference Calling Enter Number.
Conference calling and three way Ending a Call 2. Enter the character sequence,
calling must be supported on the Turn the menu knob and select see “Entering a Character
Bluetooth phone and enabled by the Hang Up. Sequence” in Operation on
wireless service carrier to work. page 7‑7 for more information.
Muting a Call
To start a conference while in a
current call: To Mute a Call
1. Turn the menu knob. Turn the menu knob and select
Mute Call.
2. Select Enter Number.
3. Enter the character sequence To Cancel Mute
then select call. See “Entering a Turn the menu knob and select
Character Sequence” in Mute Call.
Operation on page 7‑7 for
more information.

. Only one paired cell phone can
Bluetooth (Voice Pairing
be connected to the Bluetooth
Recognition) A Bluetooth cell phone must be system at a time.
paired to the Bluetooth system and
Using Voice Recognition then connected to the vehicle before
. If multiple paired cell phones are
it can be used. See your cell phone within range of the system, the
To use voice recognition, press the
system connects to the first
b g button located on the steering manufacturers user guide for
available paired cell phone in the
wheel. The system responds Bluetooth functions before pairing
the cell phone. If a Bluetooth phone order that they were first paired
differently depending on what kind
is not connected, calls will be made to the system. To link to a
of infotainment system the vehicle
using OnStar® Hands‐Free Calling, different paired phone, see
has installed.
if available. Refer to the OnStar “Linking to a Different Phone”
For vehicles without a navigation owner's guide for more information. later in this section.
system, the system responds
“Ready”, followed by a tone. After Pairing Information Pairing a Phone
the tone, say a command. . Up to five cell phones can be 1. Press b g. For vehicles with a
For vehicles with a navigation paired to the Bluetooth system. navigation system, say “Hands
system, the system responds with a Free”, after the tone.
. The pairing process is disabled
tone. After the tone say “Hands when the vehicle is moving. 2. Say “Bluetooth”.
Free” to use the Bluetooth voice
recognition system. The system . Pairing only needs to be 3. Say “Pair”. The system responds
then responds with “Ready”, completed once, unless the with instructions and a four‐digit
followed by a tone. After the tone, pairing information on the cell PIN number. The PIN number is
say a command. phone changes or the cell phone used in Step 5.
is deleted from the system.
For additional information say “Help”
while you are in a voice
recognition menu.
4. Start the pairing process on the Listing All Paired and Connected Deleting a Paired Phone
cell phone that you want to pair. Phones If the phone name you want to
For help with this process, see The system can list all cell phones delete is unknown, see “Listing All
your cell phone manufacturers paired to it. If a paired cell phone is Paired and Connected Phones”.
user guide. also connected to the vehicle, the
5. Locate the device named “Your system responds with “is connected” 1. Press b g. For vehicles with a
Vehicle” in the list on the cell after that phone name. navigation system, say “Hands
phone. Follow the instructions Free”, after the tone.
on the cell phone to enter the 1. Press b g. For vehicles with a
2. Say “Bluetooth”.
PIN number that was provided in navigation system, say “Hands
Step 3. After the PIN number is Free”, after the tone. 3. Say “Delete”. The system asks
successfully entered, the system for which phone to delete.
2. Say “Bluetooth”.
prompts you to provide a name 4. Say the name of the phone you
for the paired cell phone. This 3. Say “List”. want to delete.
name will be used to indicate
which phones are paired and
connected to the vehicle, see
“Listing All Paired and
Connected Phones” later in this
section for more information.
6. Repeat Steps 1 through 5 to pair
additional phones.
Connecting to a Different Phone Storing and Deleting Phone Using the “Store” Command
To connect to a different cell phone, Numbers 1. Press b g. For vehicles with a
the Bluetooth system looks for the The system can store up to navigation system, say “Hands
next available cell phone in the 30 phone numbers as name tags in Free”, after the tone.
order in which all the available cell the Hands Free Directory that is
phones were paired. Depending on 2. Say “Store”.
shared between the Bluetooth and
which cell phone you want to OnStar systems. 3. Say the phone number or group
connect to, you may have to use of numbers you want to store all
this command several times. The following commands are used
at once with no pauses, then
delete and store phone numbers.
follow the directions given by the
1. Press b g. For vehicles with a Store: This command will store a system to save a name tag for
navigation system, say “Hands phone number, or a group of this number.
Free”, after the tone. numbers as a name tag.
2. Say “Bluetooth”. Using the “Digit Store” Command
Digit Store: This command allows
3. Say “Change phone”. a phone number to be stored as a If an unwanted number is
name tag by entering the digits one recognized by the system, say
. If another cell phone is “Clear” at any time to clear the last
at a time.
found, the response will be number.
“<Phone name> is now Delete: This command is used to
connected”. delete individual name tags. To hear all of the numbers
recognized by the system, say
. If another cell phone is not Delete All Name Tags: This “Verify” at any time.
found, the original phone command deletes all stored name
remains connected. tags in the Hands Free Calling 1. Press b g. For vehicles with a
Directory and the OnStarTurn by navigation system, say “Hands
Turn Destinations Directory. Free”, after the tone.
2. Say “Digit Store”.
3. Say each digit, one at a time, Using the “Delete All Name Tags” Making a Call
that you want to store. After Command
Calls can be made using the
each digit is entered, the system This command deletes all stored following commands.
repeats back the digit it heard name tags in the Hands Free
followed by a tone. After the last Dial or Call: The dial or call
Calling Directory and the
digit has been entered, say command can be used
OnStarTurn by Turn Destinations
“Store”, and then follow the interchangeably to dial a phone
Directory.
directions given by the system to number or a stored name tag.
save a name tag for this number. To delete all name tags:
Digit Dial: This command allows a
Using the “Delete” Command 1. Press b g. For vehicles with a phone number to be dialed by
navigation system, say “Hands entering the digits one at a time.
1. Press b g. For vehicles with a Free”, after the tone. Re‐dial : This command is used to
navigation system, say “Hands
2. Say “Delete all name tags”. dial the last number used on the cell
Free”, after the tone.
phone.
2. Say “Delete”. Listing Stored Numbers
Using the “Dial” or “Call”
3. Say the name tag you want to The list command will list all the Command
delete. stored numbers and name tags.
1. Press b g. For vehicles with a
Using the “List” Command navigation system, say “Hands
1. Press b g. For vehicles with a Free”, after the tone.
navigation system, say “Hands 2. Say “Dial” or “Call”.
Free”, after the tone.
3. Say the entire number without
2. Say “Directory”. pausing or say the name tag.
3. Say “Hands Free Calling”. Once connected, the person called
4. Say “List”. will be heard through the audio
speakers.
Using the “Digit Dial” Command 3. Say each digit, one at a time, Receiving a Call
The digit dial command allows a that you want to dial. After each
When an incoming call is received,
phone number to be dialed by digit is entered, the system
the audio system mutes and a ring
entering the digits one at a time. repeats back the digit it heard
tone is heard in the vehicle.
After each digit is entered, the followed by a tone. After the last
system repeats back the digit it digit has been entered, . Press b g to answer the call.
heard followed by a tone. say “Dial”.
. Press c $ to ignore a call.
If an unwanted number is Once connected, the person called
recognized by the system, say will be heard through the audio Call Waiting
“Clear” at any time to clear the last speakers.
Call waiting must be supported on
number. Using the “Re‐dial” Command the cell phone and enabled by the
To hear all of the numbers wireless service carrier.
1. Press b g. For vehicles with a
recognized by the system, say navigation system, say “Hands . Press b g to answer an
“Verify” at any time. Free”, after the tone. incoming call when another call
1. Press b g. For vehicles with a 2. After the tone, say “Re‐dial”. is active. The original call is
navigation system, say “Hands placed on hold.
Free”, after the tone. Once connected, the person called
will be heard through the audio . Press b g again to return to the
2. Say “Digit Dial”. speakers. original call.
. To ignore the incoming call, no
action is required.
. Press c $ to disconnect the
current call and switch to the call
on hold.
Three‐Way Calling Muting a Call To Transfer Audio From the

Bluetooth System to a Cell Phone
Three‐way calling must be During a call, all sounds from inside
supported on the cell phone and the vehicle can be muted so that the During a call with the audio in the
enabled by the wireless service person on the other end of the call vehicle:
carrier. cannot hear them.
1. Press b g.
1. While on a call, press b g. To mute a call, press b g, and then 2. Say “Transfer Call”.
2. Say “Three‐way call”. say “Mute Call”.
To Transfer Audio to the Bluetooth
3. Use the dial or call command to To cancel mute, press b g, and System From a Cell Phone
dial the number of the third party then say “Un‐mute Call”.
During a call with the audio on the
to be called.
Transferring a Call cell phone, press b g. The audio
4. Once the call is connected, transfers to the vehicle. If the audio
Audio can be transferred between
press b g to link all the callers the Bluetooth system and the cell does not transfer to the vehicle, use
together. phone. the audio transfer feature on the
cell phone. See your cell phone
Ending a Call The cell phone must be paired and manufacturers user guide for more
connected with the Bluetooth information.
Press c $ to end a call. system before a call can be
transferred. The connection process
can take up to two minutes after the
ignition is turned to ON/RUN.
Voice Pass-Thru Dual Tone Multi-Frequency Clearing the System

Voice pass‐thru allows access to the (DTMF) Tones Unless information is deleted out of
voice recognition commands on the The Bluetooth system can send the in‐vehicle Bluetooth system, it
cell phone. See your cell phone numbers and the numbers stored as will be retained indefinitely. This
manufacturers user guide to see if name tags during a call. You can includes all saved name tags in the
the cell phone supports this feature. use this feature when calling a phone book and phone pairing
To access contacts stored in the cell menu driven phone system. Account information. For information on how
phone: numbers can also be stored for use. to delete this information, see the
previous sections on Deleting a
1. Press b g. For vehicles with a Sending a Number or Name Tag Paired Phone and Deleting
During a Call Name Tags.
navigation system, say “Hands
Free”, after the tone. 1. Press b g. The system
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system responds “Ready”, followed by
responds “Bluetooth ready”, a tone.
followed by a tone. 2. Say “Dial”.
3. Say “Voice”. The system 3. Say the number or name tag
responds “OK, accessing to send.
<phone name>”.
. The cell phone's normal
prompt messages will go
through its cycle according
to the phone's operating
instructions.
Climate Controls 8-1
Climate Controls Climate Control Systems

Automatic Climate Control System
Climate Control Systems For vehicles with this system, it controls the heating, cooling, and ventilation.
Automatic Climate Control
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Dual Automatic Climate
Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Air Vents
Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Maintenance
Air Intake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Passenger Compartment
Air Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
A. Power F. AUTO
B. Temperature Control G. Defrost
C. Fan Control H. Air Conditioning
D. Air Delivery Mode Control I. Rear Window Defogger
E. Recirculation
8-2 Climate Controls
Automatic Operation Manual Operation \ (Bi-Level): Air is divided

The system automatically controls O (Power): Press to turn the fan between the instrument panel
the fan speed, air delivery, air on or off. outlets and the floor outlets.
conditioning and recirculation in D C (Fan Control): Press to C (Tri‐Level): Air is divided
order to heat or cool the vehicle to increase or decrease the fan speed. between the windshield, instrument
the desired temperature. The fan speed setting appears on panel, and floor outlets.
When the AUTO indicator light is the main display. Pressing either [ (Floor): Air is directed to the
on, the system is in full automatic button cancels automatic fan control floor outlets.
operation. If the air delivery mode, and the fan can be controlled
fan speed, recirculation or air manually. Press AUTO to return to - (Defog): Clears the windows of
conditioning setting is adjusted, the automatic operation. fog or moisture. Air is directed to the
AUTO indicator turns off and the windshield and floor outlets.
e * (Air Delivery Mode
selected settings will appear on the Control): Press to change the 0 (Defrost): Clears the
display. direction of the airflow. The current windshield of fog or frost more
To place the system in automatic mode appears in the display screen. quickly. Air is directed to the
mode do the following: Pressing either button cancels windshield. Selecting defrost will
automatic air delivery control and disable automatic control.
1. Press AUTO.
the direction of the airflow can be For best results, clear all snow and
2. Set the temperature. Allow the controlled manually. Press AUTO to ice from windshield before
system time to stabilize. Adjust return to automatic operation. defrosting.
the temperature as needed for
best comfort. To change the current mode, select # (Air Conditioning): Press to
one of the following: turn the air conditioning system on
Q / R (Temperature Control): Y (Vent): Air is directed to the or off. If the fan is turned off or the
Press to increase or decrease the outside temperature falls below
temperature. instrument panel outlets.
freezing, the air conditioning system
will not run.
Pressing this button cancels Rear Window Defogger For vehicles with heated outside
automatic air conditioning and turns rearview mirrors, they turn on when
off the air conditioner. Press AUTO
= (Rear Window Defogger): the rear window defogger button is
Press to turn the rear window
to return to automatic operation on and helps to clear fog or frost
defogger on or off.
and the air conditioner runs from the surface of the mirror.
automatically as needed. When the The rear window defogger turns See Heated Mirrors on page 2‑17.
indicator light is on, the air off automatically after about
Notice: Do not try to clear frost
conditioner runs automatically to 10 minutes. If turned on again it
or other material from the inside
cool the air inside the vehicle or to runs for about 5 minutes before
of the front windshield and rear
dry the air needed to defog the turning off. The defogger can
window with a razor blade or
windshield faster. also be turned off by turning the
anything else that is sharp. This
ignition to ACC/ACCESSORY or
> (Recirculation): Press to LOCK/OFF.
may damage the rear window
alternate between recirculating air defogger grid and affect your
inside the vehicle or pulling in The rear window defogger can be radio's ability to pick up stations
outside air. When the indicator light set to automatic operation, see clearly. The repairs wouldn't be
is on, air is being recirculated inside Climate and Air Quality under covered by your warranty.
the vehicle. This helps to quickly Vehicle Personalization on
Remote Start Climate Control
cool the air inside the vehicle or page 5‑36. When auto rear defog is
Operation: For vehicles with the
prevent outside air and odors from selected, the rear window defogger
remote vehicle start feature, the
entering. turns on automatically when the
climate control system may run
interior temperature is cold and the
Pressing this button cancels when the vehicle is started remotely.
outside temperature is about 40°F
automatic recirculation. Press AUTO The system uses the driver's
and below. The auto rear defogger
to return to automatic operation and previous settings to heat or cool the
turns off automatically after about
recirculation runs automatically as inside of the vehicle. See Remote
10 minutes, or after 5 minutes if the
needed. Vehicle Start on page 2‑8.
outside temperature is not as cold.
The rear window defogger turns on
if it is cold outside.
Sensors Dual Automatic Climate Control System

The solar sensor located on top of For vehicles with this system, it controls the heating, cooling, and ventilation.
the instrument panel near the
windshield monitors the solar heat.
The climate control system uses
the sensor information to adjust
the temperature, fan speed,
recirculation, and air delivery mode
for best comfort.
Do not cover the sensors or the
automatic climate control system
may not work properly.
A. Power G. Passenger Temperature Control

B. Driver Temperature Control H. AUTO
C. Defrost I. Rear Window Defogger
D. Fan Control J. Heated Steering Wheel
E. Air Delivery Mode Control K. Air Conditioning
F. Recirculation / Automatic L. ZONE
Recirculation
Automatic Operation Q / R (Driver and Passenger e * (Air Delivery Mode

The system automatically controls Temperature Control): The Control): Press to change the
the fan speed, air delivery, air temperature can be adjusted direction of the airflow. The current
conditioning and recirculation in separately for the driver and the mode appears in the display screen.
order to heat or cool the vehicle to passenger. Press to increase or Pressing either button cancels
the desired temperature. decrease the temperature. automatic air delivery control and
ZONE: Press to link all climate the direction of the airflow is
When the AUTO indicator light is controlled manually. Press AUTO to
on, the system is in full automatic zone settings to the driver's
settings. The ZONE indicator light return to automatic operation.
operation. If the air delivery mode,
fan speed, recirculation or air will turn off. When the passenger To change the current mode, select
conditioning setting is adjusted, the settings are adjusted, the ZONE one of the following:
AUTO indicator turns off and the indicator light is on. Y (Vent): Air is directed to the
selected settings will appear on the Manual Operation instrument panel outlets.
display.
O (Power): Press to turn the fan \ (Bi-Level): Air is divided
To place the system in automatic off or on. between the instrument panel
mode do the following: outlets and the floor outlets.
D C (Fan Control): Press to
1. Press AUTO. increase or decrease the fan speed. C (Tri‐Level): Air is divided
2. Set the temperature. Allow the The fan speed setting appears on between the windshield, instrument
system time to stabilize. Adjust the main display. Pressing either panel, and floor outlets.
the temperature as needed for button cancels automatic fan control [ (Floor): Air is directed to the
best comfort. and the fan is controlled manually. floor outlets.
Press AUTO to return to automatic
operation. - (Defog): Clears the windows of
fog or moisture. Air is directed to the
windshield and floor outlets.
0 (Defrost): Clears the > / / (Recirculation/Auto Auto Defog: The climate control
windshield of fog or frost more Recirculation): Press to change to system may have a sensor to
quickly. Air is directed to the automatic control of air recirculation automatically detect high humidity
windshield. inside the vehicle. When the auto inside the vehicle. When high
recirculation indicator light is on, the humidity is detected, the climate
For best results, clear all snow and control system may adjust to
ice from windshield before air is automatically recirculated as
needed to help quickly cool the air outside air supply and turn on the
defrosting. air conditioner. The fan speed may
inside the vehicle.
# (Air Conditioning): Press to
In auto recirculation control, the Air
slightly increase to help prevent
turn the air conditioning system on fogging. If the climate control
or off. If the fan is turned off or the Quality Control system may operate system does not detect possible
outside temperature falls below when pollution is detected. To adjust window fogging, it returns to normal
freezing, the air conditioner will the sensitivity of the Air Quality operation. To turn Auto Defog off or
not run. Control, see Climate and Air Quality on, see Climate and Air Quality
under Vehicle Personalization on under Vehicle Personalization on
Pressing this button cancels page 5‑36. page 5‑36.
automatic air conditioning and turns
off the air conditioner. Press AUTO When the > indicator light is on, air
to return to automatic operation is recirculated inside the vehicle.
and the air conditioner runs If both indicator lights are off,
automatically as needed. When outside air will flow into the vehicle.
the indicator light is on, the air Press AUTO or / to return to
conditioner runs automatically to automatic operation.
cool the air inside the vehicle or to
dry the air needed to defog the
windshield faster.
Rear Window Defogger For vehicles with heated outside Remote Start Climate Control
rearview mirrors, they turn on when Operation: For vehicles with the
= (Rear Window Defogger): the rear window defogger button is remote vehicle start feature, the
Press to turn the rear window
on and helps to clear fog or frost climate control system may run
defogger on or off.
from the surface of the mirror. when the vehicle is started remotely.
The rear window defogger turns See Heated Mirrors on page 2‑17. The system uses the driver's
off automatically after about previous settings to heat or cool the
Notice: Do not try to clear frost
10 minutes. If turned on again it inside of the vehicle. See Remote
or other material from the inside
runs for about 5 minutes before Vehicle Start on page 2‑8.
of the front windshield and rear
turning off. The defogger can also
window with a razor blade or The rear window defogger turns on
be turned off by turning the
anything else that is sharp. This if it is cold outside.
ignition to ACC/ACCESSORY or
may damage the rear window
LOCK/OFF. Sensors
defogger grid and affect your
The rear window defogger can be radio's ability to pick up stations The solar sensor, located on top of
set to automatic operation, see clearly. The repairs wouldn't be the instrument panel near the
Climate and Air Quality under covered by your warranty. windshield monitors the solar heat.
Vehicle Personalization on
page 5‑36. When auto rear defog is
( (Heated Steering Wheel): For The climate control system uses
vehicles with this feature, press to the sensor information to adjust
selected, the rear window defogger
turn on or off. See Heated Steering the temperature, fan speed,
turns on automatically when the
Wheel on page 5‑3. recirculation, and air delivery mode
interior temperature is cold and the
outside temperature is about 40°F for best comfort.
and below. The auto rear defogger Do not cover the sensors or the
turns off automatically after about automatic climate control system
10 minutes, or after 5 minutes if the may not work properly.
outside temperature is not as cold.
Air Vents Maintenance The passenger compartment air

filter can be accessed by removing
Use the louvers located on the air the entire glove box.
vents to change the direction of the Air Intake
1. Open the passenger side door.
airflow. Clear away any ice, snow, or leaves Remove the end cover located
To open the vent, move the from the air intake at the base of the on the side of the instrument
thumbwheel to R. To close the vent, windshield that can block the flow of panel in the top right corner.
air into the vehicle. Remove the screw affixed to the
move the thumbwheel to (.
side of the glove box.
Operation Tips Passenger Compartment 2. Open the glove box door and
. Keep all outlets open whenever Air Filter remove the attached screws
possible for best system The filter removes dust, pollen, and from around the glove box.
performance. other airborne irritants from outside 3. Lower the loosened glove box
. Keep the path under all seats air that is pulled into the vehicle. housing.
clear of objects to help circulate The filter should be replaced as part 4. Unplug both wire cables and
the air inside the vehicle more of routine scheduled maintenance. remove the glove box.
effectively. See Scheduled Maintenance on
page 11‑2 for replacement 5. Pull the three tabs to release
. Use of non-GM approved hood and open the filter door.
deflectors can adversely affect intervals. To find out what type of
the performance of the system. filter to use, see Maintenance
Replacement Parts on page 11‑9.
6. Remove the old air filter. 7. Install the new air filter.
8. Reinstall the air filter door.
Re‐install the glove box.
See your dealer if additional
assistance is needed.
2 NOTES
Driving and Operating 9-1
Driving and Starting and Operating

New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . 9-17
Brakes
Antilock Brake
Operating Ignition Positions (Key
Access) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18
System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32
Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33
Ignition Positions (Keyless Brake Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35
Driving Information Access) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19
Retained Accessory Ride Control Systems
Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 Traction Control
Drunk Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Power (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21
Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . 9-21 System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35
Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Electronic Stability
Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4 Engine Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24
Shifting Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25 Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-37
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 Limited-Slip Differential . . . . . . 9-38
Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6 Shifting Out of Park . . . . . . . . . . 9-26
Parking Over Things Selective Ride Control . . . . . . . 9-38
Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Driving on Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . 9-8 That Burn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27 Cruise Control
Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8 Engine Exhaust Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-39
Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . 9-9
Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27 Object Detection Systems
Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9 Running the Vehicle While
If the Vehicle is Stuck . . . . . . . . 9-11 Ultrasonic Parking Assist . . . . 9-42
Parked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28 Side Blind Zone
Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . 9-12
Automatic Transmission Alert (SBZA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-44
Automatic Transmission . . . . . 9-28 Rear Vision
Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30 Camera (RVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-46
Drive Systems
All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32
9-2 Driving and Operating
Fuel Driving Information

Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-50 { WARNING
Recommended Fuel . . . . . . . . . 9-50
Gasoline Specifications . . . . . . 9-51 Defensive Driving Assume that other road users
California Fuel (pedestrians, bicyclists, and other
Defensive driving means “always
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-51 expect the unexpected.” The first drivers) are going to be careless
Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . 9-52 step in driving defensively is to wear and make mistakes. Anticipate
Fuel Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-52 your safety belt, see Safety Belts on what they might do and be ready.
Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-53 page 3‑13. In addition:
Filling a Portable Fuel . Allow enough following
Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-54 distance between you and
Towing the driver in front of you.
General Towing . Focus on the task of driving.
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-55
Driver distraction can cause
Driving Characteristics and
Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-56 collisions resulting in injury or
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-60 possible death. These simple
Towing Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . 9-61 defensive driving techniques
could save your life.
Conversions and Add-Ons
Add-On Electrical
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-62
Drunk Driving Police records show that almost that when anyone who has been
40 percent of all motor drinking — driver or passenger — is
vehicle-related deaths involve in a crash, that person's chance of
{ WARNING alcohol. In most cases, these being killed or permanently disabled
Drinking and then driving is very deaths are the result of someone is higher than if the person had not
who was drinking and driving. In been drinking.
dangerous. Your reflexes,
recent years, more than
perceptions, attentiveness, and
judgment can be affected by even
17,000 annual motor vehicle-related Control of a Vehicle
deaths have been associated with
a small amount of alcohol. You the use of alcohol, with about The following three systems
can have a serious — or even 250,000 people injured. help to control the vehicle while
fatal — collision if you drive after driving — brakes, steering, and
drinking. Do not drink and drive or For persons under 21, it is against accelerator. At times, as when
ride with a driver who has been the law in every U.S. state to drink driving on snow or ice, it is easy to
drinking. Ride home in a cab; or if alcohol. There are good medical, ask more of those control systems
psychological, and developmental than the tires and road can provide.
you are with a group, designate a
reasons for these laws. Meaning, you can lose control of the
driver who will not drink.
The obvious way to eliminate the vehicle. See Traction Control
leading highway safety problem is System (TCS) on page 9‑35.
Death and injury associated with for people never to drink alcohol
drinking and driving is a global Adding non‐dealer accessories can
and then drive. affect vehicle performance. See
tragedy.
Medical research shows that Accessories and Modifications on
Alcohol affects four things that alcohol in a person's system can page 10‑3.
anyone needs to drive a vehicle: make crash injuries worse,
judgment, muscular coordination, especially injuries to the brain,
vision, and attentiveness. spinal cord, or heart. This means
Braking And, of course, actual stopping If the engine ever stops while the
distances vary greatly with the vehicle is being driven, brake
See Brake System Warning Light surface of the road, whether it is normally but do not pump the
on page 5‑17. pavement or gravel; the condition of brakes. If the brakes are pumped,
Braking action involves perception the road, whether it is wet, dry, the pedal could get harder to push
time and reaction time. Deciding to or icy; tire tread; the condition of the down. If the engine stops, there will
push the brake pedal is perception brakes; the weight of the vehicle; still be some power brake assist but
time. Actually doing it is and the amount of brake force it will be used when the brake is
reaction time. applied. applied. Once the power assist is
Avoid needless heavy braking. used up, it can take longer to stop
Average reaction time is about and the brake pedal will be harder
three‐fourths of a second. But that is Some people drive in
spurts — heavy acceleration to push.
only an average. It might be less
with one driver and as long as two followed by heavy braking — rather Adding non‐dealer accessories can
or three seconds or more with than keeping pace with traffic. This affect vehicle performance. See
another. Age, physical condition, is a mistake. The brakes might not Accessories and Modifications on
alertness, coordination, and have time to cool between hard page 10‑3.
eyesight all play a part. So do stops. The brakes will wear out
alcohol, drugs, and frustration. much faster with a lot of heavy
But even in three‐fourths of a braking. Keeping pace with the
second, a vehicle moving at traffic and allowing realistic following
100 km/h (60 mph) travels 20 m distances eliminates a lot of
(66 ft). That could be a lot of unnecessary braking. That means
distance in an emergency, so better braking and longer brake life.
keeping enough space between the
vehicle and others is important.
Steering If the vehicle seems harder to steer Steering in Emergencies

than normal when parking or driving
Power Steering There are times when steering can
slowly, there may be a problem with
be more effective than braking. For
If power steering assist is lost the system. You will still have power
example, you come over a hill and
because the engine stops or the steering, but steering will be stiffer
find a truck stopped in your lane,
power steering system is not than normal at slow speeds. See
or a car suddenly pulls out from
functioning, the vehicle can be your dealer for service.
nowhere, or a child darts out from
steered but it will take more effort. Steering Tips between parked cars and stops right
in front of you. These problems can
Speed Variable Assist Steering It is important to take curves at a be avoided by braking — if you can
The vehicle has a steering system reasonable speed. stop in time. But sometimes you
that varies the amount of effort Traction in a curve depends on the cannot stop in time because there is
required to steer the vehicle in condition of the tires and the road no room. That is the time for
relation to the speed of the vehicle. surface, the angle at which the evasive action — steering around
The amount of steering effort curve is banked, and vehicle speed. the problem.
required is less at slower speeds While in a curve, speed is the one The vehicle can perform very well in
to make the vehicle more factor that can be controlled. emergencies like these. First apply
maneuverable and easier to park. If there is a need to reduce speed, the brakes. See Braking on
At faster speeds, the steering effort do it before entering the curve, while page 9‑4.
increases to provide a sport-like feel the front wheels are straight.
to the steering. This provides
Try to adjust the speed so you can
maximum control and stability.
drive through the curve. Maintain a
reasonable, steady speed. Wait to
accelerate until out of the curve, and
then accelerate gently into the
straightaway.
It is better to remove as much The fact that such emergency is nothing in the way, steer so that
speed as possible from a collision. situations are always possible is a the vehicle straddles the edge of the
Then steer around the problem, to good reason to practice defensive pavement. Turn the steering wheel
the left or right depending on the driving at all times and wear safety 8 to 13 cm (3 to 5 inches), about
space available. belts properly. one-eighth turn, until the right front
tire contacts the pavement edge.
Off-Road Recovery Then turn the steering wheel to go
straight down the roadway.
The vehicle's right wheels can drop
off the edge of a road onto the
shoulder while driving.
Loss of Control
Let us review what driving experts
say about what happens when the
three control systems — brakes,
steering, and acceleration — do not
have enough friction where the tires
meet the road to do what the driver
has asked.
An emergency like this requires In any emergency, do not give up.
close attention and a quick decision. Keep trying to steer and constantly
If holding the steering wheel at the seek an escape route or area of
recommended 9 and 3 o'clock less danger.
positions, it can be turned a full
180 degrees very quickly without
removing either hand. But you have If the level of the shoulder is only
to act fast, steer quickly, and just as slightly below the pavement,
quickly straighten the wheel once recovery should be fairly easy. Ease
you have avoided the object. off the accelerator and then, if there
Skidding If the vehicle starts to slide, ease vehicle speed by shifting to a lower
your foot off the accelerator pedal gear. Any sudden changes could
In a skid, a driver can lose control of
and quickly steer the way you want cause the tires to slide. You might
the vehicle. Defensive drivers avoid
the vehicle to go. If you start not realize the surface is slippery
most skids by taking reasonable
steering quickly enough, the vehicle until the vehicle is skidding. Learn to
care suited to existing conditions,
may straighten out. Always be ready recognize warning clues — such as
and by not overdriving those
for a second skid if it occurs. enough water, ice, or packed snow
conditions. But skids are always
Of course, traction is reduced when on the road to make a mirrored
possible.
water, snow, ice, gravel, or other surface — and slow down when you
The three types of skids correspond have any doubt.
material is on the road. For safety,
to the vehicle's three control
slow down and adjust your driving to Remember: Antilock brakes help
systems. In the braking skid, the
these conditions. It is important to avoid only the braking skid.
wheels are not rolling. In the
slow down on slippery surfaces
steering or cornering skid, too much
because stopping distance is longer
speed or steering in a curve causes
and vehicle control more limited.
tires to slip and lose cornering force.
And in the acceleration skid, too While driving on a surface with
much throttle causes the driving reduced traction, try to avoid
wheels to spin. sudden steering, acceleration,
or braking, including reducing

. Keep windshield wiping
Driving on Wet Roads WARNING (Continued) equipment in good shape.
Rain and wet roads can reduce .
happens, you and other vehicle Keep the windshield washer fluid
vehicle traction and affect your
reservoir filled.
ability to stop and accelerate. occupants could drown. Do not
Always drive slower in these types ignore police warnings and be . Have good tires with proper
of driving conditions and avoid very cautious about trying to drive tread depth. See Tires on
driving through large puddles and through flowing water. page 10‑46.
deep‐standing or flowing water. . Turn off cruise control.
Hydroplaning
{ WARNING Hydroplaning is dangerous. Water Highway Hypnosis
Wet brakes can cause crashes. can build up under your vehicle's Always be alert and pay attention to
They might not work as well in a tires so they actually ride on the your surroundings while driving.
quick stop and could cause water. This can happen if the road is If you become tired or sleepy, find a
pulling to one side. You could wet enough and you are going fast safe place to park your vehicle
enough. When your vehicle is and rest.
lose control of the vehicle.
hydroplaning, it has little or no
After driving through a large contact with the road. Other driving tips include:
puddle of water or a car/vehicle There is no hard and fast rule about
. Keep the vehicle well ventilated.
wash, lightly apply the brake hydroplaning. The best advice is to . Keep interior temperature cool.
pedal until the brakes work slow down when the road is wet.
normally.
. Keep your eyes moving — scan
Other Rainy Weather Tips the road ahead and to the sides.
Flowing or rushing water creates
strong forces. Driving through Besides slowing down, other wet . Check the rearview mirror and
weather driving tips include: vehicle instruments often.
flowing water could cause your
vehicle to be carried away. If this . Allow extra following distance.
(Continued) . Pass with caution.

. Pay attention to special road
Hill and Mountain Roads
{ WARNING signs (falling rocks area, winding
Driving on steep hills or through roads, long grades, passing or
mountains is different than driving Coasting downhill in N (Neutral) no-passing zones) and take
on flat or rolling terrain. Tips for or with the ignition off is appropriate action.
driving in these conditions include: dangerous. The brakes will have
. Keep the vehicle serviced and in to do all the work of slowing down Winter Driving
good shape. and they could get so hot that
they would not work well. You Driving on Snow or Ice
. Check all fluid levels and brakes, would then have poor braking or Drive carefully when there is snow
tires, cooling system, and even none going down a hill. You or ice between the tires and the
transmission. could crash. Always have the road, creating less traction or grip.
. Shift to a lower gear when going engine running and the vehicle in Wet ice can occur at about 0°C
down steep or long hills. gear when going downhill. (32°F) when freezing rain begins to
fall, resulting in even less traction.
{ WARNING . Stay in your own lane. Do not
Avoid driving on wet ice or in
freezing rain until roads can be
swing wide or cut across the
If you do not shift down, the treated with salt or sand.
center of the road. Drive at
brakes could get so hot that they speeds that let you stay in your Drive with caution, whatever the
would not work well. You would own lane. condition. Accelerate gently so
then have poor braking or even traction is not lost. Accelerating too
none going down a hill. You could
. Top of hills: Be alert —
quickly causes the wheels to spin
crash. Shift down to let the engine something could be in your lane
and makes the surface under the
assist the brakes on a steep (stalled car, accident).
tires slick, so there is even less
downhill slope. traction.
Try not to break the fragile traction. Blizzard Conditions

If you accelerate too fast, the drive WARNING (Continued)
Being stuck in snow can be in a
wheels will spin and polish the
serious situation. Stay with the If the vehicle is stuck in the snow:
surface under the tires even more.
vehicle unless there is help nearby.
The Antilock Brake System (ABS)
. Clear away snow from around
If possible, use the Roadside
on page 9‑32 improves vehicle the base of your vehicle,
Assistance Program on page 13‑7.
stability during hard stops on especially any that is blocking
To get help and keep everyone in
slippery roads, but apply the brakes the exhaust pipe.
the vehicle safe:
sooner than when on dry pavement. . Check again from time to
. Turn on the hazard warning
Allow greater following distance on time to be sure snow does
flashers.
any slippery road and watch for not collect there.
. Tie a red cloth to an outside
slippery spots. Icy patches can . Open a window about 5 cm
mirror.
occur on otherwise clear roads in (2 in) on the side of the
shaded areas. The surface of a vehicle that is away from the
curve or an overpass can remain icy { WARNING wind to bring in fresh air.
when the surrounding roads are
Snow can trap engine exhaust . Fully open the air outlets on
clear. Avoid sudden steering
under the vehicle. This may or under the instrument
maneuvers and braking while
cause exhaust gases to get panel.
on ice.
inside. Engine exhaust contains . Adjust the climate control
Turn off cruise control on slippery Carbon Monoxide (CO) which system to a setting that
surfaces. cannot be seen or smelled. It can circulates the air inside the
cause unconsciousness and even vehicle and set the fan speed
death. to the highest setting. See
(Continued) Climate Control System in the
Index.
(Continued)
WARNING (Continued)
To save fuel, run the engine for only If the Vehicle is Stuck
short periods as needed to warm
the vehicle and then shut the engine Slowly and cautiously spin the
For more information about off and close the window most of wheels to free the vehicle when
carbon monoxide, see Engine the way to save heat. Repeat this stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow.
Exhaust on page 9‑27. until help arrives but only when you If stuck too severely for the traction
Snow can trap exhaust gases feel really uncomfortable from the system to free the vehicle, turn the
under your vehicle. This can cold. Moving about to keep warm traction system off and use the
cause deadly CO (Carbon also helps. rocking method.
Monoxide) gas to get inside. CO If it takes some time for help to
could overcome you and kill you. arrive, now and then when you run { WARNING
You cannot see it or smell it, so the engine, push the accelerator
you might not know it is in your pedal slightly so the engine runs If the vehicle's tires spin at high
vehicle. Clear away snow from faster than the idle speed. This speed, they can explode, and you
around the base of your vehicle, keeps the battery charged to restart or others could be injured. The
especially any that is blocking the the vehicle and to signal for help vehicle can overheat, causing an
exhaust. with the headlamps. Do this as little engine compartment fire or other
as possible to save fuel. damage. Spin the wheels as little
as possible and avoid going
Run the engine for short periods above 55 km/h (35 mph) as
only as needed to keep warm, but
shown on the speedometer.
be careful.
For information about using tire

chains on the vehicle, see Tire
Chains on page 10‑68.
Rocking the Vehicle to Get Vehicle Load Limits

it Out { WARNING
It is very important to know how
Turn the steering wheel left and much weight the vehicle can Do not load the vehicle any
right to clear the area around the carry. This weight is called the heavier than the Gross
front wheels. Turn off any traction Vehicle Weight Rating
vehicle capacity weight and
system. Shift back and forth (GVWR), or either the
between R (Reverse) and a forward includes the weight of all
occupants, cargo and all maximum front or rear Gross
gear, spinning the wheels as little as
possible. To prevent transmission nonfactory‐installed options. Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
wear, wait until the wheels stop Two labels on the vehicle show If you do, parts on the vehicle
spinning before shifting gears. how much weight it may can break, and it can change
Release the accelerator pedal while properly carry, the Tire and the way the vehicle handles.
shifting, and press lightly on the Loading Information label and These could cause you to lose
accelerator pedal when the the Certification label. control and crash. Also,
transmission is in gear. Slowly overloading can shorten the
spinning the wheels in the forward life of the vehicle.
and reverse directions causes a
rocking motion that could free the
vehicle. If that does not get the
vehicle out after a few tries, it might
need to be towed out. If the vehicle
does need to be towed out, see
Towing the Vehicle on page 10‑88.
Tire and Loading Information positions (A), and the maximum Steps for Determining Correct
Label vehicle capacity weight (B) in Load Limit
kilograms and pounds. 1. Locate the statement “The
The Tire and Loading combined weight of
Information label also shows occupants and cargo should
the tire size of the original never exceed XXX kg or
equipment tires (C) and the XXX lbs” on your vehicle's
recommended cold tire inflation placard.
pressures (D). For more 2. Determine the combined
information on tires and inflation weight of the driver and
see Tires on page 10‑46 and Tire passengers that will be riding
Pressure on page 10‑53 . in your vehicle.
There is also important loading 3. Subtract the combined
Label Example information on the Certification
weight of the driver and
A vehicle specific Tire and label. It tells you the Gross
passengers from XXX kg or
Loading Information label is Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
XXX lbs.
attached to the vehicle's center and the Gross Axle Weight
pillar (B-pillar). With the driver's Rating (GAWR) for the front and
door open, you will find the label rear axle. See “Certification
attached below the door lock Label” later in this section.
post. The Tire and Loading
Information label shows the
number of occupant seating
4. The resulting figure equals 6. If your vehicle will be towing

the available amount of cargo a trailer, the load from your
and luggage load capacity. trailer will be transferred to
For example, if the “XXX” your vehicle. Consult this
amount equals 1400 lbs and manual to determine how this
there will be five 150 lb reduces the available cargo
passengers in your vehicle, and luggage load capacity of
the amount of available cargo your vehicle.
and luggage load capacity is See Trailer Towing on page 9‑60
650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150) for important information on
= 650 lbs). towing a trailer, towing safety
5. Determine the combined rules and trailering tips. Example 1
weight of luggage and cargo A. Vehicle Capacity Weight for
being loaded on the vehicle. Example 1 = 453 kg
That weight may not safely (1,000 lbs).
exceed the available cargo
B. Subtract Occupant Weight
and luggage load capacity
@ 68 kg (150 lbs) × 2 =
calculated in Step 4.
136 kg (300 lbs).
C. Available Occupant and
Cargo Weight = 317 kg
(700 lbs).
Refer to the vehicle's Tire and

Loading Information label for
specific information about the
vehicle's capacity weight and
seating positions. The combined
weight of the driver, passengers,
and cargo should never exceed
the vehicle's capacity weight.
Example 2 Example 3
A. Vehicle Capacity Weight for A. Vehicle Capacity Weight for
Example 2 = 453 kg Example 3 = 453 kg
(1,000 lbs). (1,000 lbs).
B. Subtract Occupant Weight B. Subtract Occupant Weight
@ 68 kg (150 lbs) × 5 = @ 91 kg (200 lbs) × 5 =
340 kg (750 lbs). 453 kg (1,000 lbs).
C. Available Cargo Weight = C. Available Cargo Weight =
113 kg (250 lbs). 0 kg (0 lbs).
Certification Label vehicle, or the Gross Axle If you put things inside the
Weight Rating (GAWR) for vehicle — like suitcases,
either the front or rear axle. tools, packages, or anything
And, if there is a heavy load, it else — they will go as fast as the
should be spread out. See vehicle goes. If you have to stop
“Steps for Determining Correct or turn quickly, or if there is a
Load Limit” earlier in this crash, they will keep going.
section.
{ WARNING
{ WARNING Things you put inside the
Do not load the vehicle any vehicle can strike and injure
heavier than the Gross people in a sudden stop or
Label Example turn, or in a crash.
Vehicle Weight Rating
A vehicle specific Certification (GVWR), or either the . Put things in the cargo
label is attached to the driver maximum front or rear Gross area of the vehicle. In the
side center pillar (B-pillar). Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). cargo area, put them as
The label tells the gross weight If you do, parts on the vehicle far forward as you can.
capacity of the vehicle, called can break, and it can change Try to spread the weight
the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating the way the vehicle handles. evenly.
(GVWR). The GVWR includes These could cause you to lose (Continued)
the weight of the vehicle, all control and crash. Also,
occupants, fuel, and cargo. overloading can shorten the
Never exceed the GVWR for the life of the vehicle.
WARNING (Continued) Starting and can be used. Vehicle speeds

above 110 km/h (68 mph)
Operating should be limited to
. Never stack heavier five minutes per use.
things, like suitcases, New Vehicle Break-In .
inside the vehicle so that Avoid making hard stops for
Notice: The vehicle does not the first 322 km (200 miles) or
some of them are above so. During this time the new
the tops of the seats. need an elaborate break-in. But it
will perform better in the long run brake linings are not yet
. Do not leave an if you follow these guidelines: broken in. Hard stops with
unsecured child restraint new linings can mean
. Do not drive at any one premature wear and earlier
in the vehicle. constant speed, fast or replacement. Follow this
. When you carry something slow, for the first 805 km breaking-in guideline every
inside the vehicle, secure (500 miles). Do not make time you get new brake
it whenever you can. full-throttle starts. Avoid linings.
downshifting to brake or
. Do not tow a trailer during
. Do not leave a seat folded slow the vehicle.
down unless you need to. break-in. See Driving
. During the first 1 000 km Characteristics and Towing
(600 miles), avoid using more Tips on page 9‑56 for the
than moderate acceleration trailer towing capabilities of
in lower gears and avoid your vehicle and more
vehicle speeds above information.
110 km/h (68 mph).
Following break‐in, engine speed
. Between the first 1 000 km and load can be gradually
(600 miles) and 5 000 km increased.
(3,000 miles), heavy
acceleration in lower gears
Ignition Positions To shift out of P (Park), turn the In an emergency:

ignition to ON/RUN and apply the
(Key Access) brake pedal.
1. Brake using a firm and steady
pressure. Do not pump the
A (STOPPING THE ENGINE/ brakes repeatedly. This may
LOCK/OFF): When the vehicle is deplete power assist, requiring
stopped, turn the ignition switch to increased brake pedal force.
LOCK/OFF to turn the engine off. 2. Shift the vehicle to neutral. This
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) can be done while the vehicle is
will remain active. See Retained moving. After shifting to neutral,
Accessory Power (RAP) on firmly apply the brakes and steer
page 9‑21 for more information. the vehicle to a safe location.
This is the only position from which 3. Come to a complete stop, shift
the key can be removed. This locks to P (Park), and turn the ignition
the ignition and automatic to LOCK/OFF. On vehicles with
transmission. an automatic transmission, the
The ignition switch has four different Do not turn the engine off when the shift lever must be in P (Park) to
positions. vehicle is moving. This will cause a turn the ignition switch to the
Notice: Using a tool to force the loss of power assist in the brake LOCK/OFF position.
key to turn in the ignition could and steering systems and disable 4. Set the parking brake. See
cause damage to the switch or the airbags. Parking Brake on page 9‑33.
break the key. Use the correct
key, make sure it is all the way in, The ignition switch can bind in the
and turn it only with your hand. LOCK/OFF position with the wheels
If the key cannot be turned by turned off center. If this happens,
hand, see your dealer. move the steering wheel from right
to left while turning the key to
ACC/ACCESSORY. If this does not D (START) : This position starts Pressing the button cycles it through
work, then the vehicle needs the engine. When the engine starts, three modes, ACC/ACCESSORY,
service. release the key. The ignition switch ON/RUN/START and STOPPING
B (ACC/ACCESSORY) : This will return to ON/RUN for normal THE ENGINE/OFF.
position provides power to some of driving. The transmitter must be in the
the electrical accessories. It unlocks A warning tone sounds when the vehicle for the system to operate.
the ignition. The transmission is driver door is opened when the If the push-button start is not
also unlocked in this position on ignition is still in ACC/ACCESSORY working, the vehicle may be near a
automatic transmission vehicles. and the key is in the ignition. strong radio antenna signal causing
To move the key from ACC/ interference to the keyless access
ACCESSORY to LOCK/OFF, the Ignition Positions system. See Remote Keyless Entry
shift lever must be in P (Park). (RKE) System Operation on
(Keyless Access) page 2‑4 for more information.
C (ON/RUN): The ignition switch
stays in this position when the To shift out of P (Park), the vehicle
engine is running. This position can must be in ACC/ACCESSORY or
be used to operate the electrical ON/RUN and the brake pedal must
accessories, including the be applied.
ventilation fan and 12 volt power
outlet, as well as to display some
warning and indicator lights.
The battery could be drained if the
key is left in the ACC/ACCESSORY
or ON/RUN position with the engine
off. The vehicle might not restart if The vehicle has an electronic
the battery is allowed to drain for an keyless ignition with push‐button
extended period of time. start.
Stopping the Engine/OFF In an emergency: ACC/ACCESSORY (Amber LED

(No LED Lights): When the vehicle 1. Brake using a firm and steady Light): This mode allows you to
is stopped, press the engine pressure. Do not pump the use some electrical accessories
START/STOP button once to turn brakes repeatedly. This may when the engine is off.
the engine off. deplete power assist, requiring With the ignition off, pressing the
If the vehicle is in P (Park), the increased brake pedal force. button one time without the brake
ignition will turn OFF, and Retained 2. Shift the vehicle to neutral. This pedal applied, will place the ignition
Accessory Power (RAP) will remain can be done while the vehicle is system in ACC/ACCESSORY.
active. See Retained Accessory moving. After shifting to neutral, The ignition will switch from
Power (RAP) on page 9‑21 for firmly apply the brakes and steer ACC/ACCESSORY to OFF after
more information. the vehicle to a safe location. five minutes to prevent battery
If the vehicle is not in P (Park), 3. Come to a complete stop, shift run down.
the ignition will return to ACC/ to P (Park), and turn the ignition ON/RUN/START (Green LED
ACCESSORY and display the to LOCK/OFF. On vehicles with Light): This mode is for driving and
message SHIFT TO PARK in the an automatic transmission, the starting. With the ignition off, and
Driver Information Center (DIC). shift lever must be in P (Park) to the brake pedal applied, pressing
See Transmission Messages on turn the ignition switch to the the button once will place the
page 5‑36 for more information. LOCK/OFF position. ignition system in ON/RUN/START.
When the vehicle is shifted into Once engine cranking begins,
P (Park), the ignition system will 4. Set the parking brake. See
Parking Brake on page 9‑33 release the button. Engine cranking
switch to OFF. will continue until the engine starts.
Do not turn the engine off when the See Starting the Engine on
vehicle is moving. This will cause a page 9‑21 for more information.
loss of power assist in the brake The ignition will then remain in
and steering systems and disable ON/RUN.
the airbags.
Retained Accessory Starting the Engine Starting Procedure (Key Access)

Power (RAP) Move the shift lever to P (Park) or 1. With your foot off the accelerator
N (Neutral). The engine will not start pedal, turn the ignition key to
These vehicle accessories can be START. When the engine starts,
used for up to 10 minutes after the in any other position. To restart the
engine when the vehicle is already let go of the ignition.
engine is turned off:
moving, use N (Neutral) only. The idle speed will go down as
. Audio System your engine gets warm. Do not
Notice: Do not try to shift to
. Power Windows P (Park) if the vehicle is moving. race the engine immediately
. If you do, you could damage the after starting it. Operate the
Sunroof (if equipped)
transmission. Shift to P (Park) engine and transmission gently
. Auxiliary Power Outlet only when the vehicle is stopped. to allow the oil to warm up and
Power to the audio system will lubricate all moving parts.
Notice: The engine is designed to
continue to operate for up to work with the electronics in the The vehicle has a
10 minutes or until the driver door is vehicle. If you add electrical parts Computer-Controlled Cranking
opened. or accessories, you could change System. This feature assists in
Power to the power windows and the way the engine operates. starting the engine and protects
sunroof will continue to operate for Before adding electrical components. If the ignition key is
up to 10 minutes or until any door is equipment, check with your turned to the START position,
opened. dealer. If you do not, the engine and then released when the
might not perform properly. Any engine begins cranking, the
All these features will work when engine will continue cranking for
resulting damage would not be
the ignition is in ON/RUN or a few seconds or until the
ACC/ACCESSORY. covered by the vehicle warranty.
vehicle starts. If the engine does
not start and the key is held in
START for many seconds,
cranking will be stopped after
15 seconds to prevent cranking
motor damage. To prevent gear 2. If the engine does not start after Starting Procedure (Keyless
damage, this system also 5‐10 seconds, especially in very Access)
prevents cranking if the engine cold weather (below −18°C or 1. If the vehicle has the keyless
is already running. Engine 0°F), it could be flooded with too access system, the transmitter
cranking can be stopped by much gasoline. Try pushing the must be in the vehicle. Put your
turning the ignition switch to accelerator pedal all the way to foot on the brake pedal and
ACC/ACCESSORY or the floor and holding it there as push the START button. When
LOCK/OFF. you hold the key in START, the engine begins cranking, let
Notice: Cranking the engine for or press the START button, for go of the button.
long periods of time, by returning up to a maximum of 15 seconds.
Wait at least 15 seconds The idle speed will go down as
the key to the START position your engine gets warm. Do not
immediately after cranking has between each try, to allow the
cranking motor to cool down. race the engine immediately
ended, can overheat and damage after starting it. Operate the
the cranking motor, and drain the When the engine starts, let go
of the key or button, and the engine and transmission gently
battery. Wait at least 15 seconds to allow the oil to warm up and
between each try, to let the accelerator. If the vehicle starts
briefly but then stops again, do lubricate all moving parts.
cranking motor cool down.
the same thing. This clears the If the transmitter is not in the
extra gasoline from the engine. vehicle or something is
Do not race the engine interfering with the transmitter,
immediately after starting it. the Driver Information Center
Operate the engine and (DIC) will display NO REMOTE
transmission gently until the oil DETECTED. See Driver
warms up and lubricates all Information Center (DIC) on
moving parts. page 5‑23 for more information.
If the battery in the keyless To prevent gear damage, this Wait at least 15 seconds
access transmitter needs system also prevents cranking if between each try, to allow the
replacing, the DIC displays the engine is already running. cranking motor to cool down.
REPLACE BATTERY IN Engine cranking can be stopped When the engine starts, let go
REMOTE KEY. The vehicle can by pressing the START button a of the key or button, and the
still be driven. See Starting the second time. accelerator. If the vehicle starts
Vehicle with a Low Transmitter Notice: Cranking the engine for briefly but then stops again, do
Battery in Remote Keyless Entry long periods of time, by returning the same thing. This clears the
(RKE) System Operation on the key to the START position extra gasoline from the engine.
page 2‑4 for more information. immediately after cranking has Do not race the engine
The vehicle has a ended, can overheat and damage immediately after starting it.
Computer-Controlled Cranking the cranking motor, and drain the Operate the engine and
System. This feature assists in battery. Wait at least 15 seconds transmission gently until the oil
starting the engine and protects between each try, to let the warms up and lubricates all
components. If the START cranking motor cool down. moving parts.
button is pressed, and then 2. If the engine does not start after
released when the engine 5‐10 seconds, especially in very
begins cranking, the engine will cold weather (below −18°C or
continue cranking for a few 0°F), it could be flooded with too
seconds or until the vehicle much gasoline. Try pushing the
starts. If the engine does not accelerator pedal all the way to
start and the button is pressed the floor and holding it there as
for many seconds, cranking will you hold the key in START,
be stopped after 15 seconds to or press the START button, for
prevent cranking motor damage. up to a maximum of 15 seconds.
Engine Heater
The engine coolant heater,
if available, can help in cold weather
conditions at or below −18°C (0°F)
for easier starting and better fuel
economy during engine warm-up.
Plug in the coolant heater at least
four hours before starting the
vehicle. An internal thermostat in
the plug-end of the cord will prevent
engine coolant heater operation at
temperatures above −18°C (0°F).
V6 Engine 4 Cylinder Engine
To Use The Engine Coolant The electrical cord is located on The electrical cord is located on
Heater the driver side of the engine the passenger side of the engine
1. Turn off the engine. compartment, between the compartment, between the
fender and the engine fender and the air cleaner on
2. Open the hood and unwrap the compartment fuse block on vehicles with a four cylinder
electrical cord. vehicles with a six cylinder engine.
engine.
3. Plug it into a normal, grounded Shifting Into Park Leaving the Vehicle With the
110-volt AC outlet. Engine Running
{ WARNING { WARNING
{ WARNING
It can be dangerous to get out of
Plugging the cord into an the vehicle if the shift lever is not It can be dangerous to leave the
ungrounded outlet could cause an fully in P (Park) with the parking vehicle with the engine running.
electrical shock. Also, the wrong brake firmly set. The vehicle can The vehicle could move suddenly
kind of extension cord could roll. If you have left the engine if the shift lever is not fully in
overheat and cause a fire. You running, the vehicle can move P (Park) with the parking brake
could be seriously injured. Plug suddenly. You or others could be firmly set. And, if you leave the
the cord into a properly grounded injured. To be sure the vehicle will vehicle with the engine running, it
three-prong 110-volt AC outlet. not move, even when you are on could overheat and even catch
If the cord will not reach, use a fairly level ground, use the steps fire. You or others could be
heavy-duty three-prong extension that follow. injured. Do not leave the vehicle
cord rated for at least 15 amps. with the engine running.
1. Hold the brake pedal down and
4. Before starting the engine, be set the parking brake. If you have to leave the vehicle with
sure to unplug and store the the engine running, be sure the
cord as it was before to keep it See Parking Brake on
vehicle is in P (Park) and the
away from moving engine parts. page 9‑33 for more information.
parking brake is firmly set before
The length of time the heater should 2. Move the shift lever into P (Park) you leave it. After you have moved
remain plugged in depends on by pushing the lever all the way the shift lever into P (Park), hold
several factors. Ask a dealer in the toward the front of the vehicle. down the regular brake pedal. See if
area where you will be parking the 3. Turn the ignition off. you can move the shift lever away
vehicle for the best advice on this.
from P (Park) without first pulling it Shifting Out of Park If the console shift lever cannot be
toward you. If you can, it means that moved out of P (Park):
the shift lever was not fully locked Automatic Transmission 1. Apply and maintain the regular
into P (Park). Shift Lock brakes.
Torque Lock The vehicle has an electronic shift 2. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN
lock release system. The shift lock position. See Ignition Positions
Torque lock is when the weight of release is designed to:
the vehicle puts too much force on (Key Access) on page 9‑18 or
the parking pawl in the . Prevent ignition key removal Ignition Positions (Keyless
transmission. This happens when unless the shift lever is in Access) on page 9‑19 for more
parking on a hill and shifting the P (Park). information.
transmission into P (Park) is not . Prevent movement of the shift 3. Let up on the shift lever and
done properly and then it is difficult lever out of P (Park), unless the make sure the shift lever is
to shift out of P (Park). To prevent ignition is in ON/RUN and the pushed all the way into P (Park).
torque lock, set the parking brake brake pedal is applied.
and then shift into P (Park). To find 4. Press the shift lever button
out how, see "Shifting Into P (Park)" The shift lock is always functional 5. Then, move the shift lever into
listed previously. except in the case of a an the desired gear.
uncharged or low voltage (less
If torque lock does occur, your than 9 volt) battery. If you still cannot move the shift
vehicle may need to be pushed lever from P (Park), consult your
uphill by another vehicle to relieve If the vehicle has an uncharged dealer or a professional towing
the parking pawl pressure, so you battery or a battery with low voltage, service.
can shift out of P (Park). try charging or jump starting the
battery. See Jump Starting on
If you are towing a trailer and page 10‑84.
parking on a hill, see Driving
Characteristics and Towing Tips on
page 9‑56.
Parking Over Things Engine Exhaust WARNING (Continued)

That Burn
{ WARNING . There are holes or openings
{ WARNING Engine exhaust contains Carbon
in the vehicle body from
damage or after-market
Things that can burn could touch Monoxide (CO) which cannot be modifications that are not
hot exhaust parts under the seen or smelled. Exposure to CO completely sealed.
vehicle and ignite. Do not park can cause unconsciousness and If unusual fumes are detected or
over papers, leaves, dry grass, even death. if it is suspected that exhaust is
or other things that can burn. Exhaust may enter the vehicle if: coming into the vehicle:
. The vehicle idles in areas . Drive it only with the windows
with poor ventilation (parking completely down.
garages, tunnels, deep snow . Have the vehicle repaired
that may block underbody immediately.
airflow or tail pipes).
Never park the vehicle with the
. The exhaust smells or engine running in an enclosed
sounds strange or different. area such as a garage or a
. The exhaust system leaks building that has no fresh air
due to corrosion or damage. ventilation.
. The vehicle’s exhaust system
has been modified, damaged
or improperly repaired.
(Continued)
Running the Vehicle Automatic

While Parked
{ WARNING
It can be dangerous to get out of
Transmission
It is better not to park with the The automatic transmission has a
engine running. But if you ever have the vehicle if the automatic
transmission shift lever is not fully shift lever located on the console
to, here are some things to know. between the seats.
in P (Park) with the parking brake
firmly set. The vehicle can roll. Do
{ WARNING not leave the vehicle when the
Idling a vehicle in an enclosed engine is running unless you
area with poor ventilation is have to. If you have left the
dangerous. Engine exhaust may engine running, the vehicle can
enter the vehicle. Engine exhaust move suddenly. You or others
contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) could be injured. To be sure the
which cannot be seen or smelled. vehicle will not move, even when
It can cause unconsciousness you are on fairly level ground,
and even death. Never run the always set the parking brake and
engine in an enclosed area that move the shift lever to P (Park).
has no fresh air ventilation. For
more information, see Engine Follow the proper steps to be sure
Exhaust on page 9‑27. the vehicle will not move. See P (Park): This position locks the
Shifting Into Park on page 9‑25. front wheels. It is the best position
to use when starting the engine
If parking on a hill and pulling a because the vehicle cannot move
trailer, see Driving Characteristics easily.
and Towing Tips on page 9‑56.
fully applied first and then the shift N (Neutral): In this position, the
{ WARNING lever button pressed before shifting engine does not connect with the
from P (Park) when the ignition key wheels. To restart the engine when
It is dangerous to get out of the is in ON/RUN. If you cannot shift out the vehicle is already moving,
vehicle if the shift lever is not fully of P (Park), ease pressure on the use N (Neutral) only. Also, use
in P (Park) with the parking brake shift lever, then push the shift lever N (Neutral) when the vehicle is
firmly set. The vehicle can roll. all the way into P (Park) as you being towed.
Do not leave the vehicle when the maintain brake application. Then
engine is running unless you press the shift lever button and
move the shift lever into another
{ WARNING
have to. If you have left the
engine running, the vehicle can gear. See Shifting Out of Park on Shifting into a drive gear while the
move suddenly. You or others page 9‑26. engine is running at high speed is
could be injured. To be sure the R (Reverse): Use this gear to dangerous. Unless your foot is
vehicle will not move, even when back up. firmly on the brake pedal, the
you are on fairly level ground, vehicle could move very rapidly.
Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse)
always set the parking brake and You could lose control and hit
while the vehicle is moving
move the shift lever to P (Park). people or objects. Do not shift
forward could damage the
See Shifting Into Park on transmission. The repairs would into a drive gear while the engine
page 9‑25. If you are pulling a not be covered by the vehicle is running at high speed.
trailer, see Driving Characteristics warranty. Shift to R (Reverse) only
and Towing Tips on page 9‑56. after the vehicle is stopped. Notice: Shifting out of P (Park) or
To rock the vehicle back and forth to N (Neutral) with the engine
Make sure the shift lever is fully in get out of snow, ice or sand without running at high speed may
P (Park) before starting the engine. damaging the transmission, see If damage the transmission. The
The vehicle has an automatic the Vehicle is Stuck on page 9‑11. repairs would not be covered by
transmission shift lock control the vehicle warranty. Be sure the
system. The regular brake must be engine is not running at high
speed when shifting the vehicle.
D (Drive): This position is for Manual Mode: This position is With Selective Ride Control
normal driving. It provides the best shown on the shifter as a +/−. 1. Move the shift lever to the left
fuel economy. If more power is It allows the driver to select the from D (Drive).
needed for passing, and the gears appropriate for current driving
vehicle is: conditions. See Manual Mode on The vehicle will be in Sport
page 9‑30 for more information. Mode. The gear indicator in the
. Going less than 56 km/h DIC will still display a D for
(35 mph), push the accelerator Drive, and the Sport Mode On
pedal about halfway down. Manual Mode
message will be displayed
. Going about 56 km/h (35 mph) or Driver Shift Control (DSC) momentarily. See Driver
more, push the accelerator all Information Center (DIC) on
Notice: If you drive the vehicle at
the way down. page 5‑23. When you are in
high RPMs without upshifting
Notice: If the vehicle seems to Sport Mode, the vehicle will still
while using Driver Shift Control
accelerate slowly or not shift shift automatically, but chassis
(DSC), you could damage the
gears when you go faster, and tuning is modified. See Selective
vehicle. Always upshift when
you continue to drive the vehicle Ride Control on page 9‑38.
necessary while using DSC.
that way, you could damage the If you move the shift lever
Driver Shift Control (DSC) allows forward or rearward, the
transmission. Have the vehicle
you to shift an automatic transmission will enter Manual
serviced right away. You can
transmission similar to a manual Mode, and the DIC gear
drive in L (Low) when you are
transmission. To use the DSC indicator will change to an M
driving less than 56 km/h (35 mph)
feature: followed by a number
and D (Drive) for higher speeds
until then. representing the gear the vehicle
is currently in.
2. In Manual Mode, press the shift The transmission will only allow you
lever forward to upshift or to shift into gears appropriate for the
rearward to downshift. vehicle speed and engine
Revolutions Per Minute (RPM). The
Without Selective Ride Control transmission will not automatically
1. Move the shift lever to the left shift to the next lower gear if the
from D (Drive). engine RPM is too high, nor to the
The transmission will enter next higher gear when the maximum
Manual Mode. The DIC gear engine RPM is reached.
indicator will change to an M While in the DSC mode, the
followed by a number transmission will automatically
representing the gear the vehicle downshift when the vehicle comes
is currently in. Uplevel Display Shown, Base to a stop. This will allow for more
2. In Manual Mode, press the shift Model Similar power during take-off.
lever forward to upshift or The display on the instrument panel When accelerating the vehicle from
rearward to downshift. cluster will show which gear the a stop in snowy and icy conditions,
vehicle is in. The number indicates you may want to shift into second
the requested gear range when gear. A higher gear allows you to
moving the shift lever forward or gain more traction on slippery
rearward. surfaces.
Drive Systems Brakes If driving safely on a wet road and it

becomes necessary to slam on the
brakes and continue braking to
All-Wheel Drive Antilock Brake avoid a sudden obstacle, a
Vehicles with this feature always System (ABS) computer senses that the wheels
send engine power to all four are slowing down. If one of the
This vehicle has the Antilock Brake
wheels. It is fully automatic, and wheels is about to stop rolling, the
System (ABS), an advanced
adjusts itself as needed for road computer will separately work the
electronic braking system that helps
conditions. brakes at each wheel.
prevent a braking skid.
When using a compact spare tire on ABS can change the brake pressure
When the engine is started and the
an AWD vehicle, the system to each wheel, as required, faster
vehicle begins to drive away, ABS
automatically detects the compact than any driver could. This can help
checks itself. A momentary motor or
spare and disables AWD. To restore the driver steer around the obstacle
clicking noise might be heard while
AWD operation and prevent while braking hard.
this test is going on, and it might
excessive wear on the system, even be noticed that the brake As the brakes are applied, the
replace the compact spare with a pedal moves a little. This is normal. computer keeps receiving updates
full-size tire as soon as possible. on wheel speed and controls
See Compact Spare Tire on braking pressure accordingly.
If there is a problem with ABS, this

warning light stays on. See Antilock
Brake System (ABS) Warning Light
on page 5‑18.
Remember: ABS does not change Parking Brake The system has a Park Brake
the time needed to get a foot up to Status light and a Park Brake
the brake pedal or always decrease Warning light. See Electric Parking
stopping distance. If you get too Brake Light on page 5‑18. There
close to the vehicle in front of you, are also three Driver Information
there will not be enough time to Center (DIC) messages. See Brake
apply the brakes if that vehicle System Messages on page 5‑31
suddenly slows or stops. Always for more information. In case of
leave enough room up ahead to insufficient electrical power, the EPB
stop, even with ABS. cannot be applied or released.
Using ABS Before leaving the vehicle, check
the park brake status lamp to insure
Do not pump the brakes. Just hold the park brake is applied.
the brake pedal down firmly and let
ABS work. You might hear the ABS EPB Apply
pump or motor operating and feel The vehicle has an Electric Parking
Brake (EPB). The switch for the The EPB can be applied any time
the brake pedal pulsate, but this is the vehicle is stopped. The EPB is
EPB is in the center console. The
normal. applied by momentarily lifting up on
EPB can always be activated, even
Braking in Emergencies if the ignition is OFF. To prevent the EPB switch. Once fully applied,
draining the battery, avoid repeated the park brake status light will be
ABS allows the driver to steer and cycles of the EPB system when the on. While the brake is being applied,
brake at the same time. In many engine is not running. the status lamp will flash until full
emergencies, steering can help
more than even the very best
braking.
apply is reached. If the light does If the park brake status light flashes EPB Release
not come on, or remains flashing, continuously, the EPB is only
To release the EPB, place the
you need to have the vehicle partially applied or released,
ignition in the ON/RUN position,
serviced. Do not drive the vehicle if or there is a problem with the EPB.
apply and hold the brake pedal, and
the park brake status light is The DIC message SERVICE PARK
push down momentarily on the EPB
flashing. See your dealer. See BRAKE will be displayed. If this light
switch. If you attempt to release the
Electric Parking Brake Light on flashes continuously, release the
EPB without the brake pedal
page 5‑18 for more information. EPB, and attempt to apply it again.
applied, a chime will sound, and the
If the EPB is applied while the If this light continues to flash, do not
DIC message PRESS BRAKE
vehicle is in motion, a chime will drive the vehicle. See your dealer.
PEDAL TO RELEASE PARK
sound, and the DIC message If the park brake warning light is on, BRAKE will be displayed. The EPB
RELEASE PARK BRAKE SWITCH the EPB has detected an error in is released when the park brake
will be displayed. The vehicle will another system and is operating status light is off.
decelerate as long as the switch is with reduced functionality. To apply
If the park brake warning light is on,
held in the up position. Releasing the EPB when this light is on, lift up
the EPB has detected an error in
the EPB switch during the on the EPB switch and hold it in the
another system and is operating
deceleration will release the parking up position. Full application of the
with reduced functionality. To
brake. If the switch is held in the up parking brake by the EPB system
release the EPB when this light is
position until the vehicle comes to a may take a longer period of time
on, push down on the EPB switch
stop, the EPB will remain applied. than normal when this light is on.
and hold it in the down position.
Continue to hold the switch until the
EPB release may take a longer
park brake status light remains on.
period of time than normal when this
If the park brake warning light is on,
light is on. Continue to hold the
see your dealer.
switch until the park brake status
If the EPB fails to apply, the rear light is off. If the light is on, see your
wheels should be blocked to dealer.
prevent vehicle movement.
Notice: Driving with the parking Brake Assist Ride Control Systems
brake on can overheat the brake
system and cause premature This vehicle has a brake assist
wear or damage to brake system feature designed to assist the driver Traction Control
parts. Make sure that the parking in stopping or decreasing vehicle System (TCS)
brake is fully released and the speed in emergency driving
conditions. This feature uses the The vehicle has a traction control
brake warning light is off before
stability system hydraulic brake system that limits wheel spin. This is
driving.
control module to supplement the especially useful in slippery road
Automatic EPB Release power brake system under conditions. On a front-wheel-drive
conditions where the driver has vehicle, the system operates if it
The EPB will automatically release if senses that one or both of the front
the vehicle is running, placed into quickly and forcefully applied the
brake pedal in an attempt to quickly wheels are spinning or beginning to
gear and an attempt is made to lose traction. On an All-Wheel-Drive
drive away. Avoid rapid acceleration stop or slow down the vehicle. The
stability system hydraulic brake (AWD) vehicle, the system will
when the EPB is applied, to operate if it senses that any of the
preserve park brake lining life. control module increases brake
pressure at each corner of the wheels are spinning or beginning to
For maximum EPB force when vehicle until the ABS activates. lose traction. When this happens,
towing a trailer or parking on a hill, Minor brake pedal pulsation or the system brakes the spinning
pull the EPB switch twice. If you are pedal movement during this time is wheel(s) and/or reduces engine
towing a trailer and parking on a hill, normal and the driver should power to limit wheel spin.
see Driving Characteristics and continue to apply the brake pedal The system may be heard or felt
Towing Tips on page 9‑56 for more as the driving situation dictates. while it is working, but this is
information. The brake assist feature will normal.
automatically disengage when the
brake pedal is released or brake
pedal pressure is quickly
decreased.
Notice: Do not repeatedly brake Driving on page 9‑9 for

or accelerate heavily when TCS is information on using TCS when
off. The vehicle's driveline could driving in snowy or icy conditions.
be damaged.
The TCS/StabiliTrak warning light

flashes to indicate that the traction
control system is active.
This warning light comes on if there
is a problem with the traction control To turn the system off, press g
system. The TCS off light comes on to located on the console to the right of
indicate that the traction control the shifter.
See Traction Off Light on system has been turned off.
page 5‑19. When this warning light Press and release g and the traction
is on, the system does not limit When TCS is switched off on AWD
vehicles, the system may still make control system turns off and the
wheel spin. Adjust your driving traction control system warning light
accordingly. noise. This is normal and necessary
with the AWD hardware on the comes on. Press g again to turn the
TCS automatically comes on vehicle. system back on. For information on
whenever the vehicle is started. turning StabiliTrak off and on, see
To limit wheel spin, especially in It might be necessary to turn the
StabiliTrak System following in this
slippery road conditions, the system system off if the vehicle gets stuck
section.
should always be left on. But, TCS in sand, mud or snow and rocking
the vehicle is required. See If the Adding non‐GM accessories can
can be turned off if needed.
Vehicle is Stuck on page 9‑11 for affect the vehicle's performance.
more information. See also Winter See Accessories and Modifications
Electronic Stability StabiliTrak comes on automatically

whenever the vehicle is started. To
Control (ESC) assist with directional control of the
The vehicle has a vehicle stability vehicle, the system should always
enhancement system called be left on.
StabiliTrak. It is an advanced
computer controlled system that When the stability control system
assists with directional control of the activates, the Traction Control
vehicle in difficult driving conditions. System (TCS)/StabiliTrak light
StabiliTrak activates when the flashes on the instrument panel.
computer senses a difference This also occurs when traction
between the intended path and the control is activated. A noise might
direction the vehicle is actually be heard or vibration might be felt in StabiliTrak can be turned off if
traveling. StabiliTrak selectively the brake pedal. This is normal. needed by pressing and holding g
applies braking pressure at any one Continue to steer the vehicle in the until the StabiliTrak Off light comes
of the vehicle's brakes to help steer intended direction. on the instrument panel. For
the vehicle in the intended direction. If there is a problem detected with information on turning TCS off and
StabiliTrak, the TCS/StabiliTrak light on, see Traction Control System
comes on and the system is not (TCS) in this section.
operational. See Electronic Stability
Control (ESC)/Traction Control
System (TCS) Indicator/Warning
Light on page 5‑20. Driving should
be adjusted accordingly.
If cruise control is being used when Selective Ride Control TOUR: Use for normal city and
StabiliTrak activates, the cruise highway driving. This setting
control automatically disengages. The vehicle may have a ride control provides a smooth, soft ride.
Press the cruise control button to system called Selective Ride
Control. The system provides the SPORT: Use where road conditions
reengage when road conditions or personal preference demand
allow. See Cruise Control on following performance benefits:
more control. This setting provides
page 9‑39 for more information. . Reduced Impact Harshness more “feel”, or response to road
. Improved Road Isolation conditions through increased
Limited-Slip Differential steering effort and suspension
. Improved High-Speed Stability tuning.
Vehicles with a limited-slip
differential can give more traction on . Improved Handling Response The setting can be changed at any
snow, mud, ice, sand or gravel. . Better Control of Body Ride time. Based on road conditions,
It works like a standard differential Motions steering wheel angle and the
most of the time, but when traction vehicle speed, the system
is low, this feature allows the drive To switch from TOUR to SPORT
mode, move the shift lever to automatically adjusts to provide the
wheel with the most traction to best handling while providing a
move the vehicle. the left while the transmission is
in D (Drive) smooth ride. The Tour and Sport
modes will feel similar on a
smooth road.
Cruise Control { WARNING

With cruise control, the vehicle can
maintain a speed of about 40 km/h Cruise control can be dangerous
(25 mph) or more without keeping where you cannot drive safely at
your foot on the accelerator. Cruise a steady speed. So, do not use
control does not work at speeds the cruise control on winding
below 40 km/h (25 mph). roads or in heavy traffic.
On vehicles with the Traction Cruise control can be dangerous
Control System (TCS) or Electronic on slippery roads. On such roads,
Stability Control (ESC), the system fast changes in tire traction can
may begin to limit wheel spin while cause excessive wheel slip, and
you are using cruise control. If this you could lose control. Do not use The cruise control buttons are
happens, the cruise control will cruise control on slippery roads. located on the steering wheel.
automatically disengage. See 5 (On/Off): Press to turn the
Traction Control System (TCS) on cruise control system on and off. An
page 9‑35 or Electronic Stability indicator light will turn on or off in
Control (ESC) on page 9‑37. the instrument panel cluster.
\ (Cancel): Press to disengage
cruise control without erasing the
set speed from memory.
RES/+ (Resume/Accelerate): 3. Move the thumbwheel down Increasing Speed While Using
Move the thumbwheel up to make toward SET/− and release it. Cruise Control
the vehicle resume to a previously The desired set speed briefly If the cruise control system is
set speed or to accelerate. appears in the instrument panel already activated:
SET/− (Set/Coast): Move the cluster.
. Move the thumbwheel up toward
thumbwheel down to set the speed 4. Take your foot off the accelerator RES/+ and hold it until the
and activate cruise control or make pedal. vehicle accelerates to the
the vehicle decelerate. desired speed, and then
Resuming a Set Speed
Setting Cruise Control release it.
If the cruise control is set at a
If the cruise button is on when not in desired speed and then the brakes . To increase the speed in small
use, it could get bumped and go into are applied or the Cancel button is amounts, move the thumbwheel
cruise when not desired. Keep the pressed, the cruise control is up toward RES/+ briefly and
cruise control switch off when cruise disengaged without erasing the set then release it. Each time this is
is not being used. speed from memory. done, the vehicle goes about
1.6 km/h (1 mph) faster.
1. Press 5 to turn the cruise Once the vehicle reaches about
control system on. The indicator 40 km/h (25 mph) or more, move the
light in the instrument panel thumbwheel up toward RES/+
cluster comes on. briefly. The vehicle returns to the
previous set speed and stays there.
2. Get to the speed desired.
Reducing Speed While Using Passing Another Vehicle While Ending Cruise Control
Cruise Control Using Cruise Control There are three ways to end cruise
If the cruise control system is Use the accelerator pedal to control:
already activated: increase the vehicle's speed. When . To disengage cruise control,
. Move the thumbwheel toward you take your foot off the pedal, the step lightly on the brake pedal or
SET/− and hold until the desired vehicle will slow down to the clutch; when cruise control
lower speed is reached, then previous set cruise control speed. disengages, the indicator light
release it. Using Cruise Control on Hills will not be lit.
. To slow down in small amounts, How well the cruise control works . Press [ on the steering wheel.
move the thumbwheel toward on hills depends upon the vehicle's
SET/− briefly and then release it. speed, load, and the steepness of
. To turn off the cruise control,
Each time this is done, the the hills. When going up steep hills, press 5 on the steering wheel.
vehicle goes about 1.6 km/h you might have to step on the
(1 mph) slower. Erasing Speed Memory
accelerator pedal to maintain the
vehicle's speed. When going The cruise control set speed is
downhill, you might have to brake or erased from memory by pressing
shift to a lower gear to maintain the the 5 button or if the ignition is
vehicle's speed. When the brakes turned off.
are applied the cruise control
shuts off.
Object Detection How the System Works

{ WARNING URPA comes on automatically when
Systems The Ultrasonic Rear Parking the shift lever is moved into
Assist (URPA) system does not R (Reverse). A single tone sounds
Ultrasonic Parking Assist replace driver vision. It cannot to indicate the system is working.
For vehicles with the Ultrasonic detect: URPA operates only at speeds less
Rear Parking Assist (URPA) system, than 8 km/h (5 mph).
. Objects that are below the
it assists the driver with parking and
bumper, underneath the An obstacle is indicated by audible
avoiding objects while in
vehicle, or too close or far beeps. The interval between the
R (Reverse). URPA operates at
from the vehicle beeps becomes shorter as the
speeds less than 8 km/h (5 mph),
and the sensors on the rear bumper . Children, pedestrians, vehicle gets closer to the obstacle.
detect objects up to 2.5 m (8 ft.) bicyclists, or pets. When the distance is less than
behind the vehicle, and at least 30 cm (12 in.) the beeps are
If you do not use proper care continuous.
20 cm (8 in.) off the ground. before and while backing, vehicle
damage, injury, or death could To be detected, objects must be at
occur. Even with URPA, always least 20 cm (8 in.) off the ground
and below trunk level. Objects must
check behind the vehicle before
also be within 2.5 m (8 ft.) from the
backing up. While backing, be
rear bumper. The distance objects
sure to look for objects and check can be detected may be less during
the vehicle's mirrors. warmer or humid weather.
PARK ASSIST OFF displays on the When the System Does Not
. An object was hanging out of the
Driver Information Center (DIC) to Seem to Work Properly trunk during the last drive cycle.
indicate that URPA is off. The Once the object is removed,
message disappears after a short SERVICE PARK ASSIST: If this URPA will return to normal
period of time. message occurs, take the vehicle to operation.
your dealer to repair the system.
Turning the System On and Off
. The vehicle's bumper is
PARK ASSIST OFF: If the URPA damaged. Take the vehicle to
The URPA system can be turned on system does not activate due to a your dealer to repair the system.
and off using the park assist button temporary condition, the message
displays on the DIC, see Driver
. Other conditions may affect
located next to the shift lever.
Information Center (DIC) on system performance, such as
page 5‑23 for more information. vibrations from a jackhammer or
This can occur under the following the compression of air brakes on
conditions: a very large truck.
. The driver has disabled the If the system is still disabled, after
system. driving forward at least 40 km/h
(25 mph), take the vehicle to your
The park assist button lights up
. The ultrasonic sensors are not dealer.
when the system is on and turns off clean. Keep the vehicle's rear
when it has been disabled. bumper free of mud, dirt, snow,
ice and slush. For cleaning
URPA defaults to the on setting instructions, see Exterior Care
each time the vehicle is started. on page 10‑91.
Side Blind Zone When the system detects a vehicle How the System Works
in the side blind zone, amber SBZA
Alert (SBZA) displays will light up in the side
The vehicle may have a Side Blind mirrors. This indicates that it may be
Zone Alert (SBZA) system. Read unsafe to change lanes. Before
this entire section before using the making a lane change, always
system. check the SBZA display, check the
outside and rearview mirrors, look Left Side Mirror Right Side Mirror
{ WARNING over your shoulder for vehicles and
hazards, and use the turn signal.
Display Display
SBZA is only a lane changing aid When the vehicle is started, both
SBZA Detection Zones outside mirror displays will briefly
and does not replace driver
vision. SBZA does not detect: The SBZA sensor covers a zone come on to indicate that the system
of approximately one lane over is operating. While driving forward,
. Vehicles outside the side from both sides of the vehicle, the left or right side mirror SBZA
blind zones which may be 3.5 m (11 ft.). This zone starts at display will light up if a vehicle is
rapidly approaching. each side mirror and goes back detected in that blind zone. If you
. Pedestrians, bicyclists, approximately 5.0 m (16 ft.). The activate a turn signal and a vehicle
or animals. height of the zone is approximately has been detected on the same
between 0.5 m (1.5 ft.) and side, the SBZA display will flash to
Failure to use proper care when 2.0 m (6 ft.) off the ground. give you extra warning not to
changing lanes may result in change lanes.
damage to the vehicle, injury, The SBZA detection zones do not
or death. Always check the change if the vehicle is towing a
outside and rearview mirrors, trailer. So be extra careful when
glance over your shoulder, and changing lanes while towing a
trailer.
use the turn signal before
changing lanes.
SBZA displays do not come on If the SBZA displays do not light up When SBZA is disabled for any
while the vehicle is approaching or when the system is on and vehicles reason other than the driver turning
passing other vehicles. At speeds are in the blind zone, the system it off, the driver will not be able to
greater than 32 km/h (20 mph), may need service. Take the vehicle turn SBZA back on using Vehicle
SBZA displays may come on when to your dealer. Personalization. The SIDE BLIND
a vehicle you have passed remains SBZA is designed to ignore ZONE ALERT ON option will not be
in or drops back into the stationary objects; however, the selectable if the conditions for
detection zone. system may occasionally light up normal system operation are not
SBZA can be disabled through due to guard rails, signs, trees, met. Until normal operating
Vehicle Personalization. See shrubs, and other stationary objects. conditions for SBZA are met, you
Vehicle Personalization on This is normal system operation, the should not rely upon SBZA while
page 5‑36 for more information. vehicle does not need service. driving.
If the SBZA is disabled by the SBZA does not operate when the SBZA Error Messages
driver, the SBZA mirror displays will left or right corners of the rear
not light up during normal driving. The following messages may
bumper are covered with mud, dirt, appear on the infotainment display:
When the System Does Not Seem snow, ice, slush, or in heavy
rainstorms. For cleaning SIDE BLIND ZONE ALERT
To Work Properly SYSTEM OFF: This message
instructions, see Exterior Care on
Occasional missed alerts can occur indicates that the driver has turned
page 10‑91. If the infotainment
under normal circumstances and will the system off.
display still shows the SIDE BLIND
increase in wet conditions. The SIDE BLIND ZONE SYS.
ZONE SYS. UNAVAILABLE
system does not need to be UNAVAILABLE: This message
message after cleaning the bumper,
serviced due to an occasional indicates that the SBZA system is
see your dealer.
missed alert. The number of missed disabled because the sensor is
alerts will increase with increased The SBZA displays may remain on
if a trailer is attached to the vehicle, blocked and cannot detect vehicles
rainfall or road spray. in the blind zone. The sensor may
or a bicycle or object is extending
out to either side of the vehicle. be blocked by mud, dirt, snow, ice,
slush, or even heavy rainstorms.
This message may also activate Rear Vision WARNING (Continued)

during heavy rain or due to road
spray. The vehicle does not need
Camera (RVC)
service. For cleaning, see Exterior This vehicle may have an RVC speed backing maneuvers or
Care on page 10‑91. system. Read this entire section where there could be cross-traffic.
before using it. Your judged distances using the
SERVICE SIDE BLIND ZONE screen will differ from actual
ALERT SYSTEM: If this message The RVC system can assist the distances.
appears, both SBZA displays will driver when backing up by
remain on indicating there is a displaying a view of the area behind If you do not use proper care
problem with the SBZA system. the vehicle. before backing up, you could hit
If these displays remain on after a vehicle, child, pedestrian,
continued driving, the system needs
service. Take the vehicle to your
{ WARNING bicyclist, or pet, resulting in
vehicle damage, injury, or death.
dealer. The Rear Vision Camera (RVC) Even though the vehicle has the
system does not replace driver RVC system, always check
FCC Information
vision. RVC does not: carefully before backing up by
See Radio Frequency Statement on checking behind and around the
page 13‑18 for FCC information.
. Detect objects that are
outside the camera's field of vehicle.
view, below the bumper,
or underneath the vehicle. An image appears on the navigation
. Detect children, pedestrians, screen with the message Check
bicyclists, or pets. Surroundings for Safety when the
vehicle is shifted into R (Reverse).
Do not back the vehicle by only The navigation screen goes to the
looking at the RVC screen, or use previous screen after approximately
the screen during longer, higher 10 seconds once the vehicle is
(Continued) shifted out of R (Reverse).
To cancel the delay, do one of Symbols

the following: The navigation system may have a
. Pressing a hard key on the feature that lets the driver view
navigation system. symbols on the navigation screen
. Shifting in to P (Park). while using the RVC. The Ultrasonic
Rear Park Assist (URPA) system
. Reach a vehicle speed of must not be disabled to use the
8 km/h (5 mph). caution symbols. The error message
Turning the Rear Vision Camera Rear Parking Assist Symbols
System On or Off Unavailable may display if URPA
has been disabled and the symbols
To turn the RVC system on or off: have been turned on. See
1. Shift into P (Park). 4. Select Rear Camera Options. Ultrasonic Parking Assist on
5. Select Camera. When a check page 9‑42.
2. Press the CONFIG button to
enter the configure menu mark appears next to the The symbols appear and may cover
options. Camera option, then the RVC an object when viewing the
system is on. navigation screen when an object is
3. Select Display. detected by the URPA system.
To turn the symbols on or off: Guidelines Rear Vision Camera Error

1. Shift into P (Park). The RVC system has a guideline Messages
2. Press the CONFIG button to overlay that can help the driver align Service Rear Vision Camera
enter the configure menu the vehicle when backing into a System: This message can display
options. parking spot. when the system is not receiving
To turn the guidelines on or off: information it requires from other
3. Select Display vehicle systems.
4. Select Rear Camera Options. 1. Shift into P (Park).
If any other problem occurs or if a
5. Select Symbols. When a check 2. Press the CONFIG button to problem persists, see your dealer.
mark appears next to the enter the configure menu
Symbols option, symbols will options.
appear. 3. Select Display
4. Select Rear Camera Options.
5. Select Guidelines. When a
check mark appears next to the
Guidelines option, guidelines will
appear.
Rear Vision Camera Location When the System Does Not

Seem To Work Properly
The RVC system may not work
properly or display a clear image if:
. The RVC is turned off. See
“Turning the Rear Camera
System On or Off” earlier in this
section.
. It is dark.
. The sun or the beam of
headlamps are shining directly
into the camera lens.
. Ice, snow, mud, or anything else
The camera is located above the
license plate. builds up on the camera lens.
Clean the lens, rinse it with
The area displayed by the camera is
water, and wipe it with a soft
limited, it does not display objects
cloth.
that are close to either corner or
under the bumper and can vary . The back of the vehicle is in an
depending on vehicle orientation or accident, the position and
road conditions. The distance of the mounting angle of the camera
image that appears on the screen is can change or the camera can
different from the actual distance. be affected. Be sure to have the
A. View displayed by the camera. camera and its position and
The following illustration shows the
B. Corner of the rear bumper. mounting angle checked at your
field of view that the camera
dealer.
provides.
Fuel The VIN is at the top left of the

instrument panel. See Vehicle
Use of the recommended fuel is an Identification Number (VIN) on
important part of the proper page 12‑1.
maintenance of this vehicle. To help
keep the engine clean and maintain Recommended Fuel
optimum vehicle performance, we
recommend the use of gasoline If the vehicle has a 2.4L L4 engine
advertised as TOP TIER Detergent (VIN Code C), use regular unleaded
Gasoline. gasoline with a posted octane rating
of 87 or higher. If the octane rating
Look for the TOP TIER label on the is less than 87, an audible knocking
fuel pump to ensure gasoline meets noise, commonly referred to as
enhanced detergency standards spark knock, might be heard when
developed by auto companies. A list driving. If this occurs, use a
of marketers providing TOP TIER gasoline rated at 87 octane or
Detergent Gasoline can be found at higher as soon as possible. If heavy
www.toptiergas.com. knocking is heard when using
gasoline rated at 87 octane or
higher, the engine needs service.
The 8th digit of the Vehicle

Identification Number (VIN) shows
the code letter or number that
identifies the vehicle's engine.
If the vehicle has the 3.6L V6 engine Gasoline Specifications California Fuel
(VIN Code D), use premium
unleaded gasoline with a posted At a minimum, gasoline should Requirements
octane rating of 91 or higher. You meet ASTM specification If the vehicle is certified to meet
can also use regular unleaded D 4814 in the United States or California Emissions Standards, it is
gasoline rated at 87 octane or CAN/CGSB‐3.5 or 3.511 in Canada. designed to operate on fuels that
higher, but the vehicle's acceleration Some gasolines contain an meet California specifications. See
could be slightly reduced, and a octane-enhancing additive called the underhood emission control
slight audible knocking noise, methylcyclopentadienyl manganese label. If this fuel is not available in
commonly referred to as spark tricarbonyl (MMT). We recommend states adopting California emissions
knock, might be heard. If the octane against the use of gasolines standards, the vehicle will operate
is less than 87, a heavy knocking containing MMT. See Fuel Additives satisfactorily on fuels meeting
noise might be heard when driving. on page 9‑52 for additional federal specifications, but emission
If this occurs, use a gasoline rated information. control system performance might
at 87 octane or higher as soon as be affected. The malfunction
possible. Otherwise, you could indicator lamp could turn on and the
damage the engine. If heavy vehicle might fail a smog‐check test.
knocking is heard when using See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on
gasoline rated at 87 octane or page 5‑14. If this occurs, return to
higher, the engine needs service. your authorized dealer for diagnosis.
If it is determined that the condition
is caused by the type of fuel used,
repairs might not be covered by the
vehicle warranty.
Fuels in Foreign Fuel Additives For customers who do not use TOP
TIER Detergent Gasoline regularly,
Countries To provide cleaner air, all gasolines one bottle of GM Fuel System
If you plan on driving in another in the United States are now Treatment PLUS, added to the fuel
country outside the United States or required to contain additives that tank at every engine oil change,
Canada, the proper fuel might be help prevent engine and fuel system can help clean deposits from fuel
hard to find. Never use leaded deposits from forming, allowing the injectors and intake valves. GM Fuel
gasoline or any other fuel not emission control system to work System Treatment PLUS is the only
recommended in the previous text properly. In most cases, nothing gasoline additive recommended by
on fuel. Costly repairs caused by should have to be added to the fuel. General Motors. It is available at
use of improper fuel would not be However, some gasolines contain your dealer.
covered by the vehicle warranty. only the minimum amount of
additive required to meet U.S. Gasolines containing oxygenates,
To check the fuel availability, ask an Environmental Protection Agency such as ethers and ethanol, and
auto club, or contact a major oil regulations. To help keep fuel reformulated gasolines might be
company that does business in the injectors and intake valves clean, available in your area. We
country where you will be driving. or if the vehicle experiences recommend that you use these
problems due to dirty injectors or gasolines, if they comply with the
valves, look for gasoline that is specifications described earlier.
advertised as TOP TIER Detergent However, E85 (85% ethanol) and
Gasoline. Look for the TOP TIER other fuels containing more than
label on the fuel pump to ensure 10% ethanol must not be used in
gasoline meets enhanced vehicles that were not designed for
detergency standards developed those fuels.
by the auto companies. A list of
marketers providing TOP TIER
Detergent Gasoline can be found at
www.toptiergas.com.
Notice: This vehicle was not Filling the Tank

designed for fuel that contains
methanol. Do not use fuel
containing methanol. It can { WARNING
corrode metal parts in the fuel Fuel vapor burns violently and a
system and also damage plastic
fuel fire can cause bad injuries.
and rubber parts. That damage
To help avoid injuries to you and
would not be covered under the
vehicle warranty. others, read and follow all the
instructions on the fuel pump
Some gasolines that are island. Turn off the engine when
not reformulated for low refueling. Do not smoke near fuel
emissions can contain an or when refueling the vehicle. Do
octane-enhancing additive called The tethered fuel cap is behind
not use cellular phones. Keep
methylcyclopentadienyl manganese the fuel door on the vehicle's
sparks, flames, and smoking
tricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendant passenger side. Turn the fuel cap
materials away from fuel. Do not counterclockwise to remove.
where you buy gasoline whether the
leave the fuel pump unattended
fuel contains MMT. We recommend
against the use of such gasolines. when refueling the vehicle. This is
Fuels containing MMT can reduce against the law in some places.
the life of spark plugs and the Do not re-enter the vehicle while
performance of the emission control pumping fuel. Keep children away
system could be affected. The from the fuel pump; never let
malfunction indicator lamp might children pump fuel.
turn on. If this occurs, return to your
dealer for service.
While refueling, hang the tethered Filling a Portable Fuel

fuel cap from the hook on the fuel { WARNING Container
door. Reinstall the cap by turning it
clockwise until it clicks. If a fire starts while you are
refueling, do not remove the
nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel
{ WARNING
{ WARNING by shutting off the pump or by Never fill a portable fuel container
Fuel can spray out on you if you notifying the station attendant. while it is in the vehicle. Static
open the fuel cap too quickly. Leave the area immediately. electricity discharge from the
If you spill fuel and then container can ignite the fuel
something ignites it, you could be Notice: If a new fuel cap is vapor. You can be badly burned
badly burned. This spray can needed, be sure to get the right and the vehicle damaged if this
happen if the tank is nearly full, type of cap from your dealer. occurs. To help avoid injury to you
and is more likely in hot weather. The wrong type fuel cap might and others:
Open the fuel cap slowly and wait not fit properly, might cause the . Dispense fuel only into
for any hiss noise to stop. Then malfunction indicator lamp to approved containers.
unscrew the cap all the way. light, and could damage the fuel
tank and emissions system.
. Do not fill a container while it
See Malfunction Indicator Lamp is inside a vehicle, in a
Do not top off or overfill the tank and on page 5‑14. vehicle's trunk, pickup bed,
wait a few seconds before removing or on any surface other than
the nozzle. Clean fuel from painted the ground.
surfaces as soon as possible. (Continued)
See Exterior Care on page 10‑91.
WARNING (Continued) Towing For information on towing a disabled

vehicle, see Towing the Vehicle on
page 10‑88. For information on
. Bring the fill nozzle in contact General Towing towing the vehicle behind another
with the inside of the fill Information vehicle such as a motorhome, see
opening before operating the Recreational Vehicle Towing on
Only use towing equipment that has
nozzle. Contact should be page 10‑88.
been designed for the vehicle.
maintained until the filling is Contact your dealer or trailering
complete. dealer for assistance with preparing
. Do not smoke while the vehicle for towing a trailer.
pumping fuel. See the following trailer towing
. Do not use a cellular phone information in this section:
while pumping fuel. . For information on driving while
towing a trailer, see “Driving
Characteristics and
Towing Tips.”
. For maximum vehicle and trailer
weights, see “Trailer Towing.”
. For information on equipment to
tow a trailer, see “Towing
Equipment.”
Driving Characteristics The vehicle can tow a trailer when Pulling A Trailer
equipped with the proper trailer
and Towing Tips towing equipment. For trailering
Here are some important points:
capacity, see Trailer Towing on . There are many laws, including
{ WARNING page 9‑60. Trailering changes speed limit restrictions that apply
handling, acceleration, braking, to trailering. Check for legal
The driver can lose control when durability and fuel economy. With requirements.
pulling a trailer if the correct the added weight, the engine, .
equipment is not used or the Do not tow a trailer at all during
transmission, wheel assemblies and the first 1 600 km (1,000 miles)
vehicle is not driven properly. For tires are forced to work harder and the new vehicle is driven. The
example, if the trailer is too under greater loads. The trailer also engine, axle or other parts could
heavy, the brakes may not work adds wind resistance, increasing the be damaged.
well — or even at all. The driver pulling requirements. For safe
and passengers could be trailering, correctly use the proper . During the first 800 km
seriously injured. The vehicle may trailering equipment. (500 miles) that a trailer is
also be damaged; the resulting towed, do not drive over 80 km/h
The following information has (50 mph) and do not make starts
repairs would not be covered by important trailering tips and rules for at full throttle. This reduces wear
the vehicle warranty. Pull a trailer your safety and that of your on the vehicle.
only if all the steps in this section passengers. Read this section
have been followed. Ask your carefully before pulling a trailer.
dealer for advice and information
about towing a trailer with the
vehicle.

. The vehicle can tow in D (Drive). and mirror adjustments. If the trailer Following Distance
Use a lower gear if the has electric brakes, start the vehicle
transmission shifts too often. Stay at least twice as far behind the
and trailer moving and then apply
vehicle ahead as you would when
. Do not use the Fuel Saver Mode the trailer brake controller by hand
driving the vehicle without a trailer.
when towing. to be sure the brakes are working.
This can help to avoid situations
. Obey speed limit restrictions. During the trip, check regularly to be that require heavy braking and
Do not drive faster than the sure that the load is secure, and the sudden turns.
maximum posted speed for lamps and trailer brakes are working
trailers, or no more than 90 km/h properly. Passing
(55 mph), to reduce wear on the Towing with a Stability Control More passing distance is needed
vehicle. when towing a trailer. Because the
System rig is longer, it is necessary to go
Driving with a Trailer When towing, the sound of the farther beyond the passed vehicle
Towing a trailer requires experience. stability control system might be before returning to the lane.
Get familiar with handling and heard. The system is reacting to the
braking with the added trailer vehicle movement caused by the
weight. The vehicle is now longer trailer, which mainly occurs during
and not as responsive as the cornering. This is normal when
vehicle is by itself. towing heavier trailers.
Check all trailer hitch parts and
attachments, safety chains,
electrical connectors, lamps, tires
Backing Up When turning with a trailer, make Driving On Grades

wider turns than normal so the
Hold the bottom of the steering Reduce speed and shift to a lower
trailer will not strike soft shoulders,
wheel with one hand. To move the gear before starting down a long or
curbs, road signs, trees or other
trailer to the left, move that hand to steep downgrade. If the
objects. Use the turn signal well in
the left. To move the trailer to the transmission is not shifted down, the
advance and avoid jerky or sudden
right, move your hand to the right. brakes might have to be used so
maneuvers.
Always back up slowly and, much that they would get hot and no
if possible, have someone Turn Signals When Towing a longer work well.
guide you. Trailer The vehicle can tow in D (Drive).
Making Turns The turn signal indicators on the Use a lower gear if the transmission
instrument panel flash whenever shifts too often.
Notice: Making very sharp turns
while trailering could cause the signaling a turn or lane change. When towing at high altitude on
trailer to come in contact with the Properly hooked up, the trailer steep uphill grades, engine coolant
vehicle. The vehicle could be lamps also flash, telling other boils at a lower temperature than at
damaged. Avoid making very drivers the vehicle is turning, normal altitudes. If the engine is
sharp turns while trailering. changing lanes or stopping. turned off immediately after towing
When towing a trailer, the arrows on at high altitude on steep uphill
the instrument panel flash for turns grades, the vehicle could show
even if the bulbs on the trailer are signs similar to engine overheating.
burned out. Check occasionally to To avoid this, let the engine run
be sure the trailer bulbs are still while parked, preferably on level
working. ground, with the transmission in
P (Park) for a few minutes before
turning the engine off. If the
overheat warning comes on, see
Engine Overheating on page 10‑19.
Parking on Hills 3. When the wheel chocks are in Maintenance When Trailer
place, release the brake pedal Towing
{ WARNING until the chocks absorb the load.
The vehicle needs service more
4. Reapply the brake pedal. Then often when pulling a trailer. See the
Parking the vehicle on a hill with apply the parking brake and shift Maintenance Schedule boklet for
the trailer attached can be into P (Park). more information. Things that are
dangerous. If something goes especially important in trailer
5. Release the brake pedal.
wrong, the rig could start to move. operation are automatic
People can be injured, and both Leaving After Parking on a Hill transmission fluid, engine oil, axle
the vehicle and the trailer can be lubricant, belts, cooling system and
1. Apply and hold the brake pedal
damaged. When possible, always brake system. Inspect these before
while you:
park the rig on a flat surface. and during the trip.
. Start the engine.
Check periodically to see that all
If parking the rig on a hill:
. Shift into a gear. hitch nuts and bolts are tight.
1. Press the brake pedal, but do
. Release the parking brake.
Engine Cooling When Trailer
not shift into P (Park) yet. Turn 2. Let up on the brake pedal. Towing
the wheels into the curb if facing
downhill or into traffic if facing 3. Drive slowly until the trailer is The cooling system may temporarily
uphill. clear of the chocks. overheat during severe operating
4. Stop and have someone pick up conditions. See Engine Overheating
2. Have someone place chocks on page 10‑19.
under the trailer wheels. and store the chocks.
Trailer Towing See “Weight of the Trailer Tongue” If there are a lot of options,
later in this section for more equipment, passengers or cargo in
Before pulling a trailer, there are information. the vehicle, it will reduce the tongue
three important considerations that weight the vehicle can carry, which
have to do with weight: Maximum trailer weight is calculated
assuming only the driver is in the will also reduce the trailer weight the
. The weight of the trailer. tow vehicle and it has all the vehicle can tow. If towing a trailer,
required trailering equipment. The the tongue load must be added to
. The weight of the trailer tongue. the GVW because the vehicle will
weight of additional optional
. The total weight on your equipment, passengers and cargo in be carrying that weight, too. See
vehicle's tires. the tow vehicle must be subtracted Vehicle Load Limits on page 9‑12
from the maximum trailer weight. for more information.
Weight of the Trailer
How heavy can a trailer safely be? Ask your dealer for trailering
information or advice, or write us at
For a vehicle with a V6 engine, it our Customer Assistance Offices.
should never weigh more than See Customer Assistance Offices
454 kg (1,000 lbs). But even that on page 13‑4 for more information.
can be too heavy.
It depends on how the rig is used.
Weight of the Trailer Tongue
For example, speed, altitude, road The tongue load (A) of any trailer is
grades, outside temperature and an important weight to measure
how much the vehicle is used to pull because it affects the total gross
a trailer are all important. It can weight of the vehicle. The Gross
depend on any special equipment Vehicle Weight (GVW) includes the
on the vehicle, and the amount of curb weight of the vehicle, any The trailer tongue (A) should weigh
tongue weight the vehicle can carry. cargo carried in it, and the people 10‐15 percent of the total loaded
who will be riding in the vehicle. trailer weight (B).
After loading the trailer, weigh the Towing Equipment Safety Chains
trailer and then the tongue,
Hitches Always attach chains between the
separately, to see if the weights are
vehicle and the trailer. Cross the
proper. If they are not, adjustments Use the correct hitch equipment. safety chains under the tongue of
might be made by moving some See your dealer or a hitch dealer for the trailer to help prevent the tongue
items around in the trailer. assistance. from contacting the road if it
Total Weight on Your Vehicle's . The rear bumper on the vehicle becomes separated from the hitch.
Tires is not intended for hitches. Do Leave enough slack so the rig can
not attach rental hitches or other turn. Never allow safety chains to
Be sure the vehicle's tires are drag on the ground.
inflated to the upper limit for cold bumper-type hitches to it. Use
tires. These numbers can be found only a frame-mounted hitch that Trailer Brakes
on the Tire-Loading Information does not attach to the bumper.
Does the trailer have its own
label. See Vehicle Load Limits on . Will any holes be made in the brakes? Be sure to read and follow
page 9‑12. Make sure not to go body of the vehicle when the the instructions for the trailer brakes
over the GVW limit for the vehicle, trailer hitch is installed? If there so they are installed, adjusted, and
including the weight of the trailer are, seal the holes when the maintained properly.
tongue. hitch is removed. If the holes are
not sealed, dirt, water, and Because the vehicle has antilock
deadly carbon monoxide (CO) brakes, do not tap into the vehicle's
from the exhaust can get into the brake system. If this is done, both
vehicle. See Engine Exhaust on brake systems will not work well,
page 9‑27. or at all.
Conversions and Add-on equipment can drain the

vehicle 12‐volt battery, even if the
Add-Ons vehicle is not operating.
The vehicle has an airbag system.
Add-On Electrical Before attempting to add anything
Equipment electrical to the vehicle, see
Servicing the Airbag-Equipped
Notice: Do not add anything Vehicle on page 3‑39 and Adding
electrical to the vehicle unless Equipment to the Airbag-Equipped
you check with your dealer first. Vehicle on page 3‑40.
Some electrical equipment can
damage the vehicle and the
damage would not be covered by
the vehicle's warranty. Some
add-on electrical equipment can
keep other components from
working as they should.
Vehicle Care 10-1
Vehicle Care Engine Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . 10-13

Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15
Bulb Replacement
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-32
Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16 Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32
Engine Overheating . . . . . . . . 10-19 High Intensity Discharge
General Information Overheated Engine (HID) Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32
General Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-2 Protection Headlamps, Front Turn
California Proposition Operating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20 Signal and Parking
65 Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3 Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . 10-21 Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32
California Perchlorate Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22 Taillamps, Turn Signal,
Materials Requirements . . . . 10-3 Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23 Stoplamps, and Back-Up
Accessories and Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24 Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34
Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25 License Plate Lamp . . . . . . . . 10-35
Vehicle Checks Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . 10-26 Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . 10-36
Doing Your Own Automatic Transmission Shift
Service Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4 Lock Control Function Electrical System
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5 Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26 Electrical System
Engine Compartment Ignition Transmission Lock Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27 Fuses and Circuit
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6
Park Brake and P (Park) Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9
Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-27 Engine Compartment Fuse
Engine Oil Life System . . . . . 10-12
Wiper Blade Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38
Automatic Transmission
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28 Instrument Panel Fuse
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41
Headlamp Aiming Rear Compartment Fuse
Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . 10-29 Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-43
10-2 Vehicle Care
Wheels and Tires Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-66 General Information

Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-46 Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-68
Winter Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-47 If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-68 For service and parts needs,
Tire Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . 10-47 Tire Sealant and visit your dealer. You will receive
Tire Designations . . . . . . . . . . . 10-49 Compressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . 10-70 genuine GM parts and GM-trained
Tire Terminology and Storing the Tire Sealant and and supported service people.
Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50 Compressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . 10-78 Genuine GM parts have one of
Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53 Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-78 these marks:
Tire Pressure Monitor Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . 10-84
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54
Tire Pressure Monitor Jump Starting
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55 Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-84
Tire Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59 Towing
Tire Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59 Towing the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 10-88
When It Is Time for New Recreational Vehicle
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-61 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-88
Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62
Different Size Tires and Appearance Care
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-64 Exterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-91
Uniform Tire Quality Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-95
Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-64 Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-98
Wheel Alignment and Tire
Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-66
Vehicle Care 10-3
California Proposition California Perchlorate Accessories and

65 Warning Materials Requirements Modifications
Most motor vehicles, including this Certain types of automotive Adding non‐dealer accessories
one, contain and/or emit chemicals applications, such as airbag to the vehicle can affect vehicle
known to the State of California to initiators, seat belt pretensioners, performance and safety, including
cause cancer and birth defects or and lithium batteries contained in such things as airbags, braking,
other reproductive harm. Engine remote keyless transmitters, may stability, ride and handling,
exhaust, many parts and systems, contain perchlorate materials. emissions systems, aerodynamics,
many fluids, and some component Special handling may be necessary. durability, and electronic systems
wear by-products contain and/or For additional information, see like antilock brakes, traction control,
emit these chemicals. www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/ and stability control. Some of these
perchlorate. accessories could even cause
malfunction or damage not covered
by the vehicle warranty.
Damage to vehicle components
resulting from the installation or use
of non‐GM certified parts, including
control module modifications, is not
covered under the terms of the
vehicle warranty and may affect
remaining warranty coverage for
affected parts.
10-4 Vehicle Care
GM Accessories are designed to Vehicle Checks

complement and function with other WARNING (Continued)
systems on the vehicle. Your GM
dealer can accessorize the vehicle Doing Your Own . Be sure to use the proper
using genuine GM Accessories. Service Work nuts, bolts, and other
When you go to your GM dealer fasteners. English and metric
and ask for GM Accessories, you
will know that GM-trained and
{ WARNING fasteners can be easily
confused. If the wrong
supported service technicians will You can be injured and the fasteners are used, parts can
perform the work using genuine GM vehicle could be damaged if you later break or fall off. You
Accessories. try to do service work on a vehicle could be hurt.
Also, see Adding Equipment to the without knowing enough about it.
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on . Be sure you have sufficient If doing some of your own service
page 3‑40. knowledge, experience, the work, use the proper service
proper replacement parts, manual. It tells you much more
and tools before attempting about how to service the vehicle
any vehicle than this manual can. To order the
maintenance task. proper service manual, see Service
(Continued) Publications Ordering Information
on page 13‑14.
Vehicle Care 10-5
This vehicle has an airbag system. Hood

Before attempting to do your own
service work, see Servicing the To open the hood, do the following:
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on
page 3‑39.
Keep a record with all parts receipts
and list the mileage and the date
of any service work performed.
See Maintenance Records on
page 11‑10.
2. Push the secondary hood

release lever, located under the
center of the hood above the
grille, to the right to disengage it.
1. Pull the interior hood release
handle located to the left of the 3. Lift the hood.
steering column below the Before closing the hood, make sure
instrument panel. all the filler caps are properly
secured. Pull the hood down and
close it firmly.
10-6 Vehicle Care
Engine Compartment Overview
2.4 L L4 Engine
Vehicle Care 10-7
A. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on G. Power Steering Reservoir and

page 10‑13. Cap. See Power Steering Fluid
B. Engine Cover. on page 10‑21.
C. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See Engine H. Engine Coolant Reservoir and
Oil on page 10‑9. Pressure Cap. See Engine
Coolant on page 10‑16.
D. Engine Oil Dipstick. See Engine
Oil on page 10‑9. I. Battery Cover. See Battery on
page 10‑25.
E. Transmission Fluid Cap and
Dipstick. See Automatic J. Engine Compartment Fuse
Transmission Fluid on Block on page 10‑38.
page 10‑13. K. Windshield Washer Fluid
F. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See Washer Fluid on
Reservoir. See Brakes on page 10‑22.
page 10‑23.
10-8 Vehicle Care
3.6 L V6 Engine
Vehicle Care 10-9
A. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on K. Windshield Washer Fluid Checking Engine Oil

page 10‑13. Reservoir. See Washer Fluid on
It is a good idea to check the engine
B. Power Steering Reservoir and page 10‑22.
oil level at each fuel fill. In order
Cap. See Power Steering Fluid to get an accurate reading, the
on page 10‑21. Engine Oil vehicle must be on level ground.
C. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See Engine To ensure proper engine The engine oil dipstick handle is
Oil on page 10‑9. performance and long life, careful a yellow loop. See Engine
attention must be paid to engine oil. Compartment Overview on
D. Engine Oil Dipstick (Out of Following these simple, but page 10‑6 for the location of the
View). See Engine Oil on important steps will help protect engine oil dipstick.
page 10‑9. your investment: Obtaining an accurate oil level
E. Engine Cover. . Always use engine oil approved reading is essential:
F. Transmission Fluid Cap and to the proper specification and of 1. If the engine has been running
Dipstick. See Automatic the proper viscosity grade. See recently, turn off the engine and
Transmission Fluid on “Selecting the Right Engine Oil.” allow several minutes for the oil
page 10‑13. . Check the engine oil level to drain back into the oil pan.
G. Brake Master Cylinder regularly and maintain the Checking your oil level too soon
Reservoir. See Brakes on proper oil level. See “Checking after engine shut off will not
page 10‑23. Engine Oil” and “When to Add provide an accurate oil level
Engine Oil.” reading.
H. Engine Coolant Reservoir and
Pressure Cap. See Engine . Change the engine oil at the 2. Pull out the dipstick and clean
Coolant on page 10‑16. appropriate time. See Engine Oil it with a paper towel or cloth,
Life System on page 10‑12. then push it back in all the way.
I. Battery Cover. See Battery on Remove it again, keeping the tip
page 10‑25. . Always dispose of engine oil
down, and check the level.
properly. See “What to Do With
J. Engine Compartment Fuse
Used Oil.”
Block on page 10‑38.
10-10 Vehicle Care
When to Add Engine Oil area that shows the proper This certification mark indicates that
operating range, the engine could the oil has been approved to the
be damaged. You should drain dexos™ specification.
out the excess oil or limit your
driving of the vehicle and seek a
service professional to remove
the excess amount of oil.
See Engine Compartment Overview
If the oil is below the cross-hatched on page 10‑6 for the location of the
area at the tip of the dipstick, add engine oil fill cap.
one liter/quart of the recommended Your vehicle was filled at the factory
Add enough oil to put the level
oil and then recheck the level. See with dexos™ approved engine oil.
somewhere in the proper operating
“Selecting the Right Engine Oil” for range. Push the dipstick all the way Notice: Use only engine oil that
an explanation of what kind of oil to back in when through. is approved to the dexos™
use. For engine oil crankcase specification or an equivalent
capacity, see Capacities and Selecting the Right Engine Oil engine oil of the appropriate
Specifications on page 12‑2. viscosity grade. Engine oils
Selecting the right engine oil
Notice: Do not add too much oil. depends on both the proper oil approved to the dexos™
Oil levels above or below the specification and viscosity grade: specification will show the
acceptable operating range dexos™ symbol on the container.
shown on the dipstick are harmful Specification Failure to use the recommended
to the engine. If you find that you Use and ask for engine oils with the engine oil or equivalent can result
have an oil level above the dexos™ certification mark. Oils in engine damage not covered by
operating range, i.e. the engine meeting the requirements of your the vehicle warranty. If you are
has so much oil that the oil level vehicle should have the dexos™ unsure whether your oil is
gets above the cross-hatched certification mark on the container. approved to the dexos™
specification, ask your service
provider.
Vehicle Care 10-11
Use of Substitute Engine Oils if be used. An oil of this viscosity

dexos™ is unavailable: In the event grade will provide easier cold
that dexos™ approved engine oil is starting for the engine at extremely
not available at an oil change or for low temperatures. When selecting
maintaining proper oil level, you an oil of the appropriate viscosity
may use substitute engine oil grade, be sure to always select
displaying the API Starburst symbol an oil that meets the required
and of SAE 5W-30 viscosity grade. specification, dexos™. See
Use of oils that do not meet the “Specification” for more information.
dexos™ specification, however, may
result in reduced performance under
certain circumstances.
Viscosity Grade
SAE 5W-30 is the best viscosity
grade for the vehicle. Do not use
other viscosity oils such as
SAE 10W‐30, 10W‐40, or 20W-50.
Cold Temperature Operation: In an

area of extreme cold, where the
temperature falls below −29°C
(−20°F), an SAE 0W-30 oil should
10-12 Vehicle Care
Engine Oil Additives/Engine Used oil can be a threat to the necessary. A CHANGE ENGINE
Oil Flushes environment. If you change your OIL SOON message comes on. See
own oil, be sure to drain all the oil Engine Oil Messages on page 5‑33.
Do not add anything to the oil. The from the filter before disposal. Never Change the oil as soon as possible
recommended oils with the dexos™ dispose of oil by putting it in the within the next 1 000 km (600 miles).
specification and displaying the trash or pouring it on the ground, It is possible that, if driving under
dexos™ certification mark are all into sewers, or into streams or the best conditions, the oil life
that is needed for good performance bodies of water. Recycle it by taking system might indicate that an oil
and engine protection. it to a place that collects used oil. change is not necessary for up to a
Engine oil system flushes are not year. The engine oil and filter must
recommended and could cause Engine Oil Life System be changed at least once a year
engine damage not covered by the and, at this time, the system must
vehicle warranty. When to Change Engine Oil be reset. Your dealer has trained
This vehicle has a computer system service people who will perform this
What to Do with Used Oil work and reset the system. It is also
that indicates when to change the
Used engine oil contains certain engine oil and filter. This is based important to check the oil regularly
elements that can be unhealthy for on engine revolutions and engine over the course of an oil drain
your skin and could even cause temperature, and not on mileage. interval and keep it at the proper
cancer. Do not let used oil stay on Based on driving conditions, the level.
your skin for very long. Clean your mileage at which an oil change is If the system is ever reset
skin and nails with soap and water, indicated can vary considerably. For accidentally, the oil must be
or a good hand cleaner. Wash or the oil life system to work properly, changed at 5 000 km (3,000 miles)
properly dispose of clothing or rags the system must be reset every time since the last oil change.
containing used engine oil. See the the oil is changed. Remember to reset the oil life
manufacturer's warnings about the system whenever the oil is changed.
use and disposal of oil products. When the system has calculated
that oil life has been diminished, it
indicates that an oil change is
Vehicle Care 10-13
How to Reset the Engine Oil If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL dealer for additional information or
Life System message comes back on when the the procedure can be found in the
vehicle is started, the engine oil life service manual. To purchase a
Reset the system whenever the system has not been reset. Repeat service manual, see Service
engine oil is changed so that the the procedure. Publications Ordering Information
system can calculate the next on page 13‑14.
engine oil change. To reset the
system:
Automatic Transmission Change the fluid and filter at the
1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN with
Fluid intervals listed in Scheduled
Maintenance on page 11‑2, and be
the engine off. How to Check Automatic sure to use the fluid listed in
2. Press the DIC menu button on Transmission Fluid Recommended Fluids and
the turn signal lever to scroll It is not necessary to check Lubricants on page 11‑7.
through the menu items on the the transmission fluid level.
DIC screen. A transmission fluid leak is the only Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
3. Press the set button to clear the reason for fluid loss. If a leak The engine air cleaner/filter is
CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON occurs, take the vehicle to your located in the engine compartment
message and/or restore the dealer service department and have on the driver's side of the vehicle.
REMAINING OIL LIFE 100% it repaired as soon as possible. See Engine Compartment Overview
message. There is a special procedure for on page 10‑6 for more information
4. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF. checking and changing the on location.
transmission fluid. Because this
The system is reset when the procedure is difficult, you should
CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON have this done at your dealer
message is off and the REMAINING service department. Contact your
OIL LIFE 100% message is
displayed.
10-14 Vehicle Care
When to Inspect the Engine Air To inspect or replace the engine air 2. Lift the filter cover housing away
Cleaner/Filter cleaner/filter do the following: from the engine.
Inspect the air cleaner/filter at the 2.4 L L4 Engine 3. Pull out the filter.
scheduled maintenance intervals 4. Inspect or replace the engine air
and replace it at the first oil change cleaner/filter.
after each 80 000 km (50,000 mi)
interval. See Scheduled 5. Lower the filter cover housing
Maintenance on page 11‑2 for toward the engine.
more information. If you are driving 6. Install the screws to the top of
in dusty/dirty conditions, inspect the the housing to lock the cover in
filter at each engine oil change. place.
How to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
To inspect the air cleaner/filter,
remove the filter from the vehicle
and lightly shake the filter to release 1. Remove the screws on top of
loose dust and dirt. If the filter the engine air cleaner/filter
remains caked with dirt, a new filter housing.
is required.
Vehicle Care 10-15
3.6 L V6 Engine 5. Lower the filter cover housing Cooling System

toward the engine.
The cooling system allows the
6. Install the screws to the top of engine to maintain the correct
the housing to lock the cover in working temperature.
place.
When it is safe to lift the hood:
{ WARNING 2.4 L L4 Engine
Operating the engine with the air

cleaner/filter off can cause you
or others to be burned. The air
cleaner not only cleans the air; it
helps to stop flames if the engine
1. Remove the screws on top of backfires. Use caution when
the engine air cleaner/filter working on the engine and do not
housing. drive with the air cleaner/filter off.
2. Lift the filter cover housing away
from the engine. Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is
off, dirt can easily get into the
3. Pull out the filter.
engine, which could damage it.
4. Inspect or replace the engine air Always have the air cleaner/filter A. Engine Cooling Fan
cleaner/filter. in place when you are driving. (Out of View)
B. Coolant Surge Tank and
Pressure Cap
10-16 Vehicle Care
3.6 L V6 Engine Notice: Using coolant other

{ WARNING than DEX-COOL® can cause
premature engine, heater core,
An electric engine cooling fan or radiator corrosion. In addition,
under the hood can start up even the engine coolant could require
when the engine is not running changing sooner, at 50 000 km
and can cause injury. Keep (30,000 miles) or 24 months,
hands, clothing, and tools away whichever occurs first. Any
from any underhood electric fan. repairs would not be covered by
the vehicle warranty. Always use
DEX-COOL (silicate-free) coolant
in the vehicle.
{ WARNING
Heater and radiator hoses, and Engine Coolant
A. Engine Cooling Fans other engine parts, can be very The cooling system in the vehicle
(Out of View) hot. Do not touch them. If you do, is filled with DEX-COOL® engine
B. Coolant Surge Tank and you can be burned. coolant. This coolant is designed to
Pressure Cap Do not run the engine if there is remain in the vehicle for 5 years or
240 000 km (150,000 mi), whichever
a leak. If you run the engine, it
occurs first.
could lose all coolant. That could
cause an engine fire, and you The following explains the cooling
could be burned. Get any leak system and how to check and add
fixed before you drive the vehicle. coolant when it is low. If there is a
problem with engine overheating,
see Engine Overheating on
page 10‑19.
Vehicle Care 10-17
What to Use Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, Checking Coolant

drinkable water and DEX-COOL
The vehicle must be on a level
{ WARNING coolant. If using this mixture,
nothing else needs to be added.
surface when checking the coolant
level.
Adding only plain water or some This mixture:
other liquid to the cooling system Check to see if coolant is visible in
. Gives freezing protection down
can be dangerous. Plain water the coolant surge tank. If the coolant
to −37°C (−34°F), outside
and other liquids, can boil before inside the coolant surge tank is
temperature.
the proper coolant mixture will. boiling, do not do anything else until
. Gives boiling protection up to it cools down. If coolant is visible
The vehicle's coolant warning 129°C (265°F), engine but the coolant level is not at or
system is set for the proper temperature. above the mark pointed to, add a
coolant mixture. With plain water 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
or the wrong mixture, the engine
. Protects against rust and
corrosion. water and DEX-COOL coolant at the
could get too hot but you would coolant surge tank, but be sure the
not get the overheat warning. The . Will not damage aluminum parts. cooling system is cool before this
engine could catch fire and you or . Helps keep the proper engine is done.
others could be burned. Use a temperature.
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
water and DEX-COOL coolant. Notice: If an improper coolant
mixture is used, the engine could
overheat and be badly damaged.
The repair cost would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty.
Too much water in the mixture
can freeze and crack the engine,
radiator, heater core, and other
parts.
10-18 Vehicle Care
If no coolant is visible in the coolant

surge tank, add coolant as follows: { WARNING
How to Add Coolant to the An electric engine cooling fan
Coolant Surge Tank under the hood can start up even
when the engine is not running
{ WARNING and can cause injury. Keep
hands, clothing, and tools away
The coolant surge tank pressure
cap can be removed when the
You can be burned if you spill from any underhood electric fan. cooling system, including the surge
coolant on hot engine parts. tank pressure cap and upper
Coolant contains ethylene glycol radiator hose, is no longer hot.
and it will burn if the engine parts
are hot enough. Do not spill { WARNING 1. Turn the pressure cap slowly
counterclockwise. If a hiss is
coolant on a hot engine. Steam and scalding liquids from a heard, wait for that to stop.
hot cooling system can blow out A hiss means there is still some
Notice: This vehicle has a and burn you badly. They are pressure left.
specific coolant fill procedure. under pressure, and if you turn 2. Then keep turning the cap and
Failure to follow this procedure the surge tank pressure remove it.
could cause the engine to cap — even a little — they can
overheat and be severely come out at high speed. Never
damaged. turn the cap when the cooling
system, including the surge tank
pressure cap, is hot. Wait for the
cooling system and surge tank
pressure cap to cool if you ever
have to turn the pressure cap.
Vehicle Care 10-19
reaches the mark pointed to on You may decide not to lift the hood
the front of the coolant when this warning appears, but
surge tank. instead get service help right away.
5. Replace the cap. Be sure the See Roadside Assistance Program
cap is hand–tight and full (U.S. and Canada) on page 13‑7 or
seated. Roadside Assistance Program
(Mexico) on page 13‑9.
Notice: If the pressure cap is not
tightly installed, coolant loss and If you do decide to lift the hood,
possible engine damage may make sure the vehicle is parked on
occur. Be sure the cap is properly a level surface.
and tightly secured. Then check to see if the engine
If coolant is needed, add the proper cooling fans are running. If the
3. Fill the coolant surge tank with
DEX-COOL coolant mixture at the engine is overheating, the fan(s)
the proper mixture to the mark
coolant surge tank. should be running. If they are not,
pointed to on the front of the
do not continue to run the engine
coolant surge tank.
and have the vehicle serviced.
4. With the coolant surge tank cap Engine Overheating
Notice: Engine damage from
off, start the engine and let it run The vehicle has several indicators running the engine without
until the upper radiator hose to warn of engine overheating. coolant is not covered by the
starts getting hot. Watch out for
There is a coolant temperature warranty.
the engine cooling fan(s). By this
time, the coolant level inside gauge and a warning light on the
instrument panel cluster that If Steam is Coming from the
the coolant surge tank may be Engine Compartment
lower. If the level is lower, add indicate an overheated engine
more of the proper mixture to the condition. See Engine Coolant See Overheated Engine Protection
coolant surge tank until the level Temperature Gauge on page 5‑11 Operating Mode on page 10‑20 for
for more information. information on driving to a safe
place in an emergency.
10-20 Vehicle Care
If No Steam is Coming from 3. In heavy traffic, let the engine Overheated Engine
the Engine Compartment idle in N (Neutral) while stopped.
If it is safe to do so, pull off the
Protection
If an engine overheat warning is road, shift to P (Park) or Operating Mode
displayed but no steam can be seen N (Neutral) and let the
or heard, the problem might not be This emergency operating mode
engine idle. allows the vehicle to be driven to
too serious. Sometimes the engine
can get a little too hot when the If the temperature overheat gauge a safe place in an emergency
vehicle: is no longer in the overheat zone or situation. If an overheated engine
.
an overheat warning no longer condition exists, an overheat
Climbs a long hill on a hot day displays, the vehicle can be driven. protection mode which alternates
. Stops after high-speed driving Continue to drive the vehicle slowly firing groups of cylinders helps
for about 10 minutes. Keep a safe prevent engine damage. In this
. Idles for long periods in traffic
vehicle distance from the vehicle in mode, there is significant loss in
. Tows a trailer front. If the warning does not come power and engine performance. The
If the overheat warning displays with back on, continue to drive normally. engine coolant temperature warning
no sign of steam: light comes on the instrument panel,
If the warning continues, pull over,
to indicate the vehicle has entered
1. Turn the air conditioning off. stop, and park the vehicle
overheated engine protection
right away.
2. Turn the heater on to the highest operating mode. The temperature
temperature and to the highest If there is no sign of steam, idle the gauge also indicates an overheat
fan speed. Open the windows as engine for three minutes while condition exists. Driving extended
necessary. parked. If the warning is still km (miles) and/or towing a trailer in
displayed, turn off the engine until it the overheat protection mode
cools down. Also, see “Overheated should be avoided.
Engine Protection Operating Mode”
later in this section.
Vehicle Care 10-21
Power Steering Fluid How to Check Power Steering

Fluid
Check the level after the vehicle has
been driven for at least
twenty minutes so the fluid is warm.
To check the power steering fluid:
1. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF
See Engine Compartment Overview and let the engine compartment
on page 10‑6 for information on the cool down.
location of the power steering fluid
2. Wipe the cap and the top of the
reservoir.
reservoir clean. When the engine is hot, the level
When to Check Power Steering 3. Unscrew the cap and pull it should be at the hot MAX level.
Fluid straight up. When the engine is cold, the fluid
It is not necessary to regularly level should be between MIN and
4. Wipe the dipstick with a
check power steering fluid unless a MAX on the dipstick.
clean rag.
leak is suspected in the system or What to Use
an unusual noise is heard. A fluid 5. Replace the cap and completely
loss in this system could indicate a tighten it. To determine what kind of fluid to
problem. Have the system inspected 6. Remove the cap again and look use, see Recommended Fluids and
and repaired. at the fluid level on the dipstick. Lubricants on page 11‑7. Always
use the proper fluid.
10-22 Vehicle Care

. Do not mix water with
Washer Fluid Adding Washer Fluid
ready-to-use washer fluid.
What to Use Water can cause the solution
to freeze and damage the
When windshield washer fluid washer fluid tank and other
is needed, be sure to read the parts of the washer system.
manufacturer instructions before Also, water does not clean as
use. If operating the vehicle in an well as washer fluid.
area where the temperature can fall
below freezing, use a fluid that has Open the cap with the washer . Fill the washer fluid tank only
sufficient protection against symbol on it. Add washer fluid until three-quarters full when it is
freezing. the tank is full. See Engine very cold. This allows for
Compartment Overview on fluid expansion if freezing
page 10‑6 for reservoir location. occurs, which could damage
Notice: the tank if it is
completely full.
. When using concentrated
washer fluid, follow the
. Do not use engine coolant
manufacturer's instructions (antifreeze) in the windshield
for adding water. washer. It can damage the
windshield washer system
and paint.
Vehicle Care 10-23
Brakes Some driving conditions or climates Brake Adjustment

can cause a brake squeal when the
This vehicle has disc brakes. Disc Every time the brakes are applied,
brakes are first applied or lightly
brake pads have built-in wear with or without the vehicle moving,
applied. This does not mean
indicators that make a high-pitched the brakes adjust for wear.
something is wrong with the brakes.
warning sound when the brake pads Replacing Brake System Parts
are worn and new pads are needed. Properly torqued wheel nuts are
The sound can come and go or be necessary to help prevent brake The braking system on a vehicle is
heard all the time the vehicle is pulsation. When tires are rotated, complex. Its many parts have to be
moving, except when applying the inspect brake pads for wear and of top quality and work well together
brake pedal firmly. evenly tighten wheel nuts in the if the vehicle is to have really good
proper sequence to torque braking. The vehicle was designed
specifications in Capacities and
{ WARNING Specifications on page 12‑2.
and tested with top-quality brake
parts. When parts of the braking
The brake wear warning sound Brake linings should always be system are replaced, be sure to get
means that soon the brakes will replaced as complete axle sets. new, approved replacement parts.
not work well. That could lead to If this is not done, the brakes might
a crash. When the brake wear
Brake Pedal Travel not work properly. For example,
warning sound is heard, have the See your dealer if the brake pedal installing disc brake pads that are
does not return to normal height, wrong for the vehicle, can change
vehicle serviced.
or if there is a rapid increase in the balance between the front and
pedal travel. This could be a sign rear brakes — for the worse. The
Notice: Continuing to drive with that brake service might be braking performance expected can
worn-out brake pads could result required. change in many other ways if the
in costly brake repair. wrong replacement brake parts are
installed.
10-24 Vehicle Care
Brake Fluid There are only two reasons why the

brake fluid level in the reservoir { WARNING
might go down:
If too much brake fluid is added, it
. The brake fluid level goes down can spill on the engine and burn,
because of normal brake lining if the engine is hot enough. You
wear. When new linings are or others could be burned, and
installed, the fluid level goes the vehicle could be damaged.
back up. Add brake fluid only when work is
The brake master cylinder reservoir . A fluid leak in the brake done on the brake hydraulic
is filled with DOT 3 brake fluid as
hydraulic system can also cause system.
indicated on the reservoir cap. See
a low fluid level. Have the brake
Engine Compartment Overview on
hydraulic system fixed, since a
page 10‑6 for the location of the When the brake fluid falls to a low
leak means that sooner or later
reservoir. level, the brake warning light comes
the brakes will not work well.
on. See Brake System Warning
Do not top off the brake fluid. Light on page 5‑17.
Adding fluid does not correct a leak.
If fluid is added when the linings are
worn, there will be too much fluid
when new brake linings are
installed. Add or remove brake fluid,
as necessary, only when work is
done on the brake hydraulic system.
Vehicle Care 10-25
What to Add Notice: Battery

Use only new DOT 3 brake fluid . Using the wrong fluid can Refer to the replacement number on
from a sealed container. See badly damage brake the original battery label when a
Recommended Fluids and hydraulic system parts. For new battery is needed.
Lubricants on page 11‑7. example, just a few drops
of mineral-based oil, such
Always clean the brake fluid
reservoir cap and the area around as engine oil, in the brake { DANGER
the cap before removing it. This hydraulic system can Battery posts, terminals, and
helps keep dirt from entering the damage brake hydraulic
related accessories contain lead
reservoir. system parts so badly that
and lead compounds, chemicals
they will have to be replaced.
known to the State of California to
Do not let someone put in
{ WARNING the wrong kind of fluid. cause cancer and reproductive
harm. Wash hands after handling.
With the wrong kind of fluid in . If brake fluid is spilled on
the brake hydraulic system, the the vehicle's painted
surfaces, the paint finish can If the battery has a very low charge
brakes might not work well. This
be damaged. Be careful not or is dead, it might not be possible
could cause a crash. Always use
to spill brake fluid on the to remove the ignition key from
the proper brake fluid. the ignition switch or shift out of
vehicle. If you do, wash it off
immediately. P (Park). See Shifting Out of Park
on page 9‑26.
10-26 Vehicle Care
Vehicle Storage Starter Switch Check Automatic Transmission

Shift Lock Control
{ WARNING { WARNING Function Check
Batteries have acid that can burn When you are doing this
you and gas that can explode. inspection, the vehicle could { WARNING
You can be badly hurt if you are move suddenly. If the vehicle
not careful. See Jump Starting on When you are doing this
moves, you or others could be
page 10‑84 for tips on working inspection, the vehicle could
injured.
around a battery without move suddenly. If the vehicle
getting hurt. 1. Before starting this check, be moves, you or others could be
sure there is enough room injured.
around the vehicle.
Infrequent Usage: Remove the
black, negative (−) cable from the 2. Firmly apply both the parking 1. Before starting this check, be
battery to keep the battery from brake and the regular brake. sure there is enough room
running down. See Parking Brake on around the vehicle. It should be
page 9‑33. parked on a level surface.
Extended Storage: Remove the
black, negative (−) cable from the Do not use the accelerator 2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
battery or use a battery trickle pedal, and be ready to turn off See Parking Brake on
charger. the engine immediately if it page 9‑33.
starts. Be ready to apply the regular
3. Try to start the engine in each brake immediately if the vehicle
gear. The vehicle should start begins to move.
only in P (Park) or N (Neutral).
If the vehicle starts in any other
position, contact your dealer for
service.
Vehicle Care 10-27
3. With the engine off, turn Park Brake and P (Park) Park on a fairly steep hill, with the
the ignition to ON/RUN, but do vehicle facing downhill. Keeping
not start the engine. Without
Mechanism Check your foot on the regular brake, set
applying the regular brake, try the parking brake.
to move the shift lever out of { WARNING . To check the parking brake's
P (Park) with normal effort. If the holding ability: With the engine
shift lever moves out of P (Park), When you are doing this check,
the vehicle could begin to move. running and the transmission in
contact your dealer for service. N (Neutral), slowly remove foot
You or others could be injured
pressure from the regular brake
Ignition Transmission and property could be damaged.
pedal. Do this until the vehicle is
Make sure there is room in front
Lock Check of the vehicle in case it begins to
held by the parking brake only.
While parked, and with the parking . To check the P (Park)
roll. Be ready to apply the regular
brake set, try to turn the ignition to mechanism's holding ability:
brake at once should the vehicle
LOCK/OFF in each shift lever With the engine running, shift to
position. begin to move.
P (Park). Then release the
. The ignition should turn to parking brake followed by the
LOCK/OFF only when the shift regular brake.
lever is in P (Park). Contact your dealer if service is
. With the key access ignition required.
system, the ignition key should
come out only in LOCK/OFF.
See Ignition Positions (Key
Access) on page 9‑18 or Ignition
Positions (Keyless Access) on
page 9‑19.
Contact your dealer if service is
required.
10-28 Vehicle Care
Wiper Blade Replacement 4. Remove the wiper blade.

Windshield wiper blades should be Allowing the wiper blade arm to
inspected for wear and cracking. touch the windshield when no
See Scheduled Maintenance on wiper blade is installed could
page 11‑2 for more information. damage the windshield. Any
damage that occurs would not
Replacement blades come in be covered by the vehicle
different types and are removed warranty. Do not allow the wiper
in different ways. For proper type blade to touch the windshield.
and length, see Maintenance
Replacement Parts on page 11‑9. 5. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 for
wiper blade replacement.
To replace the windshield wiper
blade: 2. Lift up on plastic latch in the
middle of the wiper blade where
1. Pull the windshield wiper the wiper arm attaches.
assembly away from the
windshield. 3. With the latch open, pull the
wiper blade down towards the
windshield far enough to release
it from the J-hooked end of the
wiper arm.
Vehicle Care 10-29

. The vehicle should be placed so
Headlamp Aiming it is perpendicular to the wall or
To adjust the vertical aim, do the
following:
The headlamp aiming system has other flat surface.
1. Open the hood. See Hood on
been preset at the factory. . The vehicle should not have any page 10‑5
If the vehicle is damaged in an snow, ice, or mud on it.
accident, the aim of the headlamps . The vehicle should be fully
may be affected and adjustment assembled and all other work
may be necessary. stopped while headlamp aiming
It is recommended that a dealer is being performed.
adjust the headlamps. To re-aim the . The vehicle should be normally
headlamps yourself, use the loaded with a full tank of fuel and
following procedure. one person or 75 kg (160 lbs)
The vehicle should be properly sitting in the driver's seat.
prepared as follows: . Tires should be properly inflated.
. The vehicle should be placed so Headlamp aiming is done with
the headlamps are 7.6 m (25 ft.) the vehicle's low-beam headlamps. Base
from a light colored wall. The high-beam headlamps will be
. The vehicle must have all four correctly aimed if the low-beam
tires on a level surface which is headlamps are aimed properly.
level all the way to the wall.
10-30 Vehicle Care
Notice: Do not cover a headlamp

to improve beam cut-off when
aiming. Covering a headlamp may
cause excessive heat build-up
which may cause damage to the
headlamp.
6. Turn on the low-beam
headlamps and place a piece of
cardboard or equivalent in front
of the headlamp not being
adjusted. This allows only the
beam of light from the headlamp
Up-Level 4. At the wall measure from the being adjusted to be seen on the
ground upward (A) to the flat surface.
2. Locate the aim dot on the lens of
recorded distance from
the low‐beam headlamp.
Step 3 and mark it.
3. Measure the distance from the
5. Draw or tape a horizontal line (B)
ground to the aim dot on the
on the wall the width of the
low‐beam headlamp. Record the
vehicle at the height of the mark
distance.
in Step 4.
Vehicle Care 10-31
Base Up-Level 9. Make sure that the light from

the headlamp is positioned
7. Locate the vertical headlamp
at the bottom edge of the
aiming screws, which are under
horizontal tape line. The lamp
the hood near each headlamp
on the left (A) shows the correct
assembly.
headlamp aim. The lamp on the
8. Turn the vertical aiming screw right (B) shows the incorrect
until the headlamp beam is headlamp aim.
aimed to the horizontal tape
10. Repeat Steps 7 through 9 for
line. Turn it clockwise or
the opposite headlamp.
counterclockwise to raise or
lower the angle of the beam.
10-32 Vehicle Care
Bulb Replacement High Intensity Discharge Headlamps, Front Turn

For the proper type of replacement (HID) Lighting Signal and Parking
bulbs, see Replacement Bulbs on Lamps
page 10‑36. { WARNING Base Headlamp Assembly
For any bulb changing procedure The low beam high intensity
not listed in this section, contact The base model vehicle has a
discharge lighting system halogen high-beam headlamp,
your dealer.
operates at a very high voltage. a low-beam/Daytime Running
If you try to service any of the Lamp (DRL) headlamp and a
Halogen Bulbs system components, you could be turn signal/parking lamp on the
seriously injured. Have your headlamp assembly.
{ WARNING dealer or a qualified technician
service them.
Halogen bulbs have pressurized
gas inside and can burst if you
drop or scratch the bulb. You or After an HID headlamp bulb has
others could be injured. Be sure been replaced, the beam might be a
to read and follow the instructions slightly different shade than it was
on the bulb package. originally. This is normal.
Vehicle Care 10-33
To replace one of these bulbs: 2. If replacing a headlamp bulb, 6. Install the bulb socket by turning
1. Open the hood. See Hood on remove the dust cover from clockwise a quarter turn.
page 10‑5. the back of the headlamp 7. If a headlamp bulb was
housing by turning replaced, Install the dust cover
counterclockwise 1/4 turn. in the back of the headlamp
3. Remove the bulb socket housing by turning clockwise
from the headlamp by turning a quarter turn.
counterclockwise a quarter turn.
Up-Level Headlamp Assembly
4. Remove the bulb from the
socket. If replacing the The up-level model vehicle has
high/low‐beam bulb, pry the two a high intensity discharge (HID)
clips on either end of the bulb high/low beam, a dedicated DRL
and pull straight out. and a parking/turn signal lamp on
the headlamp assembly. See High
5. Install the new bulb in the Intensity Discharge (HID) Lighting
socket. on page 10‑32 for more information.
A. Low-Beam Headlamp/DRL
B. High-Beam Headlamp
C. Parking/Turn Signal Lamp
10-34 Vehicle Care
To replace one of these bulbs: 2. Turn the bulb socket Taillamps, Turn Signal,
counterclockwise to remove it
1. Open the hood. See Hood on
from the headlamp assembly.
Stoplamps, and Back-Up
page 10‑5. Lamps
3. Pull the bulb straight out from
the socket.
4. Push the new bulb into the
socket and reinstall the socket
into the headlamp assembly by
turning it clockwise.
A. DRL Lamp A. Turn Signal Lamp

B. Parking/Turn Signal Lamp B. Back–Up Lamp
Vehicle Care 10-35
To replace one of these lamps: 5. Turn the bulb socket License Plate Lamp
1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on counterclockwise to remove it.
The license plate lamps for this
page 2‑12. 6. Pull the old bulb straight out of vehicle are on the trunk lid.
2. Remove fasteners and pull back the bulb socket.
To replace one of these bulbs:
the trunk trim. 7. Push the new bulb straight into
the bulb socket until it clicks. 1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on
3. Remove the four plastic wing page 2‑12 for more information.
nuts retaining the taillamp 8. Turn the bulb socket clockwise
assembly in place. to reinstall.
4. Pull out the taillamp assembly 9. Reconnect the wiring harness.
and disconnect the wiring 10. Push the taillamp assembly
harness. back into place on the vehicle.
11. Turn the four wing nuts
clockwise to reinstall them.
12. Place the trunk trim to its
original location.
2. Push the end on either of the

lamp assemblies (passenger
side shown) and then move the
lamp assembly down to remove
it from trunk lid.
A. Back-up Lamp
B. Turn Signal Lamp
10-36 Vehicle Care
5. Push the replacement bulb Replacement Bulbs

straight into the bulb socket and
turn the bulb socket clockwise to Bulb
Exterior Lamp
install into lamp assembly. Number
6. Move the lamp assembly into Back-Up Lamp W16WLL
the trunk lid engaging the clip Daytime Running
side first. 3157K LCP
Lamp (Up-Level)
7. Push on the lamp side opposite Front Turn Signal/ 3757NAK
the clip until the lamp assembly Park Lamp LCP
snaps into place.
Headlamp High
H9
A. Bulb Socket Beam (Base)
B. Bulb Headlamp Low

H11LL
Beam (Base)
C. Lamp Assembly
License Plate Lamp W5WLL
3. Turn the bulb socket (A)
counterclockwise to remove from 3757AK
Rear Turn Signal
lamp assembly (C). LCP
4. Pull the bulb (B) straight out of For replacement bulbs not listed
the bulb socket. here, contact your dealer.
Vehicle Care 10-37
Electrical System Fuses and circuit breakers protect Windshield Wipers

the following in the vehicle:
If the wiper motor overheats due to
Electrical System . Headlamp Wiring heavy snow or ice, the windshield
Overload . Windshield Wiper Motor wipers will stop until the motor cools
and will then restart.
. Power Windows and Other
The vehicle has fuses and circuit
Power Accessories Although the circuit is protected
breakers to protect against an
from electrical overload, overload
electrical system overload. Replace a bad fuse with a new one due to heavy snow or ice may
When the current electrical load is of the identical size and rating. cause wiper linkage damage.
too heavy, the circuit breaker opens If there is a problem on the road Always clear ice and heavy snow
and closes, protecting the circuit and a fuse needs to be replaced, from the windshield before using
until the current load returns to the same amperage fuse can be the windshield wipers.
normal or the problem is fixed. This borrowed. Choose some feature of If the overload is caused by an
greatly reduces the chance of circuit the vehicle that is not needed to use electrical problem and not snow or
overload and fire caused by and replace it as soon as possible. ice, be sure to get it fixed.
electrical problems.
Headlamp Wiring
An electrical overload may cause
the lamps to go on and off, or in
some cases to remain off. Have the
headlamp wiring checked right away
if the lamps go on and off or
remain off.
10-38 Vehicle Care
Fuses and Circuit Fuses of the same amperage can Engine Compartment
be temporarily borrowed from
Breakers another fuse location, if a fuse goes
Fuse Block
The wiring circuits in the vehicle are out. Replace the fuse as soon as
protected from short circuits by a possible.
combination of fuses and circuit To identify and check fuses, circuit
breakers. This greatly reduces the breakers, and relays, see Engine
chance of damage caused by Compartment Fuse Block on
electrical problems. page 10‑38, Instrument Panel Fuse
To check a fuse, look at the Block on page 10‑41, and Rear
silver-colored band inside the fuse. Compartment Fuse Block on
If the band is broken or melted, page 10‑43.
replace the fuse. Be sure to replace
a bad fuse with a new one of the
identical size and rating.
To remove the fuse block cover,
squeeze the three retaining clips
on the cover and lift it straight up.
Notice: Spilling liquid on any
electrical component on the
vehicle may damage it. Always
keep the covers on any electrical
component.
Vehicle Care 10-39
J-Case Usage
Fuses
Antilock Brake
26
System Pump
27 Electric Park Brake
Rear Window
28
Defogger
Brake
41
Vacuum Pump
42 Cooling Fan K2
45 Cooling Fan K1
Mini Fuses Usage

Engine Compartment Fuse Block Transmission
1
Control Module
The vehicle may not be equipped J-Case Usage Engine Control
with all of the fuses, relays, and Fuses 2
Module Battery
features shown.
Rear Power Engine Control
J-Case Usage 21 5
Windows Module Ignition
Fuses
22 Sunroof 8 Ignition Coils ‐ Even
6 Wiper
Front Power 9 Ignition Coils ‐ Odd
12 Starter 24
Windows
10-40 Vehicle Care
Mini Fuses Usage Mini Fuses Usage Mini Fuses Usage

Engine Control 33 Heated Seat Left High Intensity
10
Module 50 Discharge
Antilock Brake
34 Headlamp
Post Catalytic System Valves
11 Converter Oxygen 51 Horn
35 Amplifier
Sensor Heater
52 Cluster Ignition
36 AFL Ignition
Trans Ignition / Fuel
Inside Rearview
13 System Control 37 Right High Beam
Mirror, Rear Vision
Module 53
38 Left High Beam Camera,
16 MAF Vacuum Pump
46 Cooling Fan Relay
17 Airbag Module Pre Catalytic Heating, Ventilation
54
47 Converter Oxygen and Air Conditioning
18 SBZ Ignition
Sensor Heater Outside Rear View
Variable Effort
23 Mirror, Universal
Steering 48 Fog Lamps
55 Garage Door
29 Power Lumbar, Left Right High Intensity Opener, Window
49 Discharge Switch
Body Control
32 Headlamp
Module 56 Windshield Washer
Vehicle Care 10-41
Mini Fuses Usage Mini Relays Usage Instrument Panel Fuse

60 Heated Mirror Engine Control Block
7
Module
62 Canister Vent
9 Cooling Fan
64 AFL Battery
13 Cooling Fan
65 Theft Deterrent Horn
15 Run / Crank
Fuel System Control
67
Module Rear Window
17
Defogger
Regulated Voltage
69
Control Sensor
Micro Usage
Ultrasonic Park Relays
70 Assist/Side
Blind Zone 2 Starter
4 Wiper Speed The instrument panel fuse block is
located in the instrument panel,
5 Wiper Control on the driver side of the vehicle.
10 Cooling Fan To access the fuses, open the fuse
panel door by pulling down at
Headlamp the top.
14
Low Beam
Press in on the sides of the door to
release it from the instrument panel.
10-42 Vehicle Care
Fuses Usage
Steering Wheel
1
Controls Backlight
Body Control
2
Module 7
Body Control
3
Module 5
4 Radio
OnStar® Universal
5
Hands Free Phone
Pull the door toward you to release
it from the hinge. 6 Power Outlet 1
7 Power Outlet 2
Body Control
8
Module 1
Body Control
9
Module 4
Body Control
10
Module 8
Front Heater
Instrument Panel Fuse Block 11 Ventilation Air
The vehicle may not be equipped Conditioning/Blower
with all of the fuses, relays, and
12 Passenger Seat
features shown.
Vehicle Care 10-43
Fuses Usage Fuses Usage Rear Compartment Fuse

13 Driver Seat Body Control Block
23
Module 3
Diagnostic Link
14
Connector Body Control
24
Module 2
15 Airbag
Rear Heater
16 Trunk
25 Ventilation Air
Heater Ventilation Conditioning/Blower
17 Air Conditioning
26 AC/DC Inverter
Controller
Radio, OnStar®, Relays Usage
18 Universal Hands
Free Phone R1 Trunk Relay
19 Display R2 Not Used The rear compartment fuse block is
Automatic Occupant R3 Power Outlet Relay located on the left side of the trunk
20 behind a cover.
Sensing
Instrument Panel
21
Cluster
Discrete Logic
22
Ignition Switch
10-44 Vehicle Care
Mini Fuses Usage

17 Not Used
18 PEPS
19 Not Used
Rear Sunshade,
20
Ventilated Seats
21 Not Used
22 Not Used
23 Not Used
24 Not Used
25 Not Used
26 Not Used
The vehicle may not be equipped Mini Fuses Usage 27 Not Used
with all of the fuses, relays, and
7 Not Used 28 Not Used
features shown.
Mini Fuses Usage 8 Not Used 29 Not Used

Heated Steering 15 Not Used
6
Wheel 16 Not Used
Vehicle Care 10-45
Mini Fuses Usage J‐Case Usage Relays Usage

Fuses
30 Not Used K1 Not Used
9 Not Used
Electronic Seat Ventilation,
31 K2
Suspension Control 10 Not Used Sunshade
Rear Seat 11 Not Used Heated Steering
32 K3
Infotainment Wheel
13 Not Used
33 All‐Wheel Drive K4 Not Used
14 Not Used
J‐Case Usage 34 Not Used

Fuses 35 PEPS
3 Not Used
4 Not Used
10-46 Vehicle Care
Wheels and Tires WARNING (Continued) WARNING (Continued)

Tires . Under inflated tires pose the . Replace any tires that have
same danger as overloaded been damaged by impacts
Your new vehicle comes with tires. The resulting crash
high-quality tires made by a with potholes, curbs, etc.
could cause serious injury.
leading tire manufacturer. If you Check all tires frequently to . Improperly repaired tires can
ever have questions about your maintain the recommended cause a crash. Only your
tire warranty and where to pressure. Tire pressure dealer or an authorized tire
obtain service, see your vehicle should be checked when your service center should repair,
Warranty booklet for details. tires are cold. replace, dismount, and mount
the tires.
For additional information refer . Over inflated tires are more
to the tire manufacturer. likely to be cut, punctured, . Do not spin the tires in
or broken by a sudden excess of 55 km/h (35 mph)
{ WARNING impact — such as when you
hit a pothole. Keep tires at
on slippery surfaces such
as snow, mud, ice, etc.
. Poorly maintained and the recommended pressure. Excessive spinning may
improperly used tires are .
cause the tires to explode.
Worn or old tires can cause a
dangerous. crash. If your tread is badly
. Overloading your tires can worn, replace them.
cause overheating as a result (Continued)
of too much flexing. You
could have a blowout and a
serious accident. See Vehicle
Load Limits on page 9‑12.
(Continued)
Vehicle Care 10-47
Winter Tires If you choose to use winter tires:

If you expect to drive on snow or ice
. Use tires of the same brand and
covered roads often, you may want tread type on all four wheel
to get winter tires for your vehicle. positions.
All season tires provide good overall . Use only radial ply tires of the
performance on most surfaces but same size, load range, and
they may not offer the traction you speed rating as the original
would like or the same level of equipment tires.
performance as winter tires on snow
Winter tires with the same speed
or ice covered roads.
rating as your original equipment
Winter tires, in general, are tires may not be available for H, V,
designed for increased traction on W, Y, and ZR speed rated tires. Passenger (P‐Metric) Tire Example
snow and ice covered roads. With If you choose winter tires with a
winter tires, there may be decreased lower speed rating, never exceed (A) Tire Size: The tire size is
dry road traction, increased road the tire's maximum speed capability. a combination of letters and
noise, and shorter tread life. After numbers used to define a
switching to winter tires, be alert for Tire Sidewall Labeling particular tire's width, height,
changes in vehicle handling and aspect ratio, construction type,
braking. Useful information about a tire and service description. See the
See your dealer for details
is molded into its sidewall. The “Tire Size” illustration later in this
regarding winter tire availability and examples below show a typical section for more detail.
proper tire selection. Also, see passenger vehicle tire and a
Buying New Tires on page 10‑62. compact spare tire sidewall.
10-48 Vehicle Care
(B) TPC Spec (Tire The TIN shows the

Performance Criteria manufacturer and plant code,
Specification): Original tire size, and date the tire was
equipment tires designed to manufactured. The TIN is
GM's specific tire performance molded onto both sides of the
criteria have a TPC specification tire, although only one side may
code molded onto the sidewall. have the date of manufacture.
GM's TPC specifications meet (E) Tire Ply Material : The type
or exceed all federal safety of cord and number of plies in
guidelines. the sidewall and under the tread.
(C) DOT (Department of (F) Uniform Tire Quality
Transportation): The Compact Spare Tire Example
Grading (UTQG): Tire
Department of Transportation manufacturers are required to (A) Tire Ply Material: The type
(DOT) code indicates that the grade tires based on three of cord and number of plies in
tire is in compliance with performance factors: treadwear, the sidewall and under the tread.
the U.S. Department of traction, and temperature (B) Temporary Use Only:
Transportation Motor Vehicle resistance. For more information
Safety Standards. The compact spare tire or
see Uniform Tire Quality temporary use tire has a tread
(D) Tire Identification Number Grading on page 10‑64. life of approximately 5 000 km
(TIN): The letters and numbers (G) Maximum Cold Inflation (3,000 miles) and should not be
following the DOT (Department Load Limit: Maximum load driven at speeds over 105 km/h
of Transportation) code is the that can be carried and the (65 mph). The compact spare
Tire Identification Number (TIN). maximum pressure needed to tire is for emergency use when a
support that load.
Vehicle Care 10-49
regular road tire has lost air (E) Tire Inflation: The Tire Designations
and gone flat. If your vehicle temporary use tire or compact
has a compact spare tire, spare tire should be inflated to Tire Size
see Compact Spare Tire on 420 kPa (60 psi). For more The following illustration shows
page 10‑84 and If a Tire Goes information on tire pressure and an example of a typical
Flat on page 10‑68. inflation see Tire Pressure on passenger vehicle tire size.
(C) Tire Identification Number page 10‑53.
(TIN): The letters and numbers (F) Tire Size: A combination of
following the DOT (Department letters and numbers define a
of Transportation) code is the tire's width, height, aspect ratio,
Tire Identification Number construction type, and service
(TIN). The TIN shows the description. The letter T as the
manufacturer and plant code, first character in the tire size
tire size, and date the tire was means the tire is for temporary (A) Passenger (P‐Metric) Tire:
manufactured. The TIN is use only. The United States version of a
molded onto both sides of the metric tire sizing system. The
(G) TPC Spec (Tire letter P as the first character in
tire, although only one side may Performance Criteria
have the date of manufacture. the tire size means a passenger
Specification): Original vehicle tire engineered to
(D) Maximum Cold Inflation equipment tires designed to standards set by the U.S. Tire
Load Limit: Maximum load GM's specific tire performance and Rim Association.
that can be carried and the criteria have a TPC specification
maximum pressure needed to code molded onto the sidewall. (B) Tire Width: The three‐digit
support that load. GM's TPC specifications meet number indicates the tire section
or exceed all federal safety width in millimeters from
guidelines. sidewall to sidewall.
10-50 Vehicle Care
(C) Aspect Ratio: A two‐digit is certified to carry. The speed Belt: A rubber coated layer of
number that indicates the tire rating is the maximum speed a cords that is located between
height‐to‐width measurements. tire is certified to carry a load. the plies and the tread. Cords
For example, if the tire size may be made from steel or other
aspect ratio is 60, as shown in Tire Terminology and reinforcing materials.
item C of the illustration, it would Definitions Bead: The tire bead contains
mean that the tire's sidewall is steel wires wrapped by steel
60 percent as high as it is wide. Air Pressure: The amount of
air inside the tire pressing cords that hold the tire onto
(D) Construction Code: A outward on each square inch of the rim.
letter code is used to indicate the tire. Air pressure is Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire
the type of ply construction in expressed in psi (pounds per in which the plies are laid at
the tire. The letter R means square inch) or kPa (kilopascal). alternate angles less than
radial ply construction; the 90 degrees to the centerline of
letter D means diagonal or Accessory Weight: This
means the combined weight of the tread.
bias ply construction; and the
letter B means belted‐bias ply optional accessories. Some Cold Tire Pressure: The
construction. examples of optional amount of air pressure in a tire,
accessories are, automatic measured in psi (pounds per
(E) Rim Diameter : Diameter of transmission, power steering, square inch) or kPa (kilopascal)
the wheel in inches. power brakes, power windows, before a tire has built up heat
(F) Service Description: These power seats, and air from driving. See Tire Pressure
characters represent the load conditioning. on page 10‑53.
index and speed rating of the Aspect Ratio: The relationship Curb Weight: The weight of a
tire. The load index represents of a tire's height to its width. motor vehicle with standard and
the load carrying capacity a tire optional equipment including the
Vehicle Care 10-51
maximum capacity of fuel, oil, GAWR RR: Gross Axle Maximum Load Rating:
and coolant, but without Weight Rating for the rear axle. The load rating for a tire at the
passengers and cargo. See Vehicle Load Limits on maximum permissible inflation
DOT Markings: A code molded page 9‑12. pressure for that tire.
into the sidewall of a tire Intended Outboard Sidewall : Maximum Loaded Vehicle
signifying that the tire is in The side of an asymmetrical tire, Weight: The sum of curb
compliance with the U.S. that must always face outward weight, accessory weight,
Department of Transportation when mounted on a vehicle. vehicle capacity weight, and
(DOT) motor vehicle safety Kilopascal (kPa): The metric production options weight.
standards. The DOT code unit for air pressure. Normal Occupant Weight: The
includes the Tire Identification number of occupants a vehicle
Number (TIN), an alphanumeric Light Truck (LT‐Metric) Tire:
A tire used on light duty trucks is designed to seat multiplied by
designator which can also 68 kg (150 lbs). See Vehicle
identify the tire manufacturer, and some multipurpose
passenger vehicles. Load Limits on page 9‑12.
production plant, brand, and
date of production. Load Index: An assigned Occupant Distribution :
number ranging from 1 to 279 Designated seating positions.
GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating. See Vehicle Load Limits that corresponds to the load Outward Facing Sidewall: The
on page 9‑12. carrying capacity of a tire. side of an asymmetrical tire that
Maximum Inflation Pressure: has a particular side that faces
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle outward when mounted on a
Weight Rating for the front axle. The maximum air pressure to
which a cold tire can be inflated. vehicle. The side of the tire that
See Vehicle Load Limits on contains a whitewall, bears
page 9‑12. The maximum air pressure is
molded onto the sidewall. white lettering, or bears
manufacturer, brand, and/or
10-52 Vehicle Care
model name molding that is Sidewall: The portion of a tire tire's traction, temperature,
higher or deeper than the same between the tread and the bead. and treadwear. Ratings
moldings on the other sidewall Speed Rating: An are determined by tire
of the tire. alphanumeric code assigned to manufacturers using
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: a tire indicating the maximum government testing procedures.
A tire used on passenger cars speed at which a tire can The ratings are molded into
and some light duty trucks and operate. the sidewall of the tire.
multipurpose vehicles. See Uniform Tire Quality
Traction: The friction between Grading on page 10‑64.
Recommended Inflation the tire and the road surface.
Pressure: Vehicle The amount of grip provided. Vehicle Capacity Weight:
manufacturer's recommended The number of designated
Tread: The portion of a tire seating positions multiplied by
tire inflation pressure as shown that comes into contact with
on the tire placard. See Tire 68 kg (150 lbs) plus the rated
the road. cargo load. See Vehicle Load
Pressure on page 10‑53 and
Vehicle Load Limits on Treadwear Indicators: Narrow Limits on page 9‑12.
page 9‑12. bands, sometimes called wear Vehicle Maximum Load on the
bars, that show across the tread Tire: Load on an individual tire
Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic of a tire when only 1.6 mm
tire in which the ply cords that due to curb weight, accessory
(1/16 inch) of tread remains. weight, occupant weight, and
extend to the beads are laid at See When It Is Time for New
90 degrees to the centerline of cargo weight.
Tires on page 10‑61.
the tread. Vehicle Placard: A label
UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality permanently attached to a
Rim: A metal support for a tire Grading Standards): A tire
and upon which the tire beads vehicle showing the vehicle's
information system that provides capacity weight and the original
are seated. consumers with ratings for a equipment tire size and
Vehicle Care 10-53
recommended inflation pressure. If your tires have too much air For additional information
See “Tire and Loading (over‐inflation), you can get regarding how much weight
Information Label” under Vehicle the following: your vehicle can carry, and an
Load Limits on page 9‑12. . Unusual wear. example of the Tire and Loading
Information label, see Vehicle
Tire Pressure . Poor handling. Load Limits on page 9‑12.
Tires need the correct amount of . Rough ride. How you load your vehicle
air pressure to operate affects vehicle handling and ride
. Needless damage from comfort. Never load your vehicle
effectively. road hazards. with more weight than it was
Notice: Do not let anyone tell A vehicle-specific Tire and designed to carry.
you that under‐inflation or Loading Information label is
over‐inflation is all right. It is attached to your vehicle. When to Check
not. If your tires do not have This label shows your vehicle's Check your tires once a month
enough air (under‐inflation), original equipment tires and the or more. Do not forget to check
you can get the following: correct inflation pressures for the compact spare tire, if the
. Tire overloading and your tires when they are cold. vehicle has one. The compact
over-heating which could The recommended cold tire spare should be at 420 kPa
lead to a blowout. inflation pressure, shown on the (60 psi). For additional
label, is the minimum amount of information regarding the
. Premature or air pressure needed to support compact spare tire, see
irregular wear. your vehicle's maximum load Compact Spare Tire on
. Poor handling. carrying capacity. page 10‑84.
. Reduced fuel economy.
10-54 Vehicle Care
How to Check If you overfill the tire, release air pressure label. (If your vehicle has
by pushing on the metal stem tires of a different size than the size
Use a good quality pocket-type indicated on the vehicle placard or
gauge to check tire pressure. in the center of the tire valve.
Re‐check the tire pressure with tire inflation pressure label, you
You cannot tell if your tires are should determine the proper tire
properly inflated simply by the tire gauge.
inflation pressure for those tires.)
looking at them. Radial tires may Be sure to put the valve caps As an added safety feature, your
look properly inflated even when back on the valve stems. They vehicle has been equipped with a
they are under‐inflated. Check help prevent leaks by keeping tire pressure monitoring system
the tire's inflation pressure when out dirt and moisture. (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire
the tires are cold. Cold means pressure telltale when one or
your vehicle has been sitting for Tire Pressure Monitor more of your tires is significantly
at least three hours or driven no System under‐inflated.
more than 1.6 km (1 mile). Accordingly, when the low tire
The Tire Pressure Monitor System
Remove the valve cap from the (TPMS) uses radio and sensor pressure telltale illuminates, you
should stop and check your tires as
tire valve stem. Press the tire technology to check tire pressure
levels. The TPMS sensors monitor soon as possible, and inflate them
gauge firmly onto the valve to to the proper pressure. Driving on
get a pressure measurement. the air pressure in your tires and
transmit tire pressure readings to a a significantly under‐inflated tire
If the cold tire inflation pressure causes the tire to overheat and can
matches the recommended receiver located in the vehicle.
lead to tire failure. Under‐inflation
pressure on the Tire and Each tire, including the spare also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
Loading Information label, no (if provided), should be checked tread life, and may affect the
further adjustment is necessary. monthly when cold and inflated to vehicle's handling and stopping
If the inflation pressure is low, the inflation pressure recommended ability.
by the vehicle manufacturer on the
add air until you reach the vehicle placard or tire inflation
recommended amount.
Vehicle Care 10-55
Please note that the TPMS is not malfunctions may occur for a variety Tire Pressure Monitor
a substitute for proper tire of reasons, including the installation
maintenance, and it is the driver's of replacement or alternate tires or
Operation
responsibility to maintain correct tire wheels on the vehicle that prevent This vehicle may have a Tire
pressure, even if under‐inflation has the TPMS from functioning properly. Pressure Monitor System (TPMS).
not reached the level to trigger Always check the TPMS malfunction The TPMS is designed to warn the
illumination of the TPMS low tire telltale after replacing one or more driver when a low tire pressure
pressure telltale. tires or wheels on your vehicle to condition exists. TPMS sensors are
Your vehicle has also been ensure that the replacement or mounted onto each tire and wheel
equipped with a TPMS malfunction alternate tires and wheels allow the assembly, excluding the spare tire
indicator to indicate when the TPMS to continue to function and wheel assembly. The TPMS
system is not operating properly. properly. sensors monitor the air pressure in
The TPMS malfunction indicator is See Tire Pressure Monitor the vehicle's tires and transmits the
combined with the low tire pressure Operation on page 10‑55 for tire pressure readings to a receiver
telltale. When the system detects a additional information. located in the vehicle.
malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then Federal Communications
remain continuously illuminated. Commission (FCC) and
This sequence will continue upon Industry Canada
subsequent vehicle start‐ups as See Radio Frequency Statement on
long as the malfunction exists. page 13‑18 for information
When the malfunction indicator is regarding Part 15 of the Federal When a low tire pressure condition
illuminated, the system may not be Communications Commission (FCC) is detected, the TPMS illuminates
able to detect or signal low tire rules and Industry Canada the low tire pressure warning light
pressure as intended. TPMS Standards RSS-210/220/310. located on the instrument panel
cluster. If the warning light comes
on, stop as soon as possible and
10-56 Vehicle Care
inflate the tires to the recommended A Tire and Loading Information Notice: Tire sealant materials are
pressure shown on the tire loading label, attached to your vehicle, not all the same. A non-approved
information label. See Vehicle Load shows the size of your vehicle's tire sealant could damage the Tire
Limits on page 9‑12. original equipment tires and the Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
At the same time a message to correct inflation pressure for your sensors. TPMS sensor damage
check the pressure in a specific tire vehicle's tires when they are cold. caused by using an incorrect tire
appears on the Driver Information See Vehicle Load Limits on sealant is not covered by the
Center (DIC) display. The low tire page 9‑12, for an example of the vehicle warranty. Always use only
pressure warning light and the DIC Tire and Loading Information label the GM approved tire sealant
warning message come on at each and its location on your vehicle. available through your dealer or
ignition cycle until the tires are Also see Tire Pressure on included in the vehicle.
inflated to the correct inflation page 10‑53. Factory-installed Tire Inflator Kits
pressure. Using the DIC, tire Your vehicle's TPMS can warn you use a GM approved liquid tire
pressure levels can be viewed by about a low tire pressure condition sealant. Using non-approved tire
the driver. For additional information but it does not replace normal tire sealants could damage the TPMS
and details about the DIC operation maintenance. See Tire Inspection sensors. See Tire Sealant and
and displays see Driver Information on page 10‑59, Tire Rotation on Compressor Kit on page 10‑70 for
Center (DIC) on page 5‑23. page 10‑59 and Tires on information regarding the inflator kit
The low tire pressure warning light page 10‑46. materials and instructions.
may come on in cool weather when
the vehicle is first started, and then
turn off as you start to drive. This
could be an early indicator that the
air pressure in the tire(s) are getting
low and need to be inflated to the
proper pressure.
Vehicle Care 10-57
TPMS Malfunction Light and

. The TPMS sensor matching . Operating electronic devices or
Message process was started but not being near facilities using radio
completed or not completed wave frequencies similar to the
The TPMS will not function properly successfully after rotating the TPMS could cause the TPMS
if one or more of the TPMS sensors vehicle's tires. The DIC message sensors to malfunction.
are missing or inoperable. When the and TPMS malfunction light
system detects a malfunction, the If the TPMS is not functioning it
should go off once the TPMS cannot detect or signal a low tire
low tire warning light flashes for sensor matching process is
about one minute and then stays on condition. See your dealer for
performed successfully. See service if the TPMS malfunction
for the remainder of the ignition “TPMS Sensor Matching
cycle. A DIC warning message is light and DIC message comes on
Process” later in this section. and stays on.
also displayed. The low tire warning
light and DIC warning message
. One or more TPMS sensors
are missing or damaged. The TPMS Sensor Matching
come on at each ignition cycle until Process
the problem is corrected. Some of DIC message and the TPMS
the conditions that can cause the malfunction light should go Each TPMS sensor has a unique
malfunction light and DIC message off when the TPMS sensors identification code. Any time you
to come on are: are installed and the sensor rotate your vehicle's tires or replace
matching process is performed one or more of the TPMS sensors,
. One of the road tires has been successfully. See your dealer for the identification codes will need to
replaced with the spare tire. service. be matched to the new tire/wheel
The spare tire does not have position. The sensors are matched
a TPMS sensor. The TPMS
. Replacement tires or wheels do
not match your vehicle's original to the tire/wheel positions in the
malfunction light and DIC following order: driver side front tire,
message should go off once equipment tires or wheels. Tires
and wheels other than those passenger side front tire, passenger
you re‐install the road tire side rear tire, and driver side rear
containing the TPMS sensor. recommended for your vehicle
could prevent the TPMS from tire using a TPMS diagnostic tool.
functioning properly. See Buying See your dealer for service.
New Tires on page 10‑62.
10-58 Vehicle Care
The TPMS sensors can also be The TPMS sensor matching process 7. Start with the driver side
matched to each tire/wheel position is outlined below: front tire.
by increasing or decreasing the 1. Set the parking brake. 8. Remove the valve cap from the
tire's air pressure. If increasing the valve cap stem. Activate the
tire's air pressure, do not exceed 2. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN with
the engine off. TPMS sensor by increasing or
the maximum inflation pressure decreasing the tire's air pressure
indicated on the tire's sidewall. 3. Use the MENU button to select for five seconds, or until a horn
To decrease air-pressure out of a the Vehicle Information Menu in chirp sounds. The horn chirp,
tire you can use the pointed end of the Driver Information which may take up to
the valve cap, a pencil-style air Center (DIC). 30 seconds to sound, confirms
pressure gage, or a key. 4. Use the thumbwheel to scroll to that the sensor identification
You have two minutes to match the Tire Pressure Menu Item code has been matched to this
the first tire/wheel position, and screen. tire and wheel position.
five minutes overall to match all 5. Press the SET/CLR button to 9. Proceed to the passenger side
four tire/wheel positions. If it takes begin the sensor matching front tire, and repeat the
longer than two minutes, to match process. procedure in Step 8.
the first tire and wheel, or more than 10. Proceed to the passenger side
five minutes to match all four tire A message asking if you are
sure you want to begin this rear tire, and repeat the
and wheel positions the matching procedure in Step 8.
process stops and you need to process should appear.
start over. 6. Press the SET/CLR button again
to confirm the selection.
The horn sounds twice to signal
the receiver is in relearn mode
and the TIRE LEARNING
ACTIVE message displays on
the DIC screen.
Vehicle Care 10-59
11. Proceed to the driver side rear Tire Inspection

. The tire has a bump, bulge,
tire, and repeat the procedure or split.
in Step 8. The horn sounds two We recommend that you
regularly inspect your vehicle's
. The tire has a puncture, cut,
times to indicate the sensor
identification code has been tires, including the spare tire, or other damage that cannot
matched to the driver side rear if the vehicle has one, for signs be repaired well because of
tire, and the TPMS sensor of wear or damage at least once the size or location of the
matching process is no longer a month. damage.
active. The TIRE LEARNING
ACTIVE message on the DIC Always remove the tires if any of Tire Rotation
display screen goes off. the following statements
are true: Tires should be rotated every
12. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF. 12 000 km (7,500 miles).
13. Set all four tires to the
. You can see the indicators at See Scheduled Maintenance on
recommended air pressure three or more places around page 11‑2.
level as indicated on the Tire the tire.
and Loading Information label. The purpose of a regular tire
. You can see cord or fabric rotation is to achieve a uniform
14. Put the valve caps back on the showing through the tire's wear for all tires on the vehicle.
valve stems. rubber. This will ensure that the vehicle
. The tread or sidewall is continues to perform most like it
cracked, cut, or snagged did when the tires were new.
deep enough to show cord
or fabric.
10-60 Vehicle Care
Any time you notice unusual After the tires have been
wear, rotate the tires as soon as rotated, adjust the front and rear WARNING (Continued)
possible and check wheel inflation pressures as shown on changing a wheel, remove any
alignment. Also check for the Tire and Loading Information rust or dirt from places where the
damaged tires or wheels. label. See Tire Pressure on wheel attaches to the vehicle. In
SeeWhen It Is Time for New page 10‑53 and Vehicle Load an emergency, use a cloth or a
Tires on page 10‑61 and Wheel Limits on page 9‑12. paper towel to do this; but be sure
Replacement on page 10‑66. Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor to use a scraper or wire brush
System. See Tire Pressure later, if needed, to get all the rust
Monitor Operation on or dirt off. See If a Tire Goes Flat
on page 10‑68.
page 10‑55.
Make certain that all wheel nuts
Lightly coat the center of the
are properly tightened. See
wheel hub with wheel bearing
“Wheel Nut Torque” under
grease after a wheel change or
Capacities and Specifications on
tire rotation to prevent corrosion
page 12‑2.
or rust build-up. Do not get
grease on the flat wheel
{ WARNING mounting surface or on the
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the wheel nuts or bolts.
When rotating the vehicle's tires, parts to which it is fastened, can
always use the correct rotation make wheel nuts become loose
pattern shown here. after time. The wheel could come
Do not include the compact off and cause an accident. When
spare tire in the tire rotation. (Continued)
Vehicle Care 10-61
When It Is Time for Inspection on page 10‑59 and Tire Vehicle Storage
Rotation on page 10‑59 for
New Tires additional information.
Tires age when stored normally
mounted on a parked vehicle. Park
Various factors, such as The rubber in tires ages over time. a vehicle that will be stored for at
maintenance, temperatures, driving This is also true for the spare tire, least a month in a cool, dry, clean
speeds, vehicle loading, and road if the vehicle has one, even if it is area away from direct sunlight to
conditions influence when you need not being used. Multiple conditions slow aging. This area should be free
new tires. affect how fast this aging takes of grease, gasoline, or other
place, including temperatures, substances that can deteriorate
loading conditions, and inflation rubber.
pressure maintenance. Tires will
Parking for an extended period can
typically need to be replaced due to
cause flat spots on the tires that
wear before they may need to be
may result in vibrations while
replaced due to age. Consult the tire
driving. When storing a vehicle for
manufacturer for more information
at least a month, remove the tires or
on when tires should be replaced.
raise the vehicle to reduce the
weight from the tires.
One way to tell when it is time for

new tires is to check the treadwear
indicators, which appear when the
tires have only 1.6 mm (1/16 in) or
less of tread remaining. See Tire
10-62 Vehicle Care
Buying New Tires GM's exclusive TPC Spec GM recommends replacing tires
system considers over a dozen in sets of four. This is because
GM has developed and matched critical specifications that impact uniform tread depth on all tires
specific tires for your vehicle. the overall performance of will help keep your vehicle
The original equipment tires your vehicle, including brake performing most like it did when
installed on your vehicle, system performance, ride and the tires were new. Replacing
when it was new, were designed handling, traction control, and less than a full set of tires can
to meet General Motors Tire tire pressure monitoring affect the braking and handling
Performance Criteria performance. GM's TPC Spec performance of your vehicle.
Specification (TPC Spec) number is molded onto the tire's See Tire Inspection on
system rating. If you need sidewall near the tire size. If the page 10‑59 and Tire Rotation on
replacement tires, GM strongly tires have an all‐season tread page 10‑59 for information on
recommends that you get tires design, the TPC Spec number proper tire rotation.
with the same TPC Spec rating. will be followed by an MS for
This way, your vehicle will
continue to have tires that are
mud and snow. See Tire { WARNING
Sidewall Labeling on page 10‑47
designed to give the same for additional information. Tires could explode during
performance and vehicle safety, improper service. You or others
during normal use, as the could be injured or killed if you
original tires. attempt to mount or dismount a
tire. Only your dealer or an
authorized tire service center
should mount and dismount the
tires.
Vehicle Care 10-63
Vehicles that have a tire

{ WARNING { WARNING pressure monitoring system
Mixing tires could cause you If you use bias-ply tires on the could give an inaccurate
to lose control while driving. vehicle, the wheel rim flanges low‐pressure warning if non‐TPC
If you mix tires of different could develop cracks after Spec rated tires are installed
sizes, brands, or types (radial many miles of driving. A tire on your vehicle. Non‐TPC
and bias-belted tires), the and/or wheel could fail Spec rated tires may give a
vehicle may not handle suddenly, causing a crash. low‐pressure warning that is
properly, and you could have Use only radial-ply tires with higher or lower than the proper
a crash. Using tires of different the wheels on the vehicle. warning level you would get with
sizes, brands, or types may TPC Spec rated tires. See Tire
also cause damage to your Pressure Monitor System on
If you must replace your page 10‑54.
vehicle. Be sure to use the vehicle's tires with those that do
correct size, brand, and type not have a TPC Spec number, Your vehicle's original
of tires on all wheels. It is make sure they are the same equipment tires are listed on the
all right to drive with your size, load range, speed rating, Tire and Loading Information
compact spare temporarily, and construction type (radial and label. See Vehicle Load
as it was developed for use bias‐belted tires) as your Limits on page 9‑12 for more
on your vehicle. See Compact vehicle's original tires. information about the Tire and
Spare Tire on page 10‑84. Loading Information label and its
location on your vehicle.
10-64 Vehicle Care
Different Size Tires and Uniform Tire Quality

Wheels
{ WARNING Grading
If you add different sized
If you add wheels or tires that are a Quality grades can be found
different size than your original wheels, your vehicle may not
provide an acceptable level of
where applicable on the tire
equipment wheels and tires, this sidewall between tread shoulder
could affect the way your vehicle performance and safety if tires not
recommended for those wheels and maximum section width.
performs, including its braking, ride
are selected. You may increase For example:
and handling characteristics,
stability, and resistance to rollover. the chance that you will crash and Treadwear 200 Traction AA
Additionally, if your vehicle has suffer serious injury. Only use GM Temperature A
electronic systems such as antilock specific wheel and tire systems
brakes, rollover airbags, traction developed for your vehicle, and The following information relates
control, and electronic stability have them properly installed by a to the system developed by the
control, the performance of these GM certified technician. United States National Highway
systems can be affected. Traffic Safety Administration
See Buying New Tires on (NHTSA), which grades tires
page 10‑62 and Accessories and by treadwear, traction, and
Modifications on page 10‑3 for temperature performance.
additional information. This applies only to vehicles
sold in the United States.
The grades are molded on the
sidewalls of most passenger car
tires. The Uniform Tire Quality
Vehicle Care 10-65
Grading (UTQG) system Treadwear Traction – AA, A, B, C

does not apply to deep tread, The treadwear grade is a The traction grades, from
winter-type snow tires, comparative rating based on the highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
space-saver, or temporary use wear rate of the tire when tested and C. Those grades represent
spare tires, tires with nominal under controlled conditions on the tire's ability to stop on wet
rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches a specified government test pavement as measured under
(25 to 30 cm), or to some course. For example, a tire controlled conditions on
limited-production tires. graded 150 would wear one and specified government test
While the tires available on a half (1½) times as well on the surfaces of asphalt and
General Motors passenger cars government course as a tire concrete. A tire marked C may
and light trucks may vary with graded 100. The relative have poor traction performance.
respect to these grades, they performance of tires depends Warning: The traction grade
must also conform to federal upon the actual conditions of assigned to this tire is based on
safety requirements and their use, however, and may straight-ahead braking traction
additional General Motors Tire depart significantly from the tests, and does not include
Performance Criteria (TPC) norm due to variations in driving acceleration, cornering,
standards. habits, service practices hydroplaning, or peak traction
All Passenger Car Tires Must and differences in road characteristics.
Conform to Federal Safety characteristics and climate.
Requirements In Addition To
These Grades.
10-66 Vehicle Care
Temperature – A, B, C tire that is properly inflated and Wheel Replacement

The temperature grades are not overloaded. Excessive
Replace any wheel that is bent,
A (the highest), B, and C, speed, underinflation, cracked, or badly rusted or
representing the tire's resistance or excessive loading, either corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming
to the generation of heat and separately or in combination, loose, the wheel, wheel bolts, and
its ability to dissipate heat can cause heat buildup and wheel nuts should be replaced.
when tested under controlled possible tire failure. If the wheel leaks air, replace it,
except some aluminum wheels,
conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel. Sustained Wheel Alignment and Tire which can sometimes be repaired.
Balance See your dealer if any of these
high temperature can cause the conditions exist.
material of the tire to degenerate The tires and wheels on the vehicle
and reduce tire life, and Your dealer will know the kind of
were aligned and balanced carefully
wheel you need.
excessive temperature can at the factory to give the longest tire
lead to sudden tire failure. life and best overall performance. Each new wheel should have the
The grade C corresponds to a Adjustments to wheel alignment and same load-carrying capacity,
level of performance which tire balancing will not be necessary diameter, width, offset, and be
on a regular basis. However, if there mounted the same way as the
all passenger car tires must one it replaces.
is unusual tire wear or the vehicle
meet under the Federal Motor pulls to one side or the other, the
Safety Standard No. 109. alignment should be checked. If the
Grades B and A represent vehicle vibrates when driving on a
higher levels of performance on smooth road, the tires and wheels
the laboratory test wheel than might need to be rebalanced. See
the minimum required by law. your dealer for proper diagnosis.
Warning: The temperature grade
for this tire is established for a
Vehicle Care 10-67
If you need to replace any of the Used Replacement Wheels

wheels, wheel bolts, wheel nuts, WARNING (Continued)
or Tire Pressure Monitor System
(TPMS) sensors, replace them only you or others could be injured.
{ WARNING
with new GM original equipment Always use the correct wheel, Putting a used wheel on the
parts. This way, you will be sure to wheel bolts, and wheel nuts for vehicle is dangerous. You cannot
have the right wheel, wheel bolts, replacement. know how it has been used or
wheel nuts, and TPMS sensors for how far it has been driven.
the vehicle. It could fail suddenly and cause a
Notice: The wrong wheel can
also cause problems with bearing crash. If you have to replace a
{ WARNING life, brake cooling, speedometer wheel, use a new GM original
or odometer calibration, equipment wheel.
Using the wrong replacement
headlamp aim, bumper height,
wheels, wheel bolts, or wheel vehicle ground clearance, and tire
nuts on your vehicle can be or tire chain clearance to the
dangerous. It could affect the body and chassis.
braking and handling of your
vehicle, make your tires lose air See If a Tire Goes Flat on
and make you lose control. You page 10‑68 for more information.
could have a collision in which
(Continued)
10-68 Vehicle Care
Tire Chains WARNING (Continued)

steering wheel firmly. Steer to
maintain lane position, and then
gently brake to a stop, well off the
{ WARNING To help avoid damage to the road, if possible.
Do not use tire chains. There is vehicle, drive slowly, readjust or
A rear blowout, particularly on a
not enough clearance. Tire chains remove the device if it is curve, acts much like a skid and
used on a vehicle without the contacting the vehicle, and do not may require the same correction
proper amount of clearance can spin the vehicle's wheels. If you you would use in a skid. In any rear
cause damage to the brakes, do find traction devices that will blowout remove your foot from the
suspension or other vehicle parts. fit, install them on the front tires. accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle
The area damaged by the tire under control by steering the way
you want the vehicle to go. It may
chains could cause you to lose If a Tire Goes Flat be very bumpy and noisy, but you
control of the vehicle and you or
others may be injured in a crash. It is unusual for a tire to blowout can still steer. Gently brake to a
while you are driving, especially if stop, well off the road, if possible.
Use another type of traction you maintain your vehicle's tires
device only if its manufacturer
recommends it for use on the
properly. If air goes out of a tire, it is
much more likely to leak out slowly.
{ WARNING
vehicle and tire size combination But if you should ever have a Driving on a flat tire will cause
and road conditions. Follow that blowout, here are a few tips about permanent damage to the tire.
manufacturer's instructions. what to expect and what to do: Re-inflating a tire after it has
(Continued) If a front tire fails, the flat tire been driven on while severely
creates a drag that pulls the vehicle under-inflated or flat may cause
toward that side. Take your foot off a blowout and a serious crash.
the accelerator pedal and grip the (Continued)
Vehicle Care 10-69
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire

WARNING (Continued) and wheel damage by driving slowly WARNING (Continued)
to a level place, well off the road,
Never attempt to re-inflate a tire if possible. Turn on the hazard 3. Turn off the engine and do
that has been driven on while warning flashers. See Hazard not restart while the vehicle
severely under-inflated or flat. Warning Flashers on page 6‑4. is raised.
Have your dealer or an authorized 4. Do not allow passengers to
tire service center repair or { WARNING remain in the vehicle.
replace the flat tire as soon as To be certain the vehicle will not
possible. Changing a tire can be move, put blocks at the front and
dangerous. The vehicle can slip rear of the tire farthest away
off the jack and roll over or fall on from the one being changed.
you or other people. You and they
{ WARNING could be badly injured or even
That would be the tire on the
other side, at the opposite end of
killed. Find a level place to the vehicle.
Lifting a vehicle and getting
change your tire. To help prevent
under it to do maintenance or
the vehicle from moving:
repairs is dangerous without the
appropriate safety equipment and 1. Set the parking brake firmly.
training. If a jack is provided with 2. Put an automatic
the vehicle, it is designed only for transmission shift lever in
changing a flat tire. If it is used for P (Park), or shift a manual
anything else, you or others could transmission to 1 (First) or
be badly injured or killed if the R (Reverse).
vehicle slips off the jack. If a jack (Continued)
is provided with the vehicle, only
use it for changing a flat tire.
10-70 Vehicle Care
This vehicle may come with a jack Tire Sealant and

and spare tire or a tire sealant and
compressor kit. To use the jacking
Compressor Kit
equipment to change a spare tire
safely, follow the instructions below. { WARNING
Then see Tire Changing on
page 10‑78. To use the tire sealant Idling a vehicle in an enclosed
and compressor kit, see Tire area with poor ventilation is
Sealant and Compressor Kit on dangerous. Engine exhaust may
page 10‑70. enter the vehicle. Engine exhaust
contains Carbon Monoxide (CO)
When the vehicle has a flat tire (B),
which cannot be seen or smelled.
use the following example as a
guide to assist you in the placement A. Wheel Block It can cause unconsciousness
of wheel blocks (A). B. Flat Tire and even death. Never run the
engine in an enclosed area that
The following information explains has no fresh air ventilation.
how to repair or change a tire. For more information, see Engine
Exhaust on page 9‑27.
Vehicle Care 10-71
If this vehicle has a tire sealant and The kit includes:

{ WARNING compressor kit, there may not be a
spare tire, tire changing equipment,
Over-inflating a tire could cause and on some vehicles there may not
the tire to rupture and you or be a place to store a tire.
others could be injured. Be sure
to read and follow the tire The tire sealant and compressor
sealant and compressor kit can be used to temporarily seal
instructions and inflate the tire punctures up to 6 mm (¼ in) in the
tread area of the tire. It can also be
to its recommended pressure.
used to inflate an under inflated tire.
Do not exceed the recommended
pressure. If the tire has been separated from
the wheel, has damaged sidewalls,
or has a large puncture, the tire is
too severely damaged for the tire A. On/Off Button
{ WARNING sealant and compressor kit to be
B. Selector Switch (Sealant/Air or
effective. See Roadside Assistance
Storing the tire sealant and Program (U.S. and Canada) on Air Only)
compressor kit or other page 13‑7 or Roadside Assistance C. Pressure Relief Button
equipment in the passenger Program (Mexico) on page 13‑9.
compartment of the vehicle could D. Pressure Gauge
Read and follow all of the tire
cause injury. In a sudden stop or E. Air Only Hose (Black)
sealant and compressor kit
collision, loose equipment could instructions. F. Sealant/Air Hose (Clear)
strike someone. Store the tire
sealant and compressor kit in its G. Power Plug
original location.
10-72 Vehicle Care
Tire Sealant Using the Tire Sealant and If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire
Compressor Kit to Temporarily and wheel damage by driving slowly
Read and follow the safe handling
Seal and Inflate a to a level place. Turn on the hazard
instructions on the label adhered to
Punctured Tire warning flashers. See Hazard
the compressor.
Warning Flashers on page 6‑4.
Check the tire sealant expiration Follow the directions closely for
correct sealant usage. See If a Tire Goes Flat on
date on the sealant canister.
page 10‑68 for other important
The sealant canister should be
safety warnings.
replaced before its expiration date.
Replacement sealant canisters are Do not remove any objects that
available at your local dealer. have penetrated the tire.
See “Removal and Installation of 1. Remove the tire sealant and
the Sealant Canister” following. compressor kit from its storage
There is only enough sealant to location. See Storing the Tire
seal one tire. After usage, the Sealant and Compressor Kit on
sealant canister and sealant/air page 10‑78.
hose assembly must be replaced. 2. Unwrap the sealant/air hose (F)
See “Removal and Installation of the and the power plug (G).
Sealant Canister” following.
3. Place the kit on the ground.
When using the tire sealant and Make sure the tire valve stem is
compressor kit during cold positioned close to the ground
temperatures, warm the kit in a so the hose will reach it.
heated environment for five minutes.
This will help to inflate the tire 4. Remove the valve stem cap
faster. from the flat tire by turning it
counterclockwise.
Vehicle Care 10-73
5. Attach the sealant/air hose (F) 9. Press the on/off (A) button to The pressure gauge (D) may
onto the tire valve stem. Turn it turn the tire sealant and read higher than the actual tire
clockwise until it is tight. compressor kit on. pressure while the compressor
6. Plug the power plug (G) into the The compressor will inject is on. Turn the compressor off
accessory power outlet in the sealant and air into the tire. to get an accurate pressure
vehicle. Unplug all items from reading. The compressor may
The pressure gauge (D) will be turned on/off until the
other accessory power outlets. initially show a high pressure
See Power Outlets on page 5‑6. correct pressure is reached.
while the compressor pushes the
If the vehicle has an accessory sealant into the tire. Once the Notice: If the recommended
power outlet, do not use the sealant is completely dispersed pressure cannot be reached after
cigarette lighter. into the tire, the pressure will approximately 25 minutes, the
quickly drop and start to rise vehicle should not be driven
If the vehicle only has a cigarette farther. The tire is too severely
lighter, use the cigarette lighter. again as the tire inflates with
air only. damaged and the tire sealant and
Do not pinch the power plug compressor kit cannot inflate the
cord in the door or window. 10. Inflate the tire to the tire. Remove the power plug from
recommended inflation the accessory power outlet and
7. Start the vehicle. The vehicle pressure using the pressure unscrew the inflating hose from
must be running while using the gauge (D). The recommended the tire valve. See Roadside
air compressor. inflation pressure can be found Assistance Program (U.S. and
8. Turn the selector switch (B) on the Tire and Loading Canada) on page 13‑7 or
clockwise to the Sealant + Air Information label. See Tire Roadside Assistance Program
position. Pressure on page 10‑53. (Mexico) on page 13‑9.
10-74 Vehicle Care
11. Press the on/off button (A) to 15. Return the sealant/air hose (F) 19. Stop at a safe location and
turn the tire sealant and and the power plug (G) back in check the tire pressure.
compressor kit off. their original locations. Refer to Steps 1 through 11
The tire is not sealed and will under “Using the Tire Sealant
continue to leak air until the and Compressor Kit without
vehicle is driven and the Sealant to Inflate a Tire
sealant is distributed in the tire; (Not Punctured).”
therefore, Steps 12 through If the tire pressure has fallen
18 must be done immediately more than 68 kPa (10 psi)
after Step 11. below the recommended
16. If the flat tire was able to inflate inflation pressure, stop driving
Be careful while handling the to the recommended inflation
tire sealant and compressor kit the vehicle. The tire is too
pressure, remove the severely damaged and the tire
as it could be warm after maximum speed label from the
usage. sealant cannot seal the tire.
sealant canister and place it in See Roadside Assistance
12. Unplug the power plug (G) from a highly visible location. Do not Program (U.S. and Canada) on
the accessory power outlet in exceed the speed on this label page 13‑7 or Roadside
the vehicle. until the damaged tire is Assistance Program (Mexico)
repaired or replaced. on page 13‑9.
13. Turn the sealant/air hose (F)
counterclockwise to remove it 17. Return the equipment to its If the tire pressure has not
from the tire valve stem. original storage location in the dropped more than 68 kPa
vehicle. (10 psi) from the recommended
14. Replace the tire valve
stem cap. 18. Immediately drive the vehicle inflation pressure, use the
8 km (5 miles) to distribute the compressor kit to inflate the tire
sealant in the tire. to the recommended inflation
pressure.
Vehicle Care 10-75
20. Wipe off any sealant from the Using the Tire Sealant and See If a Tire Goes Flat on
wheel, tire, and vehicle. Compressor Kit without page 10‑68 for other important
21. Dispose of the used sealant Sealant to Inflate a Tire safety warnings.
canister and sealant/air (Not Punctured) 1. Remove the tire sealant and
hose (F) assembly at a local To use the air compressor to inflate compressor kit from its storage
dealer or in accordance with a tire with air only and not sealant: location. See Storing the Tire
local state codes and practices. Sealant and Compressor Kit on
22. Replace it with a new canister page 10‑78.
available from your dealer. 2. Unwrap the air only hose (E)
23. After temporarily sealing a tire and the power plug (G).
using the tire sealant and 3. Place the kit on the ground.
compressor kit, take the Make sure the tire valve stem is
vehicle to an authorized dealer positioned close to the ground
within 161 km (100 miles) of so the hose will reach it.
driving to have the tire repaired
or replaced. 4. Remove the tire valve stem cap
from the flat tire by turning it
counterclockwise.
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire

and wheel damage by driving slowly
to a level place. Turn on the hazard
warning flashers. See Hazard
Warning Flashers on page 6‑4.
10-76 Vehicle Care
5. Attach the air only hose (E) onto 8. Turn the selector switch (B) The compressor may be turned
the tire valve stem by turning it counterclockwise to the Air Only on/off until the correct pressure
clockwise until it is tight. position. is reached. If the tire is inflated
6. Plug the power plug (G) into the 9. Press the on/off (A) button to higher than the recommended
accessory power outlet in the turn the compressor on. pressure, press the pressure
vehicle. Unplug all items from relief button (C), if equipped,
The compressor will inflate the until the proper pressure
other accessory power outlets. tire with air only.
See Power Outlets on page 5‑6. reading is reached. This option
10. Inflate the tire to the is only functional when using
If the vehicle has an accessory recommended inflation the air only hose (E).
power outlet, do not use the pressure using the pressure
cigarette lighter. 11. Press the on/off button (A)
gauge (D). The recommended to turn the tire sealant and
If the vehicle only has a cigarette inflation pressure can be found compressor kit off.
lighter, use the cigarette lighter. on the Tire and Loading
Information label. See Tire Be careful while handling the
Do not pinch the power plug tire sealant and compressor kit
cord in the door or window. Pressure on page 10‑53.
as it could be warm after
7. Start the vehicle. The vehicle The pressure gauge (D) may usage.
must be running while using the read higher than the actual tire
pressure while the compressor 12. Unplug the power plug (G) from
air compressor. the accessory power outlet in
is on. Turn the compressor off
to get an accurate reading. the vehicle.
Vehicle Care 10-77
13. Disconnect the air only Removal and Installation of the 3. Pull up on the canister (A) to
hose (E) from the tire Sealant Canister remove it.
valve stem, by turning it 4. Replace with a new canister
counterclockwise, and replace To remove the sealant canister:
which is available from your
the tire valve stem cap. dealer.
14. Return the air only hose (E) 5. Push the new canister into
and the power plug (G) back to place.
their original locations.
6. Screw the connector (B) to the
15. Return the equipment to its canister (A).
original storage location in the
vehicle. 7. Slide the plastic cover back on.
1. Remove the plastic cover.

2. Unscrew the connector (B) from
the canister (A).
10-78 Vehicle Care
Storing the Tire Sealant Tire Changing 4. Place the spare tire next to the
tire being changed.
and Compressor Kit Removing the Spare Tire 5. The jack and tools are stored
To access the tire sealant and and Tools below the spare tire.
compressor kit: The equipment you need is located
1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on in the trunk.
page 2‑12. 1. Open the trunk.
2. Lift the cover. 2. Remove the spare tire cover.
This vehicle will have either a

coin/pierce jack (D) and a jack
handle extension (C) or a hex
head jack (B) and a jack lift
3. Turn the wing nut assist tool (A).
counterclockwise to remove it. 3. Turn the retainer nut
Place the tools next to the tire
4. Remove the tire sealant and counterclockwise and remove
being changed.
compressor kit. the spare tire.
To store the tire sealant and
compressor kit, reverse the steps.
Vehicle Care 10-79
Removing the Flat Tire and

Installing the Spare Tire
1. Do a safety check before
proceeding. See If a Tire Goes
Flat on page 10‑68 for more
information.
2. Turn the wheel wrench
counterclockwise to loosen the
wheel nut caps.
If needed, finish loosening them
by hand. The nut caps will not
come off of the wheel cover. 3. Turn the wheel wrench 4. Position the jack head, as shown
counterclockwise to loosen all Set the jack to the necessary
The edge of the wheel cover the wheel nuts, but do not
could be sharp, so do not try to height before positioning it below
remove them yet. the jacking point.
remove the cover with your bare
hands. Do not drop the cap or Notice: Make sure that the jack
lay it face down, as it could lift head is in the correct position
become scratched or damaged. or you may damage your vehicle.
The repairs would not be covered
Store the wheel cover in the by your warranty.
trunk until you have the flat tire
repaired or replaced.
10-80 Vehicle Care
{ WARNING { WARNING
Getting under a vehicle when it is Lifting a vehicle and getting
jacked up is dangerous. If the under it to do maintenance or
vehicle slips off the jack, you repairs is dangerous without the
could be badly injured or killed. appropriate safety equipment and
Never get under a vehicle when it training. If a jack is provided with
is supported only by a jack. the vehicle, it is designed only for
changing a flat tire. If it is used for
anything else, you or others could
be badly injured or killed if the
Coin/Pierce Jack Shown,
{ WARNING vehicle slips off the jack. If a jack
Hex-Head Jack Similar Raising your vehicle with the jack is provided with the vehicle, only
improperly positioned can use it for changing a flat tire.
5. If you have a coin/pierce jack,
attach the jack handle extension damage the vehicle and even
to the jack by sliding the hook make the vehicle fall. To help
through the end of the jack. avoid personal injury and vehicle
damage, be sure to fit the jack lift
If you have a hex-head jack, head into the proper location
attach the jack lift-assist tool to
before raising the vehicle.
the jack by fitting both ends of
the jack and tool over one
another.
Vehicle Care 10-81
WARNING (Continued)
In an emergency, use a cloth or a

paper towel to do this; but be sure
to use a scraper or wire brush
later, if needed, to get all the rust
or dirt off. See If a Tire Goes Flat
on page 10‑68.
Hex-Head Jack Shown, 7. Remove all of the wheel nuts.

Coin/Pierce Jack Similar 8. Remove the flat tire.
6. Turn the jack handle clockwise
to raise the vehicle far enough { WARNING
off the ground for the compact
spare to fit under the vehicle. Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the
parts to which it is fastened, can
make wheel nuts become loose
after time. The wheel could come
off and cause an accident. When
changing a wheel, remove any
9. Remove any rust or dirt from the
rust or dirt from places where the wheel bolts, mounting surfaces,
wheel attaches to the vehicle. and spare wheel.
(Continued)
10-82 Vehicle Care
10. Install the compact spare tire.

{ WARNING
{ WARNING Wheel nuts that are improperly or
Never use oil or grease on bolts incorrectly tightened can cause
or nuts because the nuts might the wheels to become loose or
come loose. The vehicle's wheel come off. The wheel nuts should
could fall off, causing a crash. be tightened with a torque wrench
to the proper torque specification
after replacing. Follow the torque
11. Put the wheel nuts back on specification supplied by the
with the rounded end of the aftermarket manufacturer when
nuts toward the wheel. Turn using accessory locking wheel
each nut clockwise by hand 13. Tighten the wheel nuts firmly
nuts. See Capacities and in a crisscross sequence,
until the wheel is held against Specifications on page 12‑2 for
the hub. as shown.
original equipment wheel nut
12. Lower the vehicle by 14. Lower the jack all the way and
torque specifications.
turning the jack handle remove the jack from under the
counterclockwise. Lower the vehicle.
jack completely. Notice: Improperly tightened 15. Tighten the wheel nuts firmly
wheel nuts can lead to brake with the wheel wrench.
pulsation and rotor damage.
To avoid expensive brake repairs, Notice: Wheel covers will not fit
evenly tighten the wheel nuts in on your vehicle's compact spare.
the proper sequence and to the If you try to put a wheel cover on
proper torque specification. the compact spare, the cover or
See Capacities and Specifications the spare could be damaged.
on page 12‑2 for the wheel nut
torque specification.
Vehicle Care 10-83
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire To store the flat or spare tire and 3. Replace the jack and tools in
and Tools tools: their original storage location.
1. If the flat tire is larger than the 4. Place the tire, lying flat, facing
{ WARNING spare tire, use the longer up in the spare tire well.
mounting bolt. Secure it with the retainer nut.
Storing a jack, a tire, or other
equipment in the passenger Place the floor cover over the
compartment of the vehicle could tire even though it may not lay
cause injury. In a sudden stop or flat if the tire is larger than the
collision, loose equipment could spare.
strike someone. Store all these in The compact spare is for temporary
the proper place. use only. Replace the compact
spare tire with a full-size tire as
soon as you can.
2. Slide the shorter bolt to remove

it from the floor and insert the
longer one.
10-84 Vehicle Care
Compact Spare Tire full-size tire repaired or replaced at Jump Starting

your convenience. Of course, it is
best to replace the spare with a For more information about the
{ WARNING full-size tire as soon as possible. vehicle battery, see Battery on
The spare tire will last longer and page 10‑25.
Driving with more than one
be in good shape in case it is If the battery has run down, try to
compact spare tire at a time could
needed again. use another vehicle and some
result in loss of braking and
handling. This could lead to a Notice: When the compact spare jumper cables to start your vehicle.
crash and you or others could be is installed, do not take the Be sure to use the following steps to
injured. Use only one compact vehicle through an automatic do it safely.
spare tire at a time. car wash with guide rails.
The compact spare can get
caught on the rails which can
{ WARNING
If this vehicle has a compact spare damage the tire, wheel and other Batteries can hurt you. They can
tire, it was fully inflated when the parts of the vehicle. be dangerous because:
vehicle was new; however, it can
lose air after a time. Check the Do not use the compact spare on . They contain acid that can
inflation pressure regularly. It should other vehicles. burn you.
be 420 kPa (60 psi). Do not mix the compact spare tire or . They contain gas that can
After installing the compact spare wheel with other wheels or tires. explode or ignite.
on the vehicle, stop as soon as They will not fit. Keep the spare tire . They contain enough
possible and make sure the and its wheel together.
electricity to burn you.
spare tire is correctly inflated. Notice: Tire chains will not fit the
The compact spare is made to compact spare. Using them can If you do not follow these steps
perform well at speeds up to damage the vehicle and can exactly, some or all of these
105 km/h (65 mph) for distances up damage the chains too. Do not things can hurt you.
to 5 000 km (3,000 miles), so you use tire chains on the compact
can finish your trip and have the spare.
Vehicle Care 10-85
Notice: Ignoring these steps 3. Set the parking brake firmly and
could result in costly damage to put the shift lever in P (Park).
the vehicle that would not be See Shifting Into Park on
covered by the warranty. page 9‑25.
Trying to start the vehicle by Notice: If you leave the radio or
pushing or pulling it will not other accessories on during the
work, and it could damage the jump starting procedure, they
vehicle. could be damaged. The repairs
The jump start positive (A) is would not be covered by the
located under a trim cover in the warranty. Always turn off the
engine compartment on the driver radio and other accessories when
side of the vehicle. jump starting the vehicle.
1. Check the other vehicle. It must 4. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF
have a 12-volt battery with a and switch off all lights and
negative ground system. accessories in both vehicles,
except the hazard warning
Notice: Only use vehicles with flashers if needed.
12-volt systems with negative
grounds to jump start your
vehicle. If the other vehicle's { WARNING
system is not a 12-volt system
An electric fan can start up even
with a negative ground, both
vehicles can be damaged. when the engine is not running
and can injure you. Keep hands,
2. Position the two vehicles so that clothing and tools away from any
they are not touching. underhood electric fan.
This post is used instead of a direct
connection to the battery.
10-86 Vehicle Care
6. Do not let the other end of the

{ WARNING { WARNING red positive (+) cable touch
metal. Connect it to the
Using a match near a battery can Fans or other moving engine positive (+) terminal of the good
cause battery gas to explode. parts can injure you badly. Keep battery (B). Use a remote
People have been hurt doing this, your hands away from moving positive (+) terminal if the vehicle
and some have been blinded. parts once the engine is running. has one.
Use a flashlight if you need
more light. 7. Connect one end of the black
negative (–) cable to the
Be sure the battery has enough negative (–) terminal of the
water. You do not need to add good battery (C). Use a remote
water to the battery installed in negative (−) terminal if the
your new vehicle. But if a battery vehicle has one.
has filler caps, be sure the right Do not let the other end touch
amount of fluid is there. If it is low, anything until the next step.
add water to take care of that The other end of the negative (–)
first. If you don't, explosive gas cable does not go to the dead
could be present. battery. It goes to a heavy,
Battery fluid contains acid that unpainted metal engine part or
can burn you. Do not get it on to a remote negative (–) terminal
5. Connect one end of the red on the vehicle with the dead
you. If you accidentally get it in
positive (+) cable to the jump battery.
your eyes or on your skin, flush
start positive (+) post (A). Use a
the place with water and get
remote positive (+) terminal if the
medical help immediately. vehicle has one.
Vehicle Care 10-87
8. Connect the other end of the To disconnect the jumper cables

black negative (–) cable to an from both vehicles:
unpainted heavy metal engine 1. Disconnect the black
part (D) away from the dead negative (−) cable from the
battery, but not near engine vehicle that had the dead
parts that move. battery.
9. Start the engine in the vehicle 2. Disconnect the black
with the good battery and run negative (−) cable from the
the engine at idle speed for at vehicle with the good battery.
least four minutes.
3. Disconnect the red positive (+)
10. Try to start the vehicle that had cable from the vehicle with the
the dead battery. If it will not good battery.
Jumper Cable Removal
start after a few tries, it
probably needs service. A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine 4. Disconnect the red positive (+)
Part or Remote Negative (–) cable from the other vehicle.
Notice: If the jumper cables are
Terminal 5. Return the caps over the
connected or removed in the
wrong order, electrical shorting B. Good Battery or Remote positive (+) and negative (–)
may occur and damage the Positive (+) and Remote terminals to their original
vehicle. The repairs would not be Negative (–) Terminals positions.
covered by the vehicle warranty. C. Dead Battery or Remote
Always connect and remove the Positive (+) Terminal
jumper cables in the correct
order, making sure that the
cables do not touch each other
or other metal.
10-88 Vehicle Care
Towing Recreational Vehicle Here are some important things to

consider before recreational vehicle
Towing towing:
Towing the Vehicle Recreational vehicle towing means . What is the towing capacity
Notice: To avoid damage, towing the vehicle behind another of the towing vehicle?
the disabled vehicle should be vehicle – such as behind a Be sure to read the tow
towed with all four wheels off motorhome. The two most common vehicle manufacturer's
the ground. Care must be taken types of recreational vehicle towing recommendations.
with vehicles that have low are known as dinghy towing and
ground clearance and/or special dolly towing. Dinghy towing is . What is the distance that will be
equipment. towing the vehicle with all four travelled? Some vehicles have
wheels on the ground. Dolly towing restrictions on how far and how
Consult your dealer or a long they can tow.
is towing the vehicle with two
professional towing service if the
wheels on the ground and two . Is the proper towing equipment
disabled vehicle must be towed.
wheels up on a device known as going to be used? See your
See Roadside Assistance Program
a dolly. dealer or trailering professional
(U.S. and Canada) on page 13‑7 or
Roadside Assistance Program for additional advice and
(Mexico) on page 13‑9. equipment recommendations.
To tow the vehicle behind another
. Is the vehicle ready to be
vehicle for recreational purposes, towed? Just as preparing the
such as behind a motor home, see vehicle for a long trip, make sure
“Recreational Vehicle Towing” in this the vehicle is prepared to be
section. towed.
Vehicle Care 10-89
Dinghy Towing From the Front 2. Turn the engine off and firmly set Dinghy Towing From the Rear
the parking brake.
When dinghy towing, the vehicle
should be run at the beginning of 3. Following the manufacturer's
each day and at each RV fuel stop instructions, securely attach the
for about five minutes. This will vehicle being towed to the
ensure proper lubrication of tow vehicle.
transmission components. 4. Turn the ignition to ACC/
ACCESSORY and shift the
transmission to N (Neutral).
5. Release the parking brake only
after the vehicle being towed is
firmly attached to the towing
vehicle.
When towing the vehicle for The vehicle was not designed
extended periods of time, start the to be towed from the rear with all
vehicle as often as possible to four wheels on the ground.
prevent battery drain. This should
be done when the tow vehicle is
parked.
Use the following procedure to
dinghy tow the vehicle from the front
with all four wheels on the ground:
1. Position the vehicle being towed
behind the tow vehicle and shift
the transmission to P (Park).
10-90 Vehicle Care
Dolly Towing From the Front 3. Shift the transmission to Dolly Towing From the Front
(Front Wheel Drive) P (Park). (All Wheel Drive)
4. Firmly set the parking brake.
5. Use an adequate clamping
device designed for towing to
ensure that the front wheels are
locked into the straight ahead
position.
6. Secure the vehicle to the dolly
following the manufacturer's
instructions.
7. Release the parking brake only
after the vehicle being towed is
firmly attached to the towing
Vehicles with front-wheel drive can vehicle. Vehicles with all-wheel drive cannot
be dolly towed from the front. be dolly towed.
8. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.
Use the following procedure to
dolly tow the vehicle from the front:
1. Attach the dolly to the tow
vehicle following the dolly
manufacturer's instructions.
2. Drive the front wheels onto
the dolly.
Vehicle Care 10-91
Dolly Towing From the Rear Appearance Care Notice: Machine compounding
or aggressive polishing on a
basecoat/clearcoat paint finish
Exterior Care may damage it. Use only
Cleaning Exterior non-abrasive waxes and polishes
that are made for a basecoat/
Lamps/Lenses
clearcoat paint finish on the
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a vehicle.
soft cloth, and a car washing soap
Foreign materials such as calcium
to clean exterior lamps and lenses.
chloride and other salts, ice melting
Follow instructions under “Washing
agents, road oil and tar, tree sap,
the Vehicle” later in this section.
bird droppings, chemicals from
Finish Care industrial chimneys, etc., can
damage the vehicle's finish if they
The vehicle cannot be dolly towed Occasional waxing or mild polishing remain on painted surfaces. Wash
from the rear. of the vehicle by hand may be the vehicle as soon as possible.
necessary to remove residue from If necessary, use non-abrasive
the paint finish. Approved cleaning cleaners that are marked safe for
products can be obtained from your painted surfaces to remove foreign
dealer. matter.
If the vehicle has a basecoat/ Exterior painted surfaces are
clearcoat paint finish, the clearcoat subject to aging, weather, and
gives more depth and gloss to the chemical fallout that can take their
colored basecoat. Always use toll over a period of years. To keep
waxes and polishes that are the paint finish looking new, keep
non-abrasive and made for a the vehicle garaged or covered
basecoat/clearcoat paint finish. whenever possible.
10-92 Vehicle Care
Protecting Exterior Bright Notice: Certain cleaners contain Rinse the vehicle well, before
Metal Parts chemicals that can damage the washing and after, to remove all
Bright metal parts should be emblems or nameplates on the cleaning agents completely. If they
cleaned regularly to keep their vehicle. Check the cleaning are allowed to dry on the surface,
luster. Wash with water or use product label. If it states that it they could stain.
chrome polish on chrome or should not be used on plastic Dry the finish with a soft, clean
stainless steel trim, if necessary. parts, do not use it on the vehicle chamois or an all-cotton towel to
or damage may occur and it avoid surface scratches and water
Use special care with aluminum would not be covered by the
trim. To avoid damaging protective spotting.
warranty.
trim, never use auto or chrome High pressure car washes could
polish, steam, or caustic soap to Do not use cleaning agents that are cause water to enter the vehicle.
clean aluminum. A coating of petroleum based or that contain Avoid using high pressure washes
wax, rubbed to high polish, is acid or abrasives, as they can closer than 30 cm (12 in) to the
recommended for all bright damage the paint, metal, or plastic surface of the vehicle. Use of power
metal parts. on the vehicle. Approved cleaning washers exceeding 8,274 kPa
products can be obtained from your (1,200 psi) can result in damage or
Washing the Vehicle dealer. Follow all manufacturer removal of paint and decals.
directions regarding correct
To preserve the vehicle's finish, Notice: Conveyor systems on
product usage, necessary safety
keep it clean by washing it often. some automatic car washes could
precautions, and appropriate
Do not wash the vehicle in direct disposal of any vehicle care damage the vehicle. There may
sunlight and use a car product. not be enough clearance for the
washing soap. undercarriage. Check with the
car wash manager before using
the automatic car wash.
Vehicle Care 10-93
Weatherstrips These chlorides are used on Notice: Using chrome polish on

roads for conditions such as ice aluminum wheels could damage
Silicone grease on weatherstrips
and dust. Always wash the the wheels. The repairs would
will make them last longer, seal
vehicle's chrome with soap and not be covered by the vehicle
better, and not stick or squeak.
water after exposure. warranty. Use chrome polish on
Apply silicone grease with a clean
Notice: Using strong soaps, chrome wheels only.
cloth. During very cold, damp
weather frequent application may be chemicals, abrasive polishes, Use chrome polish only on
required. See Recommended Fluids cleaners, brushes, or cleaners chrome-plated wheels, but avoid
and Lubricants on page 11‑7. that contain acid on aluminum or any painted surface of the wheel,
chrome-plated wheels, could and buff off immediately after
Wheels and Trim — Aluminum damage the surface of the application.
or Chrome wheel(s). The repairs would not Notice: Driving the vehicle
The vehicle may have either be covered by the vehicle through an automatic car wash
aluminum or chrome-plated wheels. warranty. Use only approved that has silicone carbide tire
cleaners on aluminum or cleaning brushes, could damage
Keep the wheels clean using a soft, chrome-plated wheels.
clean cloth with mild soap and the aluminum or chrome-plated
water. Rinse with clean water. After The surface of these wheels is wheels. The repairs would not be
rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft, similar to the painted surface of the covered by the vehicle warranty.
clean towel. A wax may then be vehicle. Do not use strong soaps, Never drive a vehicle that has
applied. chemicals, abrasive polishes, aluminum or chrome-plated
abrasive cleaners, cleaners with wheels through an automatic
Notice: Chrome wheels and other acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes car wash that uses silicone
chrome trim may be damaged if on them because the surface could carbide tire cleaning brushes.
the vehicle is not washed after be damaged. Do not use chrome
driving on roads that have been polish on aluminum wheels.
sprayed with magnesium,
calcium or sodium chloride.
10-94 Vehicle Care
Windshield and Wiper Blades Tires Finish Damage

Clean the outside of the windshield Use a stiff brush with tire cleaner to Any stone chips, fractures, or deep
with glass cleaner. clean the tires. scratches in the finish should be
Clean the rubber blades using a Notice: Using petroleum-based repaired right away. Bare metal will
lint‐free cloth or paper towel soaked tire dressing products on the corrode quickly and may develop
with windshield washer fluid or a vehicle may damage the paint into major repair expense.
mild detergent. Wash the windshield finish and/or tires. When applying Minor chips and scratches can be
thoroughly when cleaning the a tire dressing, always wipe off repaired with touch-up materials
blades. Bugs, road grime, sap, and any overspray from all painted available from your dealer. Larger
a buildup of vehicle wash/wax surfaces on the vehicle. areas of finish damage can be
treatments may cause wiper corrected in your dealer's body and
streaking. Replace the wiper blades Sheet Metal Damage paint shop.
if they are worn or damaged. If the vehicle is damaged and
requires sheet metal repair or
Underbody Maintenance
Wipers can be damaged by:
replacement, make sure the body Chemicals used for ice and snow
. Extreme dusty conditions repair shop applies anti-corrosion removal and dust control can collect
. Sand and salt material to parts repaired or on the underbody. If these are not
replaced to restore corrosion removed, corrosion and rust can
. Heat and sun protection. develop on the underbody parts
. Snow and ice, without proper Original manufacturer replacement such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan,
removal parts will provide the corrosion and exhaust system even though
protection while maintaining the they have corrosion protection.
vehicle warranty.
Vehicle Care 10-95
At least every spring, flush these Interior Care being cleaned. Permanent damage
materials from the underbody with can result from using cleaners on
plain water. Clean any areas The vehicle's interior will continue to surfaces for which they were not
where mud and debris can collect. look its best if it is cleaned often. intended. Apply the cleaner directly
Dirt packed in close areas of the Dust and dirt can accumulate on the to the cleaning cloth to prevent
frame should be loosened before upholstery and cause damage to over-spray. Remove any accidental
being flushed. Your dealer or an the carpet, fabric, leather, and over-spray from other surfaces
underbody car washing system plastic surfaces. Stains should be immediately.
can do this. removed quickly as extreme heat
could cause them to set rapidly. Notice: Using abrasive cleaners
Chemical Paint Spotting when cleaning glass surfaces on
Lighter colored interiors may the vehicle, could scratch the
Some weather and atmospheric require more frequent cleaning. glass and/or cause damage to
conditions can create a chemical Newspapers and garments that can the rear window defogger.
fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall transfer color to home furnishings When cleaning the glass on the
upon and attack painted surfaces on can also transfer color to the vehicle, use only a soft cloth and
the vehicle. This damage can take vehicle's interior. glass cleaner.
two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped
Remove dust from small buttons Cleaners can contain solvents that
discolorations, and small, irregular
and knobs with a small brush with can become concentrated in the
dark spots etched into the paint
soft bristles. vehicle's interior. Before using
surface.
Your dealer has products for cleaners, read and adhere to all
cleaning the vehicle's interior. safety instructions on the label.
When cleaning the vehicle's interior,
only use cleaners specifically
designed for the surfaces that are
10-96 Vehicle Care
While cleaning the vehicle's interior,

. Use only mild, neutral-pH soaps. Fabric/Carpet
maintain adequate ventilation by Avoid laundry detergents or
dishwashing soaps with Use a vacuum cleaner with a soft
opening the vehicle's doors and
degreasers. Using too much brush attachment to remove dust
windows.
soap will leave a residue that and loose dirt. A canister vacuum
Do not clean the interior using the leaves streaks and attracts dirt. with a beater bar in the nozzle may
following cleaners or techniques: For liquid cleaners, about only be used on floor carpet and
. Never use a knife or any other 20 drops per 3.78 L (1 gal) of carpeted floor mats. For soils,
sharp object to remove a soil water is a good guide. always try to remove them first with
from any interior surface. plain water or club soda. Before
. Do not heavily saturate the cleaning, gently remove as much of
. Never use a stiff brush. It can upholstery while cleaning. the soil as possible using one of the
cause damage to the vehicle's . Damage to the vehicle's interior following techniques:
interior surfaces. may result from the use of many . For liquids: gently blot the
. Never apply heavy pressure or organic solvents such as naptha, remaining soil with a paper
rub aggressively with a cleaning alcohol, etc. towel. Allow the soil to absorb
cloth. Use of heavy pressure can into the paper towel until no
damage the interior and does more can be removed.
not improve the effectiveness of .
soil removal. For solid dry soils: remove as
much as possible and then
vacuum.
Vehicle Care 10-97
To clean: If the locally cleaned area gives any that provides superior cleaning
1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white impression that a ring formation may performance when used regularly
cloth with water or club soda. result, clean the entire surface. on finished automotive leathers.
A paper towel can be used to blot Allow the leather to dry naturally.
2. Remove excess moisture. Do not use heat, steam, spot lifters
excess moisture from the fabric or
3. Start on the outside edge of the carpet after the cleaning process. or spot removers, or shoe polish on
soil and gently rub toward the leather. Many commercial leather
center. Continue cleaning, using Leather cleaners and coatings that are sold
a clean area of the cloth each to preserve and protect leather
Leather, and lighter colored leather
time it becomes soiled. may permanently change the
in particular, will need more frequent
appearance and feel of the leather
4. Continue to gently rub the cleaning to prevent the buildup of
and are not recommended. Do not
soiled area. dust, dirt, and colors transferred
use silicone or wax-based products,
from other items so that these do
5. If the soil is not completely or those containing organic solvents
not become permanent stains.
removed, use a mild soap to clean the vehicle's interior
solution and repeat the cleaning To remove dust, a soft cloth because they can alter the
process with plain water. dampened with water can be used. appearance by increasing the
If a more thorough cleaning is gloss in a non-uniform manner.
If any of the soil remains, a necessary, a soft cloth dampened
commercial fabric cleaner or spot with a mild soap solution can be
lifter may be necessary. Test a used. Your dealer has a GM
small hidden area for colorfastness approved leather cleaner available
before using a commercial
upholstery cleaner or spot lifter.
10-98 Vehicle Care
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Some commercial products may Floor Mats
Other Plastic Surfaces increase gloss on the instrument
panel. The increase in gloss may
To remove dust, a soft cloth cause annoying reflections in the { WARNING
dampened with water can be used. windshield and even make it difficult
If a more thorough cleaning is If a floor mat is the wrong size or
to see through the windshield under
necessary, a clean soft cloth is not properly installed, it can
certain conditions.
dampened with a mild soap solution interfere with the accelerator
can be used to gently remove dust Care of Safety Belts pedal and/or brake pedal.
and dirt. Never use spot lifters or Interference with the pedals can
Keep belts clean and dry.
removers on plastic surfaces. cause unintended acceleration
Many commercial cleaners and and/or increased stopping
coatings that are sold to preserve { WARNING distance which can cause a crash
and protect soft plastic surfaces and injury. Make sure the floor
may permanently change the Do not bleach or dye safety belts.
It may severely weaken them. mat does not interfere with the
appearance and feel of the interior accelerator or brake pedal.
and are not recommended. In a crash, they might not be able
Do not use silicone or wax-based to provide adequate protection.
products, or those containing Clean safety belts only with mild
organic solvents to clean the soap and lukewarm water.
vehicle's interior because they can
alter the appearance by increasing
the gloss in a non-uniform manner.
Vehicle Care 10-99
Use the following guidelines for Removing and Replacing the

proper floor mat usage. Floor Mats
. The original equipment floor Pull up on the rear of the floor mat
mats were designed for your to unlock each retainer and remove.
vehicle. If the floor mats need
replacing, it is recommended
that GM certified floor mats be
purchased. Non-GM floor mats
may not fit properly and may
interfere with the accelerator or
brake pedal. Always check that
the floor mats do not interfere
with the pedals.
. Use the floor mat with the
correct side up. Do not turn
it over.
. Do not place anything on top of
the driver side floor mat. Reinstall by lining up the floor mat
. Use only a single floor mat on retainer openings over the carpet
the driver side. retainers and snap into position.
. Do not place one floor mat on Make sure the floor mat is properly
top of another. secured in place.
Verify the floor mat does not
interfere with the accelerator or the
brake pedal.
10-100 Vehicle Care
2 NOTES
Service and Maintenance 11-1
Service and General Information Because of all the different ways

people use vehicles, maintenance
Maintenance Notice: Maintenance intervals,
checks, inspections,
needs vary. The vehicle might need
more frequent checks and services.
recommended fluids, and Please read the information under
General Information lubricants are necessary to keep Scheduled Maintenance. To keep
General Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1 this vehicle in good working the vehicle in good condition, see
condition. Damage caused by your dealer.
Scheduled Maintenance failure to follow scheduled
The maintenance schedule is for
Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . 11-2 maintenance might not be
vehicles that:
covered by the vehicle warranty.
Recommended Fluids, . Carry passengers and cargo
Lubricants, and Parts As the vehicle owner, you are
within recommended limits on
Recommended Fluids and responsible for the scheduled
the Tire and Loading Information
Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7 maintenance in this section.
label. See Vehicle Load Limits
Maintenance Replacement We recommend having your
on page 9‑12.
Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9 dealer perform these services.
. Are driven on reasonable road
Proper vehicle maintenance helps
Maintenance Records to keep the vehicle in good working surfaces within legal driving
Maintenance Records . . . . . . 11-10 condition, improves fuel economy, limits.
and reduces vehicle emissions for . Use the recommended fuel.
better air quality. See Recommended Fuel on
page 9‑50.
11-2 Service and Maintenance
The proper replacement parts, Scheduled

{ WARNING fluids, and lubricants to use are
Performing maintenance work can
listed in Recommended Fluids and Maintenance
Lubricants on page 11‑7 and
be dangerous. Some jobs can Maintenance Replacement Parts on When the Change Engine Oil
cause serious injury. Perform page 11‑9. We recommend the use Soon Message Displays
maintenance work only if you of genuine parts from your dealer. Change engine oil and filter.
have the required know-how and See Engine Oil on page 10‑9.
the proper tools and equipment. Rotation of New Tires
An Emission Control Service.
If in doubt, see your dealer to To maintain ride, handling, and
have a qualified technician do the performance of the vehicle, it is When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL
work. See Doing Your Own important that the first rotation SOON message displays, service is
Service Work on page 10‑4. service for new tires be performed. required for the vehicle as soon as
Tires should be rotated every possible, within the next 1 000 km/
12 000 km/7,500 miles. See Tire 600 miles. If driving under the best
At your dealer, you can be certain Rotation on page 10‑59. conditions, the engine oil life system
that you will receive the highest might not indicate the need for
level of service available. vehicle service for more than a year.
Your dealer has specially trained The engine oil and filter must be
service technicians, uses genuine changed at least once a year and
replacement parts, as well as, the oil life system must be reset.
up‐to‐date tools and equipment Your dealer has trained service
to ensure fast and accurate technicians who will perform this
diagnostics. work and reset the system. If the
engine oil life system is reset

. Windshield washer fluid level . Engine air cleaner filter
accidentally, service the vehicle check. See Washer Fluid on inspection. See Engine Air
within 5 000 km/3,000 miles since page 10‑22. Cleaner/Filter on page 10‑13.
the last service. Reset the oil life . Windshield wiper blade . Brake system inspection
system whenever the oil is changed. inspection for wear, cracking, (or every 12 months, whichever
See Engine Oil Life System on or contamination and windshield occurs first).
page 10‑12. and wiper blade cleaning, . Steering and suspension
if contaminated. See Exterior
Every Engine Oil Change inspection. Visual inspection for
Care on page 10‑91. Worn or damaged, loose, or missing
. Change engine oil and filter. damaged wiper blade parts or signs of wear.
Reset oil life system. See replacement. See Wiper Blade
Engine Oil on page 10‑9 and Replacement on page 10‑28. . Body hinges and latches, key
Engine Oil Life System on lock cylinders, folding seat
. Tire inflation pressures check. hardware, and sunroof
page 10‑12. An Emission Control
See Tire Pressure on (if equipped) lubrication.
Service.
page 10‑53. See Recommended Fluids and
. Engine coolant level check. . Tire wear inspection. See Tire Lubricants on page 11‑7.
See Engine Coolant on
Inspection on page 10‑59. More frequent lubrication may be
page 10‑16.
. Rotate tires if necessary. See required when the vehicle is
. Engine cooling system
Tire Rotation on page 10‑59. exposed to a corrosive
inspection. Visual inspection environment. Applying silicone
of hoses, pipes, fittings, and . Fluids visual leak check (or grease on weatherstrips with a
clamps and replacement, every 12 months, whichever clean cloth makes them last
if needed. occurs first). A leak in any longer, seal better, and not stick
system must be repaired and or squeak.
the fluid level checked.

. Restraint system component Once a Month First Engine Oil Change After
check. See Safety System Every 40 000 km/25,000 Miles
Check on page 3‑26.
. Tire inflation check. See Tire
Pressure on page 10‑53. . Passenger compartment air
. Fuel system inspection for filter replacement (or every
damage or leaks.
. Tire wear inspection. See Tire
Inspection on page 10‑59. 24 months, whichever occurs
. Exhaust system and nearby heat first). More frequent replacement
shields inspection for loose or
. Sunroof track and seal may be needed if you drive
damaged components. inspection, if equipped. in areas with heavy traffic,
See Sunroof on page 2‑20. areas with poor air quality,
Additional Required Services or areas with high dust levels.
Once a Year
Every 12 000 km/7,500 Miles Replacement may also be
. See Starter Switch Check on needed if you notice reduced
. Rotate tires. Tires should be page 10‑26. air flow, windows fogging up,
rotated every 12 000 km/ . See Automatic Transmission or odors. Your dealer can help
7,500 miles. See Tire Rotation Shift Lock Control Function you determine when it is the
on page 10‑59. Check on page 10‑26. right time to replace the filter.
At Each Fuel Stop . See Ignition Transmission Lock
. Engine oil level check. See Check on page 10‑27.
Engine Oil on page 10‑9. . See Park Brake and P (Park)
. Engine coolant level check. See Mechanism Check on
Engine Coolant on page 10‑16. page 10‑27.
. Windshield washer fluid level . Accelerator pedal check for
check. See Washer Fluid on damage, high effort, or binding.
page 10‑22. Replace if needed.
. Underbody flushing service.
First Engine Oil Change After

. All‐wheel drive only: Transfer . Evaporative control system
Every 80 000 km/50,000 Miles case fluid change (severe inspection. Check all fuel and
service) for vehicles mainly vapor lines and hoses for proper
. Engine air cleaner filter driven when frequently towing a hook‐up, routing, and condition.
replacement. See Engine Air trailer, or used for taxi, police, Check that the purge valve,
Cleaner/Filter on page 10‑13. or delivery service. Check vent if the vehicle has one, works
. Automatic transmission fluid hose at transfer case for kinks properly. Replace as needed.
change (severe service) for and proper installation. An Emission Control Service.
vehicles mainly driven in Check to be sure vent hose is The U.S. Environmental
heavy city traffic in hot weather, unobstructed, clear, and free of Protection Agency or the
in hilly or mountainous terrain, debris. During any maintenance, California Air Resources Board
when frequently towing a if a power washer is used to has determined that the failure
trailer, or used for taxi, clean mud and dirt from the to perform this maintenance item
police, or delivery service. underbody, care should be taken will not nullify the emission
See Automatic Transmission to not directly spray the transfer warranty or limit recall liability
Fluid on page 10‑13. case output seals. High pressure prior to the completion of the
water can overcome the seals vehicle's useful life. We,
and contaminate the transfer however, urge that all
case fluid. Contaminated fluid recommended maintenance
will decrease the life of the services be performed at the
transfer case and should be indicated intervals and the
replaced. maintenance be recorded.
First Engine Oil Change After case fluid. Contaminated fluid

Every 160 000 km/100,000 Miles will decrease the life of the
. Automatic transmission fluid transfer case and should be
change (normal service). replaced.
See Automatic Transmission . Spark plug replacement and
Fluid on page 10‑13. spark plug wires inspection.
. All‐wheel drive only: Transfer An Emission Control Service.
case fluid change (normal First Engine Oil Change After
service). Check vent hose at Every 240 000 km/150,000 Miles
transfer case for kinks and
proper installation. Check to be
. Engine cooling system drain,
sure vent hose is unobstructed, flush, and refill (or every
clear, and free of debris. During five years, whichever occurs
any maintenance, if a power first). See Cooling System on
washer is used to clean mud page 10‑15. An Emission Control
and dirt from the underbody, Service.
care should be taken to not . Engine drive belts inspection for
directly spray the transfer case fraying, excessive cracks,
output seals. High pressure or obvious damage (or every
water can overcome the seals 10 years, whichever occurs
and contaminate the transfer first). Replace, if needed.
Recommended Fluids, Lubricants, and Parts

Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
Usage Fluid/Lubricant
The engine requires engine oil approved to the dexos™ specification.
Oils meeting this specification can be identified with the dexos™
Engine Oil certification mark. Look for and use only an engine oil that displays the
dexos™ certification mark of the proper viscosity grade. See Engine Oil on
page 10‑9.
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and use only DEX-COOL Coolant.
Engine Coolant
See Engine Coolant on page 10‑16.
DOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid (GM Part No. U.S. 88862806,
Hydraulic Brake System
in Canada 88862807).
Windshield Washer Optikleen® Washer Solvent.
Hydraulic Power Steering System DEXRON®-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Usage Fluid/Lubricant
®
Automatic Transmission DEXRON -VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
Key Lock Cylinders
Hood Latch Assembly, Secondary Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol (GM Part No. U.S. 12346293,
Latch, Pivots, Spring Anchor, and in Canada 992723) or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Release Pawl Category LB or GC-LB.
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
Hood and Door Hinges
Weatherstrip Lubricant (GM Part No. U.S. 3634770, in Canada 10953518)
Weatherstrip Conditioning or Dielectric Silicone Grease (GM Part No. U.S. 12345579,
in Canada 992887).
Maintenance Replacement Parts

Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.
Part GM Part Number ACDelco Part Number
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 55560894 A3128C
Engine Oil Filter
2.4L L4 Engine 12605566 PF457G
3.6L V6 Engine 89017525 PF63
Passenger Compartment Air Filter Element 13271191 CF176
Spark Plugs
2.4L L4 Engine 12620540 41–108
3.6L V6 Engine 12622561 41–109
Wiper Blades
Driver Side – 65 cm (25.6 in) 25892079 —
Passenger Side – 45 cm (17.7 in) 25892080 —
Maintenance Records
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and the
type of services performed in the boxes provided. Retain all maintenance receipts.
Maintenance Record
Odometer
Date Serviced By Services Performed
Reading
Maintenance Record (cont'd)

Odometer
Reading
Maintenance Record (cont'd)

Odometer
Reading
Technical Data 12-1
Technical Data Vehicle Identification Engine Identification

The eighth character in the VIN is
Vehicle Identification the engine code. This code
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) identifies the vehicle's engine,
Vehicle Identification specifications, and replacement
Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1 parts. See “Engine Specifications”
Service Parts Identification under Capacities and Specifications
Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1 on page 12‑2 for the vehicle's
engine code.
Vehicle Data
Capacities and
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Service Parts
Engine Drive Belt Routing . . . 12-4 This legal identifier is in the front Identification Label
corner of the instrument panel, on This label, in the trunk, has the
the left side of the vehicle. It can be following information:
seen through the windshield from . Vehicle Identification
outside. The VIN also appears on
Number (VIN)
the Vehicle Certification and Service
Parts labels and certificates of title . Model designation
and registration. . Paint information
. Production options and special
equipment
Do not remove this label from the
vehicle.
12-2 Technical Data
Vehicle Data
Capacities and Specifications
Capacities
Application
Metric English
For the air conditioning system refrigerant charge
Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a amount, see the refrigerant label located under the
hood. See your dealer for more information.
Engine Cooling System
2.4L L4 Engine 7.1 L 7.5 qt
3.6L V6 Engine 9.4 L 9.9 qt
Engine Oil with Filter
2.4L L4 Engine 4.7 L 5.0 qt
3.6L V6 Engine 5.2 L 5.5 qt
Fuel Tank
AWD 74.0 L 19.5 gal
FWD 70.5 L 18.6 gal
Technical Data 12-3
Capacities
Application
Metric English
Transmission Fluid* (Drain and Refill)
2.4L L4 Engine, 6‐Speed Automatic 8.0 L 8.5 qt
3.6L V6 Engine, 6‐Speed Automatic 9.0 L 9.5 qt
Wheel Nut Torque 150 Y 110 ft lb
*See Automatic Transmission Fluid on page 10‑13 for information on checking fluid level.
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in this
manual. Recheck fluid level after filling.
Engine Specifications
Engine VIN Code Transmission Spark Plug Gap
2.4L L4 Engine C Automatic 0.9 mm (0.035 in)
3.6L V6 Engine D Automatic 1.10 mm (0.043 in)
12-4 Technical Data
Engine Drive Belt Routing
2.4L L4 Engine (Hydraulic Power 3.6L V6 Engines

Steering)
2.4L L4 Engine (Electric Power
Steering)
Customer Information 13-1
Courtesy Transportation
Customer Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-10
Customer Information
Information Collision Damage Repair . . . 13-11
Service Publications Customer Satisfaction
Ordering Information . . . . . . 13-14 Procedure (United States
Customer Information Reporting Safety Defects and Canada)
Customer Satisfaction Reporting Safety Defects to Your satisfaction and goodwill are
Procedure (United States the United States important to your dealer and to
and Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1 Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15
Customer Satisfaction Buick. Normally, any concerns
Reporting Safety Defects to with the sales transaction or the
Procedure (Mexico) . . . . . . . . 13-3 the Canadian
Customer Assistance Offices operation of your vehicle will be
Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15 resolved by your dealer's sales or
(United States and Reporting Safety Defects to
Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4 service departments. Sometimes,
General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16 however, despite the best intentions
Customer Assistance Offices
(Mexico) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5 Vehicle Data Recording and of all concerned, misunderstandings
Customer Assistance for Text can occur. If your concern has not
Privacy
Telephone (TTY) Users . . . . . 13-6 been resolved to your satisfaction,
Vehicle Data Recording and
Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . 13-6 the following steps should be taken:
Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16
GM Mobility Reimbursement Event Data Recorders . . . . . . 13-16 STEP ONE: Discuss your concern
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7 OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17 with a member of dealership
Roadside Assistance Program Navigation System . . . . . . . . . 13-17 management. Normally, concerns
(United States and Radio Frequency can be quickly resolved at that level.
Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7 Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . 13-18 If the matter has already been
Roadside Assistance Program Radio Frequency reviewed with the sales, service,
(Mexico) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9 Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18 or parts manager, contact the owner
Scheduling Service of the dealership or the general
Appointments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9 manager.
13-2 Customer Information
STEP TWO: If after contacting a When contacting Buick, remember case will generally be heard within
member of dealership management, that your concern will likely be 40 days. If you do not agree with the
it appears your concern cannot be resolved at a dealer's facility. That is decision given in your case, you
resolved by the dealership without why we suggest following Step One may reject it and proceed with any
further help, in the U.S., call first. other venue for relief available
1-800-521-7300, Customer STEP THREE — U.S. Owners: to you.
Assistance prompt. In Canada, Both General Motors and your You may contact the BBB Auto Line
contact General Motors of Canada dealer are committed to making Program using the toll-free
Customer Communication Centre at sure you are completely satisfied telephone number or write them at
1‐800-263-3777 (English) or with your new vehicle. However, the following address:
1-800-263-7854 (French). if you continue to remain unsatisfied BBB Auto Line Program
We encourage you to call the after following the procedure Council of Better Business
toll-free number in order to give your outlined in Steps One and Two, you Bureaus, Inc.
inquiry prompt attention. Have the can file with the Better Business 4200 Wilson Boulevard
following information available to Bureau (BBB) Auto Line® Program Suite 800
give the Customer Assistance to enforce your rights. Arlington, VA 22203-1838
representative: The BBB Auto Line Program is an Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
. Vehicle Identification Number. out of court program administered www.dr.bbb.org/goauto
This is available from the vehicle by the Council of Better Business
registration or title, or the plate Bureaus to settle automotive This program is available in all
at the top left of the instrument disputes regarding vehicle repairs or 50 states and the District of
panel and visible through the the interpretation of the New Vehicle Columbia. Eligibility is limited by
windshield. Limited Warranty. Although you may vehicle age, mileage, and other
be required to resort to this informal factors. General Motors reserves
. Dealership name and location. the right to change eligibility
dispute resolution program prior to
. Vehicle delivery date and filing a court action, use of the limitations and/or discontinue its
present mileage. program is free of charge and your participation in this program.
STEP THREE — Canadian For further information concerning Customer Satisfaction

Owners: In the event that you do eligibility in the Canadian Motor
not feel your concerns have been Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP),
Procedure (Mexico)
addressed after following the call toll-free 1-800-207-0685, or call
procedure outlined in Steps One the General Motors Customer
and Two, General Motors of Canada Communication Centre,
Limited wants you to be aware of 1-800-263-3777 (English),
its participation in a no-charge 1-800-263-7854 (French),
Mediation/Arbitration program. or write to:
General Motors of Canada Limited Mediation/Arbitration Program
has committed to binding arbitration c/o Customer Communication Did you get the Warranty Extension
of owner disputes involving Centre Plan? This plan is recommended by
factory-related vehicle service General Motors of Canada Limited General Motors to supplement the
claims. The program provides for Mail Code: CA1-163-005 warranty included with your new
the review of the facts involved by 1908 Colonel Sam Drive vehicle purchase.
an impartial third party arbiter, and Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7 See your dealer for details.
may include an informal hearing
before the arbiter. The program is Your inquiry should be accompanied Customer Assistance
designed so that the entire dispute by the Vehicle Identification Procedure
settlement process, from the time Number (VIN).
you file your complaint to the final Owner satisfaction and goodwill are
decision, should be completed in very important to your dealer and
approximately 70 days. We believe General Motors.
our impartial program offers Normally, any problem with the
advantages over courts in most transaction, sale, or usage of your
jurisdictions because it is informal, vehicle must be handled by your
quick, and free of charge. dealer sales or service departments.
However, we recognize that despite Step Three See Customer Assistance Offices
the good intentions of all parties If your case is not resolved in a (United States and Canada) on
involved, sometimes a reasonable amount of time by your page 13‑4 or Customer Assistance
misunderstanding may occur. dealer, please call the General Offices (Mexico) on page 13‑5 for
If you have a problem that has not Motors Customer Assistance more information.
been satisfactorily handled through Center (CAC) and provide the
the normal means, we suggest the following information: Customer Assistance
following steps: . Name Offices (United States
Step One . Address
and Canada)
Explain your case to the dealer . Phone number Buick encourages customers to call
service agent, service manager, the toll-free number for assistance.
dealer sales agent, or sales
. Model year However, if a customer wishes to
manager, depending on your case. . Brand write or e-mail Buick, the letter
should be addressed to:
Make sure that they have all . Vehicle Identification
necessary information. They are Number (VIN) United States
interested in your continual . Mileage Buick Customer Assistance Center
satisfaction.
P.O. Box 33136
. Delivery date
Step Two Detroit, MI 48232-5136
. Description of the problem www.Buick.com
If you are not satisfied, please
. Dealership name
contact the general manager or the 1-800-521-7300
dealership owner to ask for their . Dealership address 1-800-832-8425 (For Text
help. If they are not able to resolve Telephone devices (TTYs))
your case, ask them to contact the Roadside Assistance:
right people at General Motors for 1-800-252-1112
support, if needed.
From Puerto Rico: Mexico, Central America and Mexico

1-800-496-9992 (English) Caribbean Islands/Countries From Mexico City
1-800-496-9993 (Spanish) (Except Puerto Rico and U.S.
Virgin Islands) 5329-0818
From U.S. Virgin Islands:
General Motors de Mexico, S. de From Other Mexico Locations
1-800-496-9994
R.L. de C.V. 01-800-466-0818
Canada Customer Assistance Center
Av. Ejercito Nacional #843 United States and Canada
General Motors of Canada Limited Col. Granada
Customer Communication Centre, 1-800-521-7300
C.P. 11520, Mexico, D.F.
Mail Code: CA1-163-005 Costa Rica
1908 Colonel Sam Drive 01-800-466-0818
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7 Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0818 00-800-052-1005
www.gm.ca
Customer Assistance Guatemala
1-800-263-3777 (English)
1-800-263-7854 (French) Offices (Mexico) 1-800-999-5252
1-800-263-3830 (For Text To contact the Customer Assistance Panama
Telephone devices (TTYs)) Center (CAC), use the phone
Roadside Assistance: 00-800-052-0001
numbers listed in this section.
1-800-268-6800 Customer assistance is available Dominican Republic
All Overseas Locations Monday through Friday, 08:00 to 1-888-751-5301
20:00 hours, and Saturdays from
Please contact the local General 08:00 to 15:00 hours. El Salvador
Motors Business Unit.
All e-mail inquiries to the Customer 800-6273
Assistance Center (CAC) should be
sent to: cac.buick@gm.com. Honduras
800-0122-6101

. Buick dealer locator for service
Customer Assistance for nationwide
Here are a few of the valuable tools
and services you will have
Text Telephone (TTY) . access to:
Exclusive privileges and offers
Users . My Showroom: Find and save
. Recall notices for your specific
To assist customers who are deaf, vehicle information on vehicles and
hard of hearing, or speech-impaired current offers in your area.
and who use Text Telephones
. OnStar and GM Cardmember
Services Earnings summaries . My Dealers: Save details such
(TTYs), Buick has TTY equipment
as address and phone number
available at its Customer Assistance Other Helpful Links: for each of your preferred GM
Center. Any TTY user can
Buick — www.buick.com dealers.
communicate with Buick by dialing:
1-800-832-8425. TTY users in Buick Merchandise — . My Driveway: Access quick links
Canada can dial 1‐800‐263-3830. www.buickmerchandise.com to parts and service estimates,
check trade-in values,
Help Center — www.buick.com/ or schedule a service
Online Owner Center pages/mds/helpcenter/faq.do appointment by adding the
Buick Owner Center (U.S.) — . FAQ (Frequently Asked vehicles you own to your
www.buickownercenter.com Questions) driveway profile.
Information and services . Contact Us . My Preferences: Manage your
customized for your specific profile and use tools and forms
vehicle — all in one convenient My GM Canada (Canada) — with greater ease.
place. www.gm.ca
To sign up, visit the My GM.ca
. Digital owner manual, warranty My GM Canada is a section within www.gm.ca.
information, and more password-protected section of
www.gm.ca where you can save
. Store online service and information on GM vehicles, get
maintenance records personalized offers, and use handy
tools and forms with greater ease.

. Odometer reading, Vehicle
GM Mobility Roadside Assistance Identification Number (VIN), and
Reimbursement Program Program (United States delivery date of the vehicle
and Canada) . Description of the problem
For U.S.‐purchased vehicles, call
Coverage
1-800-252-1112; (Text Telephone
(TTY): 1‐888‐889‐2438). Services are provided up to
5 years/160 000 km (100,000 miles),
For Canadian‐purchased vehicles,
whichever comes first.
call 1-800-268-6800.
This program is available to In the U.S., anyone driving the
Service is available 24 hours a day,
qualified applicants for cost vehicle is covered. In Canada, a
365 days a year.
reimbursement of eligible person driving the vehicle without
aftermarket adaptive equipment Calling for Assistance permission from the owner is not
required for your vehicle, such as covered.
When calling Roadside Assistance,
hand controls or a wheelchair/ have the following information Roadside Assistance is not a part of
scooter lift for the vehicle. ready: the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
For more information on the limited Buick and General Motors of
. Your name, home address, and Canada Limited reserve the right to
offer, visit www.gmmobility.com or home telephone number
call the GM Mobility Assistance make any changes or discontinue
Center at 1-800-323-9935. Text
. Telephone number of your the Roadside Assistance program at
Telephone (TTY) users, call location any time without notification.
1-800-833-9935. . Location of the vehicle
General Motors of Canada . Model, year, color, and license
also has a Mobility Program. plate number of the vehicle
Call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483)
for details. TTY users call
1-800-263-3830.
Buick and General Motors of

. Emergency Tow From a Public . Mounting, dismounting,
Canada Limited reserve the right to Road or Highway: Tow to the or changing of snow tires,
limit services or payment to an nearest Buick dealer for chains, or other traction devices.
owner or driver if they decide the warranty service, or if the vehicle . Towing or services for vehicles
claims are made too often, or the was in a crash and cannot be driven on a non-public road or
same type of claim is made many driven. Assistance is also given highway.
times. when the vehicle is stuck in
sand, mud, or snow. Services Specific to
Services Provided Canadian‐Purchased Vehicles
. Flat Tire Change: Service to
. Emergency Fuel Delivery: change a flat tire with the spare . Fuel delivery: Reimbursement
Delivery of enough fuel for the tire. The spare tire, if equipped, is approximately $5 Canadian.
vehicle to get to the nearest must be in good condition and Diesel fuel delivery may be
service station. properly inflated. It is the owner's restricted. Propane and other
. Lock‐Out Service: Service to responsibility for the repair or fuels are not provided through
unlock the vehicle if you are replacement of the tire if it is not this service.
locked out. A remote unlock may covered by the warranty. . Lock-Out Service: Vehicle
be available if you have . Battery Jump Start: Service to registration is required.
OnStar®. For security reasons, jump start a dead battery.
the driver must present
. Trip Routing Service: Detailed
identification before this service Services Not Included in maps of North America are
is given. Roadside Assistance provided when requested either
with the most direct route or the
. Impound towing caused by most scenic route. There is a
violation of any laws. six request limit per year.
. Legal fines. Additional travel information is
also available. Allow
three weeks for delivery.

. Trip Interruption Benefits and
Assistance: Must be over
Roadside Assistance Scheduling Service
250 kilometers from where Program (Mexico) Appointments
your trip was started to qualify. Roadside Assistance is available When your vehicle requires
General Motors of Canada 24 hours a day, 365 days of warranty service, contact your
Limited requires the year. dealer and request an appointment.
pre-authorization, original By scheduling a service
detailed receipts, and a copy of For detailed information about
Roadside Assistance, please see appointment and advising your
the repair orders. Once service consultant of your
authorization has been received, the brochure provided with your new
vehicle or visit our website at: transportation needs, your dealer
the Roadside Assistance advisor can help minimize your
will help you make arrangements www.buick.com.mx. Navigate the
site and click on “Asistencia en el inconvenience.
and explain how to receive
payment. Camino.” E-mail correspondence If your vehicle cannot be scheduled
should be sent to: into the service department
. Alternative Service: If asistencia.buick@gm.com. immediately, keep driving it until it
assistance cannot be provided can be scheduled for service,
right away, the Roadside To contact Roadside Assistance by
phone, use the following numbers: unless, of course, the problem is
Assistance advisor may safety related. If it is, please call
give permission to get local Mexico your dealership, let them know this,
emergency road service. You and ask for instructions.
will receive payment, up to $100, 01-800-466-0818
after sending the original receipt If the dealer requests you to bring
United States
to Roadside Assistance. the vehicle for service, you are
Mechanical failures may be 1-866-466-8197 urged to do so as early in the work
covered, however any cost for day as possible to allow for the
Canada
parts and labor for repairs not same day repair.
covered by the warranty are the 1-800-268-6800
owner responsibility.
Courtesy Transportation Transportation Options Public Transportation or Fuel

Reimbursement
Program Warranty service can generally be
completed while you wait. However, If your vehicle requires overnight
To enhance your ownership warranty repairs, and public
if you are unable to wait, GM helps
experience, we and our participating transportation is used instead of the
to minimize your inconvenience by
dealers are proud to offer Courtesy dealer's shuttle service, the expense
providing several transportation
Transportation, a customer support must be supported by original
options. Depending on the
program for vehicles with the receipts and can only be up to the
circumstances, your dealer can
Bumper to Bumper (Base Warranty maximum amount allowed by GM
offer you one of the following:
Coverage period in Canada), for shuttle service. In addition, for
extended powertrain, and/or Shuttle Service U.S. customers, should you arrange
hybrid‐specific warranties in both transportation through a friend or
Shuttle service is the preferred
the U.S. and Canada. relative, limited reimbursement for
means of offering Courtesy
Several Courtesy Transportation Transportation. Dealers may provide reasonable fuel expenses may be
options are available to assist in shuttle service to get you to your available. Claim amounts should
reducing your inconvenience when destination with minimal interruption reflect actual costs and be
warranty repairs are required. of your daily schedule. This includes supported by original receipts. See
one‐way or round‐trip shuttle service your dealer for information regarding
Courtesy Transportation is not a
within reasonable time and distance the allowance amounts for
part of the New Vehicle Limited
parameters of the dealer's area. reimbursement of fuel or other
Warranty. A separate booklet
transportation costs.
entitled “Warranty and Owner
Assistance Information” furnished
with each new vehicle provides
detailed warranty coverage
information.
Courtesy Rental Vehicle Additional Program Collision Damage Repair

Your dealer may arrange to provide Information
If your vehicle is involved in
you with a courtesy rental vehicle or All program options, such as shuttle a collision and it is damaged,
reimburse you for a rental vehicle service, may not be available at have the damage repaired by a
that you obtain if your vehicle is every dealer. Please contact your qualified technician using the proper
kept for an overnight warranty dealer for specific information equipment and quality replacement
repair. Rental reimbursement will about availability. All Courtesy parts. Poorly performed collision
be limited and must be supported Transportation arrangements will repairs diminish your vehicle's
by original receipts. This requires be administered by appropriate resale value, and safety
that you sign and complete a dealer personnel. performance can be compromised
rental agreement and meet state/ in subsequent collisions.
provincial, local, and rental vehicle General Motors reserves the right
provider requirements. to unilaterally modify, change, Collision Parts
Requirements vary and may include or discontinue Courtesy
Transportation at any time and to Genuine GM Collision parts are
minimum age requirements, new parts made with the same
insurance coverage, credit card, etc. resolve all questions of claim
eligibility pursuant to the terms and materials and construction methods
You are responsible for fuel usage as the parts with which your vehicle
charges and may also be conditions described herein at its
sole discretion. was originally built. Genuine GM
responsible for taxes, levies, usage Collision parts are your best choice
fees, excessive mileage, or rental to ensure that your vehicle's
usage beyond the completion of the designed appearance, durability,
repair. and safety are preserved. The use
It may not be possible to provide a of Genuine GM parts can help
like vehicle as a courtesy rental. maintain your GM New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
Recycled original equipment parts any vehicle failure related to such aftermarket collision parts. Some
may also be used for repair. These parts is not covered by that insurance companies will not
parts are typically removed from warranty. specify aftermarket collision parts.
vehicles that were total losses in When purchasing insurance, we
prior crashes. In most cases, the Repair Facility recommend that you ensure that
parts being recycled are from GM also recommends that you your vehicle will be repaired with
undamaged sections of the vehicle. choose a collision repair facility that GM original equipment collision
A recycled original equipment GM meets your needs before you ever parts. If such insurance coverage
part may be an acceptable choice to need collision repairs. Your dealer is not available from your current
maintain your vehicle's originally may have a collision repair center insurance carrier, consider switching
designed appearance and safety with GM-trained technicians and to another insurance carrier.
performance; however, the history of state‐of‐the‐art equipment, or be If your vehicle is leased, the leasing
these parts is not known. Such parts able to recommend a collision repair company may require you to have
are not covered by your GM New center that has GM-trained insurance that ensures repairs with
Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any technicians and comparable Genuine GM Original Equipment
related failures are not covered by equipment. Manufacturer (OEM) parts or
that warranty. Genuine Manufacturer replacement
Insuring Your Vehicle
Aftermarket collision parts are also parts. Read your lease carefully, as
available. These are made by Protect your investment in your GM you may be charged at the end of
companies other than GM and may vehicle with comprehensive and your lease for poor quality repairs.
not have been tested for your collision insurance coverage. There
vehicle. As a result, these parts may are significant differences in the If a Crash Occurs
fit poorly, exhibit premature quality of coverage afforded by If there has been an injury, call
durability/corrosion problems, and various insurance policy terms. emergency services for help. Do not
may not perform properly in Many insurance policies provide leave the scene of a crash until all
subsequent collisions. Aftermarket reduced protection to your GM matters have been taken care of.
parts are not covered by your GM vehicle by limiting compensation for
New Vehicle Limited Warranty, and damage repairs by using
Move the vehicle only if its position

. Insurance company and policy original GM parts. Remember,
puts you in danger, or you are number recycled parts will not be covered by
instructed to move it by a police . General description of the your GM vehicle warranty.
officer. damage to the other vehicle Insurance pays the bill for the repair,
Give only the necessary information Choose a reputable repair facility but you must live with the repair.
to police and other parties involved that uses quality replacement parts. Depending on your policy limits,
in the crash. See “Collision Parts” earlier in this your insurance company may
For emergency towing see section. initially value the repair using
Roadside Assistance Program aftermarket parts. Discuss this with
If the airbag has inflated, see What your repair professional, and insist
(United States and Canada) on Will You See After an Airbag
page 13‑7 or Roadside Assistance on Genuine GM parts. Remember,
Inflates? on page 3‑33. if your vehicle is leased, you may be
Program (Mexico) on page 13‑9.
Managing the Vehicle Damage obligated to have the vehicle
Gather the following information: repaired with Genuine GM parts,
Repair Process
. Driver's name, address, and even if your insurance coverage
In the event that your vehicle does not pay the full cost.
telephone number
requires damage repairs, GM
. Driver's license number recommends that you take an active If another party's insurance
role in its repair. If you have a company is paying for the repairs,
. Owner's name, address, and you are not obligated to accept a
telephone number pre-determined repair facility of
choice, take your vehicle there, repair valuation based on that
. Vehicle license plate number or have it towed there. Specify to insurance company's collision policy
the facility that any required repair limits, as you have no
. Vehicle make, model, and contractual limits with that company.
model year replacement collision parts be
original equipment parts, either new In such cases, you can have control
. Vehicle Identification Genuine GM parts or recycled of the repair and parts choices as
Number (VIN) long as the cost stays within
reasonable limits.
Service Publications Owner Information Current and Past Models

Ordering Information Owner publications are written Technical Service Bulletins and
specifically for owners and intended Manuals are available for current
Service Manuals to provide basic operational and past model GM vehicles.
Service Manuals have the diagnosis information about the vehicle.
The Owner Manual includes the ORDER TOLL FREE:
and repair information on the 1-800-551-4123 Monday - Friday
engines, transmission, axle, Maintenance Schedule for all
8:00 AM - 6:00 PM Eastern Time
suspension, brakes, electrical, models.
steering, body, etc. For Credit Card Orders Only
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio,
(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit
Service Bulletins Owner Manual, and Warranty
Helm, Inc. at: www.helminc.com
Booklet.
Service Bulletins give additional Or you can write to:
technical service information RETAIL SELL PRICE:
$35.00 (U.S.) plus handling and Helm, Incorporated
needed to knowledgeably service
shipping fees P.O. Box 07130
General Motors cars and trucks.
Detroit, MI 48207
Each bulletin contains instructions Without Portfolio: Owner
to assist in the diagnosis and Manual only. Prices are subject to change without
service of your vehicle. notice and without incurring
RETAIL SELL PRICE:
obligation. Allow ample time for
$25.00 (U.S.) plus handling and
delivery.
shipping fees
Note to Canadian Customers: All
listed prices are quoted in U.S.
funds. Canadian residents are to
make checks payable in U.S. funds.
Reporting Safety However, NHTSA cannot Reporting Safety Defects

become involved in individual to the Canadian
Defects problems between you, your
dealer, or General Motors.
Government
Reporting Safety Defects If you live in Canada, and you
To contact NHTSA, you may
to the United States call the Vehicle Safety Hotline
believe that your vehicle has a
safety defect, notify Transport
Government toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 Canada immediately, and notify
If you believe that your vehicle (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to General Motors of Canada Limited.
has a defect which could cause http://www.safercar.gov; or Call them at 1-800-333-0510 or
a crash or could cause injury or write to: write to:
death, you should immediately Administrator, NHTSA Transport Canada
inform the National Highway 1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E. Road Safety Branch
Traffic Safety Administration Washington, D.C. 20590 2780 Sheffield Road
(NHTSA) in addition to notifying Ottawa, Ontario K1B 3V9
You can also obtain other
General Motors.
information about motor
If NHTSA receives similar vehicle safety from
complaints, it may open an http://www.safercar.gov.
investigation, and if it finds that
a safety defect exists in a group
of vehicles, it may order a recall
and remedy campaign.
Reporting Safety Defects Vehicle Data Event Data Recorders

to General Motors Recording and This vehicle has an Event Data
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Recorder (EDR). The main purpose
Transport Canada) in a situation like
Privacy of an EDR is to record, in certain
this, please notify General Motors. Your GM vehicle has a number of crash or near crash-like situations,
sophisticated computers that record such as an airbag deployment or
Call 1-800-521-7300, or write: hitting a road obstacle, data that will
information about the vehicle’s
Buick Customer Assistance Center performance and how it is driven. assist in understanding how a
P.O. Box 33136 For example, your vehicle uses vehicle's systems performed. The
Detroit, MI 48232-5136 computer modules to monitor and EDR is designed to record data
control engine and transmission related to vehicle dynamics and
In Canada, call 1-800-263-3777 safety systems for a short period of
(English) or 1-800-263-7854 performance, to monitor the
conditions for airbag deployment time, typically 30 seconds or less.
(French), or write: The EDR in this vehicle is designed
and deploy airbags in a crash, and,
General Motors of Canada Limited if so equipped, to provide antilock to record such data as:
Customer Communication Centre, braking to help the driver control the . How various systems in your
Mail Code: CA1-163-005 vehicle. These modules may store vehicle were operating
1908 Colonel Sam Drive data to help your dealer technician
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7 service your vehicle. Some modules
. Whether or not the driver and
may also store data about how you passenger safety belts were
operate the vehicle, such as rate of buckled/fastened
fuel consumption or average speed. . How far, if at all, the driver was
These modules may also retain the pressing the accelerator and/or
owner’s personal preferences, such brake pedal
as radio pre-sets, seat positions, . How fast the vehicle was
and temperature settings. traveling
This data can help provide a better special equipment, can read the OnStar®
understanding of the circumstances information if they have access to
in which crashes and injuries occur. the vehicle or the EDR. If your vehicle is equipped with an
active OnStar system, that system
Important: EDR data is recorded GM will not access this data or may also record data in crash or
by your vehicle only if a non-trivial share it with others except: with the near crash‐like situations. The
crash situation occurs; no data is consent of the vehicle owner or, OnStar Terms and Conditions
recorded by the EDR under normal if the vehicle is leased, with the provides information on data
driving conditions and no personal consent of the lessee; in response collection and use and is available
data (e.g., name, gender, age, to an official request by police or in the OnStar glove box kit, at
and crash location) is recorded. similar government office; as part of www.onstar.com (U.S.) or
However, other parties, such as GM's defense of litigation through www.onstar.ca (Canada), or by
law enforcement, could combine the discovery process; or, as
pressing the Q button and
the EDR data with the type of required by law. Data that GM
personally identifying data routinely collects or receives may also be speaking to an advisor.
acquired during a crash used for GM research needs or may
investigation. be made available to others for Navigation System
To read data recorded by an EDR, research purposes, where a need is If the vehicle has a navigation
special equipment is required, and shown and the data is not tied to a system, use of the system may
access to the vehicle or the EDR is specific vehicle or vehicle owner. result in the storage of destinations,
needed. In addition to the vehicle addresses, telephone numbers, and
manufacturer, other parties, such as other trip information. Refer to the
law enforcement, that have the navigation system operating manual
for information on stored data and
for deletion instructions.
Radio Frequency Radio Frequency

Identification (RFID) Statement
RFID technology is used in some This vehicle has systems that
vehicles for functions such as tire operate on a radio frequency that
pressure monitoring and ignition comply with Part 15 of the Federal
system security, as well as in Communications Commission (FCC)
connection with conveniences such rules and with Industry Canada
as key fobs for remote door locking/ Standards RSS‐210/220/310.
unlocking and starting, and Operation is subject to the following
in-vehicle transmitters for garage two conditions:
door openers. RFID technology in
GM vehicles does not use or record 1. The device may not cause
personal information or link with any interference.
other GM system containing 2. The device must accept any
personal information. interference received, including
interference that may cause
undesired operation of the
device.
Changes or modifications to any of
these systems by other than an
authorized service facility could void
authorization to use this equipment.
INDEX i-1
A Airbag System (cont.) Appearance Care

What Will You See After Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-91
Accessories and
an Airbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . .3-33 Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-95
Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
When Should an Airbag Assistance Program,
Accessory Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21
Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-31 Roadside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7, 13-9
Adaptive Forward
Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . .3-30 Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20
Lighting (AFL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Airbags CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-20
Add-On Electrical
Adding Equipment to the CD/DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-22
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-62
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-40 Audio System
Adding Equipment to the
Passenger Status Indicator . . .5-13 Backglass Antenna . . . . . . . . . . .7-19
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . . . 3-40
Readiness Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12 Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-18
Adjustments
Servicing Airbag-Equipped Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . . 7-2
Lumbar, Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-39 Automatic
Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine . . . . . 10-13
System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28 Headlamp System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Air Filter, Passenger
Alarm System Automatic Climate Control
Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Anti-Theft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Air Intake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . 9-28
Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12 Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13
Airbag System
Antenna Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-30
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-41
Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-19 Automatic Transmission
How Does an Airbag
Anti-Theft Shift Lock Control
Restrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-33
Alarm System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14 Function Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26
Passenger Sensing
Alarm System Messages . . . . .5-35 Auxiliary Devices . . . . . . . . 7-29, 7-32
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-35
Antilock Brake
What Makes an Airbag
System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32
Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-33
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18
i-2 INDEX
B Bulb Replacement (cont.) CD

High Intensity Discharge DVD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-22
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25
(HID) Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32 CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-84
License Plate Lamps . . . . . . . 10-35 Center Console Storage . . . . . . . . 4-2
Load Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-68
Power Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Stoplamps, and Charging System Light . . . . . . . . 5-14
Voltage and Charging
Back-Up Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34 Check
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-30
Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62 Engine Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14
Blade Replacement, Wiper . . . 10-28
Ignition
Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . 7-44, 7-45, 7-50
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23 C Transmission Lock . . . . . . . . 10-27
Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 Child Restraints
Antilock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-32
California Infants and Young
Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-35
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . .9-51 Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-44
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24
Perchlorate Materials Lower Anchors and
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-33
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3 Tethers for Children . . . . . . . . .3-50
System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31
Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3 Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-42
Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Camera, Rear Vision . . . . . . . . . . 9-46 Securing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-59, 3-61
Break-In, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 9-17
Canadian Vehicle Owners . . . . . . . . iv Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-47
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36
Capacities and Where to Put the Restraint . . .3-49
Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2 Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38
Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32
Carbon Monoxide Cleaning
Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29
Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-27 Exterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-91
Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32
Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12 Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-95
Headlamps, Front Turn
Signal and Parking Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32 Cautions, Danger, and
Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
INDEX i-3
Climate Control Systems Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . 13-6 Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6

Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1 Text Telephone (TTY) Door
Dual Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4 Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-6 Ajar Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 Customer Assistance Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Cluster, IP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4, 13-5 Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10
Collision Damage Repair . . . . . 13-11 Customer Information Power Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . 10-84 Service Publications Drive Systems
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 Ordering Information . . . . . . 13-14 All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-32
Compass Messages . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31 Customer Satisfaction Driver Information
Compressor Kit, Tire Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1, 13-3 Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
Sealant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-70 Driving
Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 D Characteristics and
Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 Damage Repair, Collision . . . . . 13-11 Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-56
Coolant Danger, Warnings, and Defensive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16 Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv Drunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Engine Temperature Data Recorders, Event . . . . . . . 13-16 Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 Daytime Running Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . 9-9
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15 Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 If the Vehicle is Stuck . . . . . . . . . 9-11
Engine Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32 Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Courtesy Transportation Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11 Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-10 Devices, Auxiliary . . . . . . . 7-29, 7-32 Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . .9-12
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-39 Differential, Limited-Slip . . . . . . . 9-38 Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23 Displays Driving for Better Fuel
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31 Head-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26 Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
i-4 INDEX
Dual Automatic Climate Engine Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6

Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4 Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13 Equipment, Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-61
DVD Check and Service Engine Event Data Recorders . . . . . . . . 13-16
Rear Seat Entertainment Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14 Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-34 Compartment Overview . . . . . . .10-6 Extender, Safety Belt . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
DVD/CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-22 Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16 Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Coolant Temperature Exterior Lamps Off Reminder . . . 6-2
E Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Electric Parking Brake Light . . . 5-18 Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15 F
Electrical Equipment, Cooling System Messages . . .5-32 Features
Add-On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-62 Drive Belt Routing . . . . . . . . . . . .12-4 Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Electrical System Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-27 Filter
Engine Compartment Overheated Protection Engine Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . 10-13
Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38 Operating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20 Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Fuses and Circuit Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19 Flashers, Hazard Warning . . . . . . 6-4
Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38 Power Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-33 Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-68
Instrument Panel Fuse Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21 Flat Tire, Changing . . . . . . . . . . . 10-78
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41 Running While Parked . . . . . . . .9-28 Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-98
Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37 Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-21 Fluid
Rear Compartment Fuse Engine Oil Automatic Transmission . . . . 10-13
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-43 Life System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12 Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24
Electronic Stability Control . . . . . 9-37 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-33 Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21
Electronic Stability Control Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22
Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
INDEX i-5
Fog Lamps Fuses General Information

Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 Engine Compartment Service and Maintenance . . . . . 11-1
Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16 Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-55
Front Fog Lamps Fuses and Circuit Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22 Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38 Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Front Seats Instrument Panel Fuse GM Mobility Reimbursement
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41 Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9 Rear Compartment Fuse
Heated and Ventilated . . . . . . . .3-10 Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-43 H
Front Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-50 G Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . 6-4
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-52 Garage Door Opener . . . . . . . . . . 5-42 Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Filling a Portable Fuel Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-43 Head-Up Display (HUD) . . . . . . . 5-26
Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-54 Gasoline Headlamps
Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-53 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-51 Adaptive Forward
Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . .9-52 Gauges Lighting (AFL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Gasoline Specifications . . . . . . .9-51 Engine Coolant Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10 Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . .5-21 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-32
Recommended . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-50 Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10 Daytime Running
Requirements, California . . . . .9-51 Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10 Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-33 Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10 Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Fuel Economy Warning Lights and
Driving for Better . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-22 Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
i-6 INDEX
Headlamps (cont.) Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14 Lamps (cont.)

High Intensity Discharge Infants and Young Children, Headlamps, Front Turn
(HID) Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32 Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44 Signal and Parking
High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . .5-22 Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32
High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-2 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .iii, 7-2 License Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35
Heated Malfunction Indicator . . . . . . . . .5-14
Steering Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3 J Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Heated and Ventilated Front Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-84 Sun Visor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10 Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
Heated Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9 LATCH System
Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17 K Replacing Parts After a
High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22 Key and Lock Messages . . . . . . . 5-34 Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-59
Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8 Keyless Entry Latch, Lower Anchors and
Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . 9-9 Remote (RKE) System . . . . . . . . 2-4 Tethers for Children . . . . . . . . . . 3-50
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5 Keyless Entry System . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 Light
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3 Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 Electric Parking Brake . . . . . . . .5-18
How to Wear Safety Belts Lighting
Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16 L Adaptive Forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Labeling, Tire Sidewall . . . . . . . . 10-47 Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
I Lamp Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34 Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . 9-18, 9-19 Lamps Illumination Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Ignition Transmission Lock Daytime Running (DRL) . . . . . . . 6-3 Lights
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27 Dome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 Airbag Readiness . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12
Exterior Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 Antilock Brake System
Exterior Lamps Off (ABS) Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18
Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 Charging System . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23
INDEX i-7
Lights (cont.) M Messages (cont.)

Engine Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . .5-21 Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34
Maintenance
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 Object Detection System . . . . .5-34
Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-10
Front Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22 Ride Control System . . . . . . . . . .5-34
Maintenance Schedule
High-Beam On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22 Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35
Recommended Fluids and
High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-2 Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-36
Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7
Low Fuel Warning . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21 Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-30
Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . . 11-2
Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . .5-12 Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-36
Malfunction Indicator Lamp . . . . 5-14
Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22 Mirrors
Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30
Taillamp Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22 Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16
Mass Storage Media (MEM) . . . 7-25
Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20 Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17
Memory Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Traction Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19 Manual Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17
Messages
Limited-Slip Differential . . . . . . . . 9-38 Park Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17
Anti-Theft Alarm System . . . . . .5-35
Locks Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16
Battery Voltage and
Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11 Monitor System, Tire
Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-30
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10 Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31
Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12
Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32 N
Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6 Navigation System
Engine Cooling System . . . . . . .5-32
Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . . . 5-21 Vehicle Data Recording
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-33
Lower Anchors and Tethers and Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17
Engine Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-33
for Children (LATCH Net, Convenience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Fuel System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-33
SYSTEM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-50 New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . . . 9-17
Key and Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34
Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
i-8 INDEX
O P Power (cont.)
Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Object Detection System Park
Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34 Shifting Into . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-25
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18
Object Detection, Side Blind Shifting Out of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-26
Pregnancy, Using Safety
Zone Alert (SBZA) . . . . . . . . . . . 9-44 Park Tilt Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10 Parking
Privacy
Off-Road Assist, Ultrasonic . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-42
Radio Frequency
Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6 Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-33
Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . 13-18
Oil Brake and P (Park)
Program
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-9 Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-27
Courtesy Transportation . . . . 13-10
Engine Oil Life System . . . . . 10-12 Over Things That Burn . . . . . . .9-27
Proposition 65 Warning,
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-33 Passenger Airbag Status
California . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21 Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Older Children, Restraints . . . . . 3-42 Passenger Compartment Air
Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . . . 13-6 Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8 R
OnStar® System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23 Passenger Sensing System . . . 3-35 Radio Frequency
Operation, Infotainment Perchlorate Materials Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . . 13-18
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7 Requirements, California . . . . . 10-3 Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18
Outlets Phone Radios
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6 Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . 7-44, 7-45, 7-50 AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-12
Overheated Engine Power CD/DVD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-22
Protection Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11 Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-18
Operating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16 Satellite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-14
Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . 10-19 Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6 Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Overview, Infotainment Protection, Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3, 7-5 Retained Accessory (RAP) . . .9-21
INDEX i-9
Rear Seat Entertainment Replacing Safety Belt S

System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34 System Parts After a
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11 Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-27
Rear Vision Camera (RVC) . . . . 9-46 Reporting Safety Defects
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-26
Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17 Canadian Government . . . . . . 13-15
How to Wear Safety Belts
Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16
Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-16
Recommended Fluids and U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15
Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . .3-21
Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7 Retained Accessory
Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12
Recommended Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . 9-50 Power (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21
Replacing After a Crash . . . . . .3-27
Records Ride Control Systems . . . . . . . . . 9-37
Use During Pregnancy . . . . . . . .3-26
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-10 Electronic Stability (ESC) . . . . .9-37
Safety Defects Reporting
Recreational Vehicle Enhanced Traction
Canadian Government . . . . . . 13-15
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-88 System (ETS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-38
General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16
Reimbursement Program, Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34
U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15
GM Mobility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7 Selective . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-38
Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Remote Keyless Entry Roadside Assistance
Safety System Check . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
(RKE) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3, 2-4 Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7, 13-9
Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Roof
Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . . . 11-2
Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36 Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-20
Scheduling Appointments . . . . . . 13-9
Replacement Parts Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59
Sealant Kit, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-70
Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-41 Routing, Engine Drive Belt . . . . . 12-4
Seats
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9 Running the Vehicle While
Adjustment, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Replacing Airbag System . . . . . . 3-41 Parked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Replacing LATCH System
Heated and Ventilated
Parts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . 3-59
Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-10
Heated Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
i-10 INDEX
Seats (cont.) Shift Lock Control Function Storage

Lumbar Adjustment, Front . . . . . 3-7 Check, Automatic Mass Media (MEM) . . . . . . . . . . .7-25
Power Adjustment, Front . . . . . . 3-4 Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26 Storage Areas
Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11 Shifting Center Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-25 Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Securing Child Out of Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-26 Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-59, 3-61 Side Blind Zone Alert . . . . . . . . . . 9-44 Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Security Signals, Turn and Storing the Tire Sealant
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22 Lane-Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 and Compressor Kit . . . . . . . . . 10-78
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14 Spare Tire Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
Selective Ride Control . . . . . . . . . 9-38 Compact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-84 Sun Visor Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Service Specifications and Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
Accessories and Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2 Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3 Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10 Sunshade, Rear Window . . . . . . 2-20
Doing Your Own Work . . . . . . . .10-4 Start Vehicle, Remote . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .v
Engine Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14 Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . . . 10-26
Maintenance Records . . . . . . .11-10 Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21 T
Maintenance, General Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1 Fluid, Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21 Taillamp Indicator Light . . . . . . . . 5-22
Parts Identification Label . . . . .12-1 Heated Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3 Taillamps
Publications Ordering Wheel Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-34
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14 Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 Text Telephone (TTY) Users . . . 13-6
Scheduling Appointments . . . . .13-9 Stoplamps and Back-Up Lamps Theft-Deterrent
Servicing the Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-34 Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14, 2-15
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . . . 3-39 Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14
INDEX i-11
Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 Tires (cont.) Transportation Program,

Tires Wheel Alignment and Tire Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-10
Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62 Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-66 Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-68 Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-66 Turn and Lane-Change
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-78 When It Is Time for New Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-84 Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-61 Turn Signal
Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-49 Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-47 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-34
Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-64 Towing
If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-68 Driving Characteristics . . . . . . . .9-56 U
Inflation Monitor System . . . . 10-55 Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-61 Ultrasonic Parking Assist . . . . . . 9-42
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59 General Information . . . . . . . . . .9-55 Uniform Tire Quality
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35 Recreational Vehicle . . . . . . . . 10-88 Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-64
Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20 Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-60 Universal Remote System . . . . . 5-42
Pressure Monitor System . . . 10-54 Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-88 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-46
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59 Traction Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-43
Sealant and Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . .9-35 Using this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
Compressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . 10-70 Limited-Slip Differential . . . . . . .9-38
Sealant and Compressor Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19
Kit, Storing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-78 Selective Ride Control . . . . . . . .9-38 V
Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . 10-47 Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-60 Vehicle
Terminology and Transmission Canadian Owners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .iv
Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50 Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-28 Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Uniform Tire Quality Fluid, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13 Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-12
Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-64 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-36 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-30
Personalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-36
i-12 INDEX
Vehicle (cont.) W Where to Put the Child

Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-49
Warning Lights, Gauges, and
Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-88 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-36
Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
Vehicle Care Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18
Cautions and Danger . . . . . . . . . . . .iv
Storing the Tire Sealant Rear Sunshade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-20
Hazard Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
and Compressor Kit . . . . . . . 10-78 Windshield
Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22
Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53 Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Wheels
Vehicle Identification Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
Alignment and Tire
Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-1 Winter Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-47
Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-66
Service Parts Identification Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . 10-28
Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-64
Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-1
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-66
Ventilation, Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
When It Is Time for New
Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-61

2011 LaCrosse Owner Manual PDF

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originaltitel

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

2011 LaCrosse Owner Manual PDF

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (1,1)

2011 Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual M

In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

2011 Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual M

Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

For vehicles first sold in Canada,

The names, logos, emblems, Manufactured under license from

must be authorized by Macrovision, Canadian Vehicle Owners Danger, Warnings, and

Vehicle Symbol Chart j : LATCH System Child

In Brief Sensing System for Passenger

Instrument Panel Illumination

Initial Drive Press and hold 7 for more than

Lumbar Adjustment Memory Features Storing Memory Positions

Easy Exit Driver Seat Heated Seats Heated and Ventilated

Head Restraint Safety Belt Sensing System for

Mirror Adjustment Vehicles with the memory feature Interior

Steering Wheel Interior Lighting

Exterior Lighting AUTO : Automatically turns the Windshield Wiper/Washer

Dual Automatic Climate Control System Transmission

A. Power I. Rear Window Defogger

Vehicle Features Storing a Favorite Station 4. Press the SELECT button to

Satellite Radio Portable Audio Devices See Bluetooth (Overview) on

$ c: Press to silence the Cruise Control RES/+ : Move the thumbwheel up

Driver Information SET/CLR: Use this button to set or Power Outlets

Universal Remote System Sunroof Express-open/Express-close:

Performance and Electronic Stability Tire Pressure Monitor

Keys, Doors and Windows 2-1

Keys, Doors and Doors

2-2 Keys, Doors and Windows

Keys and Locks { WARNING

Keys, Doors and Windows 2-3

Notice: If the keys get locked in If there is a decrease in the RKE

2-4 Keys, Doors and Windows

Keys, Doors and Windows 2-5

Press and hold 7 for at least Keyless Unlocking Lock Sensor

2-6 Keys, Doors and Windows

Keys, Doors and Windows 2-7

2-8 Keys, Doors and Windows

Keys, Doors and Windows 2-9

2-10 Keys, Doors and Windows

Conditions in Which Remote Start Door Locks WARNING (Continued)

Keys, Doors and Windows 2-11

2-12 Keys, Doors and Windows

Safety Locks Doors WARNING (Continued)

Keys, Doors and Windows 2-13

Remote Trunk Release Rear Seat Pass-Through

2-14 Keys, Doors and Windows

Vehicle Security Disarming the System Immobilizer

Keys, Doors and Windows 2-15

2-16 Keys, Doors and Windows

Keys, Doors and Windows 2-17

Turn Signal Indicator Park Tilt Mirrors Interior Mirrors

2-18 Keys, Doors and Windows

Windows Power Windows

Keys, Doors and Windows 2-19

2-20 Keys, Doors and Windows

Sun Visors Rear Window Sunshade Roof

Keys, Doors and Windows 2-21

2-22 Keys, Doors and Windows

Seats and Restraints 3-1

Seats and Rear Seats

3-2 Seats and Restraints

Child Restraints Head Restraints